Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Table of Contents of the Specifications
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 00 00
01 32 16 15
01 33 23
01 42 19
01 57 19
01 58 16
01 74 19
General Requirements
Project Schedules (Small Projects – Design/Bid/Build
Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples
Reference Standards
Temporary Environmental Controls
Temporary Interior Signage
Construction Waste Management
90-137
138-148
149-153
154-162
163-169
170
171-177
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 00
02 82 11
Demolition
Asbestos Abatement
178-180
181-231
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
Not Used
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
Not Used
DIVISION 05 – METALS
Not Used
DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
06 10 00
06 20 00
Rough Carpentry
Finish Carpentry
232-237
238-248
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 21 13
07 81 00
07 84 00
07 92 00
Thermal Insulation
Applied Fireproofing
Fire stopping
Joint Sealants
249-252
253-257
258-261
262-270
DIVISION 08 – Openings
08 11 13
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
271-275
86
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
08 14 00
08 71 00
08 80 00
Interior Wood Doors
Door Hardware
Glazing
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
276-280
09 22 16
09 29 00
09 30 13
09 51 00
09 65 13
09 65 19
09 91 00
Non-Structural Metal Framing
Gypsum Board
Ceramic/Porcelain Tiling
Acoustical Ceilings
Resilient Base and Accessories
Resilient Tile Flooring
Painting
318-324
281-310
311-317
325-331
332-342
343-348
349-351
352-357
358-369
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
10 26 00
10 28 00
10 51 00
Wall and Door Protection
Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories
Wood Lockers
370-373
374-381
382-388
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
11 31 00
Residential Appliances
389-392
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
Not Used
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Not Used
DIVISION 14– CONVEYING EQUIPEMENT
Not Used
DIVISION 21- FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 05 11
21 13 13
Common Work Results for Fire Suppression
Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
393-399
400-405
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
22 05 11
22 11 00
Common Work Results for Plumbing
Facility Water Distribution
406-427
428-436
87
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
22 13 00
22 40 00
Facility Sanitary Sewerage
Plumbing Fixtures
437-445
446-451
DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR
CONDITIONING (HVAC)
23 05 11
23 05 41
23 07 11
23 21 13
23 31 00
23 37 00
23 82 00
Common Work Results for HVAC and Steam Generation
Noise and Vibration Control for HVAC Piping and Equipment
HVAC, Plumbing, and Boiler Plant Insulation
Hydronic Piping
HVAC Ducts and Casings
Air Outlets and Inlets
Convection Heating and Cooling Units
452-473
474-478
479-499
500-513
514-522
523-526
527-529
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 11
26 05 21
26 05 26
26 05 33
26 24 16
26 25 11
26 27 26
26 51 00
Requirements for Electrical Installations
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (600 Volts
and Below)
Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems
Panelboards
Busways
Wiring Devices
Interior Lighting
530-538
539-545
546-551
552-562
563-568
569-572
573-578
579-592
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS
27 41 41
Master Antenna Television Equipment and Systems Extension
593-609
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 31 00
Fire Detection and Alarm
610-633
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
Not Used
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
Not Used
88
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
Not Used
DIVISION 34 – TRANSPORTATION
Not Used
DRAWINGS
00 01 15
List of Drawing Sheet
634
4.30 DRAWINGS {SEE ATTACHMENT} .........................................................................................
------------END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS--------
89
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 01 00 00
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1 GENERAL INTENTION
A. NOTICE: Contractor shall completely prepare site for building operations, including
demolition and removal of existing structures, and furnish labor, materials and perform
work for Renovations to the Community Living Center in Building 20, Floor B-1 as
required by drawings and specifications.
B. Visits to the site by Bidders may be made only by appointment with the Medical Center
Engineering Officer.
C. Testing of materials is the responsibility of the Contractor. All testing is to be performed
by a qualified, licensed testing laboratory selected by the Contractor, approved by the
Contracting Officer. Before placement and installation of work subject to tests by testing
laboratory, the Contractor shall notify the Project Engineer / COTR in sufficient time to
enable testing laboratory personnel to be present at the site in time for proper taking and
testing of specimens and field inspection, if elected , by a government representative.
Prior notice shall be not less than three workdays unless otherwise designated by the
Project Engineer / COTR.
D. The construction site (and staging areas when required/provided) shall be enclosed with a
chain link fence during construction to ensure pedestrian and vehicle safety. Furthermore,
the Contractor shall, at all times, maintain at least one clear lane for vehicle ingress and
egress, and emergency vehicle access. The Contractor shall provide unimpeded access for
vehicles at all times. This shall be accomplished by the use of flagmen, signage, and other
directional indicators.
E. The Contractor shall procure an independent utility mark-out service to locate and mark
buried utilities, VA and others, in the construction area when and if required. Dig safe
regulations of state and local regulatory agencies shall be complied with.
F. All employees of general contractor, subcontractors, and sub-subcontractors shall comply
with VA security management program and obtain permission of the VA police, be
identified with a VA issued photo ID, and restricted from unauthorized access. All
contractor visitors and employees identified as not having proper identification will be
dismissed from the Medical Center grounds until such time as proper ID has been
90
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
obtained. All employees of the general contractor, subcontractors and sub-subcontractors
will be required to be made available to Police Service at the FDR, Montrose Campus or
the Castle Point Campus to apply for photo identification badge and fingerprinting
following badge production the employee shall return in person to receive issue of the
badge. The Contractor and subcontractors are responsible to furnish the names of all
employees scheduled to work to the COTR within ten days of the Notice to Proceed. The
contractor shall identify on the construction schedule of work the date for start of work of
short term specialty subcontractors and two weeks prior to start of work process
identification badge verification for employee issue prior to starting of work (Employees
not issued identification badges will have to leave the site at no addition cost to the
government.) Refer to Section # 01 33 23 SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS.
G. Prior to commencing work, general contractor shall provide proof that a 30 Hour OSHA
certified “competent person” (CP) (29 CFR 1926.20(b)(2) will maintain a presence at the
work site whenever the general contractor or subcontractors are present.
H. Training:
1. Beginning July 31, 2005, all employees of general contractor or subcontractors shall
have the 30-hour for the Competent Person(s) and all others shall have 10-hour
OSHA certified Construction Safety course and /or other relevant competency
training, as determined by VA CP with input from the ICRA team.
2. Submit training records/certificates of all such employees, working onsite, for
approval before the start of work. Please provide this documentation within 10 days
of Notice To Proceed. Refer to Section # 01 33 23 SAMPLES AND SHOP
DRAWINGS.
I.
Daily Check-In & Superintendent
1. Superintendent shall sign-in at the beginning of each day of work and Sign-out at the
end of the work day at the Office of Engineering Service at FDR, Montrose or Castle
Point campuses.
2. The superintendent or a designee assigned prior in writing is required to sign in for the
work day. In addition, the contractor is responsible for submitting daily work logs to
the COTR at the end of every work day.
3. FDR, Montrose Engineering Service Office 7:00 AM – 4:30 PM
91
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
4. Castle Point Engineering Service Office 8:00 AM – 4:30 PM
5. Off-duty hour check in shall be arranged with the COTR.
J. Dig Permit (Not applicable)
The contractor shall complete the VA dig permit with the COTR and submit the Dig Safe
notification prior to start of any excavation work.
K. Offices of Array, HFS, 60 Madison Avenue, Suite 1001, New
York, NY 10010, telephone number 212-689-3110 Jeffery
Drucker
design team leader, as Architect Engineers, will
render certain technical services during construction. Such
services shall be considered as advisory to the Government
and shall not be construed as expressing or implying a
contractual act of the Government without affirmations by
Contracting Officer or his duly authorized representative.
1.2 STATEMENT OF BID ITEM(S)
A.
BASE BID ITEM I: The contractor will furnish all materials, equipment, supervision,
and personnel necessary to accomplish the job to as shown on the drawings and
installation of new as shown on the drawings and perform work specified herein and
comply with VA specifications and VA regulations, procedures and conditions for work
at the medical center and any applicable codes as per requirements of all governing
agencies. Contractor will be responsible to coordinate and schedule work to minimize to
short duration any shutdowns and shall be expected to plan work typically during duty
hours of the hospital. Construction Phasing will be required to ensure access to the
buildings at all times for facility’s fire protection requirements and to meet the
requirements of regulatory codes, laws, etc. In addition to meeting these requirements, all
work shall be done on weekdays (or Off Duty when required and approved) and therefore
work progress must be phased and scheduled such that all work started is completed
during a weekday time allowance.
LISTING OF WORK to include but not limited to:
Partial renovation of the First Floor of the VA Castle Point CLC Interiors Upgrade: Work
includes selective demolition, asbestos, general construction, alterations, and very limited
92
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
mechanical, plumbing and electrical work. The scope of work varies by project area and
includes mostly finishes repair / replacement. Special construction phasing requirements
will apply as shown on the Drawings.
270 Calendar Days Completion Time from Notice to Proceed
1.3 SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR CONTRACTOR
A. AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT, three (3) sets of specifications and drawings will be
furnished.
B. Additional sets of drawings may be made by the Contractor, at Contractor's expense,
from reproducible sepia prints furnished by Issuing Office. Such sepia prints shall be
returned to the Issuing Office immediately after printing is completed.
1.4 CONSTRUCTION SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Security Plan:
1. The security plan defines both physical and administrative security procedures that
will remain effective for the entire duration of the project.
2. The General Contractor is responsible for assuring that all sub-contractors working on
the project and their employees also comply with these regulations.
B. Security Procedures:
1. General Contractor’s employees shall not enter the project site without appropriate
badge. They may also be subject to inspection of their personal effects when entering
or leaving the project site or VA grounds.
2. For working outside the “regular hours” as defined in the contract, The General
Contractor shall give 3 days notice to the Contracting Officer so that security
arrangements can be provided for the employees. This notice is separate from any
notices required for utility shutdown described later in this section.
3. No photography of VA premises is allowed without written permission of the
Contracting Officer.
4. VA reserves the right to close down or shut down the project site and order General
Contractor’s employees off the premises in the event of a national emergency. The
93
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
General Contractor may return to the site only with the written approval of the
Contracting Officer.
C. Key Control:
1. The General Contractor shall provide duplicate keys and lock combinations to the
Project Engineer for the purpose of security inspections of every area of project
including tool boxes and parked machines and take any emergency action.
2. The General Contractor shall turn over all permanent lock cylinders to the VA
locksmith for permanent installation. See Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE
and coordinate.
D. Document Control:
1. Before starting any work, the General Contractor/Sub Contractors shall submit an
electronic security memorandum describing the approach to following goals and
maintaining confidentiality of “sensitive information”.
2. The General Contractor is responsible for safekeeping of all drawings, project manual
and other project information. This information shall be shared only with those with
a specific need to accomplish the project.
4. Certain documents, sketches, videos or photographs and drawings may be marked
“Law Enforcement Sensitive” or “Sensitive Unclassified”. Secure such information
in separate containers and limit the access to only those who will need it for the
project. Return the information to the Contracting Officer upon request.
5. These security documents shall not be removed or transmitted from the project site
without the written approval of Contracting Officer.
6. All paper waste or electronic media such as CD’s and diskettes shall be shredded and
destroyed in a manner acceptable to the VA.
7. Notify Contracting Officer and Site Security Officer immediately when there is a loss
or compromise of “sensitive information”.
8. All electronic information shall be stored in specified location following VA
standards and procedures using an Engineering Document Management Software
(EDMS).
a. Security, access and maintenance of all project drawings, both scanned and
electronic shall be performed and tracked through the EDMS system.
94
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
b. “Sensitive information” including drawings and other documents may be attached
to e-mail provided all VA encryption procedures are followed.
E. Motor Vehicle Restrictions
1. Vehicle authorization request shall be required for any vehicle entering the site and
such request shall be submitted 24 hours before the date and time of access. Access
shall be restricted to picking up and dropping off materials and supplies.
2. Separate permits shall be issued for General Contractor and its employees for parking
in designated areas only.
1.5
OSHA REQUIREMENTS-SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS
A.
Contractors are required to comply with the Occupational Safety and Health
Standard found in CFR 1910 and 1926. Copies of these statements can be acquired from
the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office Washington, D.C.
20420.
B.
In addition, the Contractor will be required to comply with all applicable Medical
Center fire, safety, and security regulations, policies and procedures. Each of the
Contractor's employees, inclusive of subcontractors and their employees will be required
to read this section, sign, and acknowledge understanding. Signed acknowledgment must
be filed with the Contracting Officer prior to any employee's assignment to the work site.
C.
Contractors involved with the removal, alteration, or disturbance of asbestos type
insulation or materials will be required to comply strictly with the regulations found in
CFR 1910.1001 and the appropriate EPA regulations regarding disposal of asbestos.
Assistance in identifying asbestos can be requested from the Medical Center's Industrial
Hygienist and the Project Engineer.
D.
Contractors entering locations of asbestos contamination (i.e. pipe basements)
must be certified to work in these areas and shall be responsible for providing respiratory
protection to their employees and ensuring respirators are worn in accordance with
OSHA (CFR 1910.1001(g)). Asbestos contaminated areas shall be defined on project
drawings. The minimum equipment required shall be: a half-mask air-purifying respirator
equipped with high efficiency filters along with disposable Type coveralls with hoods.
95
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
E.
Contractor, along with other submittals, and at least two weeks prior to bringing
any materials on-site, must submit a complete list of chemicals the contractor will use
and MSDS for all hazardous materials brought on-site.
F.
Severe or constant violations may result in an immediate work stoppage or
request for a Compliance Officer from the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration.
1.6 SPECIFIC MEDICAL CENTER FIRE & SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES,
AND REGULATIONS
A.
INTRODUCTION
1. The safety and fire protection of patients, employees, members of the public and
government is one of the continuous concerns of this Medical Center.
2. Contractors, their supervisors, and employees are required to comply with Medical
Center policies to ensure the occupational safety and health of all. Failure to comply may
result in work stoppage.
3. While working at this Medical Center, contractors are responsible for the Occupational
Safety and Health of their employees. Contractors are required to comply with the
applicable OSHA standards found in 20 CFR 1910 for general industry and 29 CFR 1926
for construction. Failure to comply with these standards may result in work stoppage and
a request to the Area director of OSHA for a compliance office to inspect the work site.
4. Contractors are to comply with the requirements found in the National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) #241, "Building construction and Demolition Operation".
5. Questions regarding occupational safety and health issues can be addressed to the
Medical Center Safety and Occupational Health Specialist (ext. 5265 at Castle Point
Campus) or Industrial Hygienist (ext. 5265 at Castle Point Campus) (ext. 2321 at
Montrose Campus).
B.
FIRES
All fires must be reported. In the event of a fire in the work area, use the nearest pull box
station and also notify Medical Center staff in the immediate area. Emergency
notification can also be accomplished by dialing ext. 2222 at Montrose Campus. This is
the fire department emergency phone only. Be sure to give the exact location from where
96
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
you are calling. If a contractor has experienced a fire and it was rapidly extinguished, you
still must notify the fire department (ext. 5333 at Castle Point Campus) (ext. 2332 at
Montrose Campus) so that an investigation of the fire can be accomplished. Delay in
reporting a fire is unacceptable.
C.
FIRE ALARMS, SMOKE DETECTION, AND SPRINKLER SYSTEM
If the nature of your work requires the deactivation of the fire alarm, smoke detection or
sprinkler system, you must notify the Medical Center Fire Department. Notification must
be made well in advance so that ample time can be allowed to deactivate the system and
provide an alternative measure for fire protection. Under no circumstance is a contractor
allowed to deactivate any of the fire protection systems in this Medical Center.
D.
SMOKE DETECTORS
False alarms will not be tolerated. You are required to be familiar with the location of the
smoke detectors in your work area. When performing cutting, burning, or welding or any
other operation that may cause smoke or dust, you must take steps to temporarily cover
smoke detectors in order to prevent false alarms. Failure to take the appropriate action
will result in the Contracting Officer assessing actual costs for government response for
each false alarm that is preventable. Prior to covering the smoke detectors, the contractor
will notify the VAMC Fire Department, who will also be notified when the covers are
removed.
E.
HOT WORK PERMIT
1.
If the nature of the work requires the use of welding equipment, cutting torch,
soldering equipment or the performance of processes which produce sparks, heat or
combustion, it will be required that the contractor notify the Project Engineer no less than
one day in advance of such work. The Contractor must then got to the VAMC Fire
Department and request a “hot work permit”. The Fire Department will inspect the work
area and then issue a "Hot Work Permit" authorizing the performance of such work.
2.
A "Hot Work Permit" will be issued only for the period necessary to perform such
work. In the event the time necessary will exceed one day, a "Hot Work Permit" may be
issued for the period needed; however, the VAMC Fire Department will inspect the area
daily.
97
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3.
Contractors will not be allowed to perform hot work processes without the
appropriate permit. See Attachment "A" for the standard form for obtaining a "Hot Work
Permit".
F.
TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES
Only non-combustible materials will be used to construct temporary enclosures
for barriers at this Medical Center. Plastic materials and fabrics used to construct dust
barriers must conform to NFPA #701, Standard Methods of fire Tests for FlameResistant Textiles and Films.
G.
FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS
All flammable liquids will be kept in approved safety containers. Only the
amount necessary for your immediate work will be allowed in the building. Flammable
liquids must be removed from the building at the end of each day.
H.
COMPRESSED GAS CYLINDERS
Compressed gas shall be secured in an upright position at all times. A suitable
cylinder cart will be used to transport compressed gas cylinders. Only those compressed
gas cylinders necessary for immediate work will be allowed in occupied buildings. All
others will be stored outside of buildings in a designated area. The contractor will comply
with applicable standards for compressed gas cylinders found in 29 CFR 1910 and 1926
(OSHA).
I.
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE-POWERED EQUIPMENT
Equipment powered by an internal combustion engine such as saws, compressors,
generators, etc., will not be used in an occupied building. Special consideration may be
given for unoccupied buildings only if the OSHA and NFPA requirements have been
met.
J.
POWER ACTIVATED TOOLS
In the event power activated tools are on the job site. Power activated tools will be
kept in a secured manner at all times. When not in use, the tools will be kept locked up.
When in use, the operator will have the tool under his/her immediate control.
K.
TOOLS
98
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.
Under no circumstances are tools, equipment and other items of work to
be left unattended for any reason. All tools, equipment and items of work must be under
the immediate control of the employee.
2.
If for some reason a work area must be left unattended, then it will be
required that the tools and other equipment be placed in an appropriate box or container
and locked. All tool boxes, containers or any other devices used for the storage of tools
and equipment will be provided with a latch and padlock. All tool boxes, containers or
any other device used for the storage of tools and equipment will be locked at all times
except for putting in and removing tools.
3.
All doors to work areas will be closed and locked when rooms are left
unattended. Failure to comply with this directive will be considered a violation of VA
Regulation 1.218(b), "Failure to comply with signs of directive and restrictive nature
posted for safety purposes", subject to a $50.00 fine. Subsequent similar violations may
result in both imposition of such a fine as well, as the Contracting Officer taking action
under the Contract's "Accident Prevention Clause", (FAR 52.236-13) to suspend all
contract work until such violations may be satisfactorily resolved or under FAR 52.236-5
"Material and Workmanship Clause" to remove from the work site any personnel deemed
by the Contracting Officer to be careless to the point of jeopardizing the welfare of
Facility patients of staff.
4.
The contractor must report to the VA Police Department, Extension 2509,
any tools or equipment that is missing.
5.
Tools and equipment found unattended will be confiscated and removed
from the work area.
L. LADDERS
It is required that ladders not be left unattended in an upright position. Ladders
must be attended at all times or taken down and securely chained to a stationary object.
M.
SCAFFOLDS
All scaffolds will be attended at all times. When not in use, an effective barricade
(fence) will be erected around the scaffold to prevent use by unauthorized personnel.
N.
EXCAVATIONS
99
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
All excavations left unattended shall be protected with a barricade suitable to
prevent entry by unauthorized persons.
O.
STORAGE
The contractor must make prior arrangements with the Project Engineer for the
storage of building materials. Storage will not be allowed to accumulate in Medical
Center Buildings.
P.
TRASH AND DEBRIS
The contractor must remove all trash and debris from the work area on a daily
basis. Trash and debris will not be allowed to accumulate in the buildings and will be
allowed to accumulate outside the buildings for future pick-up. The contractor is
responsible for making arrangements for the removal of trash from the Medical Center
Facility.
Q.
PROTECTION OF FLOORS
It may be necessary at times to take steps to protect construction area and non-
construction area floors from dirt, debris, paint, etc. A tarp or other protective covering
shall be used. However, the contractor must maintain a certain amount of floor space for
the safe passage of pedestrian traffic. Common sense must be used in this manner.
R.
SIGNS
Signs must be placed at the entrance to work areas warning people of the
construction activities. Signs must be suitable for the condition of the work. Small pieces
of paper with printing or writing are not acceptable. The VAMC Safety Officer can be
consulted in this matter.
S.
ACCIDENTS AND INJURIES
Contractors must report all accidents and injuries involving employees. The
contractor may use the VAMC Health Center, located on the ground floor of Building #3,
Room 16 at FDR Campus and ground floor of Building #15E, Room E003 at Castle Point
Campus for emergency care.
T.
FIRE/SMOKE BARRIER PENETRATION PERMIT
1.
If the nature of the work requires the penetration of a fire/smoke partition
or barrier the contractor must obtain the proper fire/smoke barrier penetration permit. The
100
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
VAMC Fire Department will inspect the work area and issue a "Fire/Smoke Barrier
Penetration Permit" authorizing the performance of such work.
2.
A "Fire/Smoke Barrier Permit" will be issued only for the period
necessary to perform such work. In the event the time necessary will exceed one day, a
"Fire/Smoke Barrier Permit" may be issued for the period needed; however, the VAMC
Fire Department will inspect the area daily.
3.
Contractors will not be allowed to make any penetrations without the
appropriate permit. See Attachment "B" for the standard form for obtaining a
"Fire/Smoke Barrier Permit".
U.
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY
The Contractor shall comply with and have documented Confined Space Entry
Procedures available at the site at all times as required by OSHA 29 CFR 1910.146. The
Contractor shall also comply with any state, and/or local requirements that are more
restrictive than federal requirements. Contractor is responsible for coordinating with
HVHCS’s established policy on Confined Space.
1.7 FIRE SAFETY
A. Applicable Publications: Publications listed below form part of this Article to extent
referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designations only.
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
E84-2007 ..........................Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
10-2006 ............................Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
30-2003 ............................Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code
51B-2003..........................Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting and
Other Hot Work
70-2005 ............................National Electrical Code
241-2004 ..........................Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and
Demolition Operations
3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
29 CFR 1926 ....................Safety and Health Regulations for Construction
101
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Fire Safety Plan: Establish and maintain a fire protection program in accordance with 29
CFR 1926. Prior to start of work, prepare a plan detailing project-specific fire safety
measures, including periodic status reports, and submit to Project Engineer and Facility
Safety Manager for review for compliance with contract requirements in accordance with
Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES Prior to any
worker for the contractor or subcontractors beginning work, they shall undergo a safety
briefing provided by the general contractor’s competent person per OSHA requirements.
This briefing shall include information on the construction limits, VAMC safety
guidelines, means of egress, break areas, work hours, locations of restrooms, use of
VAMC equipment, etc. Documentation shall be provided to the Project Engineer that
individuals have undergone contractor’s safety briefing.
C. Site and Building Access: Maintain free and unobstructed access to facility emergency
services and for fire, police and other emergency response forces in accordance with
NFPA 241.
D. Separate temporary facilities, such as trailers, storage sheds, and dumpsters, from existing
buildings and new construction by distances in accordance with NFPA 241. For small
facilities with less than 6 m (20 feet) exposing overall length, separate by 3m (10 feet).
E. Temporary Construction Partitions:
1. Install and maintain temporary construction partitions to provide smoke-tight
separations between construction areas and adjoining areas. Construct partitions of
gypsum board or treated plywood (flame spread rating of 25 or less in accordance
with ASTM E84) on both sides of fire retardant treated wood or metal steel studs.
Extend the partitions through suspended ceilings to floor slab deck or roof. Seal joints
and penetrations. At door openings, install Class C, ¾ hour fire/smoke rated doors
with self-closing devices.
2. Install one-hour temporary construction partitions when shown on drawings or when
required by code to maintain integrity of existing exit stair enclosures, exit
passageways, fire-rated enclosures of hazardous areas, horizontal exits, smoke
barriers, vertical shafts and openings enclosures.
102
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3. Close openings in smoke barriers and fire-rated construction to maintain fire ratings.
Seal penetrations with listed through-penetration firestop materials in accordance
with specifications. All Firestop material must be red in color.
F. Temporary Heating and Electrical: Install, use and maintain installations in accordance
with 29 CFR 1926, NFPA 241 and NFPA 70.
G. Means of Egress: Do not block exiting for occupied buildings, including paths from exits
to roads. Minimize disruptions and coordinate with Project Engineer and facility Safety
Manager.
H. Egress Routes for Construction Workers: Maintain free and unobstructed egress. Inspect
daily. Report findings and corrective actions weekly to Project Engineer and facility
Safety Manager.
I. Fire Extinguishers: Provide and maintain extinguishers in construction areas and
temporary storage areas in accordance with 29 CFR 1926, NFPA 241 and NFPA 10.
J. Flammable and Combustible Liquids: Store, dispense and use liquids in accordance with
29 CFR 1926, NFPA 241 and NFPA 30.
K. Standpipes: Install and extend standpipes up with each floor in accordance with 29 CFR
1926 and NFPA 241. Do not charge wet standpipes subject to freezing until weather
protected.
L. Sprinklers: Install, test and activate new automatic sprinklers prior to removing existing
sprinklers.
M. Existing Fire Protection: Do not impair automatic sprinklers, smoke and heat detection,
and fire alarm systems, except for portions immediately under construction, and
temporarily for connections. Provide fire watch for impairments more than 4 hours in a
24-hour period. Request interruptions in accordance with Article, OPERATIONS AND
STORAGE AREAS, and coordinate with Project Engineer and facility Safety Manager.
All existing or temporary fire protection systems (fire alarms, sprinklers) located in
construction areas shall be tested as coordinated with the medical center. Parameters for
the testing and results of any tests performed shall be recorded by the medical center and
copies provided to the Project Engineer.
N. Smoke Detectors: Prevent accidental operation. Remove temporary covers at end of work
operations each day. Coordinate with Project Engineer and facility Safety Manager.
103
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
O. Hot Work: Perform and safeguard hot work operations in accordance with NFPA 241 and
NFPA 51B. Coordinate with Project Engineer. Obtain permits from facility Safety
Manager/Fire Department at least 24 hours in advance. Designate contractor's responsible
project-site fire prevention program manager to permit hot work. See paragraph 1.6 (Hot
Work Permit) for additional information
P. Fire Hazard Prevention and Safety Inspections: Inspect entire construction areas weekly.
Coordinate with, and report findings and corrective actions weekly to Project Engineer
and facility Safety Manager.
Q. Smoking: Smoking is prohibited in and adjacent to construction areas inside existing
buildings and additions under construction. In separate and detached buildings under
construction, smoking is prohibited except in designated smoking rest areas.
R. Dispose of waste and debris in accordance with NFPA 241. Remove from buildings
daily.
S. Perform other construction, alteration and demolition operations in accordance with 29
CFR 1926.
T. If required, submit documentation to the Project Engineer that personnel have been
trained in the fire safety aspects of working in areas with impaired structural or
compartmentalization features.
U. All temporary heating equipment shall be installed in accordance with requirements of
applicable NFPA Standards and manufacturer’s instructions.
V. All flammable liquids shall be handled, stored, and used in accordance with NFPA
Standard No. 30-1990.
W. All temporary electrical wiring and equipment used for construction shall be installed and
used in accordance with pertinent provisions of NFPA Standard No. 70-1990.
X. All construction activities not already covered above shall be in accordance with the
latest edition of NFPA no. 241-1898 Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration,
and Demolition Operations, in effect at time of contract award.
1.8 HOT WORK PERMIT
A. The Contractor is responsible for requesting a “Hot “Work” permit each day prior to
commencing any cutting, burning, and welding or open torch work. The permit is
104
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
requested and obtained through the Fire Department following an inspection by the Fire
Department and COTR of the intended area of use. The permit once issued will be for a
maximum duration of one (1) day, after which a renewal, if required, must be requested
by the Contractor.
B. Before approving any “Hot Work” permit, the Contractor’s authorized representative, the
COTR, and other representatives of the Dept. of Veterans Affairs shall inspect the work
area and confirm that precautions have been taken to prevent fire in accordance with
NFPA Standard No. 51B. Following a positive inspection, a representative of the Fire
Dept. will issue the “Hot Work” permit.
C. In areas of “Hot Work” the following precautions are considered essential:
1. Sprinklers are in service where installed.
2. Cutting, welding, and other open flame torches are in good repair.
3. within 15 feet of the actual work:
a. Floors swept clean of combustible materials.
b. No combustible materials or flammable liquids are present.
c. All wall and floor openings are covered.
d. Covers suspended beneath work to collect sparks.
4. When working on enclosed equipment and in confined space, equipment and area is
free of flammable vapors.
5. Fire watch provided during and 30 minutes after operation (60 minutes for
torch applied roofing operations.
1.9 OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS
A. The Contractor shall confine all operations (including storage of materials) on
Government premises to areas authorized or approved by the Contracting Officer. The
Contractor shall hold and save the Government, its officers and agents, free and harmless
from liability of any nature occasioned by the Contractor's performance.
B. Temporary buildings (e.g., storage sheds, shops, offices) and utilities may be erected by
the Contractor only with the approval of the Contracting Officer and shall be built with
labor and materials furnished by the Contractor without expense to the Government. The
temporary buildings and utilities shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall be
105
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
removed by the Contractor at its expense upon completion of the work. With the written
consent of the Contracting Officer, the buildings and utilities may be abandoned and need
not be removed.
C. The Contractor shall, under regulations prescribed by the Contracting Officer, use only
established roadways, or use temporary roadways constructed by the Contractor when
and as authorized by the Contracting Officer. When materials are transported in
prosecuting the work, vehicles shall not be loaded beyond the loading capacity
recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or prescribed by any Federal, State, or
local law or regulation. When it is necessary to cross curbs or sidewalks, the Contractor
shall protect them from damage. The Contractor shall repair or pay for the repair of any
damaged curbs, sidewalks, or roads.
D.
Working space and space available for storing materials
shall be as determined by the Project Engineer/ COTR. The
Contractor shall consider that storage of excavated
materials on roadways, walkways and parking areas is
prohibited.
Remote stockpile location shall be as
determined by the Resident Engineer / COTR.
E. Workmen are subject to rules of Medical Center applicable to their conduct.
F. Execute work so as to interfere as little as possible with
normal functioning of Medical Center as a whole, including
operations of utility services, fire protection systems and
any existing equipment, and patients, visitors, staff and/
or with work being done by others. Provide unobstructed
access to Medical Center areas required to remain in
operation. Use of equipment and tools that transmit
vibrations and noises through the building structure, are
not permitted in buildings that are occupied, during
construction, jointly by patients or medical personnel, and
Contractor's personnel, except as permitted by Project
Engineer where required by limited working space. Keep roads
clear of construction materials, debris, standing construction equipment and
106
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
vehicles at all times. Do not block crosswalks and / or handicap access. Flagmen
must be used when necessary during equipment movement or material/equipment
drop off or pick up.
1. Do not store materials and equipment in other than assigned areas. Storage of
construction equipment and excess materials is prohibited within the workspace.
Store all construction materials and other equipment only in lockable, watertight
secure trailers.
2. Schedule delivery of materials and equipment to immediate construction working
areas within buildings in use by Department of Veterans Affairs in quantities
sufficient for not more than two work days. Provide unobstructed access to Medical
Center areas required to remain in operation. The Contractor shall be on site to
receive all scheduled deliveries. The Medical Center Warehouse will not accept
deliveries; do not use the warehouse as a shipping destination. The Contracting
Officer / COTR will assign routes for the delivery of materials and supplies to the
jobsite if such routes are not designated in the Contract Document. Under no
circumstances will Government accept deliveries for the Contractor. The Contractor
will advise the Contracting Officer / COTR, in writing, 48 Hours in advance of
delivery of materials or equipment requiring the blocking of any Medical Center road,
street, walkway, or building egress and await a written reply prior to affecting any
such blockage. Building loading docks and landings may be used to load and unload
construction materials when requested by the Contractor in writing and approved by
the COTR. Approval to utilize loading dock areas may contain restrictions as to areas
which can be utilized by the Contractor. Loading Docks are not to be used as storage
areas nor are the docks to be considered as a parking area for more than 20 minutes.
3. Provide unobstructed access to Medical Center areas required to remain in
operation. Where access by Medical Center personnel to vacated portions of
buildings is not required, storage of Contractor's materials and equipment will be
permitted subject to fire and safety requirements.
107
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
G. Phasing: To insure such executions, Contractor shall furnish the Project Engineer with a
schedule of approximate phasing and dates on which the Contractor intends to
accomplish work in each specific area of site, building or portion thereof. In addition,
Contractor shall notify the Project Engineer two weeks in advance of the proposed date of
starting work in each specific area of site, building or portion thereof. Arrange such
phasing and dates to insure accomplishment of this work in successive phases mutually
agreeable to Medical Center Director, Project Engineer and Contractor, as follows:
Phase I: Submittals. . Contractor shall submit all required submittals in Division No. 1
as required by the Contracting Officer (CO) in the time stipulated by the CO to issue the
Award Notification and Notice to Proceed. Critical submittals as indicated herein are to
be submitted within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed and until approval No work shall
commence on the job site. The remaining submittals must be submitted within 60
Calendar Days of the Notice to Proceed (or as per Submittal Log Submission Chart
approved by the Contracting Officer’s COTR), in a timely fashion to enable receipt
and approval. Delays and lack to progress work on schedule will be borne by the
Contractor.
Critical submittals shall include Division No. 1, 2, 8, 9, 10 and Division No. 11.
Phase II: VAHVHCS shall review critical submittals and return to contractor. Submittals
will be returned within approximately 30 days of receipt of submittal.
DURATION 30 Calendar Days
Phase III: Contractor shall complete construction for base bid in a period of 270
Calendar Days from the Notice to Proceed.
Phase IV: Contractor shall cleanup site within 10 Calendar Days of the above-indicated
completion. VAHVHCS shall perform a final inspection after site is cleaned by
contractor and provide contractor with any items identified in the final punch list.
Contract Completion shall be 270 Calendar Days from the Notice to Proceed.
H. When a building is turned over to Contractor, Contractor shall accept entire responsibility
therefore.
108
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. Contractor shall maintain a minimum temperature of 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) at all
times, except as otherwise specified.
2. Contractor shall maintain in operating condition existing fire protection and alarm
equipment. In connection with fire alarm equipment, Contractor shall make
arrangements for pre-inspection of site with Fire Department or Company
(Department of Veterans Affairs or municipal) whichever will be required to respond
to an alarm from Contractor's employee or watchman.
I. Utilities Services: Maintain existing utility services for Medical Center at all times.
Provide temporary facilities, labor, materials, equipment, connections, and utilities to
assure uninterrupted services. Where necessary to cut existing water, steam, gases, sewer
or air pipes, or conduits, wires, cables, etc. of utility services or of fire protection systems
and communications systems (including telephone), they shall be cut and capped at
suitable places where shown; or, in absence of such indication, where directed by Project
Engineer.
1. No utility service such as water, gas, steam, sewers or electricity, or fire protection
systems and communications systems may be interrupted without prior approval of
Project Engineer. Electrical work shall be accomplished with all affected circuits or
equipment de-energized. When an electrical outage cannot be accomplished, work on
any energized circuits or equipment shall not commence without the Medical Center
Director’s prior knowledge and written approval. Refer to specification for additional
requirements.
2. Contractor shall submit a request to interrupt any such services to Project Engineer, in
writing, 48 hours in advance of proposed interruption. Request shall state reason,
date, exact time of, and approximate duration of such interruption.
3. Contractor will be advised (in writing) of approval of request, or of which other date
and/or time such interruption will cause least inconvenience to operations of Medical
Center. Interruption time approved by Medical Center may occur at other than
Contractor's normal working hours.
109
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
4. Major interruptions of any system must be requested, in writing, at least 15 calendar
days prior to the desired time and shall be performed as directed by the Project
Engineer.
5. In case of a contract construction emergency, service will be interrupted on approval
of Project Engineer. Such approval will be confirmed in writing as soon as practical.
6. Whenever it is required that a connection fee be paid to a public utility provider for
new permanent service to the construction project, for such items as water, sewer,
electricity, gas or steam, payment of such fee shall be the responsibility of the
Government and not the Contractor.
J. Abandoned Lines: All service lines such as wires, cables, conduits, ducts, pipes and the
like, and their hangers or supports, which are to be abandoned but are not required to be
entirely removed, shall be sealed, capped or plugged. The lines shall not be capped in
finished areas, but shall be removed and sealed, capped or plugged in ceilings, within
furred spaces, in unfinished areas, or within walls or partitions; so that they are
completely behind the finished surfaces.
K. To minimize interference of construction activities with flow of Medical Center traffic,
comply with the following:
1. Keep roads, walks and entrances to grounds, to parking and to occupied areas of
buildings clear of construction materials, debris and standing construction equipment
and vehicles.
2. Method and scheduling of required cutting, altering and removal of existing roads,
walks and entrances must be approved by the Project Engineer.
L. Coordinate the work for this contract with other construction operations as directed by
Project Engineer. This includes the scheduling of traffic and the use of roadways, as
specified in Article, USE OF ROADWAYS.
1.10 ALTERATIONS
A. Survey: Before any work is started, the Contractor shall make a thorough survey with the
Project Engineer, and a representative of VA Supply Service, of areas of buildings in
which alterations occur and areas which are anticipated routes of access, and furnish a
report, signed by all three, to the Contracting Officer. This report shall list by rooms and
spaces:
110
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. Existing condition and types of resilient flooring, doors, windows, walls and other
surfaces not required to be altered throughout affected areas of building.
2. Existence and conditions of items such as plumbing fixtures and accessories,
electrical fixtures, equipment, venetian blinds, shades, etc., required by drawings to
be either reused or relocated, or both.
3. Shall note any discrepancies between drawings and existing conditions at site.
4. Shall designate areas for working space, materials storage and routes of access to
areas within buildings where alterations occur and which have been agreed upon by
Contractor and Project Engineer.
B. Any items required by drawings to be either reused or relocated or both, found during this
survey to be nonexistent, or in opinion of Project Engineer and/or Supply Representative,
to be in such condition that their use is impossible or impractical, shall be furnished
and/or replaced by Contractor with new items in accordance with specifications which
will be furnished by Government. Provided the contract work is changed by reason of
this subparagraph B, the contract will be modified accordingly, under provisions of
clause entitled "DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS" (FAR 52.236-2) and "CHANGES"
(FAR 52.243-4 and VAAR 852.236-88) of Section 00 72 00, GENERAL CONDITIONS.
C. Re-Survey: Three days before expected partial or final inspection date, the Contractor
and Project Engineer together shall make a thorough re-survey of the areas of buildings
involved. They shall furnish a report on conditions then existing, of resilient flooring,
doors, windows, walls and other surfaces as compared with conditions of same as noted
in first condition survey report:
1. Re-survey report shall also list any damage caused by Contractor to such flooring and
other surfaces, despite protection measures; and, will form basis for determining
extent of repair work required of Contractor to restore damage caused by Contractor's
workmen in executing work of this contract.
D. Protection: Provide the following protective measures:
1. Wherever existing roof surfaces are disturbed they shall be protected against water
infiltration. In case of leaks, they shall be repaired immediately upon discovery.
2. Temporary protection against damage for portions of existing structures and grounds
where work is to be done, materials handled and equipment moved and/or relocated.
111
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3. Protection of interior of existing structures at all times, from damage, dust and
weather inclemency. Wherever work is performed, floor surfaces that are to remain in
place shall be adequately protected prior to starting work, and this protection shall be
maintained intact until all work in the area is completed.
4. Dampen debris to keep down dust and provide temporary construction partitions in
existing structures where directed by Resident Engineer. Blank off ducts and diffusers
to prevent circulation of dust into occupied areas during construction. Comply with
the VA’s Infection Control Risk Assessment. Take immediate corrective action as
recommended by the risk assessment to keep exposure to dust and noise to levels as
indicated on the ICRA assessment form.
5. Do not perform any dust producing or construction tasks within occupied areas
without the approval of the Resident Engineer. For construction in any areas that will
remain jointly occupied by the medical Center and Contractor’s workers, the
Contractor shall:
a. Provide dust proof two-hour fire-rated temporary drywall construction barriers or
temporary measures as approved by the Government to completely separate
construction from the operational areas of the hospital in order to contain dirt
debris and dust. Barriers shall be sealed and made presentable on the occupied
side. Install a self-closing rated door in a metal frame, commensurate with the
partition, to allow worker access. Maintain negative air at all times. A fire
retardant polystyrene, 6-mil thick or greater plastic barrier meeting local fire
codes may be used where dust control is the only hazard, and an agreement is
reached with the Resident Engineer and Medical Center.
b. Install HEPA (High Efficiency Particulate Accumulator) filter vacuum system
rated at 95% capture of 0.3 microns including pollen, mold spores and dust
particles. Insure continuous negative air pressures occurring within the work area.
HEPA filtration is required where the exhaust dust may reenter the breathing
zone. HEPA filters should have ASHRAE 85 or other prefilter to extend the
useful life of the HEPA. Provide both primary and secondary filtrations units.
Exhaust hoses shall be heavy duty, flexible steel reinforced and exhausted so that
dust is not reintroduced to the medical center.
112
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
c. Adhesive Walk-off/Carpet Walk-off Mats, minimum 24” x 36”, shall be used at
all interior transitions from the construction area to occupied medical center area.
These mats shall be changed as often as required to maintain clean work areas
directly outside construction area.
d. Broom clean and wet mop at the end of each workday. Vacuum utilizing HEPA
filtration. Maintain surrounding area frequently. Remove debris as they are
created. Transport these outside the construction area in containers with tightly
fitting lids.
e. The contractor shall not haul debris through patient-care areas without prior
approval of the Resident Engineer and the Medical Center. When, approved,
debris shall be hauled in enclosed dust proof containers or wrapped in plastic and
sealed with duct tape. No sharp objects should be allowed to cut through the
plastic. Wipe down the exterior of the containers with a damp rag to remove dust.
All equipment, tools, material, etc. transported through occupied areas shall be
made free from dust and moisture by vacuuming and wipe down.
f. Using a HEPA vacuum, clean inside the barrier and vacuum ceiling tile prior to
replacement. Any ceiling access panels opened for investigation beyond sealed
areas shall be replaced immediately when unattended.
g. There shall be no standing water during construction. This includes water in
equipment drip pans and open containers within the construction areas. All
accidental spills must be cleaned up and dried within 12 hours. Remove and
dispose of porous materials that remain damp for more than 72 hours.
h. At completion, remove construction barriers and ceiling protection carefully,
outside of normal work hours. Vacuum and clean all surfaces free of dust after the
removal.
E. Disposal and Retention: Materials and equipment accruing from work removed and from
demolition of buildings or structures, or parts thereof, shall be disposed of as follows:
1. Reserved items which are to remain property of the Government as noted on
drawings or in specifications as items to be stored. Items which remain property of
the Government shall be removed or dislodged from present locations in such a
manner as to prevent damage, which would be detrimental to re-installation and
113
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
reuse. Store such items where directed by Resident Engineer. Supply and provide any
and all rigging to move the items.
2. Items not reserved shall become property of the Contractor and be removed by
Contractor from the Medical Center.
3. Items of portable equipment and furnishings located in rooms and spaces in which
work is to be done under this contract shall remain the property of the Government.
When rooms and spaces are vacated by the Department of Veterans Affairs during the
alteration period, such items which are NOT required by drawings and specifications
to be either relocated or reused will be removed by the Government in advance of
work to avoid interfering with Contractor's operation.
4. PCB Transformers, Capacitors and Lighting Ballasts: The Contractor shall be
responsible for disposal of the Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB) transformers and
capacitors. The transformers and capacitors shall be taken out of service and handled
in accordance with the procedures of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
and the Department of Transportation (DOT) as outlined in Code of Federal
Regulation (CFR), Titled 40 and 49 respectively. The EPA's Toxic Substance Control
Act (TSCA) Compliance Program Policy Nos. 6-PCB-6 and 6-PCB-7 also apply.
Upon removal of PCB transformers and capacitors for disposal, the "originator" copy
of the Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest (EPA Form 8700-22), along with the
Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest Continuation Sheet (EPA Form 8700-22A) shall
be returned to the Contracting Officer who will annotate the contract file and transmit
the Manifest to the Medical Center's Director.
a. Copies of the following listed CFR titles may be obtained from the Government
Printing Office:
40 CFR 261 -..............Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 262 -..............Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 263 -..............Standards Applicable to Transporters of Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 761 -..............PCB Manufacturing, Processing, Distribution in
Commerce, and use Prohibitions
49 CFR 172 -..............Hazardous Material tables and Hazardous Material
Communications Regulations
114
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
49 CFR 173 -..............Shippers - General Requirements for Shipments and
Packaging
49 CRR 173 - .............Subpart A General
49 CFR 173 -..............Subpart B Preparation of Hazardous Material for
Transportation
49 CFR 173 -..............Subpart J Other Regulated Material; Definitions and
Preparation
TSCA - .......................Compliance Program Policy Nos. 6-PCB-6 and 6-PCB-7
F. Final Cleanup:
1. Upon completion of project, or as work progresses, remove all construction debris
from above ceiling, vertical shafts and utility chases that have been part of the
construction.
2. Perform HEPA vacuum cleaning of all surfaces in the construction area. This
includes walls, ceilings, cabinets, furniture (built-in or free standing), partitions,
flooring, etc.
3. All new air ducts shall be cleaned prior to final inspection.
1.11 INFECTION PREVENTION MEASURES
A. Implement the requirements of VAMC’s Infection Control Risk Assessment (ICRA)
team. ICRA Group may monitor dust in the vicinity of the construction work and require
the Contractor to take corrective action immediately if the safe levels are exceeded.
B. Establish and maintain a dust control program as part of the contractor’s infection
preventive measures in accordance with the guidelines provided by ICRA Group. Prior to
start of work, prepare a plan detailing project-specific dust protection measures, including
periodic status reports, and submit to Project Engineer for review for compliance with
contract requirements in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS,
PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES.
1. All personnel involved in the construction or renovation activity shall be educated
and trained in infection prevention measures established by the medical center.
C. Medical center Infection Control personnel shall monitor for airborne disease (e.g.
aspergillosis) as appropriate during construction. A baseline of conditions may be
115
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
established by the medical center prior to the start of work and periodically during the
construction stage to determine impact of construction activities on indoor air quality. In
addition:
1. The Project Engineer and VAMC Infection Control personnel shall review pressure
differential monitoring documentation to verify that pressure differentials in the
construction zone and in the patient-care rooms are appropriate for their settings. The
requirement for negative air pressure in the construction zone shall depend on the
location and type of activity. Upon notification, the contractor shall implement
corrective measures to restore proper pressure differentials as needed.
2. In case of any problem, the medical center, along with assistance from the contractor,
shall conduct an environmental assessment to find and eliminate the source.
D. In general, following preventive measures shall be adopted during construction to keep
down dust and prevent mold.
1. Dampen debris to keep down dust and provide temporary construction partitions in
existing structures where directed by Project Engineer. Blank off ducts and diffusers
to prevent circulation of dust into occupied areas during construction.
2. Do not perform dust producing tasks within occupied areas without the approval of
the Project Engineer. For construction in any areas that will remain jointly occupied
by the medical Center and Contractor’s workers, the Contractor shall:
a. Provide dust proof fire-rated temporary drywall construction barriers to
completely separate construction from the operational areas of the hospital in
order to contain dirt debris and dust. Barriers shall be sealed and made presentable
on hospital occupied side. Install a self-closing rated door in a metal frame,
commensurate with the partition, to allow worker access. Maintain negative air at
all times. A fire retardant polystyrene, 6-mil thick or greater plastic barrier
meeting local fire codes may be used where dust control is the only hazard, and an
agreement is reached with the Project Engineer and Medical Center.
b. HEPA filtration is required where the exhaust dust may reenter the breathing
zone. Contractor shall verify that construction exhaust to exterior is not
reintroduced to the medical center through intake vents, or building openings.
Install HEPA (High Efficiency Particulate Accumulator) filter vacuum system
116
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
rated at 95% capture of 0.3 microns including pollen, mold spores and dust
particles. Insure continuous negative air pressures occurring within the work area.
HEPA filters should have ASHRAE 85 or other prefilter to extend the useful life
of the HEPA. Provide both primary and secondary filtrations units. Exhaust hoses
shall be heavy duty, flexible steel reinforced and exhausted so that dust is not
reintroduced to the medical center.
c. Adhesive Walk-off/Carpet Walk-off Mats, minimum 600mm x 900mm (24” x
36”), shall be used at all interior transitions from the construction area to occupied
medical center area. These mats shall be changed as often as required to maintain
clean work areas directly outside construction area at all times.
d. Vacuum and wet mop all transition areas from construction to the occupied
medical center at the end of each workday. Vacuum shall utilize HEPA filtration.
Maintain surrounding area frequently. Remove debris as they are created.
Transport these outside the construction area in containers with tightly fitting lids.
e. The contractor shall not haul debris through patient-care areas without prior
approval of the Project Engineer and the Medical Center. When, approved, debris
shall be hauled in enclosed dust proof containers or wrapped in plastic and sealed
with duct tape. No sharp objects should be allowed to cut through the plastic.
Wipe down the exterior of the containers with a damp rag to remove dust. All
equipment, tools, material, etc. transported through occupied areas shall be made
free from dust and moisture by vacuuming and wipe down.
f. Using a HEPA vacuum, clean inside the barrier and vacuum ceiling tile prior to
replacement. Any ceiling access panels opened for investigation beyond sealed
areas shall be sealed immediately when unattended.
g. There shall be no standing water during construction. This includes water in
equipment drip pans and open containers within the construction areas. All
accidental spills must be cleaned up and dried within 12 hours. Remove and
dispose of porous materials that remain damp for more than 72 hours.
h. At completion, remove construction barriers and ceiling protection carefully,
outside of normal work hours. Vacuum and clean all surfaces free of dust after the
removal.
117
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
E. Final Cleanup:
1. Upon completion of project, or as work progresses, remove all construction debris
from above ceiling, vertical shafts and utility chases that have been part of the
construction.
2. Perform HEPA vacuum cleaning of all surfaces in the construction area. This
includes walls, ceilings, cabinets, furniture (built-in or free standing), partitions,
flooring, etc.
3. All new air ducts shall be cleaned prior to final inspection.
1.12 DISPOSAL AND RETENTION
A. Materials and equipment accruing from work removed and from demolition of buildings
or structures, or parts thereof, shall be disposed of as follows:
1. Reserved items which are to remain property of the Government are identified by
attached tags or noted on drawings or in specifications as items to be stored. Items
that remain property of the Government shall be removed or dislodged from present
locations in such a manner as to prevent damage which would be detrimental to
re-installation and reuse. Store such items where directed by Project Engineer.
2. Items not reserved shall become property of the Contractor and be removed by
Contractor from Medical Center.
3. Items of portable equipment and furnishings located in rooms and spaces in which
work is to be done under this contract shall remain the property of the Government.
When rooms and spaces are vacated by the Department of Veterans Affairs during the
alteration period, such items which are NOT required by drawings and specifications
to be either relocated or reused will be removed by the Government in advance of
work to avoid interfering with Contractor's operation.
40 CFR 261
Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 262
Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 263
Standards Applicable to Transporters of Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 761
PCB Manufacturing, Processing, Distribution in Commerce, and use
Prohibitions
118
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
49 CFR 172
Hazardous Material tables and Hazardous Material Communications
Regulations
49 CFR 173
Shippers - General Requirements for Shipments and Packaging
49 CRR 173
Subpart A General
49 CFR 173
Subpart B Preparation of Hazardous Material for Transportation
49 CFR 173
Subpart J Other Regulated Material; Definitions and Preparation
TSCA
Compliance Program Policy Nos. 6-PCB-6 and 6-PCB-7
B. CONSTRUCTION WASTE AND DEBRIS
1. The Contractor will dispose of any construction waste or debris in a legal manner
outside the boundary of the Medical Center. No waste or debris will be disposed of in
Medical Center trash containers or dumpsters or in any other Contractor’s dumpsters.
2. The location of Contractor furnished trash containers or dumpsters within the bounds
of the Medical Center requires written approval from the COTR.
3. Construction waste and debris will not be accumulated in corridors or other building
areas beyond daily work hours.
C. DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
1. Several buildings or areas may contain asbestos containing materials (ACM). Some
typical types of materials found to contain ACMs are pipe insulation, transite wall panels,
floor tile, linoleum backing, floor/roof mastics and others. Contractors are required to
communicate this information to all of their employees and subcontractors that will be
working at this site. Contractor is required to alert the Medical Center
(COTR/Contracting Officer) immediately in the event any known or suspected ACM is
accidentally disturbed or will need to be disturbed before proceeding with work.
2. Disposal of any hazardous or potentially hazardous materials shall be disposed of in
accordance with State and/or local laws and regulations.
1.13 PROTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT,
UTILITIES, AND IMPROVEMENTS
A. The Contractor shall preserve and protect all structures, equipment, and vegetation (such
as trees, shrubs, and grass) on or adjacent to the work site, which are not to be removed
and which do not unreasonably interfere with the work required under this contract. The
119
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Contractor shall only remove trees when specifically authorized to do so, and shall avoid
damaging vegetation that will remain in place. If any limbs or branches of trees are
broken during contract performance, or by the careless operation of equipment, or by
workmen, the Contractor shall trim those limbs or branches with a clean cut and paint the
cut with a tree-pruning compound as directed by the Contracting Officer.
B. The Contractor shall protect from damage all existing improvements and utilities at or
near the work site and on adjacent property of a third party, the locations of which are
made known to or should be known by the Contractor. The Contractor shall repair any
damage to those facilities, including those that are the property of a third party, resulting
from failure to comply with the requirements of this contract or failure to exercise
reasonable care in performing the work. If the Contractor fails or refuses to repair the
damage promptly, the Contracting Officer may have the necessary work performed and
charge the cost to the Contractor.
(FAR 52.236-9)
C. Refer to Section 01 57 19, TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS, for
additional requirements on protecting vegetation, soils and the environment. Refer to
Articles, "Alterations", "Restoration", and "Operations and Storage Areas" for additional
instructions concerning repair of damage to structures and site improvements.
1.14 RESTORATION
A. Remove, cut, alter, replace, patch and repair existing work as necessary to install new
work. Except as otherwise shown or specified, do not cut, alter or remove any structural
work, and do not disturb any ducts, plumbing, steam, gas, or electric work without
approval of the Project Engineer. Existing work to be altered or extended and that is
found to be defective in any way, shall be reported to the Project Engineer before it is
disturbed. Materials and workmanship used in restoring work, shall conform in type and
quality to that of original existing construction, except as otherwise shown or specified.
B. Upon completion of contract, deliver work complete and undamaged. Existing work
(walls, ceilings, partitions, floors, mechanical and electrical work, lawns, paving, roads,
walks, etc.) disturbed or removed as a result of performing required new work, shall be
patched, repaired, reinstalled, or replaced with new work, and refinished and left in as
good condition as existed before commencing work.
120
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C. At Contractor's own expense, Contractor shall immediately restore to service and repair
any damage caused by Contractor's workmen to existing piping and conduits, wires,
cables, etc., of utility services or of fire protection systems and communications systems
(including telephone) which are indicated on drawings and which are not scheduled for
discontinuance or abandonment.
D. Expense of repairs to such utilities and systems not shown on drawings or locations of
which are unknown will be covered by adjustment to contract time and price in
accordance with clause entitled "CHANGES" (FAR 52.243-4 and VAAR 852.236-88)
and "DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS" (FAR 52.236-2) of Section 00 72 00,
GENERAL CONDITIONS.
1.15 PHYSICAL DATA
A. Data and information furnished or referred to below is for the Contractor's
information. The Government shall not be responsible for any interpretation of or
conclusion drawn from the data or information by the Contractor.
(FAR 52.236-4)
B. Subsurface conditions have been developed by core borings and test pits. Logs of
subsurface exploration are shown diagrammatically on drawings.
C. A copy of the soil report will be made available for inspection by bidders upon
request to the Engineering Officer at the VA Medical Center, Castle Point, NY and
shall be considered part of the contract documents.
D. Government does not guarantee that other materials will not be encountered nor that
proportions, conditions or character of several materials will not vary from those
indicated by explorations. Bidders are expected to examine site of work and logs of
borings; and, after investigation, decide for themselves character of materials and
make their bids accordingly. Upon proper application to Department of Veterans
Affairs, bidders will be permitted to make subsurface explorations of their own at the
work site at no cost to the government.
1.16 PROFESSIONAL SURVEYING SERVICES (NOT APPLICABLE)
A registered professional land surveyor or registered civil engineer whose services are
retained and paid for by the Contractor shall perform services specified herein and in
121
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
other specification sections. The Contractor shall certify that the land surveyor or civil
engineer is not one who is a regular employee of the Contractor, and that the land
surveyor or civil engineer has no financial interest in this contract. Services considered
shall include project layout, sheeting and shoring and scaffolding.
1.17 LAYOUT OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall lay out the work from Government established Line and Curve
coordinate system chart and benchmarks, indicated on the drawings, and shall be
responsible for all measurements in connection with the layout. The Contractor shall
furnish, at Contractor's own expense, all stakes, templates, platforms, equipment, tools,
materials, and labor required to lay out any part of the work. The Contractor shall be
responsible for executing the work to the lines and grades that may be established or
indicated by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall also be responsible for
maintaining and preserving all stakes and other marks established by the Contracting
Officer until authorized to remove them. If such marks are destroyed by the Contractor or
through Contractor's negligence before their removal is authorized, the Contracting
Officer may replace them and deduct the expense of the replacement from any amounts
due or to become due to the Contractor.
(FAR 52.236-17)
B. Establish and plainly mark centerlines and such other lines and grades that are reasonably
necessary to properly assure that location, orientation, and elevations established for each
such structure and/or addition are in accordance with lines and elevations shown on
contract drawings.
C. Before any permanent work is performed, establish and plainly mark sufficient additional
survey control points or system of points as may be necessary to assure proper alignment,
orientation, and grade of all major features of work. Survey shall include, but not be
limited to, location of lines and grades of footings, exterior walls, centerlines of columns
in both directions, major utilities and elevations of floor slabs.
1. Such additional survey control points or system of points thus established shall be
checked and certified by a registered land surveyor or registered civil engineer.
122
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Furnish such certification to the Resident Engineer before any work (such as footings,
floor slabs, columns, walls, utilities and other major controlling features) is placed.
D. During progress of work, and particularly as work progresses from floor to floor,
Contractor shall have line grades and plumbness of all major form work checked and
certified by a registered land surveyor or registered civil engineer as meeting
requirements of contract drawings. Furnish such certification to the Resident Engineer
before any major items of concrete work are placed. In addition, Contractor shall also
furnish to the Resident Engineer certificates from a registered land surveyor or registered
civil engineer that the following work is complete in every respect as required by contract
drawings.
1. Lines of each building and/or addition.
2. Elevations of bottoms of footings and tops of floors of each building and/or addition.
3. Lines and elevations of sewers and of all outside distribution systems.
E. Whenever changes from contract drawings are made in line or grading requiring
certificates, record such changes on a reproducible drawing bearing the registered land
surveyor or registered civil engineer seal, and forward these drawings upon completion of
work to Resident Engineer.
F. The Contractor shall perform the surveying and layout work of this and other articles and
specifications in accordance with the provisions of Article "Professional Surveying
Services".
1.18 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. The contractor shall maintain two full size sets of as-built drawings which will be kept
current during construction of the project, to include all contract changes, modifications
and clarifications.
B. All variations shall be shown in the same general detail as used in the contract drawings.
To insure compliance, as-built drawings shall be made available for the Project
Engineer's review, as often as requested.
C. Contractor shall deliver two approved completed sets of as-built drawings to the Project
Engineer within 15 calendar days after each completed phase and after the acceptance of
the project by the Project Engineer.
123
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
D. Paragraphs A, B, & C shall also apply to all shop drawings.
1.19 USE OF ROADWAYS
A. For hauling, use only established public roads and roads on Medical Center property and,
when authorized by the Project Engineer, such temporary roads which are necessary in
the performance of contract work. Temporary roads shall be constructed by the
Contractor at Contractor's expense. When necessary to cross curbing, sidewalks, or
similar construction, they must be protected by well-constructed bridges.
B. When new permanent roads are to be a part of this contract, Contractor may construct
them immediately for use to facilitate building operations. These roads may be used by
all who have business thereon within zone of building operations.
C. When certain buildings (or parts of certain buildings) are required to be completed in
advance of general date of completion, all roads leading thereto must be completed and
available for use at time set for completion of such buildings or parts thereof.
1.20 TEMPORARY USE OF EXISTING ELEVATORS
A. Contractor will not be allowed the use of existing elevators without prior approval.
Outside type hoist shall be used by Contractor for transporting materials and equipment.
1.21 TEMPORARY TOILETS
A. Provide for use of all Contractor's workmen ample temporary sanitary toilet
accommodations with suitable sewer and water connections; or, when approved by
Resident Engineer / COTR, provide suitable dry closets where directed. Keep such places
clean and free from flies and all connections and appliances connected therewith are to be
removed prior to completion of contract, and premises left perfectly clean.
B. The Contractor is to provide his own toilet facilities unless one is specifically
designated for his use. In the event a designated facility is made available the
Contractor will ensure the facility is kept clean and will be responsible for any
damage done by the Contractor/Sub-contractor workers.
1.22 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES
A. The Government shall make all reasonably required amounts of utilities available to the
Contractor from existing outlets and supplies, as specified in the contract. The amount to
124
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
be paid by the Contractor for chargeable electrical services shall be the prevailing rates
charged to the Government. The Contractor shall carefully conserve any utilities
furnished without charge.
B. The Contractor, at Contractor's expense and in a workmanlike manner satisfactory to the
Contracting Officer, shall install and maintain all necessary temporary connections and
distribution lines, and all meters required to measure the amount of electricity used for
the purpose of determining charges. Before final acceptance of the work by the
Government, the Contractor shall remove all the temporary connections, distribution
lines, meters, and associated paraphernalia.
C. Contractor shall install meters at Contractor's expense and furnish the Medical Center a
monthly record of the Contractor's usage of electricity as hereinafter specified.
D. Heat: Furnish temporary heat necessary to prevent injury to work and materials through
dampness and cold. Use of open salamanders or any temporary heating devices which
may be fire hazards or may smoke and damage finished work, will not be permitted.
Maintain minimum temperatures as specified for various materials:
1. Obtain heat by connecting to Medical Center heating distribution system.
a. Steam is available at no cost to Contractor.
E. Electricity (for Construction and Testing): Furnish all temporary electric services.
1. Obtain electricity by connecting to the Medical Center electrical distribution system.
The Contractor shall meter and pay for electricity required for electric cranes and
hoisting devices, electrical welding devices and any electrical heating devices
providing temporary heat. Electricity for all other uses is available at no cost to the
Contractor.
F. Water (for Construction and Testing): Furnish temporary water service.
1. Obtain water by connecting to the Medical Center water distribution system. Provide
reduced pressure backflow preventer at each connection. Water is available at no cost
to the Contractor.
2. Maintain connections, pipe, fittings and fixtures and conserve water-use so none is
wasted. Failure to stop leakage or other wastes will be cause for revocation (at Project
Engineer's discretion) of use of water from Medical Center's system.
125
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.23 NEW TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT
The contractor will coordinate with IRM to provide and install new telephone and
ADP needs, i.e., all cabling, materials, routing, etc. The Task Order will specify
whether the contractor will be responsible for the installation of telephone jacks,
cabling and ADP needs.
1.24 TELEPHONES
A. The Contractor may provide his own phone, or utilize pay telephones at locations
within the Medical Center. At no time will a satellite be allowed onsite for phone or
computer hookups
B. Government telephones will not be used for private business or personal calls.
1.25 TESTS
A. Pre-test mechanical and electrical equipment and systems and make corrections required
for proper operation of such systems before requesting final tests. Final test will not be
conducted unless pre-tested.
B. Conduct final tests required in various sections of specifications in presence of an
authorized representative of the Contracting Officer. Contractor shall furnish all labor,
materials, equipment, instruments, and forms, to conduct and record such tests.
C. Mechanical and electrical systems shall be balanced, controlled and coordinated. A
system is defined as the entire complex which must be coordinated to work together
during normal operation to produce results for which the system is designed. For
example, air conditioning supply air is only one part of entire system which provides
comfort conditions for a building. Other related components are return air, exhaust air,
steam, chilled water, refrigerant, hot water, controls and electricity, etc. Another example
of a complex which involves several components of different disciplines is a boiler
installation. Efficient and acceptable boiler operation depends upon the coordination and
proper operation of fuel, combustion air, controls, steam, feedwater, condensate and other
related components.
126
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
D. All related components as defined above shall be functioning when any system
component is tested. Tests shall be completed within a reasonably short period of time
during which operating and environmental conditions remain reasonably constant.
E. Individual test result of any component, where required, will only be accepted when
submitted with the test results of related components and of the entire system.
1.26 INSTRUCTIONS
A. Contractor shall furnish Maintenance and Operating manuals and verbal instructions
when required by the various sections of the specifications and as hereinafter specified.
B. Manuals: Maintenance and operating manuals (four copies each) for each separate piece
of equipment shall be delivered to the Project Engineer coincidental with the delivery of
the equipment to the job site. Manuals shall be complete, detailed guides for the
maintenance and operation of equipment. They shall include complete information
necessary for starting, adjusting, maintaining in continuous operation for long periods of
time and dismantling and reassembling of the complete units and sub-assembly
components. Manuals shall include an index covering all component parts clearly
cross-referenced to diagrams and illustrations. Illustrations shall include "exploded"
views showing and identifying each separate item. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of
special tools and instruments. The function of each piece of equipment, component,
accessory and control shall be clearly and thoroughly explained. All necessary
precautions for the operation of the equipment and the reason for each precaution shall be
clearly set forth. Manuals must reference the exact model, style and size of the piece of
equipment and system being furnished. Manuals referencing equipment similar to but of
a different model, style, and size than that furnished will not be accepted.
C. Instructions: Contractor shall provide qualified, factory-trained manufacturers'
representatives to give detailed instructions to assigned Department of Veterans Affairs
personnel in the operation and complete maintenance for each piece of equipment. All
such training will be at the job site. These requirements are more specifically detailed in
the various technical sections. Instructions for different items of equipment that are
component parts of a complete system shall be given in an integrated, progressive
manner. All instructors for every piece of component equipment in a system shall be
available until instructions for all items included in the system have been completed. This
127
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
is to assure proper instruction in the operation of inter-related systems. All instruction
periods shall be at such times as scheduled by the Project Engineer and shall be
considered concluded only when the Project Engineer is satisfied in regard to complete
and thorough coverage. The Department of Veterans Affairs reserves the right to request
the removal of, and substitution for, any instructor who, in the opinion of the Project
Engineer, does not demonstrate sufficient qualifications in accordance with requirements
for instructors above.
1.27 GOVERNMENT-FURNISHED PROPERTY (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. When Government property is involved, the Government shall deliver to the Contractor,
the Government-furnished property shown on the drawings.
B. Equipment furnished by Government to be installed by Contractor will be furnished to
Contractor at the Medical Center.
C.
Contractor shall be prepared to receive this equipment from Government and store or
place such equipment not less than 90 days before Completion Date of project.
D. Notify Contracting Officer in writing, 60 days in advance, of date on which Contractor
will be prepared to receive equipment furnished by Government. Arrangements will then
be made by the Government for delivery of equipment.
1. Immediately upon delivery of equipment, Contractor shall arrange for a joint
inspection thereof with a representative of the Government. At such time the
Contractor shall acknowledge receipt of equipment described, make notations, and
immediately furnish the Government representative with a written statement as to its
condition or shortages.
2. Contractor thereafter is responsible for such equipment until such time as acceptance
of contract work is made by the Government.
E. Equipment furnished by the Government will be delivered in a partially assembled
(knock down) condition in accordance with existing standard commercial practices,
complete with all fittings, fastenings, and appliances necessary for connections to
respective services installed under contract. All fittings and appliances (i.e., couplings,
ells, tees, nipples, piping, conduits, cables, and the like) necessary to make the connection
between the Government furnished equipment item and the utility stub-up shall be
furnished and installed by the contractor at no additional cost to the Government.
128
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
F. Completely assemble and install the Government furnished equipment in place ready for
proper operation in accordance with specifications and drawings.
G. Furnish supervision of installation of equipment at construction site by qualified factory
trained technicians regularly employed by the equipment manufacturer.
1.28 RELOCATED EQUIPMENT ITEMS
A. Contractor shall disconnect, dismantle as necessary, remove and reinstall in new location,
all existing equipment and items indicated by symbol "R" or otherwise shown or noted to
be relocated by the Contractor.
B. Perform relocation of such equipment or items at such times and in such a manner as
directed by the Resident Engineer.
C. Suitably cap existing service lines, such as steam, condensate return, water, drain, gas,
air, vacuum and/or electrical, whenever such lines are disconnected from equipment to be
relocated. Remove abandoned lines in finished areas and cap as specified herein before
under paragraph "Abandoned Lines".
D. Provide all mechanical and electrical service connections, fittings, fastenings and any
other materials necessary for assembly and installation of relocated equipment; and leave
such equipment in proper operating condition.
E. Contractor shall employ services of an installation engineer, who is an authorized
representative of the manufacturer of this equipment to supervise assembly and
installation of existing equipment, required to be relocated.
F. All service lines such as noted above for relocated equipment shall be in place at point of
relocation ready for use before any existing equipment is disconnected. Make relocated
existing equipment ready for operation or use immediately after reinstallation.
1.29 HISTORIC PRESERVATION
Where the Contractor or any of the Contractor's employees, prior to, or during the
construction work, are advised of or discover any possible archeological, historical and/or
cultural resources, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Resident Engineer
verbally, and then with a written follow up.
129
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.30 SMOKE BARRIER PENETRATION PERMIT
Contractor shall obtain smoke barrier penetration permit from the VAMC Fire
Department prior to any penetration of smoke or fire barrier structures walls floors
ceilings, ceiling tiles, etc. and comply with all requirements.
1.31 CONTRACTOR PARKING
Contractor shall park all vehicles in designated parking spaces/areas only. Do not park in
the grass or service drives and / or at dumpster (trash Containers).
1.32 CONTRACTOR IDENTIFICATION BADGES
Contractor shall submit completed 0711 forms Section 1- Applicant Information for all
employees scheduled to work onsite 10 working days prior to arrival of their first day to
the COTR/Project Engineer. A photocopy of their drivers license must accompany this
form. Upon arrival on their first day they must contact the Project Engineer/COTR and
complete a SAC form and then be prepared to have their photo and fingerprints
electronically taken for ID purposes. Upon successful completion of a background check
through the FBI a badge will be issued. Contract employees shall wear their I.D. badge
at all times while on VA property. Contractor shall conform and comply with all
requirements of the VA’s Medical Centers Security Policies and Memorandum including
fingerprinting of all contractor employees. At the completion of work the Superintendent
shall collect and submit ID Badges to the COTR.
CONTRACTOR EMPLOYEES’ NOT WEARING VA I.D. BADGES
WILL BE ASKED TO LEAVE THE PREMISES.
1.33 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY
Contractor shall comply with Medical center’s policy on confined space entry. Contractor
shall perform all testing of confined spaces using a Licensed Professional Industrial
Hygienist and submit report of same to the resident engineer. Contractor shall provide all
safety, rescue and ventilation equipment required by medical center policy. Same shall be
fully set and operational prior to confined space entry. All contract employees involved in
130
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
confined space operations shall provide proof of successful completion of federally
approved confined space entry safety training to resident engineer.
1.34 ACCESS INTO KEYED AREAS
A. The Medical Center, by necessity, is a secured facility. Authorized access to
certain areas is available only through locked doors.
B. Contractors shall coordinate through the COTR for access into locked areas.
1.35 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING/EQUIPMENT
A. All contract workers will wear and/or use the protective clothing and gear (hard hats,
goggles, protective shoes, gloves, masks or breathing apparatus, etc.) required by OSHA or
Union requirements in the performance of the work being undertaken. The Contractor shall
provide any protective equipment as required.
1.36 FEDERAL POLICE
A. The Medical Center Police are Federal Police Officers with full authority to make
arrests, investigate crime, and to issue citations. Citations issued for driving, parking violations
or other offenses usually require an appearance in the Federal District Court and/or payment of a
fine. For the safety of patients, employees and visitors, speed limits and other driving and
parking codes are strictly enforced
1.37 LOST AND FOUND
A. Any article or money found on the premises should be delivered immediately to the
Medical Center Police for safekeeping.
1.38 REMOVAL OF GOVERNMENT PROPERTY
A. Removal of Government property from the Medical Center is strictly prohibited.
Contractors or vendors taking Government equipment or property off station are required
to furnish the COTR with a receipt for such equipment.
131
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.39 SEXUAL HARASSMENT
A. Sexual harassment is strictly prohibited. This includes deliberate or unsolicited
verbal comments or gestures of a sexual nature, unwelcome sexual advances, requests for
sexual favors and/or other unwelcome verbal or physical conduct of a sexual nature. All
reported incidents of harassment will be thoroughly investigated by Medical Center
Police and appropriate action taken.
1.40 DRUGS AND ALCOHOL
A. Possession or use of illegal drugs and alcohol is strictly prohibited. All reported
incidents of possession or use of illegal drugs or alcohol will be thoroughly investigated by
Medical Center Police and appropriate action pursued.
1.41 FIREARMS AND EXPLOSIVES
A. Possession of firearms, ammunition, explosive devices and any hand held item that
may be considered an offensive weapon is strictly prohibited including carrying such
items in vehicles. All reported incidents of possession of such items will be thoroughly
investigated by Medical Center Police and appropriate action pursued.
1.42 INJURY ACCIDENTS
A. In case of injury report to the Medical Center Outpatient for immediate treatment and
stabilize for transfer by others. At FDR, Montrose Building 3 and at Castle Point
Building 15E.
B. COTR shall be notified immediately to complete VA documentation including
employee name, address, nature of injury, seriousness, and transfer location when
applicable.
1.43 RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
A. Medical Center recreational facilities (swimming pools, gyms, tennis courts, etc.) are
for use by registered Medical Center patients and staff only.
B. Contractor personnel are permitted to use the Canteen for lunch, breaks or purchase of
incidentals in the Retail Store.
132
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.44 DUST AND FUME CONTROL
A. Contractor personnel will be particularly careful not to operate any equipment or to
perform any fume or dust generating process near a building air intake system.
1.45 NOISE
A. Jack hammering, core drilling or other noisy or disturbing operations must be
scheduled and approved in writing by the COTR/Contracting Officer at least 48 hours
prior to commencing such work.
1.46 YEAR 2000 COMPLIANCE
A. All system software and control commands shall support output for reporting, control
and other system functions beyond January 1, 2000. The control system submittal
shall describe provisions being made to comply with this requirement.
B. This requirement applies to all building systems with clock functions like elevators,
security systems, fire alarm systems and other similar systems.
1.47 SUBMITTALS
A. Task/delivery orders requiring submittals will have specification 01 33 23 -01340,
Samples and Shop Drawings, included in the package given to the contractor.
1.48 CONTRACT WORK HOURS
A. Normal working hours are 8:00 am to 4:30 pm. Contractors who wish to work other
than “normal working hours” for work to be done during those hours must submit a written
request to the Contracting Officer for approval. The request must state that the Contractor is
requesting to work other than normal working hours at no additional expense to the Government.
Such requests shall be coordinated with the COTR and must be submitted to the CO two (2)
working days in advance.
B. The Contractor for certain aspects of work may be required to work off duty hours as
identified. ADD IN RESTRICTED WORK ITEMS. Noisy demolition work, work at building
entrances,
133
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.49 CONSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Must be on exterior of every entrance into the work area and be in accordance with
applicable standards.
1.50 SAFETY SIGN (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. Provide a Safety Sign where directed by Resident Engineer. Face of sign shall be 19
mm (3/4 inch) thick exterior grade plywood. Provide two 100 mm by 100 mm (four
by four inch) posts extending full height of sign and 900 mm (three feet) into ground.
Set bottom of sign level at 1200 mm (four feet) above ground.
B. Paint all surfaces of Safety Sign and posts with one prime coat and two coats of white
gloss paint. Letters and design shall be painted with gloss paint of colors noted.
C. Maintain sign and remove it when directed by Resident Engineer.
D. Detail Drawing Number 45 of safety sign showing required legend and other
characteristics of sign is attached hereto and is made a part of this specification. It is
found at the end of this package.
E. Post the number of accident free days on a daily basis.
1.51 CONSTRUCTION DIGITAL IMAGES (NOT APPLICABLE)
A. During the construction period through completion, furnish Department of Veterans
Affairs with 10 to 40 views of digital images, including one color print of each view
and one Compact Disc (CD) per visit containing those views taken on that visit.
Digital views shall be taken of exterior and/or interior as selected and directed by
Resident Engineer/COTR. Each view shall be taken with a professional grade camera
with minimum size of 6 megapixels (MP) and the images will be a minimum of 2272
x 1704 pixels for the 200x250mm (8x 10 inch) prints and 2592 x 1944 pixels for the
400x500 mm (16 x 20 inch) prints, as per these specifications:
134
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. Normally such images will be taken at monthly intervals. However, the Resident
Engineer/COTR may also direct the taking of special digital images at any time prior
to completion and acceptance of contract. If the number of trips to the site exceeds an
average of one per month of the contract performance period then an adjustment in
contract price will be made in accordance with clause entitled "CHANGES" (FAR
52.243-4 and VAAR 852.236-88) of Section 01001, GENERAL CONDITIONS.
2. In event a greater or lesser number of images than specified above are required by the
Resident Engineer, adjustment in contract price will be made in accordance with
clause entitled "CHANGES" (FAR 52.243-4 and VAAR 852.236-88) of Section
01001, GENERAL CONDITIONS.
B. Images shall be taken by a commercial photographer and must show distinctly, at as
large a scale as possible, all parts of work embraced in the picture.
C. Prints shall be made on 200 x 250 mm (8 by 10 inch) regular-weight matte archival
grade photographic paper and produced by a process with a minimum of 300 pixels
per inch (PPI). Prints must be printed using the commercial RA4 process (inkjet
prints will not be acceptable). Photographs shall have 200 x 200 mm (8 by 8 inch) full
picture print with no margin on three sides and a 50 mm (2 inches) margin on the
bottom for pre-typed self-adhesive identity label to be added by Resident Engineer. It
is required that the prints are professionally processed so the quality will meet or
exceed that of the same size print made with a film camera. Prints must be shipped
flat to the Resident Engineer:
E. Images on CD-ROM shall be recorded in JPEG format with a minimum of 24 bit
color and no reduction in actual picture size. Compressed size of the file shall be no
less than 80% or the original with no loss of information. File names shall contain the
date the image was taken, the Project number and a unique sequential identifier. The
CD-ROM shall also contain an index of all the images contained therein in either a
TXT or Microsoft Word format.
135
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
F. In case any set of prints are not submitted within five days of date established by
Resident Engineer for taking thereof, the Resident Engineer may have such
images/photographs taken and cost of same will be deducted from any money due to
the Contractor.
G. Interior Final Photos: After completion of all work in an area final interior photos will
be taken. The camera must allow the colors to be as close as possible to the actual
colors. For number and location of views, (
) shall be taken after final
completion of work. The images shall also be provided on a CD to the RE Office.
1.52 SCHEDULES FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
A. The following information shall be furnished as a minimum for each activity on the
initial bar graph
schedule:
Activity Description
Estimated Duration
Responsibility (Trade) and Manpower (Crew Size)
Planned Start and Completion Dates
Activity Cost
B. Updated Schedules and Updating Procedures
The contractor shall submit, at intervals 30 calendar days, an updated bar graph
schedule of the actual construction progress. The bar graph schedule shall show the
activities or portions of activities started and/or completed during the reporting period
and their updated monetary percentage value(s) as a basis for the contractor's monthly
progress report (payment request).
The contractor shall adjust the activity bars on the updated bar graph schedule to
reflect the actual progress and the remaining activity durations. The updated bar
graph schedule shall show at a minimum the following:
136
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Actual start and completion dates for activities started and/or completed during the
reporting period.
VA issued changes to the original contract requirements that change the contractor's
original sequence of work.
Contractor changes in work sequence, durations, responsibility, manpower, and activity
cost.
All Contract Change durations proposed by the contractor shall be reviewed and
approved by the Contracting Officer prior to insertion into the updated bar graph
scheduled. The updated bar graph schedule shall include all contract changes issued
during the reporting period. (A sample bar graph will be issued during the Notice to
Proceed reflecting the above information) .
In accordance with FAR clause 52.236-15, the Contracting Officer may withhold
approval of progress payments until the Contractor submits the required schedule.
END OF SECTION 01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01 32 16.15
PROJECT SCHEDULES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. The Contractor shall develop a Critical Path Method (CPM) plan and schedule
demonstrating fulfillment of the contract requirements (Project Schedule), and shall keep
the Project Schedule up-to-date in accordance with the requirements of this section and
137
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
shall utilize the plan for scheduling, coordinating and monitoring work under this
contract (including all activities of subcontractors, equipment vendors and suppliers).
Conventional Critical Path Method (CPM) technique shall be utilized to satisfy both time
and cost applications.
1.2 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE:
A. The Contractor shall designate an authorized representative responsible for the Project
Schedule including preparation, review and progress reporting with and to the
Contracting Officer's Representative (COTR).
B. The Contractor's representative shall have direct project control and complete authority to
act on behalf of the Contractor in fulfilling the requirements of this specification section.
C. The Contractor’s representative shall have the option of developing the project schedule
within their organization or to engage the services of an outside consultant. If an outside
scheduling consultant is utilized, Section 1.3 of this specification will apply.
1.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSULTANT:
A. The Contractor shall submit a qualification proposal to the COTR, within 10 days of bid
acceptance. The qualification proposal shall include:
1. The name and address of the proposed consultant.
2. Information to show that the proposed consultant has the qualifications to meet the
requirements specified in the preceding paragraph.
3. A representative sample of prior construction projects, which the proposed consultant
has performed complete project scheduling services. These representative samples
shall be of similar size and scope.
B. The Contracting Officer has the right to approve or disapprove the proposed consultant,
and will notify the Contractor of the VA decision within seven calendar days from receipt
of the qualification proposal. In case of disapproval, the Contractor shall resubmit another
consultant within 10 calendar days for renewed consideration. The Contractor shall have
their scheduling consultant approved prior to submitting any schedule for approval.
138
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.4 COMPUTER PRODUCED SCHEDULES
A. The contractor shall provide monthly, to the Department of Veterans Affairs (VA), all
computer-produced time/cost schedules and reports generated from monthly project
updates. This monthly computer service will include: three copies of up to five different
reports (inclusive of all pages) available within the user defined reports of the scheduling
software approved by the Contracting Officer; a hard copy listing of all project schedule
changes, and associated data, made at the update and an electronic file of this data; and
the resulting monthly updated schedule in PDM format. These must be submitted with
and substantively support the contractor’s monthly payment request and the signed look
ahead report. The COTR shall identify the five different report formats that the contractor
shall provide.
B. The contractor shall be responsible for the correctness and timeliness of the computerproduced reports. The Contractor shall also responsible for the accurate and timely
submittal of the updated project schedule and all CPM data necessary to produce the
computer reports and payment request that is specified.
C. The VA will report errors in computer-produced reports to the Contractor’s
representative within ten calendar days from receipt of reports. The Contractor shall
reprocess the computer-produced reports and associated diskette(s), when requested by
the Contracting Officer’s representative, to correct errors which affect the payment and
schedule for the project.
1.5 THE COMPLETE PROJECT SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL
A. Within 45 calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit
for the Contracting Officer's review; three blue line copies of the interim schedule on
sheets of paper 765 x 1070 mm (30 x 42 inches) and an electronic file in the previously
approved CPM schedule program. The submittal shall also include three copies of a
computer-produced activity/event ID schedule showing project duration; phase
completion dates; and other data, including event cost. Each activity/event on the
computer-produced schedule shall contain as a minimum, but not limited to,
activity/event ID, activity/event description, duration, budget amount, early start date,
early finish date, late start date, late finish date and total float. Work activity/event
139
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
relationships shall be restricted to finish-to-start or start-to-start without lead or lag
constraints. Activity/event date constraints, not required by the contract, will not be
accepted unless submitted to and approved by the Contracting Officer. The contractor
shall make a separate written detailed request to the Contracting Officer identifying these
date constraints and secure the Contracting Officer’s written approval before
incorporating them into the network diagram. The Contracting Officer’s separate
approval of the Project Schedule shall not excuse the contractor of this requirement.
Logic events (non-work) will be permitted where necessary to reflect proper logic among
work events, but must have zero duration. The complete working schedule shall reflect
the Contractor's approach to scheduling the complete project. The final Project Schedule
in its original form shall contain no contract changes or delays which may have been
incurred during the final schedule development period and shall reflect the Contractors as
bid schedule. These changes/delays shall be entered at the first update after the final
Project Schedule has been approved. The Contractor should provide their requests for
time and supporting time extension analysis for contract time as a result of contract
changes/delays, after this update, and in accordance with Article, ADJUSTMENT OF
CONTRACT COMPLETION.
D. Within 30 calendar days after receipt of the complete project interim Project Schedule
and the complete final Project Schedule, the Contracting Officer or his representative,
will do one or both of the following:
1. Notify the Contractor concerning his actions, opinions, and objections.
2. A meeting with the Contractor at or near the job site for joint review, correction or
adjustment of the proposed plan will be scheduled if required. Within 14 calendar
days after the joint review, the Contractor shall revise and shall submit three blue line
copies of the revised Project Schedule, three copies of the revised computer-produced
activity/event ID schedule and a revised electronic file as specified by the Contracting
Officer. The revised submission will be reviewed by the Contracting Officer and, if
found to be as previously agreed upon, will be approved.
E. The approved baseline schedule and the computer-produced schedule(s) generated there
from shall constitute the approved baseline schedule until subsequently revised in
accordance with the requirements of this section.
140
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
F. The Complete Project Schedule shall contain approximately ________work
activities/events.
1.6 WORK ACTIVITY/EVENT COST DATA
A. The Contractor shall cost load all work activities/events except procurement activities.
The cumulative amount of all cost loaded work activities/events (including alternates)
shall equal the total contract price. Prorate overhead, profit and general conditions on all
work activities/events for the entire project length. The contractor shall generate from this
information cash flow curves indicating graphically the total percentage of work
activity/event dollar value scheduled to be in place on early finish, late finish. These cash
flow curves will be used by the Contracting Officer to assist him in determining approval
or disapproval of the cost loading. Negative work activity/event cost data will not be
acceptable, except on VA issued contract changes.
B. The Contractor shall cost load work activities/events for guarantee period services, test,
balance and adjust various systems in accordance with the provisions in Article, FAR
52.232 – 5 (PAYMENT UNDER FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS) and
VAAR 852.236 – 83 (PAYMENT UNDER FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION
CONTRACTS).
C. In accordance with FAR 52.236 – 1 (PERFORMANCE OF WORK BY THE
CONTRACTOR) and VAAR 852.236 – 72 (PERFORMANCE OF WORK BY THE
CONTRACTOR), the Contractor shall submit, simultaneously with the cost per work
activity/event of the construction schedule required by this Section, a responsibility code
for all activities/events of the project for which the Contractor's forces will perform the
work.
D. The Contractor shall cost load work activities/events for all BID ITEMS including
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT. The sum of each BID ITEM work shall equal the value of
the bid item in the Contractors' bid.
1.7 PROJECT SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS
A. Show on the project schedule the sequence of work activities/events required for
complete performance of all items of work. The Contractor Shall:
141
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. Show activities/events as:
a. Contractor's time required for submittal of shop drawings, templates, fabrication,
delivery and similar pre-construction work.
b. Contracting Officer's and Architect-Engineer's review and approval of shop
drawings, equipment schedules, samples, template, or similar items.
c. Interruption of VA Facilities utilities, delivery of Government furnished
equipment, and rough-in drawings, project phasing and any other specification
requirements.
d. Test, balance and adjust various systems and pieces of equipment, maintenance
and operation manuals, instructions and preventive maintenance tasks.
e. VA inspection and acceptance activity/event with a minimum duration of five
work days at the end of each phase and immediately preceding any VA move
activity/event required by the contract phasing for that phase.
2. Show not only the activities/events for actual construction work for each trade
category of the project, but also trade relationships to indicate the movement of trades
from one area, floor, or building, to another area, floor, or building, for at least five
trades who are performing major work under this contract.
3. Break up the work into activities/events of a duration no longer than 20 work days
each or one reporting period, except as to non-construction activities/events (i.e.,
procurement of materials, delivery of equipment, concrete and asphalt curing) and
any other activities/events for which the COTR may approve the showing of a longer
duration. The duration for VA approval of any required submittal, shop drawing, or
other submittals will not be less than 20 work days.
4. Describe work activities/events clearly, so the work is readily identifiable for
assessment of completion. Activities/events labeled "start," "continue," or
"completion," are not specific and will not be allowed. Lead and lag time activities
will not be acceptable.
5. The schedule shall be generally numbered in such a way to reflect either discipline,
phase or location of the work.
B. The Contractor shall submit the following supporting data in addition to the project
schedule:
142
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. The appropriate project calendar including working days and holidays.
2. The planned number of shifts per day.
3. The number of hours per shift.
Failure of the Contractor to include this data shall delay the review of the submittal until
the Contracting Officer is in receipt of the missing data.
C. To the extent that the Project Schedule or any revised Project Schedule shows anything
not jointly agreed upon, it shall not be deemed to have been approved by the COTR.
Failure to include any element of work required for the performance of this contract shall
not excuse the Contractor from completing all work required within any applicable
completion date of each phase regardless of the COTR’s approval of the Project
Schedule.
D. Compact Disk Requirements and CPM Activity/Event Record Specifications: Submit to
the VA an electronic file(s) containing one file of the data required to produce a schedule,
reflecting all the activities/events of the complete project schedule being submitted.
1.8 PAYMENT TO THE CONTRACTOR:
A. Monthly, the contractor shall submit the AIA application and certificate for payment
documents G702 & G703 reflecting updated schedule activities and cost data in
accordance with the provisions of the following Article, PAYMENT AND PROGRESS
REPORTING, as the basis upon which progress payments will be made pursuant to
Article, FAR 52.232 – 5 (PAYMENT UNDER FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION
CONTRACTS) and VAAR 852.236 – 83 (PAYMENT UNDER FIXED-PRICE
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS). The Contractor shall be entitled to a monthly
progress payment upon approval of estimates as determined from the currently approved
updated project schedule. Monthly payment requests shall include: a listing of all agreed
upon project schedule changes and associated data; and an electronic file (s) of the
resulting monthly updated schedule.
B. Approval of the Contractor’s monthly Application for Payment shall be contingent,
among other factors, on the submittal of a satisfactory monthly update of the project
schedule.
143
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.9 PAYMENT AND PROGRESS REPORTING
A. Monthly schedule update meetings will be held on dates mutually agreed to by the COTR
and the Contractor. Contractor and their CPM consultant (if applicable) shall attend all
monthly schedule update meetings. The Contractor shall accurately update the Project
Schedule and all other data required and provide this information to the COTR three
work days in advance of the schedule update meeting. Job progress will be reviewed to
verify:
1. Actual start and/or finish dates for updated/completed activities/events.
2. Remaining duration for each activity/event started, or scheduled to start, but not
completed.
3. Logic, time and cost data for change orders, and supplemental agreements that are to
be incorporated into the Project Schedule.
4. Changes in activity/event sequence and/or duration which have been made, pursuant to
the provisions of following Article, ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT
COMPLETION.
5. Completion percentage for all completed and partially completed activities/events.
6. Logic and duration revisions required by this section of the specifications.
7. Activity/event duration and percent complete shall be updated independently.
B. After completion of the joint review, the contractor shall generate an updated computerproduced calendar-dated schedule and supply the Contracting Officer’s representative
with reports in accordance with the Article, COMPUTER PRODUCED SCHEDULES,
specified.
C. After completing the monthly schedule update, the contractor’s representative or
scheduling consultant shall rerun all current period contract change(s) against the prior
approved monthly project schedule. The analysis shall only include original workday
durations and schedule logic agreed upon by the contractor and resident engineer for the
contract change(s). When there is a disagreement on logic and/or durations, the
Contractor shall use the schedule logic and/or durations provided and approved by the
resident engineer. After each rerun update, the resulting electronic project schedule data
file shall be appropriately identified and submitted to the VA in accordance to the
requirements listed in articles 1.4 and 1.7. This electronic submission is separate from the
144
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
regular monthly project schedule update requirements and shall be submitted to the
resident engineer within fourteen (14) calendar days of completing the regular schedule
update. Before inserting the contract changes durations, care must be taken to
ensure that only the original durations will be used for the analysis, not the reported
durations after progress. In addition, once the final network diagram is approved,
the contractor must recreate all manual progress payment updates on this approved
network diagram and associated reruns for contract changes in each of these update
periods as outlined above for regular update periods. This will require detailed
record keeping for each of the manual progress payment updates.
D. Following approval of the CPM schedule, the VA, the General Contractor, its approved
CPM Consultant, RE office representatives, and all subcontractors needed, as determined
by the SRE, shall meet to discuss the monthly updated schedule. The main emphasis shall
be to address work activities to avoid slippage of project schedule and to identify any
necessary actions required to maintain project schedule during the reporting period. The
Government representatives and the Contractor should conclude the meeting with a clear
understanding of those work and administrative actions necessary to maintain project
schedule status during the reporting period. This schedule coordination meeting will
occur after each monthly project schedule update meeting utilizing the resulting schedule
reports from that schedule update. If the project is behind schedule, discussions should
include ways to prevent further slippage as well as ways to improve the project schedule
status, when appropriate.
1.10 RESPONSIBILITY FOR COMPLETION
A. If it becomes apparent from the current revised monthly progress schedule that phasing or
contract completion dates will not be met, the Contractor shall execute some or all of the
following remedial actions:
1. Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as necessary to
eliminate the backlog of work.
2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per working day, working days
per week, the amount of construction equipment, or any combination of the foregoing
to eliminate the backlog of work.
3. Reschedule the work in conformance with the specification requirements.
145
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Prior to proceeding with any of the above actions, the Contractor shall notify and obtain
approval from the COTR for the proposed schedule changes. If such actions are
approved, the representative schedule revisions shall be incorporated by the Contractor
into the Project Schedule before the next update, at no additional cost to the Government.
1.11 CHANGES TO THE SCHEDULE
A. Within 30 calendar days after VA acceptance and approval of any updated project
schedule, the Contractor shall submit a revised electronic file (s) and a list of any
activity/event changes including predecessors and successors for any of the following
reasons:
1. Delay in completion of any activity/event or group of activities/events, which may be
involved with contract changes, strikes, unusual weather, and other delays will not
relieve the Contractor from the requirements specified unless the conditions are
shown on the CPM as the direct cause for delaying the project beyond the acceptable
limits.
2. Delays in submittals, or deliveries, or work stoppage are encountered which make
rescheduling of the work necessary.
3. The schedule does not represent the actual prosecution and progress of the project.
4. When there is, or has been, a substantial revision to the activity/event costs regardless
of the cause for these revisions.
B. CPM revisions made under this paragraph which affect the previously approved
computer-produced schedules for Government furnished equipment, vacating of areas by
the VA Facility, contract phase(s) and sub phase(s), utilities furnished by the Government
to the Contractor, or any other previously contracted item, shall be furnished in writing to
the Contracting Officer for approval.
C. Contracting Officer's approval for the revised project schedule and all relevant data is
contingent upon compliance with all other paragraphs of this section and any other
previous agreements by the Contracting Officer or the VA representative.
D. The cost of revisions to the project schedule resulting from contract changes will be
included in the proposal for changes in work as specified in FAR 52.243 – 4 (Changes)
and VAAR 852.236 – 88 (Changes – Supplemental), and will be based on the complexity
146
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
of the revision or contract change, man hours expended in analyzing the change, and the
total cost of the change.
E. The cost of revisions to the Project Schedule not resulting from contract changes is the
responsibility of the Contractor.
1.12 ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT COMPLETION
A. The contract completion time will be adjusted only for causes specified in this contract.
Request for an extension of the contract completion date by the Contractor shall be
supported with a justification, CPM data and supporting evidence as the COTR may
deem necessary for determination as to whether or not the Contractor is entitled to an
extension of time under the provisions of the contract. Submission of proof based on
revised activity/event logic, durations (in work days) and costs is obligatory to any
approvals. The schedule must clearly display that the Contractor has used, in full, all the
float time available for the work involved in this request. The Contracting Officer's
determination as to the total number of days of contract extension will be based upon the
current computer-produced calendar-dated schedule for the time period in question and
all other relevant information.
B. Actual delays in activities/events which, according to the computer- produced
calendar-dated schedule, do not affect the extended and predicted contract completion
dates shown by the critical path in the network, will not be the basis for a change to the
contract completion date. The Contracting Officer will within a reasonable time after
receipt of such justification and supporting evidence, review the facts and advise the
Contractor in writing of the Contracting Officer's decision.
C. The Contractor shall submit each request for a change in the contract completion date to
the Contracting Officer in accordance with the provisions specified under FAR 52.243 –
4 (Changes) and VAAR 852.236 – 88 (Changes – Supplemental). The Contractor shall
include, as a part of each change order proposal, a sketch showing all CPM logic
revisions, duration (in work days) changes, and cost changes, for work in question and its
relationship to other activities on the approved network diagram.
D. All delays due to non-work activities/events such as RFI’s, WEATHER, STRIKES, and
similar non-work activities/events shall be analyzed on a month by month basis.
147
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
- - - E N D OF SECTION 01 32 16 15 PROJECT SCHEDULES- -
SECTION 01 33 23
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES
1-1.
Refer to Articles titled SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR CONSTRUCTION
(FAR 52.236-21) and, SPECIAL NOTES (VAAR 852.236-91), in GENERAL
CONDITIONS.
1-2.
For the purposes of this contract, samples (including laboratory samples to be tested), test
reports, certificates, and manufacturers' literature and data shall also be subject to the
148
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
previously referenced requirements. The following text refers to all items collectively as
SUBMITTALS.
1-3.
Submit for approval, all of the items specifically mentioned under the separate sections of
the specification, with information sufficient to evidence full compliance with contract
requirements. Materials, fabricated articles and the like to be installed in permanent work
shall equal those of approved submittals. After an item has been approved, no change in
brand or make will be permitted unless:
A. Satisfactory written evidence is presented to, and approved by Contracting Officer,
that manufacturer cannot make scheduled delivery of approved item or;
B. Item delivered has been rejected and substitution of a suitable item is an urgent
necessity or;
C. Other conditions become apparent which indicates approval of such substitute item to
be in best interest of the Government.
1-4.
Forward submittals in sufficient time to permit proper consideration and approval action
by Government. Time submission to assure adequate lead time for procurement of
contract - required items. Delays attributable to untimely and rejected submittals
(including any laboratory samples to be tested) will not serve as a basis for extending
contract time for completion.
1-5.
Submittals will be reviewed for compliance with contract requirements by
Architect-Engineer, and action thereon will be taken by Resident Engineer on behalf of
the Contracting Officer.
1-6.
Upon receipt of submittals, Architect-Engineer will assign a file number thereto.
Contractor, in any subsequent correspondence, shall refer to this file and identification
number to expedite replies relative to previously approved or disapproved submittals.
1-7.
The Government reserves the right to require additional submittals, whether or not
particularly mentioned in this contract. If additional submittals beyond those required by
the contract are furnished pursuant to request therefor by Contracting Officer, adjustment
in contract price and time will be made in accordance with Articles titled CHANGES
(FAR 52.243-4) and CHANGES - SUPPLEMENT (VAAR 852.236-88) of the
GENERAL CONDITIONS.
149
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1-8.
Schedules called for in specifications and shown on shop drawings shall be submitted for
use and information of Department of Veterans Affairs and Architect-Engineer.
However, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for coordinating and verifying
schedules. The Contracting Officer and Architect- Engineer assumes no responsibility for
checking schedules or layout drawings for exact sizes, exact numbers and detailed
positioning of items.
1-9.
Submittals must be submitted by Contractor only and shipped prepaid. Contracting
Officer assumes no responsibility for checking quantities or exact numbers included in
such submittals.
A. Submit samples for finishes required by various Sections in quadruplicate. Submit
other samples in single units unless otherwise specified. Submit shop drawings,
schedules, manufacturers' literature and data, and certificates in quadruplicate, except
where a greater number is specified.
B. Submittals will receive consideration only when covered by a transmittal letter signed
by Contractor. Letter shall be sent via first class mail and shall contain the list of
items, name of Medical Center , name of Contractor, contract number, applicable
specification paragraph numbers, applicable drawing numbers (and other information
required for exact identification of location for each item), manufacturer and brand,
ASTM or Federal Specification Number (if any) and such additional information as
may be required by specifications for particular item being furnished. In addition,
catalogs shall be marked to indicate specific items submitted for approval.
1. A copy of letter must be enclosed with items, and any items received without
identification letter will be considered "unclaimed goods" and held for a limited
time only.
2. Each sample, certificate, manufacturers' literature and data shall be labeled to
indicate the name and location of the Medical Center , name of Contractor,
manufacturer, brand, contract number and ASTM or Federal Specification
Number as applicable and location(s) on project.
3. Required certificates shall be signed by an authorized representative of
manufacturer or supplier of material, and by Contractor.
150
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C. In addition to complying with the applicable requirements specified in preceding
Article 1.9, samples which are required to have Laboratory Tests (those preceded by
symbol "LT" under the separate sections of the specification shall be tested, at the
expense of Contractor, in a commercial laboratory approved by Contracting Officer.
1. Laboratory shall furnish Contracting Officer with a certificate stating that it is
fully equipped and qualified to perform intended work, is fully acquainted with
specification requirements and intended use of materials and is an independent
establishment in no way connected with organization of Contractor or with
manufacturer or supplier of materials to be tested.
2. Certificates shall also set forth a list of comparable projects upon which
laboratory has performed similar functions during past five years.
3. Samples and laboratory tests shall be sent directly to approved commercial testing
laboratory.
4. Contractor shall send a copy of transmittal letter to both Resident Engineer and to
Architect-Engineer simultaneously with submission of material to a commercial
testing laboratory.
5. Laboratory test reports shall be sent directly to Resident Engineer for appropriate
action.
6. Laboratory reports shall list contract specification test requirements and a
comparative list of the laboratory test results. When tests show that the material
meets specification requirements, the laboratory shall so certify on test report.
7. Laboratory test reports shall also include a recommendation for approval or
disapproval of tested item.
D. If submittal samples have been disapproved, resubmit new samples as soon as possible
after notification of disapproval. Such new samples shall be marked "Resubmitted
Sample" in addition to containing other previously specified information required on
label and in transmittal letter.
E. Approved samples will be kept on file by the Resident Engineer at the site until
completion of contract, at which time such samples will be delivered to Contractor as
Contractor's property. Where noted in technical sections of specifications, approved
samples in good condition may be used in their proper locations in contract work. At
151
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
completion of contract, samples that are not approved will be returned to Contractor
only upon request and at Contractor's expense. Such request should be made prior to
completion of the contract. Disapproved samples that are not requested for return by
Contractor will be discarded after completion of contract.
F. Submittal drawings (shop, erection or setting drawings) and schedules, required for
work of various trades, shall be checked before submission by technically qualified
employees of Contractor for accuracy, completeness and compliance with contract
requirements. These drawings and schedules shall be stamped and signed by
Contractor certifying to such check.
1. For each drawing required, submit one legible photographic paper or vellum
reproducible.
2. Reproducible shall be full size.
3. Each drawing shall have marked thereon, proper descriptive title, including
Medical Center location, project number, manufacturer's number, reference to
contract drawing number, detail Section Number, and Specification Section
Number.
4. A space 120 mm by 125 mm (4-3/4 by 5 inches) shall be reserved on each
drawing to accommodate approval or disapproval stamp.
5. Submit drawings, ROLLED WITHIN A MAILING TUBE, fully protected for
shipment.
6. One reproducible print of approved or disapproved shop drawings will be
forwarded to Contractor.
7. When work is directly related and involves more than one trade, shop drawings
shall be submitted to Architect-Engineer under one cover.
1-10. Samples (except laboratory samples), shop drawings, test reports, certificates and
manufacturers' literature and data, shall be submitted for approval to:
Array Healthcare Facilities Solutions
60 Madison Avenue
New York, New York 10010
1-11. At the time of transmittal to the Architect-Engineer, the Contractor shall also send a copy
of the complete submittal directly to the Resident Engineer,
152
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
VA Medical Center,
100 Route 9D,
Mail Stop 138 (Engineering)
Castle Point, New York 12511
- - - E N D of SECTION 01 33 23 SHOP DRAWINGS SAMPLES- - -
SECTION 01 42 19
REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the availability and source of references and standards specified in
the project manual under paragraphs APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS and/or shown on
the drawings.
153
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.2 AVAILABILITY OF SPECIFICATIONS LISTED IN THE GSA INDEX OF
FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS AND COMMERCIAL ITEM
DESCRIPTIONS FPMR PART 101-29 (FAR 52.211-1) (AUG 1998)
A. The GSA Index of Federal Specifications, Standards and Commercial Item Descriptions,
FPMR Part 101-29 and copies of specifications, standards, and commercial item
descriptions cited in the solicitation may be obtained for a fee by submitting a request to
– GSA Federal Supply Service, Specifications Section, Suite 8100, 470 East L’Enfant
Plaza, SW, Washington, DC 20407, Telephone (202) 619-8925, Facsimile (202) 6198978.
B. If the General Services Administration, Department of Agriculture, or Department of
Veterans Affairs issued this solicitation, a single copy of specifications, standards, and
commercial item descriptions cited in this solicitation may be obtained free of charge by
submitting a request to the addressee in paragraph (a) of this provision. Additional copies
will be issued for a fee.
1.3 AVAILABILITY FOR EXAMINATION OF SPECIFICATIONS NOT LISTED IN
THE GSA INDEX OF FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS AND
COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (FAR 52.211-4) (JUN 1988)
The specifications and standards cited in this solicitation can be examined at the
following location:
DEPARMENT OF VETERANS AFFAIRS
Office of Construction & Facilities Management
Facilities Quality Service (00CFM1A)
811 Vermont Avenue, NW - Room 462
Washington, DC 20420
Telephone Numbers: (202) 461-8217 or (202) 461-8292
Between 9:00 AM - 3:00 PM
1.4 AVAILABILITY OF SPECIFICATIONS NOT LISTED IN THE GSA INDEX OF
FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS AND COMMERCIAL ITEM
DESCRIPTIONS (FAR 52.211-3) (JUN 1988)
The specifications cited in this solicitation may be obtained from the associations or
organizations listed below.
AA
Aluminum Association Inc.
http://www.aluminum.org
154
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
AABC
Associated Air Balance Council
http://www.aabchq.com
AAMA
American Architectural Manufacturer's Association
http://www.aamanet.org
AAN
American Nursery and Landscape Association
http://www.anla.org
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
http://www.aashto.org
AATCC
American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists
http://www.aatcc.org
ACGIH
American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists
http://www.acgih.org
ACI
American Concrete Institute
http://www.aci-int.net
ACPA
American Concrete Pipe Association
http://www.concrete-pipe.org
ACPPA
American Concrete Pressure Pipe Association
http://www.acppa.org
ADC
Air Diffusion Council
http://flexibleduct.org
AGA
American Gas Association
http://www.aga.org
AGC
Associated General Contractors of America
http://www.agc.org
AGMA
American Gear Manufacturers Association, Inc.
http://www.agma.org
AHAM
Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers
http://www.aham.org
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
http://www.aisc.org
155
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
http://www.steel.org
AITC
American Institute of Timber Construction
http://www.aitc-glulam.org
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association, Inc.
http://www.amca.org
ANLA
American Nursery & Landscape Association
http://www.anla.org
ANSI
American National Standards Institute, Inc.
http://www.ansi.org
APA
The Engineered Wood Association
http://www.apawood.org
ARI
Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
http://www.ari.org
ASAE
American Society of Agricultural Engineers
http://www.asae.org
ASCE
American Society of Civil Engineers
http://www.asce.org
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and
Air-Conditioning Engineers
http://www.ashrae.org
ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
http://www.asme.org
ASSE
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
http://www.asse-plumbing.org
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
http://www.astm.org
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute
http://www.awinet.org
AWS
American Welding Society
http://www.aws.org
156
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
AWWA
American Water Works Association
http://www.awwa.org
BHMA
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
http://www.buildershardware.com
BIA
Brick Institute of America
http://www.bia.org
CAGI
Compressed Air and Gas Institute
http://www.cagi.org
CGA
Compressed Gas Association, Inc.
http://www.cganet.com
CI
The Chlorine Institute, Inc.
http://www.chlorineinstitute.org
CISCA
Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association
http://www.cisca.org
CISPI
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
http://www.cispi.org
CLFMI
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
http://www.chainlinkinfo.org
CPMB
Concrete Plant Manufacturers Bureau
http://www.cpmb.org
CRA
California Redwood Association
http://www.calredwood.org
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
http://www.crsi.org
CTI
Cooling Technology Institute
http://www.cti.org
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute
http://www.dhi.org
EGSA
Electrical Generating Systems Association
http://www.egsa.org
157
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
EEI
Edison Electric Institute
http://www.eei.org
EPA
Environmental Protection Agency
http://www.epa.gov
ETL
ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc.
http://www.et1.com
FAA
Federal Aviation Administration
http://www.faa.gov
FCC
Federal Communications Commission
http://www.fcc.gov
FPS
The Forest Products Society
http://www.forestprod.org
GANA
Glass Association of North America
http://www.cssinfo.com/info/gana.html/
FM
Factory Mutual Insurance
http://www.fmglobal.com
GA
Gypsum Association
http://www.gypsum.org
GSA
General Services Administration
http://www.gsa.gov
HI
Hydraulic Institute
http://www.pumps.org
HPVA
Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
http://www.hpva.org
ICBO
International Conference of Building Officials
http://www.icbo.org
ICEA
Insulated Cable Engineers Association Inc.
http://www.icea.net
\ICAC
Institute of Clean Air Companies
http://www.icac.com
158
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
http://www.ieee.org\
IMSA
International Municipal Signal Association
http://www.imsasafety.org
IPCEA
Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association
NBMA
Metal Buildings Manufacturers Association
http://www.mbma.com
MSS
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
http://www.mss-hq.com
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
http://www.naamm.org
NAPHCC Plumbing-Heating-Cooling Contractors Association
http://www.phccweb.org.org
NBS
National Bureau of Standards
See - NIST
NBBPVI National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors
http://www.nationboard.org
NEC
National Electric Code
See - NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
http://www.nema.org
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
http://www.nfpa.org
NHLA
National Hardwood Lumber Association
http://www.natlhardwood.org
NIH
National Institute of Health
http://www.nih.gov
NIST
National Institute of Standards and Technology
http://www.nist.gov
NLMA
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association, Inc.
http://www.nelma.org
159
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
NPA
National Particleboard Association
18928 Premiere Court
Gaithersburg, MD 20879
(301) 670-0604
NSF
National Sanitation Foundation
http://www.nsf.org
NWWDA Window and Door Manufacturers Association
http://www.nwwda.org
OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Department of Labor
http://www.osha.gov
PCA
Portland Cement Association
http://www.portcement.org
PCI
Precast Prestressed Concrete Institute
http://www.pci.org
PPI The Plastic Pipe Institute
http://www.plasticpipe.org
PEI
Porcelain Enamel Institute, Inc.
http://www.porcelainenamel.com
PTI
Post-Tensioning Institute
http://www.post-tensioning.org
RFCI
The Resilient Floor Covering Institute
http://www.rfci.com
RIS
Redwood Inspection Service
See - CRA
RMA
Rubber Manufacturers Association, Inc.
http://www.rma.org
SCMA
Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association
http://www.cypressinfo.org
SDI
Steel Door Institute
http://www.steeldoor.org
160
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
IGMA
Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance
http://www.igmaonline.org
SJI Steel Joist Institute
http://www.steeljoist.org
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors
National Association, Inc.
http://www.smacna.org
SSPC
The Society for Protective Coatings
http://www.sspc.org
STI
Steel Tank Institute
http://www.steeltank.com
SWI
Steel Window Institute
http://www.steelwindows.com
TCA
Tile Council of America, Inc.
http://www.tileusa.com
TEMA
Tubular Exchange Manufacturers Association
http://www.tema.org
TPI
Truss Plate Institute, Inc.
583 D'Onofrio Drive; Suite 200
Madison, WI 53719
(608) 833-5900
UBC
The Uniform Building Code
See ICBO
UL
Underwriters' Laboratories Incorporated
http://www.ul.com
ULC
Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada
http://www.ulc.ca
WCLIB
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
6980 SW Varns Road, P.O. Box 23145
Portland, OR 97223
(503) 639-0651
161
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
WRCLA Western Red Cedar Lumber Association
P.O. Box 120786
New Brighton, MN 55112
(612) 633-4334
WWPA
Western Wood Products Association
http://www.wwpa.org
- - - E N D OF SECTION 01 42 19 REFERENCE STANDARDS- - -
SECTION 01 57 19
TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
EP-1. DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the control of environmental pollution and damage that the
Contractor must consider for air, water, and land resources. It includes management of
visual aesthetics, noise, solid waste, radiant energy, and radioactive materials, as well as
162
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
other pollutants and resources encountered or generated by the Contractor. The
Contractor is obligated to consider specified control measures with the costs included
within the various contract items of work.
B. Environmental pollution and damage is defined as the presence of chemical, physical, or
biological elements or agents which:
1. Adversely effect human health or welfare,
2. Unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human life,
3. Effect other species of importance to humankind, or;
4. Degrade the utility of the environment for aesthetic, cultural, and historical purposes.
C. Definitions of Pollutants:
1. Chemical Waste: Petroleum products, bituminous materials, salts, acids, alkalis,
herbicides, pesticides, organic chemicals, and inorganic wastes.
2. Debris: Combustible and noncombustible wastes, such as leaves, tree trimmings,
ashes, and waste materials resulting from construction or maintenance and repair
work.
3. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by runoff water.
4. Solid Waste: Rubbish, debris, garbage, and other discarded solid materials resulting
from industrial, commercial, and agricultural operations and from community
activities.
5. Surface Discharge: The term "Surface Discharge" implies that the water is discharged
with possible sheeting action and subsequent soil erosion may occur. Waters that are
surface discharged may terminate in drainage ditches, storm sewers, creeks, and/or
"water of the United States" and would require a permit to discharge water from the
governing agency.
6. Rubbish: Combustible and noncombustible wastes such as paper, boxes, glass and
crockery, metal and lumber scrap, tin cans, and bones.
163
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
7. Sanitary Wastes:
a. Sewage: Domestic sanitary sewage and human and animal waste.
b. Garbage: Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking, dispensing, and
consumption of food.
EP-2. QUALITY CONTROL
A. Establish and maintain quality control for the environmental protection of all items set
forth herein.
B. Record on daily reports any problems in complying with laws, regulations, and
ordinances. Note any corrective action taken.
EP-3. REFERENCES
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
B. U.S. National Archives and Records Administration (NARA):
33 CFR 328 ............................Definitions
EP-4. SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section, 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES, furnish the following:
1. Environmental Protection Plan: After the contract is awarded and prior to the
commencement of the work, the Contractor shall meet with the Resident Engineer to
discuss the proposed Environmental Protection Plan and to develop mutual
understanding relative to details of environmental protection. Not more than 20 days
after the meeting, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Resident Engineer //
and the Contracting Officer // for approval, a written and/or graphic Environmental
Protection Plan including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Name(s) of person(s) within the Contractor's organization who is (are) responsible
for ensuring adherence to the Environmental Protection Plan.
b. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for manifesting hazardous
waste to be removed from the site.
C. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for training the Contractor's
environmental protection personnel.
164
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
d. Description of the Contractor's environmental protection personnel training
program.
e. A list of Federal, State, and local laws, regulations, and permits concerning
environmental protection, pollution control, noise control and abatement that are
applicable to the Contractor's proposed operations and the requirements imposed
by those laws, regulations, and permits.
f. Methods for protection of features to be preserved within authorized work areas
including trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, ground cover, landscape features, air and
water quality, fish and wildlife, soil, historical, and archeological and cultural
resources.
g. Procedures to provide the environmental protection that comply with the
applicable laws and regulations. Describe the procedures to correct pollution of
the environment due to accident, natural causes, or failure to follow the
procedures as described in the Environmental Protection Plan.
h. Permits, licenses, and the location of the solid waste disposal area.
i. Drawings showing locations of any proposed temporary excavations or
embankments for haul roads, // stream crossings, // material storage areas,
structures, sanitary facilities, and stockpiles of excess or spoil materials. Include
as part of an Erosion Control Plan approved by the District Office of the U.S. Soil
Conservation Service and the Department of Veterans Affairs.
j. Environmental Monitoring Plans for the job site including land, water, air, and
noise.
k. Work Area Plan showing the proposed activity in each portion of the area and
identifying the areas of limited use or nonuse. Plan should include measures for
marking the limits of use areas. This plan may be incorporated within the Erosion
Control Plan.
B. Approval of the Contractor's Environmental Protection Plan will not relieve the
Contractor of responsibility for adequate and continued control of pollutants and other
environmental protection measures.
165
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
EP-5. PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES
A. Protect environmental resources within the project boundaries and those affected outside
the limits of permanent work during the entire period of this contract. Confine activities
to areas defined by the specifications and drawings.
B. Protection of Land Resources: Prior to construction, identify all land resources to be
preserved within the work area. Do not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy land
resources including trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, top soil, and land forms without
permission from the Resident Engineer. Do not fasten or attach ropes, cables, or guys to
trees for anchorage unless specifically authorized, or where special emergency use is
permitted.
1. Work Area Limits: Prior to any construction, mark the areas that require work to be
performed under this contract. Mark or fence isolated areas within the general work
area that are to be saved and protected. Protect monuments, works of art, and markers
before construction operations begin. Convey to all personnel the purpose of marking
and protecting all necessary objects.
9. Handle and dispose of solid wastes in such a manner that will prevent contamination
of the environment. Place solid wastes (excluding clearing debris) in containers that
are emptied on a regular schedule. Transport all solid waste off Government property
and dispose of waste in compliance with Federal, State, and local requirements.
10. Store chemical waste away from the work areas in corrosion resistant containers and
dispose of waste in accordance with Federal, State, and local regulations.
11. Handle discarded materials other than those included in the solid waste category as
directed by the Resident Engineer.
C. Protection of Water Resources: Keep construction activities under surveillance,
management, and control to avoid pollution of surface and ground waters and sewer
systems. Implement management techniques to control water pollution by the listed
construction activities that are included in this contract.
1. Washing and Curing Water: Do not allow wastewater directly derived from
construction activities to enter water areas. Collect and place wastewater in retention
ponds allowing the suspended material to settle, the pollutants to separate, or the
water to evaporate.
166
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Control movement of materials and equipment at stream crossings during
construction to prevent violation of water pollution control standards of the Federal,
State, or local government.
3. Monitor water areas affected by construction.
E. Protection of Air Resources: Keep construction activities under surveillance,
management, and control to minimize pollution of air resources. Burning is not permitted
on the job site. Keep activities, equipment, processes, and work operated or performed, in
strict accordance with the State of New York and Federal emission and performance laws
and standards. Maintain ambient air quality standards set by the Environmental
Protection Agency, for those construction operations and activities specified.
1. Particulates: Control dust particles, aerosols, and gaseous by-products from all
construction activities, processing, and preparation of materials (such as from
asphaltic batch plants) at all times, including weekends, holidays, and hours when
work is not in progress.
2. Particulates Control: Maintain all excavations, stockpiles, haul roads, permanent and
temporary access roads, plant sites, spoil areas, borrow areas, and all other work areas
within or outside the project boundaries free from particulates which would cause a
hazard or a nuisance. Sprinklering, chemical treatment of an approved type, light
bituminous treatment, baghouse, scrubbers, electrostatic precipitators, or other
methods are permitted to control particulates in the work area.
3. Hydrocarbons and Carbon Monoxide: Control monoxide emissions from equipment
to Federal and State allowable limits.
4. Odors: Control odors of construction activities and prevent obnoxious odors from
occurring.
F. Reduction of Noise: Minimize noise using every action possible. Perform noiseproducing work in less sensitive hours of the day or week as directed by the Resident
Engineer. Maintain noise-produced work at or below the decibel levels and within the
time periods specified.
1. Perform construction activities involving repetitive, high-level impact noise only
between 8:00 a.m. and 6:00p.m unless otherwise permitted by local ordinance or the
167
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Resident Engineer. Repetitive impact noise on the property shall not exceed the
following dB limitations:
Time Duration of Impact Noise
Sound Level in dB
More than 12 minutes in any hour
70
Less than 30 seconds of any hour
85
Less than three minutes of any hour
80
Less than 12 minutes of any hour
75
2. Provide sound-deadening devices on equipment and take noise abatement measures
that are necessary to comply with the requirements of this contract, consisting of, but
not limited to, the following:
a. Maintain maximum permissible construction equipment noise levels at 15 m (50
feet) (dBA):
EARTHMOVING
MATERIALS HANDLING
FRONT
LOADERS
75
CONCRETE MIXERS
75
BACKHOES
75
CONCRETE PUMPS
75
DOZERS
75
CRANES
75
TRACTORS
75
DERRICKS IMPACT
75
SCAPERS
80
PILE DRIVERS
95
GRADERS
75
JACK HAMMERS
75
TRUCKS
75
ROCK DRILLS
80
PAVERS,
STATIONARY
80
PNEUMATIC TOOLS
80
PUMPS
75
BLASTING
//--//
GENERATORS
75
SAWS
75
COMPRESSOR
S
75
VIBRATORS
75
b. Use shields or other physical barriers to restrict noise transmission.
c. Provide soundproof housings or enclosures for noise-producing machinery.
d. Use efficient silencers on equipment air intakes.
168
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
e. Use efficient intake and exhaust mufflers on internal combustion engines that are
maintained so equipment performs below noise levels specified.
f. Line hoppers and storage bins with sound deadening material.
g. Conduct truck loading, unloading, and hauling operations so that noise is kept to a
minimum.
3. Measure sound level for noise exposure due to the construction at least once every
five successive working days while work is being performed above 55 dB(A) noise
level. Measure noise exposure at the property line or 15 m (50 feet) from the noise
source, whichever is greater. Measure the sound levels on the A weighing network of
a General Purpose sound level meter at slow response. To minimize the effect of
reflective sound waves at buildings, take measurements at 900 to 1800 mm (three to
six feet) in front of any building face. Submit the recorded information to the
Resident Engineer noting any problems and the alternatives for mitigating actions.
G. Restoration of Damaged Property: If any direct or indirect damage is done to public or
private property resulting from any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct, the Contractor
shall restore the damaged property to a condition equal to that existing before the damage
at no additional cost to the Government. Repair, rebuild, or restore property as directed or
make good such damage in an acceptable manner.
H. Final Clean-up: On completion of project and after removal of all debris, rubbish, and
temporary construction, Contractor shall leave the construction area in a clean condition
satisfactory to the Resident Engineer. Cleaning shall include off the station disposal of all
items and materials not required to be salvaged, as well as all debris and rubbish resulting
from demolition and new work operations.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 01 57 19 TEMP ENV CONTROLS- - -
169
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 01 58 16
INTERIOR SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL TEMPORARY
DESCRIPTION
This section specifies temporary interior signs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPORARY SIGNS
A. Fabricate from 50 Kg (110 pound) mat finish white paper.
B. Cut to 100 mm (4-inch) wide by 300 mm (12 inch) long size tag.
C. Punch 3 mm (1/8-inch) diameter hole centered on 100 mm (4-inch) dimension of tag.
Edge of Hole spaced approximately 13 mm (1/2-inch) from one end on tag.
D. Reinforce hole on both sides with gummed cloth washer or other suitable material
capable of preventing tie pulling through paper edge.
E. Ties: Steel wire 0.3 mm (0.0120-inch) thick, attach to tag with twist tie, leaving 150 mm
(6-inch) long free ends.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install temporary signs attached to room door frame or room door knob, lever, or pull for
doors on corridor openings.
B. Mark on signs with felt tip marker having approximately 3 mm (1/8-inch) wide stroke for
clearly legible numbers or letters.
C. Identify room with numbers as designated on floor plans.
3.2 LOCATION
A. Install on doors that have room, corridor, and space numbers shown.
B. Doors that do not require signs are as follows:
1. Corridor barrier doors (cross-corridor) in corridor with same number.
2. Folding doors or partitions.
3. Toilet or bathroom doors within and between rooms.
4. Communicating doors in partitions between rooms with corridor entrance doors.
5. Closet doors within rooms.
C. Replace missing, damaged, or illegible signs.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 01 58 16 TEMPORARY INTERIOR SIGNAGE- - 170
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 01 74 19
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the requirements for the management of non-hazardous building
construction and demolition waste.
B. Waste disposal in landfills shall be minimized to the greatest extent possible. Of the
inevitable waste that is generated, as much of the waste material as economically feasible
shall be salvaged, recycled or reused.
C. Contractor shall use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste
from landfills and incinerators, and facilitate their salvage and recycle not limited to the
following:
1. Waste Management Plan development and implementation.
2. Techniques to minimize waste generation.
3. Sorting and separating of waste materials.
4. Salvage of existing materials and items for reuse or resale.
5. Recycling of materials that cannot be reused or sold.
D. At a minimum the following waste categories shall be diverted from landfills:
1. Soil.
2. Inerts (eg, concrete, masonry and asphalt).
3. Clean dimensional wood and palette wood.
4. Green waste (biodegradable landscaping materials).
5. Engineered wood products (plywood, particle board and I-joists, etc).
6. Metal products (eg, steel, wire, beverage containers, etc).
7. Cardboard, paper and packaging.
8. Bitumen roofing materials.
9. Plastics (eg, ABS, PVC).
10. Carpet and/or pad.
11. Gypsum board.
12. Insulation.
13. Paint.
171
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02 41 00, DEMOLITION.
B. Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor shall practice efficient waste management when sizing, cutting and installing
building products. Processes shall be employed to ensure the generation of as little waste
as possible. Construction /Demolition waste includes products of the following:
1. Excess or unusable construction materials.
2. Packaging used for construction products.
3. Poor planning and/or layout.
4. Construction error.
5. Over ordering.
6. Weather damage.
7. Contamination.
8. Mishandling.
9. Breakage.
B. Establish and maintain the management of non-hazardous building construction and
demolition waste set forth herein. Conduct a site assessment to estimate the types of
materials that will be generated by demolition and construction.
C. Contractor shall develop and implement procedures to reuse and recycle new materials to
a minimum of 50 percent.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for implementation of any special programs involving
rebates or similar incentives related to recycling. Any revenues or savings obtained from
salvage or recycling shall accrue to the contractor.
E. Contractor shall provide all demolition, removal and legal disposal of materials.
Contractor shall ensure that facilities used for recycling, reuse and disposal shall be
permitted for the intended use to the extent required by local, state, federal regulations.
The Whole Building Design Guide website http://www.wbdg.org provides a Construction
Waste Management Database that contains information on companies that haul. Collect,
and process recyclable debris from construction projects.
172
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
F. Contractor shall assign a specific area to facilitate separation of materials for reuse,
salvage, recycling, and return. Such areas are to be kept neat and clean and clearly
marked in order to avoid contamination or mixing of materials.
G. Contractor shall provide on-site instructions and supervision of separation, handling,
salvaging, recycling, reuse and return methods to be used by all parties during waste
generating stages.
H. Record on daily reports any problems in complying with laws, regulations and ordinances
with corrective action taken.
1.4 TERMINOLOGY
A. Class III Landfill: A landfill that accepts non-hazardous resources such as household,
commercial and industrial waste resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and
demolition operations.
B. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; uncontaminated with adhesives, oils, solvents, mastics
and like products.
C. Construction and Demolition Waste: Includes all non-hazardous resources resulting from
construction, remodeling, alterations, repair and demolition operations.
D. Dismantle: The process of parting out a building in such a way as to preserve the
usefulness of its materials and components.
E. Disposal: Acceptance of solid wastes at a legally operating facility for the purpose of land
filling (includes Class III landfills and inert fills).
F. Inert Backfill Site: A location, other than inert fill or other disposal facility, to which inert
materials are taken for the purpose of filling an excavation, shoring or other soil
engineering operation.
G. Inert Fill: A facility that can legally accept inert waste, such as asphalt and concrete
exclusively for the purpose of disposal.
H. Inert Solids/Inert Waste: Non-liquid solid resources including, but not limited to, soil and
concrete that does not contain hazardous waste or soluble pollutants at concentrations in
excess of water-quality objectives established by a regional water board, and does not
contain significant quantities of decomposable solid resources.
I. Mixed Debris: Loads that include commingled recyclable and non-recyclable materials
generated at the construction site.
173
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
J. Mixed Debris Recycling Facility: A solid resource processing facility that accepts loads
of mixed construction and demolition debris for the purpose of recovering re-usable and
recyclable materials and disposing non-recyclable materials.
K. Permitted Waste Hauler: A company that holds a valid permit to collect and transport
solid wastes from individuals or businesses for the purpose of recycling or disposal.
L. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating, and reconstituting materials for the
purpose of using the altered form in the manufacture of a new product. Recycling does
not include burning, incinerating or thermally destroying solid waste.
1. On-site Recycling – Materials that are sorted and processed on site for use in an
altered state in the work, i.e. concrete crushed for use as a sub-base in paving.
2. Off-site Recycling – Materials hauled to a location and used in an altered form in the
manufacture of new products.
M. Recycling Facility: An operation that can legally accept materials for the purpose of
processing the materials into an altered form for the manufacture of new products.
Depending on the types of materials accepted and operating procedures, a recycling
facility may or may not be required to have a solid waste facilities permit or be regulated
by the local enforcement agency.
N. Reuse: Materials that are recovered for use in the same form, on-site or off-site.
O. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit.
P. Salvage: To remove waste materials from the site for resale or re-use by a third party.
Q. Source-Separated Materials: Materials that are sorted by type at the site for the purpose of
reuse and recycling.
R. Solid Waste: Materials that have been designated as non-recyclable and are discarded for
the purposes of disposal.
S. Transfer Station: A facility that can legally accept solid waste for the purpose of
temporarily storing the materials for re-loading onto other trucks and transporting them to
a landfill for disposal, or recovering some materials for re-use or recycling.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and
SAMPLES, furnish the following:
174
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Prepare and submit to the Resident Engineer a written demolition debris management
plan. The plan shall include, but not be limited to, the following information:
1. Procedures to be used for debris management.
2. Techniques to be used to minimize waste generation.
3. Analysis of the estimated job site waste to be generated:
a. List of each material and quantity to be salvaged, reused, recycled.
b. List of each material and quantity proposed to be taken to a landfill.
4. Detailed description of the Means/Methods to be used for material handling.
a. On site: Material separation, storage, protection where applicable.
b. Off site: Transportation means and destination. Include list of materials.
1) Description of materials to be site-separated and self-hauled to designated
facilities.
2) Description of mixed materials to be collected by designated waste haulers
and removed from the site.
c. The names and locations of mixed debris reuse and recycling facilities or sites.
d. The names and locations of trash disposal landfill facilities or sites.
e. Documentation that the facilities or sites are approved to receive the materials.
B. Designated Manager responsible for instructing personnel, supervising, documenting and
administer over meetings relevant to the Waste Management Plan.
C. Monthly summary of construction and demolition debris diversion and disposal,
quantifying all materials generated at the work site and disposed of or diverted from
disposal through recycling.
1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
Publications are referenced by the basic designation only. In the event that criteria
requirements conflict, the most stringent requirements shall be met.
A. U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC):
LEED Green Building Rating System for New Construction
1.7 RECORDS
Maintain records to document the quantity of waste generated; the quantity of waste
diverted through sale, reuse, or recycling; and the quantity of waste disposed by landfill
175
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
or incineration. Records shall be kept in accordance with the LEED Reference Guide and
LEED Template.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. List of each material and quantity to be salvaged, recycled, reused.
B. List of each material and quantity proposed to be taken to a landfill.
C. Material tracking data: Receiving parties, dates removed, transportation costs, weight
tickets, tipping fees, manifests, invoices, net total costs or savings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COLLECTION
A. Provide all necessary containers, bins and storage areas to facilitate effective waste
management.
B. Clearly identify containers, bins and storage areas so that recyclable materials are
separated from trash and can be transported to respective recycling facility for
processing.
C. Hazardous wastes shall be separated, stored, disposed of according to local, state, federal
regulations.
3.2 DISPOSAL
A. Contractor shall be responsible for transporting and disposing of materials that cannot be
delivered to a source-separated or mixed materials recycling facility to a transfer station
or disposal facility that can accept the materials in accordance with state and federal
regulations.
B. Construction or demolition materials with no practical reuse or that cannot be salvaged or
recycled shall be disposed of at a landfill or incinerator.
3.3 REPORT
A. With each application for progress payment, submit a summary of construction and
demolition debris diversion and disposal including beginning and ending dates of period
covered.
B. Quantify all materials diverted from landfill disposal through salvage or recycling during
the period with the receiving parties, dates removed, transportation costs, weight tickets,
176
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
manifests, invoices. Include the net total costs or savings for each salvaged or recycled
material.
C. Quantify all materials disposed of during the period with the receiving parties, dates
removed, transportation costs, weight tickets, tipping fees, manifests, and invoices.
Include the net total costs for each disposal.
E N D OF SECTION 01 74 19 CON WASTE MANAGEMENT
177
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 02 41 00
DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
This section specifies demolition and removal of portions of buildings, utilities, other
structures and debris from trash dumps shown.
1.2 RELATED WORK:
A. Safety Requirements: GENERAL CONDITIONS Article, ACCIDENT PREVENTION.
B. Disconnecting utility services prior to demolition: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS.
C. Reserved items that are to remain the property of the Government: Section 01 00 00,
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
D. Environmental Protection: Section 01 57 19, TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL
CONTROLS.
E. Infectious Control: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article 1.7,
INFECTION PREVENTION MEASURES.
1.3 PROTECTION:
A. Perform demolition in such manner as to eliminate hazards to persons and property; to
minimize interference with use of adjacent areas, utilities and structures or interruption of
use of such utilities; and to provide free passage to and from such adjacent areas of
structures. Comply with requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS Article,
ACCIDENT PREVENTION.
B. Provide safeguards, including warning signs, barricades, temporary fences, warning
lights, and other similar items that are required for protection of all personnel during
demolition and removal operations. Comply with requirements of Section 01 00 00,
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article 1.9 PROTECTION OF EXISTING
VEGETATION, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, UTILITIES AND IMPROVEMENTS.
C. Prevent spread of flying particles and dust. Sprinkle rubbish and debris with water to
keep dust to a minimum. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable
condition such as, but not limited to; ice, flooding, or pollution. Vacuum and dust the
work area daily.
178
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
D. In addition to previously listed fire and safety rules to be observed in performance of
work, include following:
1. Wherever a cutting torch or other equipment that might cause a fire is used, provide
and maintain fire extinguishers nearby ready for immediate use. Instruct all possible
users in use of fire extinguishers.
2. Keep hydrants clear and accessible at all times. Prohibit debris from accumulating
within a radius of 4500 mm (15 feet) of fire hydrants.
E. Before beginning any demolition work, the Contractor shall survey the site and examine
the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work. The contractor shall
take necessary precautions to avoid damages to existing items to remain in place, to be
reused, or to remain the property of the Medical Center; any damaged items shall be
repaired or replaced as approved by the Resident Engineer. The Contractor shall
coordinate the work of this section with all other work and shall construct and maintain
shoring, bracing, and supports as required. The Contractor shall ensure that structural
elements are not overloaded and shall be responsible for increasing structural supports or
adding new supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition
work performed under this contract. Do not overload structural elements. Provide new
supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by demolition or removal
works. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement must have Resident Engineer’s
approval.
F. The work shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 57 19, TEMPORARY
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.
G. The work shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS, Article 1.7 INFECTION PREVENTION MEASURES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 DEMOLITION:
A. Debris, including brick, concrete, stone, metals and similar materials shall become
property of Contractor and shall be disposed of by him daily, off the Medical Center
Property to avoid accumulation at the demolition site. Materials that cannot be removed
daily shall be stored in areas specified by the Resident Engineer. Contractor shall dispose
179
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
debris in compliance with applicable federal, state or local permits, rules and/or
regulations.
B. Remove and legally dispose of all materials, other than earth to remain as part of project
work, from any trash dumps shown. Materials removed shall become property of
contractor and shall be disposed of in compliance with applicable federal, state or local
permits, rules and/or regulations. Materials that are discovered to be hazardous, shall be
handled as unforeseen. The removal of hazardous material shall be referred to Hazardous
Materials specifications.
C. Remove existing utilities as indicated or uncovered by work and terminate in a manner
conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility and approved
by the Resident Engineer. When Utility lines are encountered that are not indicated on the
drawings, the Resident Engineer shall be notified prior to further work in that area.
3.2 CLEAN-UP:
On completion of work of this section and after removal of all debris, leave site in clean
condition satisfactory to Resident Engineer. Clean-up shall include off the Medical
Center Property disposal of all items and materials not required to remain property of the
Government as well as all debris and rubbish resulting from demolition operations.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION- - -
180
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 02 82 11
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ARTICLE TITLE
PART I - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY OF THE WORK
1.1.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.1.2 EXTENT OF WORK
1.1.3
RELATED WORK
1.1.4
TASKS
1.1.5 CONTRACTORS USE OF PREMISES
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
VARIATION IN QUANTITIES
STOP ASBESTOS REMOVAL
DEFINITIONS
GENERAL
GLOSSARY
REFERENCE STANDARD ORGANIZATIONS
1.5
CODES AND REGULATIONS
1.5.1
GENERAL APPLICABILITY OF CODES, REGULATIONS AND
STANDARDS
1.5.2 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY
1.5.3 FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.5.4 STATE REQUIREMENTS
1.5.5 LOCAL REQUIREMENTS
1.5.6
STANDARDS
1.5.7 EPA GUIDANCE DOCUMENT
1.5.8 NOTICES
1.5.9 PERMITS
1.5.10 LICENSES
1.5.11 POSTING AND FILING OF REGULATIONS
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
PROJECT COORDINATION
PERSONNEL
CONTINGENCY PLANS AND ARRANGEMENTS
SECURITY
1.7
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.7.4
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION
GENERAL
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM(RPP)
WRITTEN STATEMENT OF COMPANY POLICY
THE RPP COORDINATOR
181
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.7.5 WRITTEN RPP PROCEDURE FOR SELECTION AND USE OF RESPIRATORS
1.7.6 RESPIRATORS FOR ABATEMENT OPERATIONS
1.7.7 RESPIRATORS FOR PRE-ABATEMENT AND OTHER LOW LEVEL EXPOSURE
OPERATIONS
1.7.8 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR RESPIRATOR WEARERS
1.7.9 WORKER AND SUPERVISOR TRAINING
1.7.10 RESPIRATOR FIT TEST
1.7.11 CLEANING DISINFECTION, INSPECTION, REPAIR AND STORAGE
1.7.12 REGULAR PROGRAM EVALUATION AND SPECIAL PROBLEM OF USE
1.7.13 PROPER RESPIRATOR USE PROCEDURES
1.7.14 SUBMITTALS BEFORE START OF WORK
1.7.15 BREATHING AIR SYSTEMS
1.8
1.8.1
1.8.2
1.8.3
1.8.4
1.8.5
1.8.6
WORKER PROTECTION
TRAINING PRIOR TO ENGAGE IN ABATEMENT WORK
MEDICAL EXAMINATION
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
ENTERING AND EXITING PROCEDURES
DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES
LIMITATIONS WITHIN WORK AREA
1.9
1.9.1
1.9.2
1.9.3
1.9.4
1.9.5
1.9.6
DECONTAMINATION FACILITIES
DESCRIPTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PERSONNEL DECONTAMINATION FACILITIES (PDF)
EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION FACILITIES (EDF)
TEMPORARY UTILITIES TO PDF AND EDF
EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES
1.10 NEGATIVE PRESSURE FILTRATION SYSTEMS
1.10.1 SUBMITTALS
1.10.2 NEGATIVE AIR MACHINE (HEPA UNITS)
1.10.3 PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL
1.10.4 MONITORING
1.10.5 AUXILIARY GENERATOR
1.10.6 SUPPLEMENTAL MAKE-UP AIR INLETS
1.10.7 TESTING THE SYSTEM
1.10.8 DEMONSTRATION OF NEGATIVE AIR SYSTEM OPERATION
1.10.9 USE OF SYSTEM DURING ABATEMENT OPERATIONS
1.10.10
DISMANTLING THE SYSTEM
1.11
1.11.1
1.11.2
1.11.3
1.11.4
CONTAINMENT BARRIERS AND COVERINGS OF WORK AREA
GENERAL
PREPARATION PRIOR TO SEALING OFF
CONTROL ACCESS TO WORK AREA
CRITICAL BARRIERS
182
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.11.5
1.11.6
1.11.7
1.11.8
PRIMARY BARRIERS
EXTENSION OF WORK AREA
SECONDARY BARRIERS
FIRESTOPPING
1.12 MONITORING, INSPECTION AND TESTING
1.12.1
GENERAL
1.12.2 OUTLINE SCOPE OF SERVICES OF THE V.P.I.H. CONSULTANT
1.12.3 MONITORING, INSPECTION AND TESTING BY ABATEMENT
CONTRACTOR
1.13
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES (SOP)
1.14
SUBMITTALS
1.14.1 PRE CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS
1.14.2 SUBMITTALS DURING ABATEMENT
1.14.3 SUBMITTALS AT COMPLETION OF ABATEMENT
PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PREPARATION
PACKAGING OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
ENCAPSULANTS
TYPES OF ENCAPSULANTS
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE
2.3
RECYCLABLE PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
PRE ABATEMENT ACTIVITIES
PRE ABATEMENT MEETING
PRE ABATEMENT INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
PRE ABATEMENT CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATIONS
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
REMOVAL OF ACM AND ACE
WETTING MATERIALS
SECONDARY BARRIERS AND WALKWAYS
WET REMOVAL OF ACM OTHER THAN AMOSITE
WET REMOVAL OF AMOSITE AND DRY REMOVAL OF ACM AND
OTHER
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
3.2.5
DRY REMOVAL OF ACM AND OTHER SPECIAL PROCEDURES
183
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
ENCLOSURE OF ACM
MONITORING OF ENCLOSURE WORK
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
QUALITY ASSURANCE
ACCEPTABLE ENCAPSULANTS
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
REPAIR OF ACM INSULATION AND LAGGING
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
PRODUCTS
PROCEDURES
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
LOCK BACK ENCAPSULATION
GENERAL
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
WORKER PROTECTION
PIPING
SEALING EXPOSED EDGE
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
DISPOSAL OF ACM AND ACE WASTE MATERIAL
GENERAL
PROCEDURES
3.7
PROJECT DECONTAMINATION
3.7.1
GENERAL
3.7.2
WORK AREA CLEARANCE
3.7.3
WORK DESCRIPTION
3.7.4
PRE DECONTAMINATION CONDITIONS
3.7.5
FIRST CLEANING
3.7.6
PRE CLEARANCE INSPECTION AND TESTING
3.7.7
LOCK BACK ENCAPSULATION OF WORK SURFACES
3.7.8
SECOND CLEANING
3.7.9
THIRD CLEANING
3.7.10 FINAL CLEANING
3.8
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
3.8.4
3.8.5
3.8.6
3.8.7
3.8.8
FINAL INSPECTION AND TESTING
GENERAL
FINAL INSPECTION
FINAL TESTING
FINAL TESTING PROCEDURES
SCHEDULE OF AIR SAMPLES WITH PCM
TEM SAMPLING
LABORATORY TESTING FOR PCM
LABORATORY TESTING FOR TEM
3.9
3.9.1
ABATEMENT CLOSE OUT AND CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
COMPLETION OF ABATEMENT WORK
184
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3.9.2
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION BY CONTRACTOR
ATTACHMENTS:
1.
2.
3.
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION
CERTIFICATE OF WORKER`S ACKNOWLEDGMENT
AFFIDAVIT OF MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE AND RESPIRATORY PROTECTION
4. ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR/COMPETENT PERSON(S) REVIEW AND
ACCEPTANCE OF THE VA’S ASBESTOS SPECIFICATION
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT SPECIFICATION
SECTION 01569
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL:
1.1
SUMMARY OF THE WORK:
1.1.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings, general provision of contract, including general and supplementary conditions and
other division 1000 specifications, apply to the work of this section. The contract documents
show the work of the contract and related requirements and conditions impacting the project.
Related requirements and conditions include applicable codes and regulations, notices and
permits, existing site conditions and restrictions on use of the site, requirements for partial owner
occupancy during work, coordination with other work and phasing of work. In the event the
asbestos abatement contractor discovers an ambiguity or conflict in or between the contract
documents and related requirements and codes, that issue must be immediately brought to the
attention of the contracting officer for resolution. Any action taken without obtaining such
guidance from the contracting officer shall be the sole risk and responsibility of the abatement
contractor.
1.1.2 EXTENT OF WORK:
A brief written summary of the extent of the work and non-binding to the contract documents is
as follows and is shown on the attached drawings.
A.
Below is a brief description of the estimated quantities of asbestos-containing materials to
be removed. This data is provided for informational purpose only, and is based on the
best information available at the time of specification preparation. Nothing in this section
may be interpreted as limiting the scope of work otherwise required by this contract and
related documents.
185
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B.
Mechanical work scheduled for the nurse’s station is to be performed on the HVAC
system and domestic hot and cold water pipes and drainpipes within the nurse’s station
and within the crawl space under the nurse’s station. These pipes are not insulated with
asbestos in the nurse’s station or crawl space. However, there is asbestos pipe insulation
debris on the dirt floor of the crawl space. It is the VAMC policy to require personal
protective equipment including disposable suits, gloves and P100 respirators when
working in these areas. The asbestos-containing pipe insulation debris in the crawl space
will not be abated as part of this work and incidental contact with the asbestos debris may
occur during the removal and installation of the HVAC system and domestic hot and cold
water pipes and drainpipes.
C.
The mechanical contractor must be a licensed asbestos abatement contractor employing
New York State Department of Labor Restricted Asbestos Handler-Allied Trades to
perform the mechanical work within the crawl space. The mechanical contractor’s
employees will utilize a personal decontamination enclosure system that complies with
Industrial Code Rule 56 following all work within the crawl space. The decontamination
enclosure shall be constructed contiguous to the work area. A tape barrier shall be
installed at an appropriate distance from the perimeter of the work area to isolate the
work area. Uncertified workers shall be prohibited from all work areas. Workers are to
wear personal protective equipment including disposable suits, respirators, gloves,
hardhats, and boots during mechanical work within the crawl space. The contractor shall
construct a decontamination unit at the entrance to the crawl space where mechanical work
is to be performed. Workers are to enter and exit the crawl space through this
decontamination unit.
D.
Decontamination units shall be constructed at the entrance to the crawl space so that the
workers do not have to walk through or around the building to decontaminate.
1.1.3 RELATED WORK:
A.
Section 22 14 00 Facility Storm Drainage
1.1.4 TASKS:
Work can be briefly summarized as follows:
A.
Preabatement activities including preabatement meeting, inspection, notification, permits,
submittal approvals, preparations, emergency arrangements and standard operating
procedures.
B.
Abatement activities including removal, encapsulation, enclosure, disposal of
contaminated waste, record keeping, security, inspection, and monitoring.
C.
Cleaning and decontaminating activities including final inspection and testing and
certification of decontamination.
186
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
D.
Reinsulation activities including reinsulation of all thermal and mechanical insulation
removed during the abatement process.
1.1.5 CONTRACTORS USE OF PREMISES:
A.
Cooperate fully with the VA's representative to minimize conflicts and to facilitate the
VA's safe and smooth usage of the buildings. Perform the work in accordance with the
specifications, drawings, and phasing plan.
B.
Use existing facilities in occupied building strictly within the limits shown in contract
documents and the approved preabatement plan of action.
1.2
VARIATION IN QUANTITIES:
Not Applicable.
1.3
STOP ASBESTOS REMOVAL:
If the contracting officer or his field representative presents a written stop asbestos removal stop
all work and initiate fiber reduction activities. Do not resume asbestos removal until authorized
in writing by VA. A stop asbestos removal order will be issued at any time VA determines
abatement conditions are not within specifications requirements. Stoppage will continue until
conditions have been corrected. Standby time and cost required for corrective action is at the
contractor`s expense. The occurrence of the following events shall be reported in writing to the
VA representative and shall require the contractor to immediately stop asbestos removal and
initiate fiber reduction activities.
A.
Excessive airborne fibers outside containment area (0.01 f/cc or greater, or levels that are
statistically greater than preabatement as determined by Phase Contrast Microscopy
utilizing NIOSH 7400 Method).
B.
Break in either the primary or secondary containment barriers.
C.
Loss of negative air pressure (at or below 0.02 inches of water).
D.
Serious worker injury within the containment area which necessitates interruption of the
normal decontamination procedures.
E.
Presence of a fire and/or safety emergency.
F.
Respiratory protection system failure.
G.
Power failure.
H.
Excessive airborne fibers inside containment area (0.5 f/cc or greater when wet methods
are employed).
187
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.4
DEFINITIONS:
1.4.1 GENERAL:
Definitions and explanations here are neither complete nor exclusive of all terms used in the
contract documents, but are general for the work to the extent they are not stated more explicitly
in another element of the contract documents. Drawings must be recognized as diagrammatic in
nature and not completely descriptive of the requirements indicated thereon.
1.4.2 GLOSSARY:
ABATEMENT: A general term used to refer to the various processes used to control asbestos
materials in buildings. Three alternative methods for ACM and/or ACE abatement are removal,
encapsulation and enclosure.
ACE: Asbestos contaminated elements.
ACM: Asbestos containing material.
ACS: Asbestos contaminated soil.
AEROSOL: Solid or liquid particles, suspended in air.
AGGRESSIVE SAMPLING: EPA defined clearance sampling method using air moving
equipment such as fans and leaf blowers to stir the air.
AHERA: Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act. Asbestos regulations issued by EPA in
1987.
AIR CELL: Type of pipe or duct insulation comprised of corrugated cardboard which frequently
contains asbestos combined with cellulose or refractory binders.
AIR MONITORING: The process of collecting and analyzing air samples to determine the
number of fibers present per cubic centimeter of air. This overall monitoring procedure is also
called Air Testing, or testing.
AIR SAMPLE COLLECTION FILTER: Membrane filter used to collect fibers/particulates
which are counted and/or analyzed. Membrane is usually made of mixed cellulose material for
PCM, (phase contrast microscopy) and polycarbonate or mixed cellulose for TEM (transmission
electron microscopy).
AMENDED WATER: Water to which a surfactant has been added.
ASBESTOS: The general name for a group of fibrous mineral forms including but not limited to
chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, anthophyllite, actinolite and tremolite.
188
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
ASBESTOS WASTE DECONTAMINATION FACILITY: Airlock system consisting of
drum/bag washing facilities and temporary storage area for cleaned containers. Used as exit for
waste and equipment leaving the abatement area. May be used in an emergency to evacuate
personnel.
ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL (ACM): Any material containing more than 1% (one
percent) by weight of asbestos of any type or mixture.
ASBESTOS CONTAMINATED ELEMENTS (ACE): Building elements such as ceilings,
walls, lights and ductwork that are contaminated by asbestos.
ASBESTOS CONTAINING WASTE MATERIAL: Materials removed from an abatement area
which is or is suspected of being contaminated with an asbestos containing material.
AUTHORIZED VISITOR: Any person approved by VA, the contractor or any government
agency which has proven jurisdiction over asbestos related work.
BARRIER: Any surface that seals the work area to inhibit the movement of fibers. Containment
Barrier - An airtight barrier, consisting of walls, floors and/or ceilings of sealed plastic sheeting,
surrounding and sealing the outer perimeter of the work area. Critical barrier - the barrier
responsible for isolation of the work area from adjacent spaces, typically constructed of
polyethylene sheeting secured in place at penetrations such as doors, windows or another
opening into the work area. Primary barrier - Barriers assembled over critical barrier and
exposed directly to decontamination work. Secondary Barrier - Any additional sheeting to collect
and provide protection from debris during abatement.
BREATHING ZONE: A hemisphere forward of the shoulders with a radius of approximately 6
to 9 inches.
BRIDGING ENCAPSULANT: An encapsulant that forms a discrete layer on the surface of an
asbestos matrix.
BULK TEST: The collection and analysis of samples of suspected asbestos materials. A small
amount, or bulk, of the material is physically removed from the structure and placed in a rigid
airtight container for transportation to an accredited lab for analysis.
CHANGING AREA: Normally the first chamber of the personnel decontamination facilities.
i.e., the "clean room".
CLEARANCE SAMPLE: An area sample taken to a certain airborne fiber levels after removal
clean-up and final inspection have been completed. Performed by the VA`s I.H. consultant
(VPIH).
COUNT: Refers to "fiber count" or the average number of asbestos fibers greater than five
micrometers in length per cubic centimeter of air.
189
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C.P.I.H.: Asbestos abatement contractor`s industrial hygienist. I.H. must meet qualification
requirements of P.I.H.
DEMOLITION: The removal of any building component, system, finish or assembly of a
facility. Wrecking or taking out of any load-supporting structural member of a facility together
with any related handling operations or the intentional burning of any facility. Standards for
demolition involving ACM are as defined in NESHAPs 40 CFR 61.145.
DISPOSAL BAG: Six mil thick, air liquid leak proof plastic bag used for transporting asbestos
waste from abatement areas to disposal site. Each is labelled in accordance with OSHA
regulations.
DRUM: A rigid, impermeable container made of cardboard, metal or plastic which can be
sealed in an air and watertight manner.
ENCAPSULANT: A material that surrounds or embeds asbestos fibers in an adhesive matrix
and prevents release of fibers.
ENCAPSULATION: Treatment of ACM with an encapsulant.
ENCLOSURE: The construction of an air tight, impermeable, permanent barrier around ACM
to control the release of asbestos fibers into the air.
ENTRANCE PORT: A name sometimes used for main entrance airlock in an OSHA defined
negative air containment area.
EDF: Equipment Decontamination facility.
f/cc: Abbreviation for fibers per cubic centimeter of air and standard measurement units used to
measure the level of asbestos contamination in the air.
FILTER: A media component used in respirators or other equipment to remove solid or liquid
particles from the air.
FIRE-STOP: Material used to close open parts of a structure and prevent the spread of fire.
FRIABLE ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL (F-ACM): Material that contains more
than 1.0% asbestos by weight, which can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand
pressure when dry.
GLOVE BAG: A sack (typically constructed of 6 mil transparent polyethylene or
polyvinylchloride plastic) with two inward projecting long sleeve gloves, which are designed to
enclose an object from which ACM is to be removed.
190
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
HIGH-EFFICIENCY PARTICULATE AIR (HEPA) FILTER: A filter which removes from the
air 99.97% or more of monodisperse dioctyl phthalate (DOP) particles having a mean diameter
of 0.3 micrometer.
HEPA FILTER VACUUM CLEANER: High efficiency particulate (absolute) vacuum
collection equipment with a HEPA filter system capable of collecting and retaining asbestos
fibers.
INDUSTRIAL HYGIENIST (I.H.): A person with a college degree in engineering, chemistry,
physics, medicine or related physical and biological science and a competence in industrial
hygiene acquired through special studies and training. Meets all definition requirements of the
American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA).
I.H. TECHNICIAN: A person working under the supervision of the I.H. with special training,
experience, certifications and licenses required for the industrial hygiene work assigned to
perform. Requires a minimum experience as I.H. technician on three projects of similar size and
complexity to this project.
LOCK-BACK: Encapsulation of all surfaces involved in abatement at the conclusion of ACM
removal and before removal of primary barriers.
MCEF: Mixed cellulose ester filter.
NEGATIVE PRESSURE: Air pressure lower than surrounding areas, created by exhausting air
from a sealed space (work area).
NEGATIVE PRESSURE RESPIRATOR: A respirator in which the air pressure inside the
respiratory-inlet covering is positive during exhalation in relation to the air pressure of the
outside atmosphere and negative during inhalation in relation to the air pressure of the outside
atmosphere.
NEGATIVE PRESSURE SYSTEM: A local exhaust system, utilizing HEPA filtration capable
of maintaining a negative pressure inside the work area and a constant air flow from adjacent
areas into the work area and exhausting that air outdoors.
NESHAP: National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants.
NON-FRIABLE ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL (NF-ACM): Material that contains
more than 1% (one percent) asbestos by weight but can not be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced
to powder by hand pressure when dry. Non friable asbestos materials can release asbestos fibers
when power tools such as grinders, drills, sanders, etc. are used on them.
OV: Organic Vapor
PAPR: Powered air Purifying Respirator.
191
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
PCM: Abbreviation for phase contrast microscopy. Phase contrast microscopy utilizes a light
microscope for the purpose of counting fibers. Reference NIOSH 7400 method.
PDF: Personnel Decontamination Facilities.
PENETRATING ENCAPSULANT: Encapsulant that is absorbed by the asbestos matrix
without leaving a discrete surface layer.
PERSONAL AIR SAMPLING: Air sample collected with a special battery-powered portable
pump unit which is fitted on the body of the monitored person. The collection device (filter
cassette) is
located within the individual`s breathing zone.
PERSONAL MONITORING: Sampling of the asbestos fiber concentration within the breathing
zone of a person.
PLASTIC SHEETING: Barrier material not as strong as polyethylene.
PLM: Abbreviation for polarized light microscopy with dispersion staining utilizing light
microscopy and refractive indices to identify type of asbestos present.
POLYETHYLENE SHEETING: Strong plastic barrier material usually transparent and made
flame resistant in compliance.
POSITIVE/NEGATIVE FIT TEST: A negative-pressure respirator fit check, performed by
placing the palm of one hand over the exhalation valve and exhaling (positive pressure) and
feeling for face piece-to-face fit leakage or, covering the filters cartridges with the palms of the
hand and inhaling (negative pressure) while feeling for face piece-to-face fit leakage.
PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL SYSTEM: System which restricts airflow from adjacent areas
into work area and continuously refilters air from the HEPA filtration machine. Minimal exhaust
ventilation is utilized by maintaining a pressure differential of 0.02" of water.
P.I.H.: Professional (Qualified) I.H. who meets all the definition requirements of AIHA and
OSHA of a "competent person" under 29 CFR 1926.1101, has completed at least three
specialized courses on asbestos abatement, supervision and management in EPA endorsed
training programs, and formal training in respiratory protection and waste disposal, and has a
minimum experience of (5) projects of similar complexity with this project of which at least
three (3) projects serving as the supervisory I.H. licensed when required by the state or local law.
PROTECTION FACTOR: The ratio of the ambient concentration of an airborne substance
inside the respirator to the concentration at the breathing zone of the wearer. The protection
factor is a measure of the degree of protection provide by a respirator.
QNFT: Quantitative Fit test.
192
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
QLFT: Qualitative fit test.
REMOVAL: Means removal of ACM and ACE. Accomplished with tools such as scrapers,
chisels, and nylon brushes.
REMOVAL ENCAPSULANT: A penetrating encapsulant specifically designated for removal
of ACM rather than encapsulation.
RENOVATION: Alteration of a facility or one or more facility components in any way,
including the striping or removal of ACM
are as defined in NESHAPs 40 CFR 61.145.
RESPIRATOR: A device designed to protect the wearer from the inhalation of harmful
atmospheres.
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM COORDINATOR (RPPC): Individual who is
authorized and responsible for all aspects of the contractor's respiratory protection program
(RPP).
RPP: Respiratory Protection Program.
RPPC: Respiratory Protection Program Coordinator.
SAR: Supplied Air Respirator.
SCBA: Self Contained Breathing Apparatus.
SEALANT: Another name for encapsulating material. This term also refers to the approved
coating which is used to cover brown coat ceilings after asbestos surfaces have been removed.
SEALED WORK AREA: Refers to work area after containment barriers and decontamination
facilities have been erected and a negative pressure air system has been installed.
SHOWERS: Shower stalls installed in the Personnel Decontamination Facilities and used as part
of the decontamination process required for every person leaving the sealed work areas. Also
used in the Equipment Decontamination Facilities to wash disposable bags.
S.O.P.: Standard Operating Procedures required to be submitted by contractor.
STATION SAMPLE OR AREA SAMPLE: Refers to air samples collected at a specific spot or
station using high volume air pumps.
SURFACTANT: A chemical wetting agent added to water to improve penetration, thus reducing
the quantity of water required for a given operation or area.
193
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
TEM: Abbreviation for transmission electron microscopy. TEM is used for the purpose of fiber
counting and it has the analytical capacity of identifying asbestos fibers.
TESTING: One or two types of testing done in relation to asbestos bulk and air testing.
VA REPRESENTATIVE: VA official responsible for on-going project work. For central office
projects, the A/E is the representative and has the authority to delegate the abatement
responsibilities to the V.P.I.H. for station level work, any official or V.P.I.H. in charge of the
project is the representative.
VAT: Vinyl-asbestos tile.
VISIBLE EMISSIONS: Any emission containing particulate asbestos material that are visually
detected without the aid of instruments. This does not include condensed uncombined water
vapor.
V.P.I.H.: Department of Veterans Affairs retained Industrial Hygienist.
WET CLEANING: The process of thoroughly eliminating asbestos contamination from building
surfaces and objects by using cloths, mops, or other cleaning utensils which have been dampened
with amended water or diluted removal encapsulant.
WETTING AGENT: See Surfactant.
WORK AREA: Area where asbestos related work or removal operations are performed which is
defined and isolated to prevent the spread of asbestos dust, fibers or debris, and the entry of
unauthorized personnel. Work area is a regulated area as defined by OSHA Regulation 29 CFR
1926.1101, also called Containment Area.
WORKER DECONTAMINATION FACILITY (WDF): Another name for the main
entrance/exit airlock system consisting of clean/change room, shower facilities, and equipment
(dirty room). Intended to be used exclusively for worker access to/from abatement area.
1.4.3 REFERENCED STANDARD ORGANIZATIONS:
A.
The following acronym or abbreviations as referenced in contract documents are defined
to mean the associated names. Both names and addresses are subject to change, and are
believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate and up to date of contract documents.
B.
V.A.
C.
AIHA American Industrial Hygiene Association
2700 Prosperity Avenue. Suite 250
Fairfax, VA 22031
Department of Veterans Affairs
810 Vermont Avenue,N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20420
194
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
D.
ANSI American National Standards Institute
1430 Broadway
New York, NY 10018
E.
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
1916 Race Street
Philadelphia, PA 19103
F.
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations available from
printing office;
Washington, DC 20420 (Usually first published in
Government
federal
register)
G.
CGA Compressed Gas Association
1235 Jefferson Davis Highway
Arlington, VA
H.
CS
Commercial Standard of NBS (U.S. Dept. of
I.
EPA
Environmental Protection Agency
401 M Street, S.W.
Washington, DC 20460
J.
MIL-STD
K.
MSHA Mine Safety and Health Administration
(Respiratory Protection division)
Balston Tower #3
Department of Labor
Arlington VA 22203
L.
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
(U.S. Dept of Commerce)
Gaithersburg, MD 20234
N.
NEC
M.
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
2101 L Street, N.W.
Washington, DC 20037
O.
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
Batterymarch Park
Commerce)
Military Standard/Standardization Division Office of the Assistant
Secretary of Defense
Washington 25, DC
National Electrical Code (By NFPA)
195
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Quincy, MA 02269
P.
NIOSH
National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health
4676 Columbia Parkway
Cincinnati, OH 45226
Q.
NYSDOL
R.
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration (U.S. Dept. of Labor)
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC
S.
UL
Underwriters Laboratories 333 Pfingsten Rd.
Northbrook IL 60062
T.
USA
United States Army-Army Chemical Corps Department of Defense
1.5
CODES AND REGULATIONS:
New York State Department of Labor
State Office Building Campus
Asbestos Control Program
Room 511
Albany, New York 12240
1.5.1 GENERAL APPLICABILITY OF CODES, REGULATIONS AND STANDARD:
Except to the extent that more stringent requirements
are written directly into the contract documents, all applicable codes, regulations, and standards
have the same force and effect (and are made a part of the contract documents by reference) as if
copied directly into the contract documents, or as if published copies are bound herewith.
1.5.2 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY:
The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability for the compliance with all
applicable Federal, State, and local regulations pertaining to work practices, hauling and disposal
of ACM and ACE, and protection of workers, visitors to the site, and persons occupying areas
adjacent to the site. Contractor is responsible for providing medical examinations and
maintaining medical records of personnel as required by the applicable Federal, State and local
regulations. Contractor shall hold the VA and VPIH consultants harmless for failure to comply
with any applicable work, hauling, disposal, safety, health or other part of himself, his
employees, or his subcontractors. Contractor incurs all costs of the C.P.I.H. including all
sampling/analytical costs for sampling to comply with OSHA regulation.
Abatement Contractor shall determine the applicability of any process patents he/she may be
employing and be responsible for paying any fees, royalties or licenses that may be required for
the use of patented processes.
196
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.5.3 FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS:
Federal requirements which govern asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of asbestos
waste material include but are not limited to the following regulations.
A.
B.
U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, (OSHA).
1.
Occupational Exposure to Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite;
Final Rules Title 29, Part 1926, Section 1101 of the Code of Federal Regulations
and Respiratory Protection Title 29, Part 1910, Section 134 of the Code of Federal
Regulations Construction Industry Title 29, and Section 103, Part 1926, of the
Code of Federal Regulations.
2.
National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP), Section
112 of the Clean Air Act; and those asbestos standards contained in Title 40 Code
of Federal Regulations, Part 61, Subpart M.
3.
Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA), Public law 99-519, and
Title II, Sec. 201, et, seq., of the Toxic Substance Control Act, 15 USC 2601.
4.
Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records Title 29, Part 1910, Section 2
of the Code of Federal Regulations.
5.
Hazard Communication Title 29, Part 1910, Section 1200 of the Code of Federal
Regulation.
6.
Specification for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags Title 29, Part 1910, Section
145 of the Code of Federal Regulations.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
1. Asbestos Abatement Projects Rule 40 CFR Part 762 CPTS 62044, FRL 2843-9 Federal
Register, vol.50 No. 134, July 12, 1985 P-28540.
2.
Regulation for Asbestos, Title 40, Part 61, Sub-part A of the Code of Federal
Regulations.
3.
National Emission Standard for Asbestos
Title 40, Part 61, Sub-part M (Revised Sub-part B) of the Code of Federal
Regulations
1.5.4 STATE REQUIREMENTS:
State requirements which govern asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of asbestos
waste materials include but are not limited to the following:
197
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
A.
State of New York Asbestos Regulations
Title 12, NYCRR Part 56 and subsequent amendments
B.
New York State Department of Environmental Conservation
Title 6, NYCRR
1.
NYCRR Part 360 - Solid Waste Management Facilities
2.
NYCRR Part 364 - Waste Transporter Permits
1.5.5 LOCAL REQUIREMENTS:
Abide by all local requirements if these requirements are more stringent than state and federal
requirements which govern asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of asbestos waste
materials.
1.5.6 STANDARDS:
A.
B.
Standard which govern asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of asbestos
waste materials include but are not limited to the following:
1.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z-79 Fundamental Governing the
Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems
2.
Z88.2 Practices for Respiratory Protection
3.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)586-90 UL Standard for Safety High Efficiency,
Particulate Air Filters Units, Seventh Edition
Standards which govern encapsulation work include but are not limited to the following:
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1916 Race Street
Philadelphia, PA 19103
(215) 299-5400
C.
1.
Specification for Encapsulants for Friable Asbestos-containing Materials
Proposal P-189
2.
Safety and Health Requirements Relating to Occupational Exposure to AsbestosE-849-82
Standards which govern the fire and safety in the asbestos containment areas:
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
198
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.
NFPA 241 - Standard for safeguarding Construction, Alteration and Demolition
Operations
2.
NFPA 701 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Resistant Textiles and
Film
3.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
1.5.7 EPA GUIDANCE DOCUMENTS:
EPA guidance documents which discuss asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of
asbestos waste materials are listed below. These documents are made part of this section by
reference. EPA maintains an information number (800)334-8571 and publications can be
ordered from (800)424-9065 (554-1404 in Washington DC).
A.
Guidance for Controlling Asbestos Containing Materials in Buildings (Purple Book) EPA
560/5-85-024
B.
Asbestos Waste Management Guidance. EPA 530-SW-85-007
C.
A Guide to Respiratory Protection for the Asbestos Abatement Industry, EPA 560-OPTS86-001.
D.
(T 799) 20th July 1990 Guide to managing asbestos in place.
E.
Asbestos in Buildings. Simplified Sampling Scheme for Friable Surfacing Materials.
F.
Commercial Laboratories with Polarized Light Microscopy capabilities for bulk asbestos
identification.
1.5.8 NOTICES:
Not Applicable.
1.5.9 PERMITS:
Permits: An annual "Industrial Waste Hauler Permit" specifically for asbestos-Containing
Materials (ACM), is required for transporting asbestos waste to a disposable site.
1.5.10 LICENSES:
Maintain current licenses as required by applicable state or local jurisdictions for removal,
transporting and disposal or other regulated activity relative to the work of this contract.
1.5.11 POSTING AND FILING REGULATIONS:
199
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Maintain two (2) copies of applicable Federal, State and Local regulations. Post one copy of
each at the job site where workers will have ready, easy and daily exposure to the text. Keep on
file in contractor`s office one copy of each.
1.6
PROJECT COORDINATION:
Minimum administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordination of work on
the project are personnel, contingency arrangements and security.
1.6.1 PERSONNEL:
A.
Administrative and Supervisory Personnel: Shall consist of a qualified general
superintendent, C.P.I.H. and I.H. technicians, and appropriate number of qualified or
competent foremen required to complete abatement within contract time. The
contractor's "competent person" as defined by OSHA must meet all OSHA requirements
of the I.H. technician as identified in this section. C.P.I.H. does training for employees
and emergency personnel and shall be independent from V.P.I.H. I.H. technicians do
personal monitoring to comply with OSHA requirements and other I.H. monitoring and
inspection work under the supervision of the C.P.I.H. Administrative personnel shall
work full time for the contractor and be dedicated to this project. These employees are
the contractor's representatives responsible for compliance with these specifications.
They must meet the minimum qualifications criteria described in Paragraph C below.
B.
Non-Supervisory Personnel: An adequate number of qualified personnel shall be able to
meet the schedule requirements of the project. Laborers employed for abatement shall
meet the minimum qualifications criteria described in paragraph C below. Personnel
employed in this abatement work shall be pre-approved by the VA representative.
Supervisors and laborers will comply with each component of the OSHA Asbestos
Standard, 29 CFR 1926.1101. Submit a request for approval for any person intended to
be employed in the project with name, social security, qualifications, "Certificate of
Worker's Acknowledgment" (Attachment #2) and "Affidavit of Medical Surveillance and
Respiratory Protection " (Attachment #3).
C.
Minimum qualifications: Abatement Construction Company and assigned Personnel for
this project shall meet the following minimum requirement:
1.
The Abatement Construction Company: Has completed within the last 3 years, 3
asbestos abatement projects of comparable complexity and dollar value with this
project; has not been penalized for major violations of asbestos regulations in the
last 3 years; carries liability insurance for asbestos abatement work; is licensed in
the state in which this project is located; and has available equipment, materials
and supplies in adequate quantity, capacity and number to perform the work of
this project. The Abatement Construction Company shall provide explanation of
default(s) on any asbestos abatement project in the last 3 years (refer to article
1.14, SUBMITTALS, paragraph 1.14.1.H.)
200
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2.
Superintendent and Foremen: The superintendent and foremen must meet federal,
state, and local requirements for training and licensing for asbestos abatement.
The superintendent has four years abatement construction experience of which
two years as a foreman and one year as superintendent. Has worked as
superintendent in at least three projects, two of which are comparable in
complexity and size to this project. Has completed four courses of specialized
training in which two are on management and supervision of asbestos abatement.
Has medical records and other OSHA requirements. Has current NYSDOL
asbestos supervisor certifications and licenses.
The foreman has three years abatement construction experience of which one year
as foremen, have worked in five abatement projects, three of which are of
comparable complexity with this project, have completed two courses of
specialized training in asbestos abatement construction and regulations. One
course shall be on management of asbestos contracts with content equivalent to
the national asbestos training center/EPA course. Have medical records and other
OSHA requirements. Have asbestos handler certificates as required by NYSDOL.
3.
Contractor Professional I.H. (C.P.I.H): Has 5 years of experience monitoring and
supervising abatement construction, is presumed as a competent person due to
I.H. training and past experience, has participated as senior I.H. in 5 abatement
projects, 3 of which are of comparable complexity and dollar value with this
project, has developed at least one complete written standard operating procedure
for abatement and has trained abatement workers for 3 years.
Has specialized training in asbestos abatement management, respiratory
protection and training, asbestos waste disposal, abatement, monitoring,
inspection and testing and has medical records. Has successfully completed the
EPA AHERA courses for supervisors and workers. Has certification and license
where required by state or local government. Has NYSDOL certification as a
Project Monitor and Air Sampling Technician.
4.
Laborers: Have specialized training in asbestos abatement which meets state and
local requirements, and meet (as a minimum) the training required by AHERA
(see Section 206 of the Toxic Substances Control Act). Have specialized training
in abatement construction, OSHA and EPA regulations, the standard operating
procedures of the company, asbestos hazards and respiratory protection. Have
completed a course similar to the National Asbestos Council field instructors
course, the New York State Department of Health asbestos course or other states
course equivalent content. Have one year of abatement construction experience.
Have medical records and other OSHA requirements. Have asbestos handler
certificates as required by NYSDOL.
1.6.2 CONTINGENCY PLANS AND ARRANGEMENTS:
201
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Prepare a contingency plan for emergencies including fire, accident, failure of power, failure of
negative air system, failure of supplied air system or any other event that may require
modification of standard operating procedures during abatement. Include specific procedures to
ensure safe exiting and to provide medical attention in the event of an emergency. Post the
telephone numbers and locations of emergency services including fire, ambulance, doctor,
hospital, police, power company and telephone company in the clean room of personnel
decontamination facilities. Notify all these emergency services as to the danger of entering the
containment area, and to invite them to participate in an informal training program by the
qualified I.H. on relevant aspects of asbestos abatement. Provide assistance on developing
contingency plans for responding safely and efficiently to any emergency during abatement.
Provide and clearly indicate the location of approved fire extinguisher for every 10,000 sq. ft.
and train the asbestos crew on the use of equipment.
1.6.3 SECURITY:
Provide a 24-hour security system at the entrance of a containment area with guard and log book
during working hours to ensure that every entry to the containment will be logged in and that
only properly trained and outfitted workers will be allowed to enter. Entrance will be allowed
also to any authorized VA representatives and inspectors from regulatory agencies if properly
fitted with protective clothing and respirators. Work area will be locked during nonworking
hours.
1.7
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION:
1.7.1 GENERAL:
Provide respiratory protection in accordance with OSHA regulations 29 CFR 1910, Section
1001, 29 CFR 1910.134 and 29 CFR 1926.1101, EPA regulations 40 CFR 763.120, 121, ANSI
standards Z88.2-1980, CGS Pamphlet g-7 and specification G-7.1, the NIOSH, and MSHA
standards. In case of conflict, the most stringent requirements are applicable for this project.
1.7.2 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM (RPP):
Develop, implement and maintain a respiratory protection program consisting of the following
elements:
A.
Written statement of company policy, including assignment of individual responsibility,
accountability, and authority for required activities of the respiratory protection program.
B.
Written standard operating procedures governing the selection and use of respirators.
C.
Respiratory section (from NIOSH/MSHA approved and certified models) on the basis of
hazards to which the worker is exposed.
D.
Medical examination of workers to determine whether or not they may be assigned an
activity where respiratory protection is required.
202
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
E.
User training in the proper use and limitations of respirators (as well as a way to evaluate
the skill and knowledge obtained by the worker through training).
F.
Respiratory fit testing.
G.
Regulatory cleaning and disinfecting of respirators.
H.
Routine inspection of respirators during cleaning, and at least once a month and after
each use for those respirators designated for emergency use.
I.
Storage of respirators in convenient, clean and sanitary locations.
J.
Surveillance of work area conditions and degree of employee exposure (e.g. through air
monitoring).
K.
Regular inspection and evaluation of the continued effectiveness of the program.
L.
Recognition and resolution of special problems as they affect respirators use (e.g., facial
hair, eye glasses, etc.)
M.
Proper respirator use (procedures for donning and doffing respirators when entering and
exiting the abatement area.
1.7.3 WRITTEN STATEMENT OF COMPANY POLICY:
Provide a written statement of intent to provide a safe and healthful work place for workers.
Written statement shall include assignment of individual responsibility, accountability,
enforcement procedures and authority for required activities of the RPP.
1.7.4 THE RPP COORDINATOR:
Responsibility and authority for administering the entire RPP shall be with the contractor`s
designated and qualified Respiratory Protection Program Coordination (RPPC). The minimum
qualifications of the designated RPPC are:
A.
Completion of OSHA training institute 2 week course on respiratory protection or
NIOSH course "Occupational Respiratory Protection".
B.
Two years experience running such a program for an abatement contractor after
completion of training course. The RPP shall write the operating procedures of the RPP.
Where other individuals are involved in the administration of the program, they shall
report directly to C.P.I.H. who in turn shall be responsible directly to the contractor.
RPPC shall ensure that the employees wear the appropriate personal protective
equipment and are trained in the use of appropriate methods of exposure control. In
addition the RPPC shall be responsible for purchasing approved respirators, issuing
203
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
respirators, controlling inventory and record keeping. Record keeping shall include a list
of employees who are trained in respirator use, medical records trained in respirator use,
medical records of each respirator user, results of any pre or post training evaluations of
worker`s knowledge and hands on skill, documentation of respirator care and
maintenance, verification that respirators have been inspected for defects, airborne
concentration of asbestos and descriptions of any problems encountered during
abatement.
1.7.5 WRITTEN RPP PROCEDURE FOR SELECTION AND USE OF RESPIRATORS:
The RPP shall include a written procedure for selection and use of respirators. Procedures shall
be written clearly and simply for the workers to understand and use. Provide a copy to the VA
representative of this procedure as part of the contractor`s qualification sheet to be completed
and submitted along with proposal. Maintain an extra copy at the job site for ready reference by
any authorized employee or visitor.
1.7.6 RESPIRATORS FOR ABATEMENT OPERATIONS:
Where a person is or could reasonably be expected to be exposed during abatement operations to
airborne asbestos above 0.5 f/cc or where ACM debris is visible, one of the following maximum
levels of respiratory protection is required:
A.
A combination respirator which includes a Type-C supplied air respirator (SAR) with a
full face piece operated in the pressure demand mode and with an auxiliary self contained
breathing apparatus (SAR/SCBA) operated in the pressure demand mode shall be worn
whenever fiber concentrations are equal to or greater than 10.0 f/cc.
B.
A self contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) with a full facepiece operated in the
pressure demand mode.
C.
A pressure demand, full facepiece supplied air respirator that is equipped with an
emergency backup HEPA filter shall be worn whenever fiber concentrations are equal or
greater than 0.5 f/cc and less than 10.0 f/cc. The HEPA filter would be used when air
flow unexpectedly ceased to provide emergency protection.
1.
D.
Head coverings: Combination pressure demand SAR/SCBA or pressure demand
SCBA shall be equipped with full face pieces. Full face pieces shall be worn with
either a bonnet-type disposable head/hood or with a full head cover/hood which is
part of a fully encapsulating protective garment. Bonnet type head covers/hoods
are used with the head straps located under the hoods. This allows removal of the
head covering prior to showering without disturbing the respirators (which is
worn into the shower).
Reserve air shall be provided per OSHA regulations 29 CFR 1910.134 as part of any
supplied air system with the above respirators.
204
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
E.
Exemptions from maximum respiratory protection during abatement operations: When
the abatement contractor has demonstrated to the VA`s satisfaction that levels of airborne
asbestos fibers in the work area are consistently below 0.5 f/cc, a full facepiece PAPR
with HEPA cartridges may be used.
1.7.7 RESPIRATORS FOR PRE-ABATEMENT AND OTHER LOW LEVEL EXPOSURE
OPERATIONS:
A.
Air purifying respirators (1/2 face) supplied with HEPA filters may be used only in
special situations such as during preabatement inspections, preparation of preabatement
area, and operations after concentrations of asbestos are below 0.1 f/cc. These respirators
may be used for glove bag application where the environment in which glove bag
operation is to be conducted is free of any measurable concentration of asbestos. These
respirators may be used for the loading, transportation and disposal of asbestos
containing waste.
B.
The use of half mask air purifying respirators is only a precaution in the event of an
accidental asbestos exposure. Should such accidental asbestos exposure occur, the
exposed personnel shall immediately leave the area of exposure and begin personal
decontamination procedures in an appropriate PDF designated for this purpose.
C.
The following respirators are suitable for non-abatement operations:
1.
Pressure-demand SAR.
2.
Any continuous-flow SAR.
3.
Any powered air purifying respirators with HEPA filters.
4.
Any dust, fume and mist respirator with HEPA filters.
1.7.8 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR RESPIRATOR WEARERS
Determine whether an employee is capable of wearing and using a respirator. Submit a
certificate for each employee on the abatement job, signed by the examining physician and
stating each employee is fit to perform all duties assigned for asbestos abatement.
1.7.9 WORKER AND SUPERVISOR TRAINING:
Provide formal instruction in the proper use of respirators to workers and supervisors. The
supervisors shall have more comprehensive training in addition to the basic worker training.
Submit copies of employees certificates or proof of attendance and a copy of course outline
along with name and address of instructor. Furnish proof that instructor has satisfactorily
completed the OSHA respirator course or its equivalent.
205
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.7.10 RESPIRATOR FIT TEST:
A.
Perform a quantitative fit test (QNFT) or qualitative fit test (QLFT) in accordance with
OSHA regulations CFR 1926.1101, to determine satisfactory fit with any respirator
which creates a negative pressure in the facepiece, such as negative pressure air purifying
respirator or a SAR fitted with an emergency HEPA filter as back up. Submit
QNFT/QLFT results for each abatement employee.
B.
Routine donning of respirators with tight fitting facepiece requires negative and positive
pressure test to ensure adequate sealing fit. This shall be performed by the wearer prior
to each entry into the work area.
C.
Negative pressure test: For SCBA, SAR/SCBA, and SAR, block the end of the breathing
tube with the palm of the hand and for negative pressure air purifying respirators close
off the cartridge(s) or filter(s) by covering with the palms of the hands. The wearer shall
inhale gently and hold at least 10 seconds. The face piece shall collapse slightly without
inward leakage of air into the face piece.
D.
Positive pressure test: For SCBA, SAR/SCBA, SAR and for negative pressure air
purifying respirators, the exhalation valve is closed off and wearer exhales gently for at
least 10 seconds. A slightly positive pressure shall be built up inside the face piece
without any outward leakage of air from the face piece.
1.7.11 CLEANING, DISINFECTION, INSPECTION, REPAIR AND STORAGE:
Respirators shall be cleaned after each use by the wearer at the end of each shift. Collect all
respirators at the change room of the PDF for additional inspection and cleaning. An individual
with special training from the respirator manufacturer shall be assigned for this task. Every
worker`s respirator shall bear identification and shall always be assigned to the same worker. If
the respirators are serviced between shifts, only one respirator per worker is needed. If the
cleaning is done during a work shift or if a worker will be entering and leaving the abatement
area more than once during a shift, each worker requires two or more respirators depending on
the number of exits and entries. Perform continuous inspection of respirators to identify
malfunctions. Inspections shall be performed in accordance with manufacture`s instructions.
Repair of respirators and replacement of parts shall be done by the manufacturer. Replacement
parts for respirators shall be from the manufacturer of the respirator only. Substitution of parts
from a different brand or type of respirator, or unauthorized modification will void the approval
of the respirator and will lead to serious violation of these specifications. Any such violation
will cause stoppage of abatement work; shall be reported to OSHA, EPA and other agencies
having jurisdiction; and shall cause the mandatory substitution of the individual responsible for
the infraction. Store respirators in a convenient, clean, and sanitary location to ensure proper
function when used. Protect against dust, chemicals, sunlight, excessive heat or cold, and
mechanical damage. Store thoroughly dried respirators in sealed plastic bags or in containers
with tight fitting lids.
1.7.12 REGULAR PROGRAM EVALUATION AND SPECIAL PROBLEMS OF USE:
206
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
A.
The RPPC shall periodically assess the effectiveness of the respiratory protection
program during all phases of asbestos abatement operations. Frequent walk through
inspections during abatement activities shall be conducted to monitor and document
supervisor and worker compliance with requirements of the program. In addition to
general assessment of the overall respiratory program, specific evaluations of the
respirator cleaning, inspection, maintenance, repair, storage, and use procedures shall be
frequently conducted to ensure that the desired results of these operations are consistently
achieved.
B.
The following special problems shall be addressed and resolved, if encountered when
wearing respirators:
1.
Facial hair, including beards, sideburns, moustaches or even a few days of growth
of stubble shall not be allowed for employees wearing any type of respirator.
2.
Ordinary eye glasses shall not be used with full face respirators. Special
corrective lenses are available from manufacturers and shall be permanently
mounted by an individual designated by the manufacturer as qualified to install
accessory items. Eyeglasses and goggles may interfere with the half face pieces.
In this case, a full face piece with special corrective lenses as installed by
manufacturer shall be provided. Contact lenses will not be allowed with any kind
of respirator.
3.
Facial deformities which prevent tight seals are scars, deep skin creases,
prominent cheekbones, severe acne and the lack of teeth or dentures.
4.
Communications while wearing a respirator with a face piece can break the seal
of the face piece. When communication is necessary within the work area, it shall
be done with the help of special communicating equipment obtained from the
respirator manufacturer.
5.
Under high or low temperatures, the respirator shall be equipped with a vortex
tube to either warm or cool the air supply if such device has been approved by the
respirator manufacturer, or the air supply shall heat or cool the air supplied to the
respirator.
1.7.13 PROPER RESPIRATOR USE PROCEDURES:
Establish a well defined procedure for donning and doffing of respirator when entering and
exiting the work area through the PDF. Donning and doffing of respiratory protective devices
and work clothes shall be accomplished using the "BUDDY" system, involving two employees
assisting each other to ensure full and satisfactory compliance with the establish procedures.
Established written procedures for proper respirator use shall be in accordance with the
requirements described in the EPA/NIOSH publication EPA-560-OPTS-86-001 titled "A Guide
to Respiratory Protection for the Asbestos Abatement Industry". The procedures described in
207
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
this document for clean room (entry), shower room (entry), equipment room (entry), work area,
equipment room (exit), shower room (exit), and clean room (exit) for pressure demand
SAR/SCBA are made by reference part of this specification.
1.7.14 SUBMIT BEFORE START OF WORK:
Manufacturer`s product information for each component including NIOSH and MSHA
certification, system diagram for Type "C" supplied air system, showing assembly of
components into a complete system, showing location of compressor, filter banks, backup air
lines to work area(s) from compressor.
1.7.15 BREATHING AIR SYSTEMS:
A.
Where required, provide a breathing air system for a continuous sufficient supply of
"Grade D" or better breathing air in accordance with CGA standards. Provide one hour
reserve or escape type for all type SARs including SAR/SCBA and SAR with backup
HEPA. The air system shall provide breathing air temperature control, continuous
monitoring and alarm against carbon monoxide (CO) in the airstream and an alarm for air
compressor failure. Alarm shall be audible throughout the project area above the
operating noise of equipment and normal work. Provide continuous monitoring of the
breathing air system operation including compressor, filter system, back up air capacity,
and monitoring and warning devices by a dedicated individual trained by the
manufacturer for the operation and maintenance of the system. Two types of breathing
air systems that may be used are the high pressure breathing air system and the high
pressure air storage cylinders:
1.
High pressure breathing air system shall operate between 2000 and 4000 psi and
shall consist of a high pressure compressor, an inter cooler/after cooler assembly,
and air purifier assembly, an in line high pressure air storage bank and a high
pressure distribution line and control panel with connections for the respirators.
2.
High pressure air storage cylinders shall be used for small jobs only such as
maintenance and repair. The system consists of pre-pumped high pressure
cylinders containing "Grade D" or better in accordance with CGA. These
cylinders may be obtained from commercial suppliers.
B.
The low pressure breathing air system and the ambient air pump system are not allowed
for asbestos abatement work in this project.
1.8
WORKER PROTECTION:
1.8.1 TRAINING PRIOR TO ENGAGE IN ABATEMENT WORK:
Train workers in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 and this section. Workers shall be
trained and be knowledgeable on the following topics: Methods of recognizing ACM; health
208
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
effects of asbestos exposure; effects of smoking and asbestos exposure; activities that could
result in hazardous exposure; protective controls; practices and procedures to minimize exposure
including engineering controls, work practices, respirators, housekeeping procedures, hygiene
facilities, protective clothing, decontamination procedures, emergency procedures and waste
transportation and disposal; review OSHA 29 CFR 1910.134 for respirators; medical
surveillance program; review OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101, and for air monitoring, personal and
area; review this section of the project specification.
1.8.2 MEDICAL EXAMINATIONS:
Provide medical examinations for all workers and any other employee entering the work area per
OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 regardless of asbestos exposure levels. In addition, the contractor's
physician shall perform an evaluation of each individual's ability to work in heat stress
environments.
1.8.3 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING:
Provide boots with steel shank and toe, hard hats, goggles and gloves for all workers. Equipment
shall meet OSHA requirements for personal protection. Provide all persons entering the work
area with disposable full body coveralls, disposable head covers, undershorts, and 18" boot type
covers. Ensure that disposable clothes will not be compromised by employees. Provide
disposable plastic or rubber gloves to protect hands. Cloth gloves may be worn inside the
disposable gloves but shall not be used alone. Use tape to secure sleeves at the wrists and to
secure foot coverings at the ankles.
1.8.4 ENTERING AND EXITING PROCEDURES:
Provide worker protection per most stringent applicable requirements. Provide as a minimum
the following:
A.
Ensure that each time workers enter the work area, they remove all street clothes and
jewelry in the changing room of the personal decontamination unit and put on new
disposable coveralls, new head covers, and clean respirators, then proceed through the
shower to equipment room, and put on work boots.
1.8.5 DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES:
Require that all workers adhere to the following decontamination procedure whenever they leave
the work area:
A.
Require that all workers use the following decontamination procedure as a minimum
requirement whenever leaving the work area:
1.
When exiting work area, remove disposable coveralls, and all other clothes,
disposable head covers, and disposable footwear covers or boots in the equipment
room.
209
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2.
Still wearing respirators, and completely naked proceed to showers. Showering is
mandatory. Care must be taken to follow reasonable procedures in removing the
respirator to avoid asbestos fibers while showering. The following procedure is
required as a minimum:
a.
Thoroughly wet the body including hair and face. If using a Powered AirPurifying Respirator (PAPR) hold unit above head to keep canisters dry.
B.
With respirators still in place thoroughly wash body, hair, respirator face piece, and all
parts of the respirator except the blower unit and battery pack on a PAPR. Pay particular
attention to clean seal between face and respirator and under straps.
C.
Take a deep breath, hold it and/or exhale slowly, completely wet hair, face, and
respirator. While still holding breath, remove respirator and hold it away from face
before starting to breath.
D.
3.
Carefully wash face piece of respirator inside and out. If using PAPR: shutdown
in the following sequence, first cap inlets to filter cartridges, then turn off blower
unit (this sequence will keep debris from dislodging and contaminating the
outside of the unit). Thoroughly wash blower unit and hoses. Carefully wash
battery pack with wet rag. Be extremely cautious of getting water in the battery
pack as this will short out and destroy the battery.
4.
Shower completely with soap and water. Rinse thoroughly.
5.
Rinse shower room walls and floor prior to exit.
6.
Proceed from shower to changing room and change into street clothes or into new
disposable work items.
Air Purifying-Negative Pressure Respirators: Require that all workers use the following
decontamination procedure as a minimum requirement leaving the work area with a full
face cartridge type respirator:
1.
When exiting area, remove disposable coveralls, and all other clothes, disposable
head covers, and disposable footwear covers or boots in the equipment room.
2.
Still wearing respirators and completely naked, proceed to showers. Showering is
mandatory. Care must be taken to follow reasonable procedures in removing the
respirator and filters to avoid asbestos fibers while showering. The following
procedure is required as a minimum:
a.
Thoroughly wet body from neck down. Wet hair as thoroughly as
possible without wetting the respirator filter if using as air purifying type
respirator.
210
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
b.
Take a deep breath, hold it and/or exhale slowly, completely wetting of
hair, thoroughly wetting face, respirator and filter (air purifying
respirator). While still holding breath, remove respirator and hold it away
from face before starting to breath.
3.
Dispose of wet filters from air purifying respirator.
4.
Carefully wash face piece of respirator inside and out.
5.
Shower completely with soap and water. Rinse thoroughly.
6.
Rinse shower room walls and floor prior to exit.
7.
Proceed from shower to Changing Room and change into street clothes or into
new disposable work items.
1.8.6 LIMITATIONS WITHIN WORK AREA:
Ensure that workers do not eat, drink, smoke, chew gum or tobacco, or in any way break the
protection of the respiratory protection system in the work area.
1.9
DECONTAMINATION FACILITIES:
1.9.1 DESCRIPTION
Provide each work area with separate personnel and equipment decontamination facilities.
Ensure that the PDF are the only means of ingress and egress for the work area and that all
equipment, bagged waste material and other material exit the work area only through the
equipment decontamination facilities (EDF). See drawings for minimum requirements of each
arrangement and
OSHA regulation 29 CFR 1926.1101.
1.9.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
All persons entering and exiting the work area shall follow the entry and exit procedures required
by the applicable regulations and these specifications. Process all equipment and material
exiting the work area through the EDF and decontaminate as required by the specifications.
Construct walls and ceilings of PDF and EDF airtight with at least 6-mil flame resistant
polyethylene sheeting and attach to existing building components or to a temporary framework.
Use a minimum of 2 layers of 6-mil opaque flame resistant polyethylene to cover floor under
PDF. Construct doors from overlapping flame resistant polyethylene sheets so that they overlap
adjacent surfaces. Weigh sheets at bottom so that they quickly close after release. Put arrow on
sheets showing direction of overlap and travel. If building is partially occupied construct solid
barrier on the public site to protect sheeting. When a pressure differential system is selected and
approved by VA Representative, PDF and EDF openings will be of rigid fire retardant
211
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
construction such as plywood or sheet rock with a rigid rubber flanged door to restrict air flow
into work area from adjacent areas. Construct rigid enclosures as indicated on drawings with fire
retardant lumber.
1.9.3 PERSONNEL DECONTAMINATION FACILITIES (PDF):
A.
Provide a PDF consisting of serial arrangement of change room, shower room and
equipment room. Provide adequately sized PDF to accommodate the number of
employees scheduled for the project. The center chamber of the three chamber PDF shall
be fitted with as many portable walk through shower stalls as necessary so that all
employees will be able to go through the entire decontamination procedure within 15
minutes. Construct PDF of opaque or colored flame-resistant polyethylene for privacy.
Construct PDF so that it will not allow for parallel routes of exit without showering.
B.
Changing room for PDF: The changing room of the PDF must be physically and visually
separated from the rest of the building for the purpose of worker changing into protective
clothing or dressing into street clothing. Construct using 6-mil minimum thickness
polyethylene sheeting to provide an airtight room. Provide a minimum of two, three feet
wide flapped doorways constructed from sheet polyethylene. One doorway shall be from
the outside and one from the shower. Maintain floor of this room dry and clean at all
times. Do not allow overflow from shower into this room. Damp wipe all surfaces twice
after each shift change with a disinfectant solution. Provide in this room adequate supply
of disposable or recyclable bath towels and protective clothing. Provide 1 storage locker
per employee, benches for employees to sit on and all other components indicated on the
drawings. Provide a portable type "ABC" fire extinguisher in this room as per NFPA
Standard 10. Require all persons to remove all street clothes in this room, dress in
disposable or recyclable protective clothes, dress with cleanly laundered warm wear and
disposable or recyclable protective clothes, and respiratory protection equipment. Ensure
that any person entering this room will do so either from outside with street clothes or
from the showers completely naked and thoroughly washed. If a female is required to
enter or exit the work area make all necessary provisions to ensure her privacy
throughout the decontamination process.
C.
Airlock: Provide an airlock between shower and clean room. This is a transit area for
workers. Separate this room from the rest of the building with curtained doorways and
airtight walls fabricated of 6-mil polyethylene.
D.
Showers Room of PDF: The showers room of PDF provides a completely water tight
operational compartment to be used for transit of all persons entering the work area from
the changing room, or for showering by all persons headed out of the work area after
undressing in the equipment room. Construct each stall and shower walls so that water
running down the walls will drip into the pan. Install a freely draining smooth wooden
floor on top of shower pan. Separate this room from the rest of the building and the
adjacent equipment and changing rooms with the air tight walls fabricated of a minimum
6-mil flame-resistant polyethylene. Provide splash proof entrances to changing and
equipment rooms with two doors arranged as follows:
212
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.
At each entrance to the shower room, construct door frame from 2'x4' lumber with
1-1/2" head and sill. Attach to the frame two overlapping flaps of rubber roofing
material, fastened at the head and jambs. Overlap flaps at least 6" in a direction
that presents a shingle-like configuration to the water stream from the shower.
Overlap sill by 1-1/2" minimum. Arrange so that any air movement from the work
area will cause the flaps to seal against the door frame. At one foot toward
shower from each entrance to the shower room construct a second 2'x4' door
head. Attach to this head a one piece flap of rubber roofing material fastened at
the top, overlapping onto each side of the shower unit by 1-1/2" minimum and
stopping 1" clear of floor. Provide shower heads and controls, temporary cold and
hot water and drainage, soap dish and continuous supply of soap and maintain
sanitary conditions. Arrange controls so that a single individual can shower
without assistance. Provide flexible hoses shower head, hose bib and all other
items shown on drawings. Pump waste water to drain or storage for use as
amended water. If pumped to drain, provide 20 micron and 5 micron waste water
filters in line to drain. Change filters daily. Locate filters inside shower so that
water lost during filter changes drains into shower pan. Hose down all surfaces of
the showers room after each shift and clean debris from the shower pan. Dispose
of residue as asbestos contaminated waste.
E.
Airlock: Provide an airlock between shower and equipment room. This is a transit area
for workers. Separate this room from the rest of the building with curtained doorways
and airtight walls fabricated of 6-mil polyethylene.
F.
Equipment Room of PDF: The equipment room of the PDF provides a completely
airtight compartment to be used to store work equipment, reusable footwear and warm
clothing and as a transit and change station. Separate this room from the work area by a
minimum 3` wide flap door of 6 mil flame-resistant polyethylene sheeting. Separate this
room from the shower room, the work area and other rooms with airtight walls and
ceiling constructed of a minimum 6 mil flame-resistant polyethylene sheeting. If the
airborne asbestos level in the work area is expected to be higher than .5 f/cc (i.e.,dry
removal operations),add an intermediate cleaning space between the equipment room and
the work area. Damp wipe all surfaces of the equipment room after each shift change.
Provide an additional floor layer of 6-mil clear polyethylene sheeting per shift change
and remove contaminated layer after each shift. Provide temporary electrical sub-panel
in this room to accommodate any power tools and equipment in work area. Provide
benches for workers to sit on.
1.9.4 EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION FACILITIES (EDF):
Provide an EDF consisting of a serial arrangement of an airlock, wash room, airlock, and
holding room (clean room) for removal of equipment and material from work area. Do not allow
entry or exit of people through EDF for other than emergencies. Clean debris and residue from
inside EDF on a daily basis. Wipe down or hose down all surfaces after each shift and clean
shower pan from debris.
213
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
A.
Airlock: Provide an airlock between work area and wash room. This is a transit area for
waste and equipment. Separate this room from the rest of the building with curtained
doorways and airtight walls fabricated of 6-mil polyethylene.
B.
Wash down station: Provide an enclosed shower unit located in work area just outside
wash room as an equipment, bag and container cleaning station. Provide wash room for
cleaning of bagged or containerized asbestos-containing waste materials passed from the
work area. Construct wash room of 2'x4' wood framing and polyethylene sheeting, at
least 6-mil in thickness. Locate room so that packaged materials, after being wiped clean
can be passed to the Holding Room.
C.
Wash Room: Provide wash room for cleaning of bagged or containerized asbestos
containing waste materials passed from the work area. Construct wash room of 2'x4'
wood framing and flame resistant polyethylene sheeting, at least 6 mil in thickness.
Locate room so that packaged materials, after being wiped clean can be passed to the
holding Room. Separate this room from the work area by a single flap of 6 mil
polyethylene sheeting.
D.
Airlock: Provide an airlock between holding room and wash room. This is a transit area
for waste and equipment. Separate this room from the rest of the building with curtained
doorways and airtight walls fabricated of 6-mil polyethylene.
E.
Holding Room: Provide Holding Room as a drop location for bagged asbestos containing
materials passed from the wash room. Construct clean room of 2'x4' wood framing and
polyethylene sheeting, at least 6 mil thickness and located so that bagged materials can
not be passed from the wash room through the Holding Room to the Clean Room.
Separate this room from the adjacent rooms by double flaps fabricated from +/- 1/16 inch
thick single ply rubber roofing material either EDPM (ethylene-propylene diene
monomer) or neoprene.
F.
Clean Room: Provide a clean room to isolate the holding room from the building exterior.
Separate this room from the exterior by a single flap of 6 mil polyethylene sheeting.
When a pressure differential system is selected, a rigid enclosure separation between the
EDF clean room and adjacent areas will be constructed.
1.9.5 TEMPORARY UTILITIES TO PDF AND EDF:
Provide temporary water service connection to the PDF and the EDF. Provide backflow
protection at the point of connection to the VA system. Provide UL rated 40-gallon electric hot
water heater to supply hot water at a minimum of 100 degrees F to the showers of the PDF. The
contractor shall be responsible for providing a licensed electrician and plumber to make his
connections to the VAMC system for temporary electricity and water.
Hot water may be secured from the building hot water system if authorized in writing by the
representative and provided that backflow protection will be installed at the point of connection.
214
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Water supply must be properly pressurized and temperature balanced at shower discharge.
Provide temporary electric power with ground fault protection and overhead wiring throughout
the PDF and EDF. Provide sub-panel for all temporary power in changing room. Provide
lighting to reach 50 foot candles throughout PDF and EDF. Provide temporary heat to maintain
70 F throughout PDF and EDF except that shower of PDF shall be maintained at 75 F.
1.9.6 EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES:
At washdown station, thoroughly wet-clean contaminated equipment and/or sealed polyethylene
bags and pass into wash room. When passing equipment and or containers into the wash room,
close all doorways of the EDF, other than the doorway between the washdown station and the
wash room. Keep all outside personnel clear of the EDF. Once inside the washroom, wet-clean
the bags and/or equipment. When cleaning is complete pass items into Holding Room. Close all
doorways except the doorway between the holding room and the clean room. Workers from the
building exterior shall enter holding room area and remove decontaminated equipment and/or
containers for disposal. Require these workers to wear full protective clothing and appropriate
respiratory protection. At no time is a worker from an uncontaminated area allowed to enter the
enclosure when a removal worker is inside.
1.10
NEGATIVE PRESSURE FILTRATION SYSTEMS:
Asbestos Contractor shall provide enough HEPA filtered negative air units to completely
exchange the work air 4 times/hour. For dry removals increase room air changes to 6.
Contractor shall demonstrate the number of units needed per work area for 4 room air changes by
calculating the volume flow rate (cfm) delivered by each unit under 2 inches pressure drop
across filters. Provide at least one standby unit in the event of a machine failure or emergency
such as contamination in surrounding non-work area. When a pressure differential system is
selected provide enough HEPA filtration units to filter and recirculate the air in the work area at
a rate of 4 room air changes per hour.
1.10.1
SUBMITTALS:
Not Applicable.
1.10.2 NEGATIVE AIR MACHINES (HEPA UNITS):
Not Applicable.
1.10.3 PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL:
Not Applicable.
1.10.4 MONITORING:
Not Applicable.
215
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.10.5 AUXILIARY GENERATOR:
Not Applicable.
1.10.6 SUPPLEMENTAL MAKE-UP AIR INLETS:
Not Applicable.
1.10.7 TESTING THE SYSTEM:
Not Applicable.
1.10.8 DEMONSTRATION OF NEGATIVE AIR SYSTEM OPERATION:
Not Applicable.
1.10.9 USE OF SYSTEM DURING ABATEMENT OPERATIONS:
Not Applicable.
1.10.10
DISMANTLING THE SYSTEM:
Not Applicable.
1.11
CONTAINMENT BARRIERS AND COVERINGS OF WORK AREA:
1.11.1 GENERAL:
Not Applicable.
1.11.2 PREPARATION PRIOR TO SEALING OFF:
Not Applicable.
1.11.3 CONTROL ACCESS TO WORK AREA:
Permit access to the work area only through the personnel decontamination facilities (PDF). All
other means of access shall be closed off and sealed and warning signs displayed on the clean
side of the sealed access. Where the work area is immediately adjacent to or within view of
occupied areas, provide a visual barrier of opaque flame-resistant polyethylene sheeting at least
6-mil thickness so that the work procedures are not visible to building occupants. Where the
area adjacent to the work area is accessible to the public, construct a sturdy barrier able to
withstand the negative pressure as specified. Construct barrier with nominal 2'x4' wood or metal
studs 16" on center, securely anchored to prevent movement, covered with minimum 3/8"
plywood. All wood must be fire retardant.
216
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Provide warning signs at each visual and physical barrier per OSHA requirements. Alternate
method of containing the work area or different definition of the limits of seal-off from the one
shown on the drawings may be submitted to the VA's representative for approval in accordance
with this section. Do not proceed with any such alterations without prior written approval by the
VA. Post asbestos warning signs.
1.11.4 CRITICAL BARRIERS:
Not Applicable.
1.11.5 PRIMARY BARRIERS:
Not Applicable.
1.11.6 EXTENSION OF WORK AREA:
Not Applicable.
1.11.7 SECONDARY BARRIERS:
Not Applicable.
1.12
MONITORING, INSPECTION AND TESTING:
1.12.1 GENERAL:
A.
Perform throughout abatement work monitoring, inspection and testing inside the work
area in accordance with OSHA requirements and these specifications. The C.P.I.H. shall
inspect and oversee the performance of the Contractor I.H. Technician. I.H. Technician
shall continuously inspect and monitor conditions inside the work area to ensure
compliance with these specifications. In addition, the C.P.I.H. shall personally manage
air sample collection, analysis and evaluation for personal and work area samples to
satisfy OSHA requirements. Additional inspection and testing requirements are specified
in other parts of this section.
B.
The VA will employ an independent industrial hygienist (V.P.I.H.) consultant to perform
various services on behalf of the VA. The V.P.I.H. consultant will perform the necessary
monitoring, inspection, testing and other support services to ensure that VA patients,
employees and visitors will not be adversely impacted by the abatement work, and the
abatement work proceeds in accordance with these specifications, that the abated areas or
abated buildings have been successfully decontaminated. The work of the V.P.I.H.
consultant in no way relieves the abatement contractor from his responsibility to perform
his work in accordance with contract documents, to perform continuous inspection,
monitoring and testing for the safety of his employees, and to perform other such services
as specified in this section. The cost of the VA, V.P.I.H. consultant and his services will
be born by the VA except for repeated final inspection and testing that may be required
217
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
due to unsatisfactory initial results. These repeated final inspections and testing, if
required, will be paid for by the contractor.
C.
If fibers counted by the V.P.I.H. consultant during abatement work, either inside or
outside the work area utilizing NIOSH 7400 air monitoring method exceed the specified
respective limits, then contractor shall stop work. Asbestos contractor may request
confirmation of above results by analysis of samples with TEM. Request must be in
writing and submitted to the VA representative. Cost for the confirmation of results will
be born by the contractor for both the collection of samples and for the time delay that
may result for this confirmation. Confirmation sampling and analysis will be the
responsibility of the C.P.I.H. with review and approval by the V.P.I.H. An agreement
between the two I.H.'s will be reached on the exact details of the confirmation effort in
writing including such things as number of samples, location, collection, quality control
on-site, analytical laboratory, interpretation of results and follow up action. This
agreement shall be co-signed by both I.H.'s and delivered to the VA representative.
1.12.2 OUTLINE SCOPE OF SERVICES OF THE V.P.I.H. CONSULTANT:
A.
The purpose of the work of the V.P.I.H. consultant is to: Assure quality, resolve
problems, and prevent the spread of contamination beyond the work area. In addition,
the consultants work includes performance, final inspection and testing, to determine
whether a space or building has been adequately decontaminated. All air monitoring is to
be done utilizing PCM with an option to utilize TEM after approval from the VA
representative. The V.P.I.H. consultant will perform the following tasks:
1.
TASK 1: Establish background levels a day before abatement work will start.
This will include taking background samples (at least 5) and retaining samples for
possible TEM analysis.
2.
TASK 2: Perform continuous air monitoring, inspection and testing outside the
work area during actual abatement work to detect any faults.
3.
TASK 3: Perform unannounced site visits to spot check overall compliance of
work with contract documents. These visits may include any inspection,
monitoring and testing inside and outside the work area and all aspects of
operation except personnel monitoring.
4.
TASK 4: Provide support to the VA representative such as evaluation of
submittals from the abatement contractor, resolution of unforeseen developments
in abatement work etc.
5.
TASK 5: Perform, in the presence of the Va representative, final inspection and
testing of a decontaminated area or building at the conclusion of the abatement
and cleanup work to certify compliance with VA decontamination standards.
218
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
6.
TASK 6: Issue certification of decontamination for each area or building and
project report.
B.
All data, inspection results and testing results generated by the V.P.I.H. consultant will be
available to the contractor for information and consideration. Contractor shall provide
cooperation and support to the V.P.I.H. consultant for efficient and smooth performance
of their work.
C.
Monitoring and inspection results of the V.P.I.H. consultant will be used by the VA to
issue any stop removal orders to the contractor during abatement work and to accept or
reject area or a building as decontaminated. The V.P.I.H. consultant will make available
to the contractor the plan for sample collection and analysis for continuous monitoring
outside the work areas and the plan of final inspection and testing for each space or
building prior to executing each plan. Plan will include location for samples, name and
qualification of person taking samples, lab analysis procedures, methodology of analysis.
lab information and qualifications of laboratory analyst.
1.12.3 MONITORING, INSPECTION AND TESTING BY ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR:
The C.P.I.H. is responsible for managing all monitoring, inspection and testing required by these
specification, the OSHA regulation 29 CFR 1926.1101, and for continuous monitoring of all subsystems and procedures effecting the safety of the contractor's employees.
Safety of the contractor's employees and providing safe conditions inside the work area for all
persons entering is the exclusive responsibility of the contractor. The person performing the
personnel and area monitoring inside the work area (OSHA "Competent Person") shall be an I.H.
technician, who shall have specialized field experience in air sampling. A minimum of two
training courses on asbestos sampling and analysis and participation in five abatement projects
collecting personal and area samples are minimum qualifications requirements. The analytical
laboratory that will be used by the contractor to analyze the samples shall be AIHA P.A.T.
accredited. Keep a daily log of personnel and area samples taken and analyzed and make such
log available to the VA Representative. Log shall contain information on the person sampled,
the date of sample collection the time of sample start and finish, flow rate, sample volume and
fibers/cc. Take and analyze personal samples for at least 25% of the workers in each shift, but
not less than two, and one area sample per 1000 sq. ft. of work space per shift but not less than
one per room where active abatement takes place. An asbestos Analyst Registry (AIHA)
registered microscopist is required if on site analysis is to be performed. In addition to the
continuous monitoring required, the C.P.I.H. will perform inspection and testing at the final
stages of abatement for each work area or building as specified elsewhere in this section. Air
samples collected for clearance monitoring must be submitted on VA form 10-0018.
1.13
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES (SOP):
Asbestos contractor shall have established a standard operating procedures (SOP) in printed form
and loose leaf folder consisting of simplified text, diagrams, sketches and pictures that establish
and explains clearly the ways and procedures to be followed during all phases of work by his
219
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
employees. The SOP must be modified as necessary to address any specific requirements of the
project and shall be submitted for review and approval prior to the start of any abatement work.
The minimum topics and areas to be covered by the SOP are as follows:
1.14
A.
Minimum Personnel Qualifications.
B.
Contingency Plans and Arrangements.
C.
Security and Fire and Safety in the Work place.
D.
Respiratory Protection Systems and Training.
E.
Worker Protection, Medical Examinations, Recordkeeping, Protective clothing,
Entering and Exiting procedures.
F.
Work Area Limitations
G.
Decontamination Facilities, PDF and EDF.
H.
Containment Barriers and coverings of Work Area.
I.
Monitoring, Inspection and Testing.
J.
Project Close-out.
K.
Project Decontamination.
L.
Disposal of ACM and ACE Waste.
SUBMITTAL:
1.14.1 PRECONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS:
Submit to the VA representative a minimum of 14 days prior to the pre-construction meeting the
following for review and approval. Conformance to these requirements is a prerequisite for the
pre-construction meeting of this project:
A.
Detailed work schedule for the entire project reflecting contract documents and the
phasing and schedule requirements from the CPM chart.
B.
Staff organization chart showing all persons to be employed in what capacity. Their
identification and qualifications, the "Certification of Worker`s training" and the
"Affidavit of Medical Surveillance and Respiratory Protection". Provide evidence of
qualifications, training and licensing.
220
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C.
Tailor made standard operating procedure for this project prepared by the C.P.I.H., dated
and signed.
D.
The specifics of the material and equipment to be used for this project with brand names,
model numbers, performance characteristics, pictures or diagrams, and number available,
for the following:
1.
Air supply system, negative pressure air units, HEPA vacuum, air monitoring
pumps and calibration devices, pressure differential monitor, recorder and
emergency power systems.
2.
Waste water filtration system, shower stall and containment barriers.
3.
Encapsulant sprayers, low pressure water sprayers, bridging encapsulant, glovebags, removal tools and fire extinguisher.
4.
Respirators and protective clothing.
5.
Fire and Safety equipment to be used in the abatement areas.
E.
Name, location and phone number of the landfill, proof that landfill is approved for ACM
disposal, the type of trucks for waste transportation, and if a waste disposal subcontractor will be used, provide name, permits for disposal if applicable, address and
phone number of sub contractor.
F.
Specific notifications and arrangements made with regulatory entities having jurisdiction
and the specific contingency arrangements made with local health, fire and safety
authorities and any other notifications and arrangements required by the specification.
G.
Name, location and qualification of the analytical laboratory to be used for the analysis of
samples required to meet OSHA regulations 29 CFR 1926. If on site analysis is
performed, provide VA a copy of the Asbestos Analyst Registration (AIHA) of the
microscopist who performed the work.
H.
Qualifications Verification: Submit the following evidence of qualifications. Ensure that
all references are current and verifiable by phone numbers provided and documentation
submitted.
1.
ABATEMENT CONSTRUCTION COMPANY:
a.
Project experience. Submit the following information for projects completed
within last 3 years, 3 of which are of comparable complexity and dollar value):
Project Type abatement
Name (Pipe,sprayed) cost
Duration
Reference
Name Final Date
phone No
Clear. Comp.
221
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
b.
List of projects halted by owner, A/E or I.H. consultant in last 5 years:
Project Reason for
Date
Name
Action
Reference Name and
Telephone Number
c.
List asbestos abatement citations, penalties, damages paid and legal actions taken
against the company in the last five years. Provide full references for easy
verification.
d.
List with full explanations, default(s) on any asbestos abatement project within
the last 3 years.
2.
PERSONNEL
Provide a resume; address each item specifically and completely, provide references,
phone numbers, copies of certificates, etc. Provide an affidavit signed by C.P.I.H. stating
that all personnel submitted below have medical records in accordance with OSHA 29
CFR 1926.1101 and the company follows a medical surveillance program and record
keeping in accordance with regulations. Provide name and phone number of medical
doctor utilized.
a.
C.P.I.H.: Name, years of abatement experience, list of projects participated
(information similar to H.1. above) certificates of courses of specialized asbestos
training, professional affiliations, number of workers trained, samples of training
material developed, samples of standard operating procedures developed and
samples of articles published, medical certificate, licenses and permits (must
include certificate showing completion of AHERA training).
b.
Superintendent and Foremen: Number, Name, Social Security number, years of
abatement experience, years of abatement experience as superintendent and
foreman, list of projects (information similar to H.I. above) as superintendent, as
foreman and as laborer, certificate of courses of specialized training (must include
certificate showing completion of AHERA training), and maximum number of
laborers supervised in anyone project. Medical Certificate and licenses.
c.
Laborers: Name, social security number, years of abatement experience,
certificates of training courses in asbestos abatement (must include certificate
222
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
showing completion of AHERA training) and respiratory protection,
qualitative/qualitative fit test (y,n), state certification.
3.
LICENSES, INSURANCE, STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Provide copies of the following: information on who provides training and how
often, who provides medical surveillance and how often, how is air monitoring
executed and list references of independent laboratories and I.H.'s familiar with
your air monitoring and your standard operating procedure. Provide copies of
monitoring results of five referenced projects listed under in Minimum
Qualification section. Describe analytical methods used on these projects.
I.
ENCAPSULATION REQUIREMENTS
Not Applicable.
J.
LOCK-BACK ENCAPSULANTS
Not Applicable.
1.14.2 SUBMITTALS DURING ABATEMENT:
A.
Maintain a daily log at the job site documenting the dates and times of the following:
Meetings, purpose, attendees and brief discussion; all persons entering/exiting work area;
special or unusual events, such as barrier breaching, equipment failures, emergencies and
any cause for stop of work; air monitoring tests and tests results; submit complete daily
log to the VA's Representative.
B.
The C.P.I.H. shall document the following events during mechanical work and submit to
the VA Representative:
1.
Inspection of work area preparation prior to start of mechanical work in the crawl
space and daily during work.
2.
Removal of any polyethylene barriers.
3.
Inspection and testing by the C.P.I.H. prior to the lock-back encapsulation.
4.
Removal and disposal of waste material from work area.
5.
Decontamination of equipment. Provide list of item.
6.
Disposal of ACM and ACE waste materials: Submit copies of all manifests and
landfill receipts to the VA Representative on a weekly basis.
1.14.3 SUBMITTALS AT COMPLETION OF ABATEMENT:
223
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
The C.P.I.H. shall submit to the VA Representative an asbestos report consisting of the daily log
book and the documentation of events during abatement including the original disposal manifests
signed by operator of licensed landfill. The project report shall include a certificate of
completion in accordance with attachment #1, dated and signed by the C.P.I.H. All certificates
and original disposal manifests are due to the VA Representative office within 30 (thirty) days
after completion of abatement work. All clearance and perimeter samples must be submitted on
VA form 10-0018. The VA Representative will forward the abatement report to the Medical
Center after completion of this project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIAL
2.1
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT:
2.1.1 PREPARATION:
Prior to the start of the work contractor shall provide and maintain a sufficient quantity of
materials and equipment to assure continuous and efficient work throughout the project. Do not
start work unless the following items have been delivered on site and the C.P.I.H. has submitted
verification to the VA Representative to this effect:
A.
Flame-Resistant polyethylene sheeting 6 and 10 mil in clear, opaque and black shades,
moisture resistant duct tape capable to continuously sealing polyethylene through project
abatement duration, lumber, drywall and plywood for enclosure, posters, signs and
notices.
B.
Installation and plumbing hardware, shower stalls, hoses, drain pans, sump pumps and
water storage drums or waste water filters.
C.
Scrapers, brushes, brooms, staple guns, shovels, ladders and scaffolds of suitable height
and length, water hose to reach all areas, airless spray equipment, and other hand tools,
electric cords, electric power with ground fault interruption; and auxiliary generators.
D.
Impermeable drums and 6-mil polyethylene bags for asbestos containing waste; spray
adhesive free of methylene chloride to seal seams on polyethylene material; glove-bags
and penetrating encapsulants.
E.
Respirators, disposable and recyclable protective clothing, goggles and footwear.
2.1.2 PACKAGING OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:
Deliver materials to the job site in their original packaging or containers. Store all materials
away from damage, weather, and contamination. Protect polyethylene from cold exposure. Do
not store flammable material inside buildings. Inspect material regularly for damage,
deterioration or contamination. Discard any damaged material. Discard ACM per these
224
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
specifications. Do not block or hinder use of buildings by patients, employees and visitors of
VA in partially occupied buildings by placing material in any unauthorized place.
2.2
ENCAPSULANTS:
2.2.1 TYPES OF ENCAPSULANTS:
The following four types of encapsulants must comply with performance requirements stated in
paragraph 2.2.2.
A.
Removal Encapsulant: Used as a wetting agent to remove ACM.
B.
Bridging Encapsulant: Provides a tough, durable surface coating on ACM.
C.
Penetrating Encapsulant: Penetrate the ACM in excess of one half inch, encapsulating all
asbestos fibers.
D.
Lock-down Encapsulant: Seals or "locks-down" minute asbestos fibers left on surface in
spaces from which ACM has been removed.
2.2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
Not Applicable.
2.2.3 CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE:
Not Applicable.
2.3
RECYCLABLE PROTECTIVE CLOTHING:
Not Applicable.
PART 3 -
EXECUTION:
3.1
PRE-ABATEMENT ACTIVITIES:
3.1.1 PRE-ABATEMENT MEETING:
The VA Representative upon receipt, review and substantial approval of all pre-abatement
submittals and upon verification by the C.P.I.H. that all material and equipment required for the
project are on site, will arrange for a preabatement meeting between the abatement contractor,
the C.P.I.H., superintendent and foremen and the VA representatives and the V.P.I.H.
consultants. The purpose of the meeting is to discuss any aspects of the project execution and
the sequence of operations. The abatement contractor and his employees shall be prepared to
provide any supplemental evidence and information to the VA's representative pertaining to any
aspects of the submittals or the material and equipment. Upon satisfactory resolution of any
outstanding items or question, the VA representative will issue a written order to proceed to the
225
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
abatement contractor. No abatement work of any kind described in the following provisions of
these specifications shall be initiated prior to the written order to proceed.
3.1.2 PRE-ABATEMENT INSPECTION AND PREPARATIONS:
A.
Before any work begins on the containment barriers, the contractor will:
1.
Conduct a space-by-space inspection with an authorized VA Representative, and
prepare a written inventory of all existing damage in those spaces where asbestos
removal work will occur. Still or video photography may be used to supplement
this written damage inventory. Document will be signed and certified as accurate
by both parties. The VA will be responsible for relocating movable objects within
the work area.
2.
Ensure that all furniture, machinery, equipment curtains, drapes, blinds and other
movable objects which the contractor is bound to remove from the work area have
been removed or protected.
3.
The contractor will notify the VA representative on systems that need to be shut
down at least 10 days in advance. The VA representative shall coordinate
shutdown with contractor. VA facility shall perform and monitor shutdown as
required by contractor.
4.
a.
Shutdown and seal off all heating, cooling, ventilating or other air
handling system serving the work area. The environment of the work area
shall be completely isolated from all other air flows in the building. The
VA representative will monitor shutdown.
b.
Shutdown all electrical circuits which pose a potential hazard on the job.
Exact electrical arrangements will be tailored to the particular space and
systems involved. All electrical circuits will be turned off at the box
outside the removal area, not just the wall switch. Potential for electrical
shock is a major threat to life in a work area where large amounts of water
will be sprayed on ceilings, conduits, lighting fixtures and other electrical
items. Electrical lines which are used to power work lights and equipment
will conform to all electrical safety standards and will be protected by a
ground fault interrupter.
Firestopping (or lack there of) in a building to be abated must be inspected by the
contractor to determine if existing firestopping is in good condition, air-tight and
have a fire-rating equal to the walls or floors penetrated. Any discrepancies and
violations to the safety codes shall be reported to the contracting officer and
resolved before abatement commences.
3.1.3 PRE-ABATEMENT CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATIONS:
226
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
A.
Perform all preparatory work for the first work area in accordance with the approved
detailed work schedule. Execute the preparatory work in accordance with this
specification.
B.
Upon completion of all preparatory work the C.P.I.H. will inspect the work and systems
and will notify the VA Representative when such work is in accordance with this
specifications. The VA Representative may inspect the work and the systems with the
VPIH consultant and may require that upon satisfactory inspection the contractor`s
employees perform all major aspects of the approved SOP. The operating systems for the
negative pressure air system(s) shall be demonstrated for performance.
C.
C.P.I.H. shall document the preabatement activities described above and deliver a copy of
to the VA representative.
D.
Upon satisfactory inspection of the installation and systems and satisfactory
demonstration of operations the VA representative will notify the contractor in writing to
proceed with abatement work.
3.2
REMOVAL OF ACM AND ACE:
3.2.1 WETTING MATERIALS:
Not Applicable.
3.2.2 SECONDARY BARRIERS AND WALKWAYS:
A.
Install as a drop cloth a 6-mil flame resistant plastic sheeting at the beginning of each
work shift in areas where mechanical work is to be carried out during the shift.
Completely cover the floors within 10 feet from work. Secure secondary barrier with duct
tape so that debris will not get behind it. Debris must be removed at the end of each shift
or as work in an area is completed. Keep material on sheet continuously wet. Fold
plastic toward center of sheet and pack in disposable bags for disposal.
B.
Install walkways with 6-mil flame-resistant black plastic sheeting between active removal
areas and decontamination facilities (PDF and EDF) to protect primary layer from track
material. Install walkways at the beginning of, and remove at the end of each work shift.
3.2.3 WET REMOVAL OF ACM OTHER THAN AMOSITE:
Not Applicable.
3.2.4 WET REMOVAL OF AMOSITE AND DRY REMOVAL OF ACM AND OTHER
SPECIAL PROCEDURES:
Not Applicable.
227
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3.2.5 DRY REMOVAL OF ACM AND OTHER SPECIAL PROCEDURES:
Not Applicable.
3.3
ENCLOSURE OF ACM:
3.3.1 GENERAL:
Not Applicable.
3.3.2 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
Deliver materials to the job site in original and unopened packages and containers bearing
manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
A.
Name and title of material;
B.
Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture;
C.
Manufacturer's name;
D.
Thinning instructions; and
E.
Application instructions.
Deliver materials together with a copy of the OSHA Material Safety Data Sheets for the material.
MSDS shall be received and reviewed prior to approval of all materials to be used.
3.3.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Install all materials by a firm and personnel approved by the manufacturer for the primary
materials. Submit written Performance Warranty, executed by the manufacturer and co-signed
by the contractor, agreeing to repair/replace spray-on work, or any other item or material which
has cracked, fallen from substrate, or otherwise deteriorated to a condition where it would not
perform effectively for its intended purposes due substantially to defective materials or
workmanship and not due to abuse by occupants, improper maintenance, non-foreseeable
ambient exposures or other causes beyond anticipated conditions and manufacturer's/contractor's
control.
3.3.4 MONITORING OF ENCLOSURE WORK:
Not Applicable.
3.3.4 ACCEPTABLE ENCAPSULANTS
Not Applicable.
228
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3.4
REPAIR OF ACM INSULATION AND LAGGING:
Not Applicable.
3.5
LOCK BACK ENCAPSULATION:
Not Applicable.
3.6
DISPOSAL OF ACM AND ACE WASTE MATERIAL:
3.6.1 GENERAL:
Dispose all ACM waste and debris that is packaged in accordance with these specifications at the
approved landfill. Dispose of non-friable ACM in accordance with the applicable regulations
and these specifications. Ensure ACM transport vehicles are properly marked per NESHAPs and
New York State Department of Environmental Conservation (NYSDEC) requirements.
3.6.2 PROCEDURES:
A.
Carefully load containerized waste on sealed trucks for transport. Ensure that
unauthorized persons do not have access to the material outside of the work area. Take
bags from the work area directly through the EDF process to a sealed truck. Double
bagged material may be transported in open trucks only if they are first loaded in sealed
drums. Label drums with same warning labels as bags. Dispose drums as contaminated,
do not attempt to empty them for refuse.
B.
Advise the sanitary landfill operator, at least 24 hours in advance of transport, of the
quantity of material to be delivered. At the burial site, sealed plastic bags may be
carefully dumped from the truck. If bags are broken or damaged, leave in the truck and
decontaminate entire truck and contents using procedures set forth elsewhere in this
section.
3.7
PROJECT DECONTAMINATION:
3.7.1 GENERAL:
A.
The entire work of project decontamination shall be performed under the close
supervision and monitoring of the C.P.I.H.
3.7.2 WORK AREA CLEARANCE:
Air testing and other requirements which must be met before release of contractor and reoccupancy of the work area are specified elsewhere in this Section.
3.7.3 WORK DESCRIPTION:
229
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
A.
The work of decontamination includes the decontamination and removal of temporary
facilities installed prior to abatement work including primary and critical barrier and
decontamination facilities (PDF and EDF).
3.7.4 PRE-DECONTAMINATION CONDITIONS:
Not Applicable.
3.7.5 FIRST CLEANING:
Not Applicable.
3.7.6 PRE-CLEARANCE INSPECTION AND TESTING:
Not Applicable.
3.7.7 LOCK-BACK ENCAPSULATION OF WORK SURFACES:
Not Applicable.
3.7.8
SECOND CLEANING:
Not Applicable.
3.7.9 THIRD CLEANING:
Not Applicable.
3.7.10 FINAL CLEANING:
Not Applicable.
3.8
FINAL INSPECTION AND TESTING:
3.8.1 GENERAL:
Not Applicable.
3.8.2 FINAL INSPECTION:
Not Applicable.
3.8.3 FINAL TESTING:
Not Applicable.
230
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3.8.4 FINAL TESTING PROCEDURES:
Not Applicable.
3.8.5 SCHEDULE OF AIR SAMPLES WITH PCM:
Not Applicable.
3.8.6 TEM SAMPLING:
Not Applicable.
3.8.7 LABORATORY TESTING FOR PCM:
Not Applicable.
3.8.8 LABORATORY TESTING FOR TEM:
Not Applicable.
3.9
ABATEMENT CLOSE OUT AND CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE:
3.9.1 COMPLETION OF ABATEMENT WORK:
Not Applicable.
3.9.2 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION BY CONTRACTORS:
The C.P.I.H. shall complete and sign a "Certificate of Completion" in accordance with
attachment #1 at the completion of the abatement and decontamination of a work area.
***END OF SECTION 02 82 11 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT ***
SECTION 06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
231
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
Section specifies wood blocking, furring, nailers, rough hardware, and light wood
construction.
1.2 RELATED WORK:
A. Milled woodwork: Section 06 20 00, FINISH CARPENTRY.
1.3 SUMBITTALS:
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Shop Drawings showing framing connection details, fasteners, connections and
dimensions.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Protect lumber and other products from dampness both during and after delivery at site.
B. Pile lumber in stacks in such manner as to provide air circulation around surfaces of each
piece.
C. Stack plywood and other board products so as to prevent warping.
D. Locate stacks on well drained areas, supported at least 150 mm (6 inches) above grade
and cover with well ventilated sheds having firmly constructed over hanging roof with
sufficient end wall to protect lumber from driving rain.
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:
A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced.
Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.
B. American Forest and Paper Association (AFPA):
National Design Specification for Wood Construction
NDS-05 ..................................Conventional Wood Frame Construction
C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
B18.2.1A-96(R2005) .............Square and Hex Bolts and Screws
B18.2.2-87(R2005) ................Square and Hex Nuts
B18.6.1-81 (R97) ...................Wood Screws
B18.6.4-98(R2005) ................Thread Forming and Thread Cutting Tapping Screws and
Metallic Drive Screws
232
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
D. American Plywood Association (APA):
E30-03 ....................................Engineered Wood Construction Guide
E. American Society for Testing And Materials (ASTM):
A47-99(R2004) ......................Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
A48-03 ...................................Gray Iron Castings
A653/A653M-07 ....................Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy
Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process
C954-04..................................Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or
Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 inch (2.24
mm) to 0.112-inch (2.84 mm) in thickness
C1002-04................................Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of
Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood
Studs or Metal Studs
D143-94(R2004) ....................Small Clear Specimens of Timber, Method of Testing
D1760-01 ...............................Pressure Treatment of Timber Products
D3498-03 ...............................Adhesives for Field-Gluing Plywood to Lumber Framing
for Floor Systems
F844-07 ..................................Washers, Steel, Plan (Flat) Unhardened for General Use
F1667-05 ................................Nails, Spikes, and Staples
F. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
MM-L-736C ...........................Lumber; Hardwood
G. Commercial Item Description (CID):
A-A-55615
Shield, Expansion (Wood Screw and Lag Bolt Self Threading Anchors)
H. Military Specification (Mil. Spec.):
MIL-L-19140E .......................Lumber and Plywood, Fire-Retardant Treated
I. U.S. Department of Commerce Product Standard (PS)
PS 1-95 ...................................Construction and Industrial Plywood
PS 20-05 .................................American Softwood Lumber Standard
233
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER:
A. Unless otherwise specified, each piece of lumber bear grade mark, stamp, or other
identifying marks indicating grades of material, and rules or standards under which
produced.
1. Identifying marks in accordance with rule or standard under which material is
produced, including requirements for qualifications and authority of the inspection
organization, usage of authorized identification, and information included in the
identification.
2. Inspection agency for lumber approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber
Standards Committee, to grade species used.
B. Lumber Other Than Structural:
1. Unless otherwise specified, species graded under the grading rules of an inspection
agency approved by Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee.
2. Framing lumber: Minimum extreme fiber stress in bending of 1100.
3. Furring, blocking, nailers and similar items 100 mm (4 inches) and narrower Standard
Grade; and, members 150 mm (6 inches) and wider, Number 2 Grade.
C. Sizes:
1. Conforming to Prod. Std., PS20.
2. Size references are nominal sizes, unless otherwise specified, actual sizes within
manufacturing tolerances allowed by standard under which produced.
D. Moisture Content:
1. At time of delivery and maintained at the site.
2. Boards and lumber 50 mm (2 inches) and less in thickness: 19 percent or less.
3. Lumber over 50 mm (2 inches) thick: 25 percent or less.
E. Fire Retardant Treatment:
1. Mil Spec. MIL-L-19140 with piece of treated material bearing identification of
testing agency and showing performance rating.
2. Treatment and performance inspection, by an independent and qualified testing
agency that establishes performance ratings.
234
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2.2 PLYWOOD
A. Comply with Prod. Std., PS 1.
B. Bear the mark of a recognized association or independent inspection agency that
maintains continuing control over quality of plywood which identifies compliance by
veneer grade, group number, span rating where applicable, and glue type.
2.3 ROUGH HARDWARE AND ADHESIVES:
A. Anchor Bolts:
1. ASME B18.2.1 and ANSI B18.2.2 galvanized, 13 mm (1/2 inch) unless shown
otherwise.
2. Extend at least 200 mm (8 inches) into masonry or concrete with ends bent 50 mm (2
inches).
B. Miscellaneous Bolts: Expansion Bolts: C1D, A-A-55615; lag bolt, long enough to extend
at least 65 mm (2-1/2 inches) into masonry or concrete. Use 13 mm (1/2 inch) bolt unless
shown otherwise.
C. Washers
1. ASTM F844.
2. Use zinc or cadmium coated steel or cast iron for washers exposed to weather.
D. Screws:
1. Wood to Wood: ANSI B18.6.1 or ASTM C1002.
2. Wood to Steel: ASTM C954, or ASTM C1002.
E. Nails:
1. Size and type best suited for purpose unless noted otherwise. Use aluminum-alloy
nails, plated nails, or zinc-coated nails, for nailing wood work exposed to weather and
on roof blocking.
2. ASTM F1667:
a. Common: Type I, Style 10.
b. Concrete: Type I, Style 11.
c. Barbed: Type I, Style 26.
d. Underlayment: Type I, Style 25.
e. Masonry: Type I, Style 27.
235
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF FRAMING AND MISCELLANEOUS WOOD MEMBERS:
A. Conform to applicable requirements of the following:
1. AFPA National Design Specification for Wood Construction for timber connectors.
3. AFPA WCD-number 1, Manual for House Framing for nailing and framing unless
specified otherwise.
4. APA for installation of plywood panels.
B. Fasteners:
1. Nails.
a. Nail in accordance with the Recommended Nailing Schedule as specified in
AFPA Manual for House Framing where detailed nailing requirements are not
specified in nailing schedule. Select nail size and nail spacing sufficient to
develop adequate strength for the connection without splitting the members.
b. Use special nails with framing connectors.
c. For sheathing, select length of nails sufficient to extend 25 mm (1 inch) into
supports.
d. Use eight penny or larger nails for nailing through 25 mm (1 inch) thick lumber
and for toe nailing 50 mm (2 inch) thick lumber.
e. Use 16 penny or larger nails for nailing through 50 mm (2 inch) thick lumber.
f. Select the size and number of nails in accordance with the Nailing Schedule
except for special nails with framing anchors.
2. Bolts:
a. Fit bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood with washers.
b. Countersink bolt heads flush with the surface of nailers.
c. Embed in concrete and solid masonry or use expansion bolts. Special bolts or
screws designed for anchor to solid masonry or concrete in drilled holes may be
used.
d. Use toggle bolts to hollow masonry or sheet metal.
e. Use bolts to steel over 2.84 mm (0.112 inch, 11 gage) in thickness. Secure wood
nailers to vertical structural steel members with bolts, placed one at ends of nailer
and 600 mm (24 inch) intervals between end bolts. Use clips to beam flanges.
236
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3. Drill Screws to steel less than 2.84 mm (0.112 inch) thick.
a. ASTM C1002 for steel less than 0.84 mm (0.033 inch) thick.
b. ASTM C 954 for steel over 0.84 mm (0.033 inch) thick.
4. Power actuated drive pins may be used where practical to anchor to solid masonry,
concrete, or steel.
5. Do not anchor to wood plugs or nailing blocks in masonry or concrete. Use metal
plugs, inserts or similar fastening.
6. Screws to Join Wood:
a. Where shown or option to nails.
b. ASTM C1002, sized to provide not less than 25 mm (1 inch) penetration into
anchorage member.
c. Spaced same as nails.
C. Cut notch, or bore in accordance with NFPA Manual for House-Framing for passage of
ducts wires, bolts, pipes, conduits and to accommodate other work. Repair or replace
miscut, misfit or damaged work.
D. Blocking Nailers:
1. Install furring, blocking, nailers, and grounds where shown.
2. Use longest lengths practicable.
3. Use fire retardant treated wood blocking where shown at openings and where shown
or specified.
4. Layers of Blocking or Plates:
a. Stagger end joints between upper and lower pieces.
b. Nail at ends and not over 600 mm (24 inches) between ends.
c. Stagger nails from side to side of wood member over 125 mm (5 inches) in width.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY- - -
237
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 06 20 00
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies interior millwork.
B. Items specified.
Base and wall cabinets Nurse station
-
Counter or Work Tops
-
Tackable Wall Panels
-
Polyester resin wall paneling and trim
-
Mounting Strips, Shelves, and Rods
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Framing, furring and blocking: Section 06 10 00, ROUGH CARPENTRY.
B. Electrical light fixtures and duplex outlets: Division 26, ELECTRICAL.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Millwork items – Half full size scale for sections and details 1:50 (1/4-inch) for
elevations and plans.
2. Show construction and installation.
C. Samples:
Plastic laminate finished plywood or particleboard, polyester resin panels and solid
surfacing material, tackable wall panel fabric and substrate, 150 mm by 300 mm (six by
twelve inches).
D. Certificates:
2. Indicating moisture content of materials meet the requirements specified.
E. Manufacturer's literature and data:
1. Finish hardware
2. Sinks with fittings
3. Electrical components
238
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect lumber and millwork from dampness, maintaining moisture content specified
both during and after delivery at site.
B. Store finishing lumber and millwork in weathertight well ventilated structures or in space
in existing buildings designated by Resident Engineer. Store at a minimum temperature
of 210C (700F) for not less than 10 days before installation.
C. Pile lumber in stacks in such manner as to provide air circulation around surfaces of each
piece.
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A36/A36M-05 ........................Structural Steel
A53-06 ...................................Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded
and Seamless
A167-99 (R2004) ...................Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip
B26/B26M-05 ........................Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings
B221-06..................................Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
D792 Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of
Plastics by Displacement
E84-07 ....................................Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
F436-07 ..................................Hardened Steel Washers
C. American Hardboard Association (AHA):
A135.4-04 ..............................Basic Hardboard
D. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA):
A156.9-03 ..............................Cabinet Hardware
A156.11-04 ............................Cabinet Locks
A156.16-02 ............................Auxiliary Hardware
E. Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association (HPVA):
239
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
HP1-04 ...................................Hardwood and Decorative Plywood
F. National Particleboard Association (NPA):
A208.1-99 ..............................Wood Particleboard
G. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
B18.2.1-96(R2005) ................Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series)
H. American Wood-Preservers’ Association (AWPA):
AWPA C1-03 .........................All Timber Products – Preservative Treatment by Pressure
Processes
I. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI):
AWI-99 ..................................Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards and Quality
Certification Program
J. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
LD 3-05 ..................................High-Pressure Decorative Laminates
LD 3.1-95 ...............................Application, Fabrication and Installation of High-Pressure
Decorative Laminates
K. U.S. Department of Commerce, Product Standard (PS):
PS1-95 ....................................Construction and Industrial Plywood
PS20-05 ..................................American Softwood Lumber Standard
L. Military Specification (Mil. Spec):
MIL-L-19140E .......................Lumber and Plywood, Fire-Retardant Treated
M. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
A-A-1922A ............................Shield Expansion
A-A-1936 ...............................Contact Adhesive
FF-N-836D .............................Nut, Square, Hexagon Cap, Slotted, Castle
FF-S-111D(1) .........................Screw, Wood
MM-L-736(C) ........................Lumber, Hardwood
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER
A. Grading and Marking:
1. Lumber shall bear the grade mark, stamp, or other identifying marks indicating grades
of material.
240
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Such identifying marks on a material shall be in accordance with the rule or standard
under which the material is produced, including requirements for qualifications and
authority of the inspection organization, usage of authorized identification, and
information included in the identification.
3. The inspection agency for lumber shall be approved by the Board of Review,
American Lumber Standards Committee, to grade species used.
B. Sizes:
1. Lumber Size references, unless otherwise specified, are nominal sizes, and actual
sizes shall be within manufacturing tolerances allowed by the standard under which
product is produced.
2. Millwork, standing and running trim, and rails: Actual size as shown or specified.
C. Softwood: PS-20, exposed to view appearance grades:
1. Use C select or D select, vertical grain for transparent finish including stain
transparent finish.
2. Use Prime for painted or opaque finish.
2.2 PLYWOOD
A. Softwood Plywood:
1. Prod. Std.
2. Grading and Marking:
a. Each sheet of plywood shall bear the mark of a recognized association or
independent inspection agency that maintains continuing control over the quality
of the plywood.
b. The mark shall identify the plywood by species group or identification index, and
shall show glue type, grade, and compliance with PS1.
3. Plywood, 13 mm (1/2 inch) and thicker; not less than five ply construction, except 32
mm (1-1/4 inch) thick plywood not less than seven ply.
4. Plastic Laminate Plywood Cores:
a. Exterior Type, and species group.
b. Veneer Grade: A-C.
5. Shelving Plywood:
a. Interior Type, any species group.
241
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
b. Veneer Grade: A-B or B-C.
6. Other: As specified for item.
2.3 PARTICLEBOARD
A. NPA A208.1
B. Plastic Laminate Particleboard Cores:
1. Use Type 1, Grade 1-M-3, or Type 2, Grade 2-M-2, unless otherwise specified.
2. Use Type 2, Grade 2-M-2, exterior bond, for tops with sinks.
C. General Use: Type 1, Grade 1-M-3 or Type 2, Grade 2-M-2.
2.4 PLASTIC LAMINATE
A. NEMA LD-3.
B. Exposed decorative surfaces including countertops, both sides of cabinet doors, and for
items having plastic laminate finish. General Purpose, Type HGL.
C. Cabinet Interiors including Shelving: Both of following options to comply with NEMA,
CLS as a minimum.
1. Plastic laminate clad plywood or particle board.
2. Resin impregnated decorative paper thermally fused to particle board.
D. Backing sheet on bottom of plastic laminate covered wood tops: Backer, Type HGP.
E. Post Forming Fabrication, Decorative Surfaces: Post forming, Type HGP.
2.5 SOLID SURFACING MATERIAL
A. Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2, standard type.
2.6 ADHESIVE
A. For Plastic Laminate: Fed. Spec. A-A-1936.
B. For Interior Millwork: Unextended urea resin, unextended melamine resin, phenol resin,
or resorcinol resin.
2.7 POLYESTER RESIN PANELS
A. Engineered polyester resin panels, 1/4” thickness , minimum
2.8 STAINLESS STEEL
ASTM A167, Type 302 or 304.
2.9 SOLID HOMOGENOUS QUARTZ SURFACING MATERIAL
A. Solid homogenous quartz surfacing material, ¾” thickness.
B. Provide manufacturer recommended joint adhesive.
242
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2.10 HARDWARE
A. Rough Hardware:
1. Furnish rough hardware with a standard plating, applied after punching, forming and
assembly of parts; galvanized, cadmium plated, or zinc-coated by electric-galvanizing
process. Galvanized where specified.
2. Use galvanized coating on ferrous metal for exterior work unless non-ferrous metals
or stainless is used.
3. Fasteners:
a. Bolts with Nuts: FF-N-836.
b. Expansion Bolts: A-A-1922A.
c. Screws: Fed. Spec. FF-S-111.
B. Finish Hardware
1. Cabinet Hardware: ANSI A156.9.
a. Door/Drawer Pulls: B02011.
b. Drawer Slides: B05051 for drawers over 150 mm (6 inches) deep, B05052 for
drawers 75 mm to 150 mm 3 to 6 inches) deep, and B05053 for drawers less than
75 mm (3 inches) deep.
d. Adjustable Shelf Standards: B4061 with shelf rest B04083.
e. Concealed Hinges: B1601, minimum 110 degree opening.
g. Cabinet Door Catch: B0371 or B03172.
h. Vertical Slotted Shelf Standard: B04103 with shelf brackets B04113, sized for
shelf depth.
2. Cabinet Locks: ANSI A156.11.
a. Drawers and Hinged Door: E07262.
b. Sliding Door: E07162.
3. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI A156.16.
a. Shelf Bracket: B04041, japanned or enameled finish.
b. Desk accessory tiles: extruded aluminum tiles for desk accessory mounting with
plastic end caps and wall mounting brackets, dimensions and colors as shown on the
drawings.4.
Edge Strips Moldings:
243
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
a. PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch (3 mm) thick, matching laminate in color,
pattern, and finish.
5.
Rubber or Vinyl molding
a. Rubber or vinyl standard stock and in longest lengths practicable.
b. Design for closures at joints with walls and adhesive anchorage.
c. Adhesive as recommended by molding manufacturer.
6.
Primers: Manufacturer's standard primer for steel providing baked enamel finish.
2.11 MOISTURE CONTENT
A. Moisture content of lumber and millwork at time of delivery to site.
1. Interior finish lumber, trim, and millwork 32 mm (1-1/4 inches) or less in nominal
thickness: 12 percent on 85 percent of the pieces and 15 percent on the remainder.
3. Moisture content of other materials shall be in accordance with the standards under
which the products are produced.
2.12 TACKABLE WALL PANELS
A. Performance criteria:
1. Thickness detailed, adhesive mounting direct to substrate.
2. Composite flame spread: ASTM E84, 25 or less.
3. Smoke developed: ASTM E84, 140 or less.
B. Glass fiber panel covered with fabric.
1. Glass fiber panel, self supporting, of 6 LB./CU.FT. density with smooth facing layer.
2. Fabric covering treated to resist stains and soil, bonded directly to the glass fiber
panel face, flat bonded directly to the glass fiber panel face, flat wrinkle-free surface.
C. Adhesive: As recommended by panel manufacturers.
D. Facing fabric: 76% polyester, 24% Xorel, fire retardant Class A, color and pattern as
shown on the finish schedule on the drawings.
2.13 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Except as otherwise specified, use AWI Custom Grade for architectural woodwork
and interior millwork.
2. Finish woodwork shall be free from pitch pockets.
244
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3. Except where special profiles are shown, trim shall be standard stock molding and
members of the same species.
4. Plywood shall be not less than 13 mm (1/2 inch), unless otherwise shown or
specified.
5. Edges of members in contact with concrete or masonry shall have a square corner
caulking rebate.
6. Fabricate members less than 4 m (14 feet) in length from one piece of lumber, back
channeled and molded a shown.
7. Interior trim and items of millwork to be painted may be fabricated from jointed,
built-up, or laminated members, unless otherwise shown on drawings or specified.
8. Provide locks for all cabinets and drawers.
9. Plastic Laminate Work:
a. Factory glued to either a plywood or a particle board core, thickness as shown or
specified.
b. Cover exposed edges with plastic laminate, except where aluminum, stainless
steel, or plastic molded edge strips are shown or specified. Use plastic molded
edge strips on 19 mm (3/4-inch) molded thick or thinner core material.
c. Provide plastic backing sheet on underside of countertops, vanity tops, including
back splashes and end splashes of countertops.
d. Use backing sheet on concealed large panel surface when decorative face does not
occur.
C. Mounting Strips and Shelves:
1. Cut mounting strips from 25 mm by 100 mm (1 by 4 inches) softwood stock, with
exposed edge slightly rounded.
2. Cut wood shelf from softwood 1 inch stock, of width shown, exposed edge slightly
rounded. Option: Use 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick plywood with 19 mm (3/4 inch)
softwood edge nosing on exposed edge, slightly rounded.
3. Plastic laminate covered, 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick plywood or particle board core with
edges and ends having plastic molded edge strips. Size, finish and number as shown.
D. Solid surfacing material:
1. Thickness not less than ½ inch or as shown.
245
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Colors and patterns as indicated.
3. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacingmaterial manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication,
and finishing.
E. Nurse Station:
1. Fabricate to AWI premium grade construction in conformance with AWI Section
400, CASEWORK.
2. Use softwood for structural framing member's standard sizes, space not over 400 mm
(16 inches) on center.
3. Use red oak for exposed hardwood trim and edging.
4. Use drawer guides on drawers with pulls.
5. Use pulls and concealed hinges on doors.
6. Use adjustable shelf standards with shelf rests.
7. Use decorative plastic laminate on exposed surfaces including interior of cupboard
cabinet.
8. Overlay frame of apron with drawer and door face.
9. Provide cut outs for electrical devices and outlets.
F. Counter or Work Tops:
1. Fabrication with plastic laminate over 32 mm (1-1/4 inch) thick core where shown.
a. Use decorative laminate for exposed edges of tops 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) wide and
on back splash and end splash. Use plastic or metal edges for top edges less than
38 mm (1-1/2 inches) wide.
b. Assemble back splash and end splash to counter top.
c. Use one piece counters for straight runs.
d. Miter corners for field joints with overlapping blocking on underside of joint.
2. Fabricate solid surface and homogenous quartz countertops where shown.
a. Align adjacent surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match
countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean
entire surface.
246
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
b. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag,
bow, or other variation from a straight line.
c. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive.
d. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07
Section "Joint Sealants.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain work areas and storage areas to a minimum temperature of 210C (700F) for not
less than 10 days before and during installation of interior millwork.
B. Do not install finish lumber or millwork in any room or space where wet process systems
such as concrete, masonry, or plaster work is not complete and dry.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Millwork receiving transparent finish shall be primed and back-painted on concealed
surfaces. Set no millwork until primed and back-painted.
2. Secure trim with fine finishing nails, screws, or glue as required.
3. Set nails for putty stopping. Use washers under bolt heads where no other bearing
plate occurs.
4. Coordinate with plumbing and electrical work for installation of fixtures and service
connections in millwork items.
5. Plumb and level items unless shown otherwise.
6. Nail finish at each blocking, lookout, or other nailer and intermediate points; toggle
or expansion bolt in place where nails are not suitable.
B. Nurse Station:
1. Secure framing to floor with expansion bolts.
2. Secure counter top to support with wood cleats or metal angles screwed on 150 mm
(6 inch) centers.
3. Conceal fasteners on corridor side. Exposed fasteners permitted under counter top and
in knee spaces on staff side.
C. Shelves:
247
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. Install mounting strip at back wall and end wall for shelves in closets where shown
secured with toggle bolts at each end and not over 600 mm (24 inch) centers between
ends.
a. Nail Shelf to mounting strip at ends and to back wall strip at not over 900 mm (36
inches) on center.
b. Install metal bracket, ANSI A156.16, B04041, not over 1200 mm (4 feet) centers
when shelves exceed 1800 mm (6 feet) in length.
c. Install metal bracket, ANSI A156.16, B04051, not over 1200 mm (4 feet) on
centers where shelf length exceeds 1800 mm (6 feet) in length with metal rods,
clothes hanger bars ANSI A156.16, L03131, of required length, full length of
shelf.
2. Install vertical slotted shelf standards, ANSI A156.9, B04103 to studs with toggle
bolts through each fastener opening. Double slotted shelf standards may be used
where adjacent shelves terminate.
a. Install brackets ANSI A156.9, B04113, providing supports for shelf not over 900
mm (36 inches) on center and within 13 mm (1/2 inch) of shelf end unless shown
otherwise.
b. Install shelves on brackets so front edge is restrained by bracket.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY-
248
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 07 21 13
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. This section specifies and acoustical insulation for buildings.
B. Acoustical insulation is identified by thickness and words "Acoustical Insulation".
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Safing insulation: Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES .
B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Insulation, each type used
2. Adhesive, each type used.
3. Tape
C. Certificates: Stating the type, thickness and "R" value (thermal resistance) of the
insulation to be installed.
1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Store insulation materials in weathertight enclosure.
B. Protect insulation from damage from handling, weather and construction operations
before, during, and after installation.
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C553-08..................................Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial
and Industrial Applications
C612-04..................................Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation
C665-06..................................Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
Construction and Manufactured Housing
249
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C954-07..................................Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel
Products or Metal Plaster Base to Steel Studs From 0.033
(0.84 mm) inch to 0.112 inch (2.84 mm) in thickness
C1002-07................................Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of
Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood
Studs or Steel Studs
E84-08 ....................................Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
F1667-05 ................................Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes and Staples.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION – GENERAL:
A. Where thermal resistance ("R" value) is specified or shown for insulation, the thickness
shown on the drawings is nominal. Use only insulation with actual thickness that is not
less than that required to provide the thermal resistance specified.
B. Where "R" value is not specified for insulation, use the thickness shown on the drawings.
C. Where more than one type of insulation is specified, the type of insulation for each use is
optional, except use only one type of insulation in any particular area.
D. Insulation Products shall comply with following minimum content standards for
recovered materials:
Material Type
Percent by Weight
Glass fiber reinforced
6 percent recovered material
Rock wool material
75 percent recovered material
The minimum-content standards are based on the weight (not the volume)
of the material in the insulating core only.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION:
A. Mineral Fiber boards: ASTM C553, Type II, flexible, or Type III, semirigid (4.5 pound
nominal density).
B. Mineral Fiber Batt or Blankets: ASTM C665. Maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke
development of 450 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
C. Thickness as shown; of widths and lengths to fit tight against framing.
2.3 FASTENERS:
A. Staples or Nails: ASTM F1667, zinc-coated, size and type best suited for purpose.
250
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Screws: ASTM C954 or C1002, size and length best suited for purpose with washer not
less than 50 mm (two inches) in diameter.
C. Impaling Pins: Steel pins with head not less than 50 mm (two inches) in diameter with
adhesive for anchorage to substrate. Provide impaling pins of length to extend beyond
insulation and retain cap washer when washer is placed on the pin.
2.4 ADHESIVE:
A. As recommended by the manufacturer of the insulation.
B. Asphalt: ASTM D312, Type III or IV.
C. Mortar: ASTM C270, Type 0.
2.5 TAPE:
A. Pressure sensitive adhesive on one face.
B. Perm rating of not more than 0.50.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install batt or blanket insulation with tight joints and filling framing void completely.
Seal cuts, tears, and unlapped joints with tape.
B. Fit insulation tight against adjoining construction and penetrations, unless specified
otherwise.
3.2 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION:
A. Fasten blanket insulation between metal studs and wall furring with continuous pressure
sensitive tape along edges or adhesive.
B. Pack insulation around door frames and windows and in cracks, expansion joints, control
joints, door soffits and other voids. Pack behind outlets, around pipes, ducts, and services
encased in wall or partition. Hold insulation in place with pressure sensitive tape or
adhesive.
C. Do not compress insulation below required thickness except where embedded items
prevent required thickness.
D. Where acoustical insulation is installed above suspended ceilings install blanket at right
angles to the main runners or framing. Extend insulation over wall insulation systems not
extending to structure above.
251
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
E. Where semirigid insulation is used which is not full thickness of cavity, adhere to one
side of cavity maintaining continuity of insulation and covering penetrations or
embedments in insulation.
F. Where sound deadening board is shown, secure with adhesive to masonry or concrete
walls and with screws to metal or wood framing. Secure sufficiently in place until
subsequent cover is installed. Seal all cracks with caulking.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 07 21 13 THERMAL INSULATION- - -
252
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 07 81 00
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies cementitious coverings to provide fire resistance to existing interior
structural steel members where damaged in areas exposed by renovations.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Manufacturer's complete and detailed application instructions and specifications.
2. Manufacturer's repair and patching instructions.
C. Certificates:
1. Certificate from testing laboratory attesting fireproofing material and application
method meet the specified fire ratings.
a. List thickness and density of material required to meet fire ratings.
b. Accompanied by complete test report and test record.
2. Manufacturer's certificate indicating sprayed-on fireproofing material supplied under
the Contract is same within manufacturing tolerance as fireproofing material tested.
D. Miscellaneous:
1. Manufacturer's written approval of surfaces to receive sprayed-on fireproofing.
2. Manufacturer's written approval of completed installation.
3. Manufacturer's written approval of the applicators of fireproofing material.
1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver to job-site in sealed containers marked and labeled to show manufacturer's name
and brand and certification of compliance with the specified requirements.
B. Remove damaged containers from the site.
C. Store the materials off the ground, under cover, away from damp surfaces.
D. Keep dry until ready for use.
E. Remove materials that have been exposed to water before installation from the site.
253
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C841-03..................................Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring
C847-06..................................Metal Lath
E84-08 ....................................Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
E119-08 ..................................Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
E605-93 (R2006) ...................Thickness and Density of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials
Applied to Structural Members
E736-00 ..................................Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials
Applied to Structural Members
E759-92 (R2005) ...................The Effect of Deflection on Sprayed Fire-Resistive
Material Applied to Structural Members
E760-92 (R2005) ...................Impact on Bonding of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material
Applied to Structural Members
E761-92 (R2005) ...................Compressive Strength of Fire-Resistive Material Applied to
Structural Members
E859-93 (R2006) ...................Air Erosion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to
Structural Members
E937-93 (R2005) ...................Corrosion of Steel by Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material
Applied to Structural Members
E1042-02 ................................Acoustically, Absorptive Materials Applied by Trowel or
Spray.
G21-96 (R2002) .....................Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials
to Fungi
C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
Fire Resistance Directory...Latest Edition including Supplements
D. Warnock Hersey (WH):
Certification Listings .............Latest Edition
254
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
E. Factory Mutual System (FM):
Approval Guide ......................Latest Edition including Supplements
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING
A. ASTM E1042, Class (a), Category A.
1. Type I, factory mixed cementitious materials with approved aggregate.
B. Materials containing asbestos are not permitted.
C. Fireproofing characteristics when applied in the thickness and density required to achieve
the fire-rating to match existing.
2.2 WATER
A. Clean, fresh, and free from organic and mineral impurities.
B. pH of 6.9 to 7.1.
2.3 MECHANICAL BOND MATERIAL
A. Expanded Metal Lath: ASTM C847, minimum weight of 0.92 kg/m2 (1.7 pounds per
square yard).
B. Fasteners: ASTM C841.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify surfaces to receive fireproofing are clean and free of dust, soot, oil, grease, water
soluble materials or any foreign substance which would prevent adhesion of the
fireproofing material.
B. Verify hangers, inserts and clips are installed before the application of fireproofing
material.
C. Verify ductwork, piping, and other obstructing material and equipment is not installed
that will interfere with fireproofing installation.
D. Verify concrete work on steel decking and concrete encased steel is completed.
E. Verify temperature and enclosure conditions are required by fire-proofing material
manufacturer.
255
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Do not start application until written approval has been obtained from manufacturer of
fireproofing materials that surfaces have been inspected by the manufacturer or his
representative, and are suitable to receive sprayed-on fireproofing.
B. Coordinate application of fireproofing material with other trades.
C. Mix and apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Mechanically control material and water ratios.
3. Apply to density and thickness indicated in UL Fire Resistance Directory, FM
Approval Guide, or WH Certification Listings unless specified otherwise. Test in
accordance with ASTM E119.
4. Minimum applied dry density per cubic meter (cubic foot) for the underside of the
walk on deck (interstitial) hung purlin or beam and steel deck, columns in interstitial
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms shall be as follows:
a. Type I - 240 kg/m3 (15 lb/ft3).
D. Application shall be completed in one area, inspected and approved by Resident Engineer
before removal of application equipment and proceeding with further work.
3.3 PATCHING AND REPAIRING
A. Inspect after mechanical, electrical and other trades have completed work in contact with
fireproofing material, but before sprayed material is covered by subsequent construction.
B. Perform corrective measures in accordance with fireproofing material Manufacturer's
recommendations.
1. Respray areas requiring additional fireproofing material to provide the required
thickness, and replace dislodged or removed material.
2. Spray material for patching by machine directly on point to be patched, or into a
container and then hand apply.
3. Hand mixing of material is not permitted.
C. Repair:
1. Respray all test and rejected areas.
2. Patch fireproofing material which is removed or disturbed after approval.
D. Perform final inspection of sprayed areas after patching and repair.
256
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3.4 SCHEDULE
A. Apply fireproofing material in interior structural steel members and on underside of
interior steel floor and roof decks to repair existing damaged fireproofing, except on
following surfaces:
1. Structural steel and underside of steel decks in elevator or dumbwaiter machine
rooms.
2. Steel members in elevator hoist ways.
3. Areas used as air handling plenums.
4. Steel to be encased in concrete or designated to receive other type of fireproofing.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 07 81 00 APPLIED ROOFING- - -
257
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Closures of openings in walls, floors, and roof decks against penetration of flame, heat,
and smoke or gases in fire resistant rated construction.
B. Closure of openings in walls against penetration of gases or smoke in smoke partitions.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Expansion and seismic joint firestopping: Section 07 95 13, EXPANSION JOINT
COVER ASSEMBLIES.
B. Spray applied fireproofing: Section 07 81 00, APPLIED FIREPROOFING
C. Sealants and application: Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.
D. Fire and smoke damper assemblies in ductwork: Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND
CASINGS Section 23 37 00, AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Manufacturers literature, data, and installation instructions for types of firestopping and
smoke stopping used.
C. List of FM, UL, or WH classification number of systems installed.
D. Certified laboratory test reports for ASTM E814 tests for systems not listed by FM, UL,
or WH proposed for use.
1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials in their original unopened containers with manufacturer’s name and
product identification.
B. Store in a location providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements.
1.5 WARRANTY
Firestopping work subject to the terms of the Article “Warranty of Construction”, FAR
clause 52.246-21, except extend the warranty period to five years.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
FM, UL, or WH or other approved laboratory tested products will be acceptable.
258
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
E84-07 ....................................Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
E814-06 ..................................Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
C. Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM):
Annual Issue Approval Guide Building Materials
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
Annual Issue Building Materials Directory
Annual Issue Fire Resistance Directory
1479-03 ..................................Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops
E. Warnock Hersey (WH):
Annual Issue Certification Listings
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A. Use either factory built (Firestop Devices) or field erected (through-Penetration Firestop
Systems) to form a specific building system maintaining required integrity of the fire
barrier and stop the passage of gases or smoke.
B. Through-penetration firestop systems and firestop devices tested in accordance with
ASTM E814 or UL 1479 using the "F" or "T" rating to maintain the same rating and
integrity as the fire barrier being sealed. "T" ratings are not required for penetrations
smaller than or equal to 100 mm (4 in) nominal pipe or 0.01 m2 (16 sq. in.) in overall
cross sectional area.
C. Products requiring heat activation to seal an opening by its intumescence shall exhibit a
demonstrated ability to function as designed to maintain the fire barrier.
D. Firestop sealants used for firestopping or smoke sealing shall have following properties:
1. Contain no flammable or toxic solvents.
2. Have no dangerous or flammable out gassing during the drying or curing of products.
3. Water-resistant after drying or curing and unaffected by high humidity, condensation
or transient water exposure.
259
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
4. When used in exposed areas, shall be capable of being sanded and finished with
similar surface treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor surface.
E. Firestopping system or devices used for penetrations by glass pipe, plastic pipe or
conduits, unenclosed cables, or other non-metallic materials shall have following
properties:
1. Classified for use with the particular type of penetrating material used.
2. Penetrations containing loose electrical cables, computer data cables, and
communications cables protected using firestopping systems that allow unrestricted
cable changes without damage to the seal.
3. Intumescent products which would expand to seal the opening and act as fire, smoke,
toxic fumes, and, water sealant.
F. Maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke development of 50 when tested in accordance
with ASTM E84.
G. FM, UL, or WH rated or tested by an approved laboratory in accordance with ASTM
E814.
H. Materials to be asbestos free.
2.2 SMOKE STOPPING IN SMOKE PARTITIONS
A. Use silicone sealant in smoke partitions as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT
SEALANTS.
B. Use mineral fiber filler and bond breaker behind sealant.
C. Sealants shall have a maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50 when
tested in accordance with E84.
D. When used in exposed areas capable of being sanded and finished with similar surface
treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor surface.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Submit product data and installation instructions, as required by article, submittals, after
an on site examination of areas to receive firestopping.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, or other substances that prevent adherence and
bonding or application of the firestopping or smoke stopping materials.
260
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Remove insulation on insulated pipe for a distance of 150 mm (six inches) on either side
of the fire rated assembly prior to applying the firestopping materials unless the
firestopping materials are tested and approved for use on insulated pipes.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Do not begin work until the specified material data and installation instructions of the
proposed firestopping systems have been submitted and approved.
B. Install firestopping systems with smoke stopping in accordance with FM, UL, WH, or
other approved system details and installation instructions.
C. Install smoke stopping seals in smoke partitions.
3.4 CLEAN-UP AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORK
A. As work on each floor is completed, remove materials, litter, and debris.
B. Do not move materials and equipment to the next-scheduled work area until completed
work is inspected and accepted by the Resident Engineer.
C. Clean up spills of liquid type materials.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 07 84 00 FIRE STOPPING- - -
261
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
Section covers all sealant and caulking materials and their application, wherever required
for complete installation of building materials or systems.
1.2 RELATED WORK:
A. Firestopping penetrations: Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.
B. Glazing: Section 08 80 00, GLAZING.
C. Sound rated gypsum partitions/sound sealants: Section 09 29 00, GYPSUM BOARD.
1.3 QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint
sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and
whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful inservice performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Product Testing: Obtain test results from a qualified testing agency based on testing
current sealant formulations within a 12-month period.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C1021.
2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by
reference to ASTM C920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
4. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing
standard specifications and test methods.
D. VOC: Acrylic latex and Silicon sealants shall have less than 50g/l VOC content.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Manufacturer's installation instructions for each product used.
262
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C. Cured samples of exposed sealants for each color where required to match adjacent
material.
D. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Caulking compound
2. Primers
3. Sealing compound, each type, including compatibility when different sealants are in
contact with each other.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Environmental Limitations:
1. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under following conditions:
b. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint-Width Conditions:
1. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than
those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
C. Joint-Substrate Conditions:
1. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of
interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE:
A. Deliver materials in manufacturers' original unopened containers, with brand names, date
of manufacture, shelf life, and material designation clearly marked thereon.
B. Carefully handle and store to prevent inclusion of foreign materials.
C. Do not subject to sustained temperatures exceeding 5 C (40 F) or less than 32 C (90
F).
1.7 DEFINITIONS:
A. Definitions of terms in accordance with ASTM C717 and as specified.
B. Back-up Rod: A type of sealant backing.
C. Bond Breakers: A type of sealant backing.
D. Filler: A sealant backing used behind a back-up rod.
263
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.8 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty exterior sealing against leaks, adhesion, and cohesive failure, and subject to
terms of "Warranty of Construction", FAR clause 52.246-21, except that warranty period
shall be extended to two years.
B. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive
Government of other rights Government may have under other provisions of Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by
Contractor under requirements of Contract Documents.
1.9 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:
A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced.
Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C509-06..................................Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing
Material.
C612-04..................................Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
C717-07..................................Standard Terminology of Building Seals and Sealants.
C834-05..................................Latex Sealants.
C919-02..................................Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.
C920-05..................................Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
C1021-08................................Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants.
C1193-05................................Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
C1330-02 (R2007) .................Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid
Applied Sealants.
D1056-07 ...............................Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials—Sponge or
Expanded Rubber.
E84-08 ....................................Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
C. Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute (SWRI).
The Professionals’ Guide
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANTS:
A. S-9:
264
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. ASTM C920 silicone.
2. Type S.
3. Class 25.
4. Grade NS.
5. Shore A hardness of 25-30.
6. Non-yellowing, mildew resistant.
2.2 CAULKING COMPOUND:
A. C-1: ASTM C834, acrylic latex.
B. C-2: One component acoustical caulking, non drying, non hardening, synthetic rubber.
2.3 COLOR:
A. Sealants used with exposed masonry shall match color of mortar joints.
B. Sealants used with unpainted concrete shall match color of adjacent concrete.
C. Color of sealants for other locations shall be light gray or aluminum, unless specified
otherwise.
D. Caulking shall be light gray or white, unless specified otherwise.
2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING:
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are
compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are
approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience
and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, of type indicated below and of size and
density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant
performance:
1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin.
C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing
complying with ASTM D1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining
resilient at temperatures down to minus 32 C (minus 26 F). Provide products with low
compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant
depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.
D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler
265
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant
failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.5 FILLER:
A. Mineral fiber board: ASTM C612, Class 1.
B. Thickness same as joint width.
C. Depth to fill void completely behind back-up rod.
2.6 PRIMER:
A. As recommended by manufacturer of caulking or sealant material.
B. Stain free type.
2.7 CLEANERS-NON POUROUS SURFACES:
Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturer of sealants and sealant backing material,
free of oily residues and other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates
and adjacent non-porous surfaces and formulated to promote adhesion of sealant and
substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Inspect substrate surface for bond breaker contamination and unsound materials at
adherent faces of sealant.
B. Coordinate for repair and resolution of unsound substrate materials.
C. Inspect for uniform joint widths and that dimensions are within tolerance established by
sealant manufacturer.
3.2 PREPARATIONS:
A. Prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and SWRI.
B. Clean surfaces of joint to receive caulking or sealants leaving joint dry to the touch, free
from frost, moisture, grease, oil, wax, lacquer paint, or other foreign matter that would
tend to destroy or impair adhesion.
1. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning,
mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound
substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants.
266
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or
blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the
following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,
harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants.
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
C. Do not cut or damage joint edges.
D. Apply masking tape to face of surfaces adjacent to joints before applying primers,
caulking, or sealing compounds.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
E. Apply primer to sides of joints wherever required by compound manufacturer's printed
instructions.
1. Apply primer prior to installation of back-up rod or bond breaker tape.
2. Use brush or other approved means that will reach all parts of joints.
F. Take all necessary steps to prevent three sided adhesion of sealants.
3.3 BACKING INSTALLATION:
A. Install back-up material, to form joints enclosed on three sides as required for specified
depth of sealant.
B. Where deep joints occur, install filler to fill space behind the back-up rod and position the
rod at proper depth.
267
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C. Cut fillers installed by others to proper depth for installation of back-up rod and sealants.
D. Install back-up rod, without puncturing the material, to a uniform depth, within plus or
minus 3 mm (1/8 inch) for sealant depths specified.
E. Where space for back-up rod does not exist, install bond breaker tape strip at bottom (or
back) of joint so sealant bonds only to two opposing surfaces.
F. Take all necessary steps to prevent three sided adhesion of sealants.
3.4 SEALANT DEPTHS AND GEOMETRY:
A. At widths up to 6 mm (1/4 inch), sealant depth equal to width.
B. At widths over 6 mm (1/4 inch), sealant depth 1/2 of width up to 13 mm (1/2 inch)
maximum depth at center of joint with sealant thickness at center of joint approximately
1/2 of depth at adhesion surface.
3.5 INSTALLATION:
A. General:
1. Apply sealants and caulking only when ambient temperature is between
5 C and 38 C (40 and 100 F).
2. Do not use sealant type listed by manufacture as not suitable for use in locations
specified.
3. Apply caulking and sealing compound in accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions.
4. Avoid dropping or smearing compound on adjacent surfaces.
5. Fill joints solidly with compound and finish compound smooth.
6. Tool joints to concave surface unless shown or specified otherwise.
7. Apply compounds with nozzle size to fit joint width.
8. Test sealants for compatibility with each other and substrate. Use only compatible
sealant.
B. For application of sealants, follow requirements of ASTM C1193 unless specified
otherwise.
C. Where gypsum board partitions are of sound rated, fire rated, or smoke barrier
construction, follow requirements of ASTM C919 only to seal all cut-outs and
intersections with the adjoining construction unless specified otherwise.
268
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. Apply a 6 mm (1/4 inch) minimum bead of sealant each side of runners (tracks),
including those used at partition intersections with dissimilar wall construction.
2. Coordinate with application of gypsum board to install sealant immediately prior to
application of gypsum board.
3. Partition intersections: Seal edges of face layer of gypsum board abutting intersecting
partitions, before taping and finishing or application of veneer plaster-joint
reinforcing.
4. Openings: Apply a 6 mm (1/4 inch) bead of sealant around all cut-outs to seal
openings of electrical boxes, ducts, pipes and similar penetrations. To seal electrical
boxes, seal sides and backs.
5. Control Joints: Before control joints are installed, apply sealant in back of control
joint to reduce flanking path for sound through control joint.
3.6 CLEANING:
A. Fresh compound accidentally smeared on adjoining surfaces: Scrape off immediately and
rub clean with a solvent as recommended by the caulking or sealant manufacturer.
B. After filling and finishing joints, remove masking tape.
C. Leave adjacent surfaces in a clean and unstained condition.
3.7 LOCATIONS:
A. Sanitary Joints:
1. Walls to Plumbing Fixtures: Type S-9
2. Counter Tops to Walls: Type S-9
3. Pipe Penetrations: Type S-9
B. Interior Caulking:
1. Typical Narrow Joint 6 mm, (1/4 inch) or less at Walls and Adjacent Components:
Types C-1, C-2.
2. Perimeter of Doors, Windows, Access Panels which Adjoin Concrete or Masonry
Surfaces: Types C-1, C-2.
3. Joints at Masonry Walls and Columns, Piers, Concrete Walls or Exterior Walls:
Types C-1, C-2.
5. Exposed Isolation Joints at Top of Full Height Walls: Types C-1, C-2.
6. Exposed Acoustical Joint at Sound Rated Partitions Type C-2.
269
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
7. Concealed Acoustic Sealant Type C-2.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS- - -
270
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 08 11 13
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies steel frames and related components.
B. Terms relating to steel frames as defined in ANSI A123.1 and as specified.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Glazing: Section 08 80 00, GLAZING.
1.3 TESTING
An independent testing laboratory shall perform testing.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Manufacturers Literature and Data:
1. Fire rated doors and frames, showing conformance with NFPA 80 and Underwriters
Laboratory, Inc., or Intertek Testing Services or Factory Mutual fire rating
requirements.
1.5 SHIPMENT
A. Prior to shipment label each frame to show location, size and other pertinent information.
B. Fasten temporary steel spreaders across the bottom of each door frame.
1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store frames at the site under cover.
B. Protect from rust and damage during storage and erection until completion.
1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
L-S-125B................................Screening, Insect, Nonmetallic
C. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI):
A115 Series ............................Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware, Series
A115.1 through A115.17 (Dates Vary)
271
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
D. Steel Door Institute (SDI):
113-01 ....................................Thermal Transmittance of Steel Door and Frame
Assemblies
128-1997 ................................Acoustical Performance for Steel Door and Frame
Assemblies
A250.8-03 ..............................Standard Steel Doors and Frames
E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A167-99(R2004) ....................Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip
A568/568-M-07 .....................Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-alloy, HotRolled and Cold-Rolled
A1008-08 ...............................Steel, sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High
Strength Low Alloy and High Strength Low Alloy with
Improved Formability
B209/209M-07 .......................Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
B221/221M-08 .......................Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles and Tubes
D1621-04 ...............................Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics
D3656-07 ...............................Insect Screening and Louver Cloth Woven from Vinyl
Coated Glass Yarns
E90-04 ....................................Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission
Loss of Building Partitions
F. The National Association Architectural Metal Manufactures (NAAMM):
Metal Finishes Manual (1988 Edition)
G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
80-09 ......................................Fire Doors and Fire Windows
H. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
Fire Resistance Directory
I. Intertek Testing Services (ITS):
Certifications Listings…Latest Edition
J. Factory Mutual System (FM):
272
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Approval Guide
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A1008, cold-rolled for panels (face sheets) of doors.
B. Anchors, Fastenings and Accessories: Fastenings anchors, clips connecting members and
sleeves from zinc coated steel.
C. Prime Paint: Paint that meets or exceeds the requirements of A250.8.
2.2 FABRICATION GENERAL
A. GENERAL:
1. Follow SDI A250.8 for fabrication of standard steel doors, except as specified
otherwise. Doors to receive hardware specified in Section 08 71 00, DOOR
HARDWARE. Tolerances as per SDI A250.8. Thickness, 44 mm (1-3/4 inches),
unless otherwise shown.
2. When vertical steel stiffeners are used for core construction, fill spaces between
stiffeners with mineral fiber insulation.
2.3 METAL FRAMES
A. General:
1. SDI A250.8, 1.3 mm (0.053 inch) thick sheet steel, types and styles as shown or
scheduled.
2. Frames for labeled fire rated and windows.
a. Comply with NFPA 80. Test by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Inchcape Testing
Services, or Factory Mutual.
b. Fire rated labels of approving laboratory permanently attached to frames as
evidence of conformance with these requirements. Provide labels of metal or
engraved stamp, with raised or incised markings.
3. Knocked-down frames are not acceptable.
B. Reinforcement and Covers:
1. SDI A250.8 for, minimum thickness of steel reinforcement welded to back of frames.
273
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Provide mortar guards securely fastened to back of hardware reinforcements except
on lead-lined frames.
C. Frame Anchors:
1. Floor anchors:
a. At bottom of jamb use 1.3 mm (0.053 inch) thick steel clip angles welded to jamb
and drilled to receive two 6 mm (1/4 inch) floor bolts. Use 50 mm x 50 mm (2
inch by 2 inch) 9 mm by (3/8 inch) clip angle for lead lined frames, drilled for 9
mm (3/8 inch) floor bolts.
b. Where mullions occur, provide 2.3 mm (0.093 inch) thick steel channel anchors,
drilled for two 6 mm (1/4 inch) floor bolts and frame anchor screws.
c. Where sill sections occur, provide continuous 1 mm (0.042 inch) thick steel rough
bucks drilled for 6 mm (1/4 inch) floor bolts and frame anchor screws. Space
floor bolts at 50 mm (24 inches) on center.
2. Jamb anchors:
a. Locate anchors on jambs near top and bottom of each frame, and at intermediate
points not over 600 mm (24 inches) apart, except for fire rated frames space
anchors as required by labeling authority.
b. Form jamb anchors of not less than 1 mm (0.042 inch) thick steel unless
otherwise specified.
c. Anchors for stud partitions: Either weld to frame or use lock-in snap-in type.
Provide tabs for securing anchor to the sides of the studs.
d. Anchors for frames set in prepared openings:
1) Steel pipe spacers with 6 mm (1/4 inch) inside diameter welded to plate
reinforcing at jamb stops or hat shaped formed strap spacers, 50 mm (2
inches) wide, welded to jamb near stop.
2) Drill jamb stop and strap spacers for 6 mm (1/4 inch) flat head bolts to pass
thru frame and spacers.
3) Two piece frames: Subframe or rough buck drilled for 6 mm (1/4 inch) bolts.
e. Anchors for observation windows and other continuous frames set in stud
partitions.
274
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1) In addition to jamb anchors, weld clip anchors to sills and heads of continuous
frames over 1200 mm (4 feet) long.
2) Anchors spaced 600 mm (24 inches) on centers maximum.
f. Modify frame anchors to fit special frame and wall construction and provide
special anchors where shown or required.
2.4 SHOP PAINTING
SDI A250.8.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Plumb, align and brace frames securely until permanent anchors are set.
1. Use triangular bracing near each corner on both sides of frames with temporary wood
spreaders at midpoint.
2. Use wood spreaders at bottom of frame if the shipping spreader is removed.
3. Protect frame from accidental abuse.
4. Where construction will permit concealment, leave the shipping spreaders in place
after installation, otherwise remove the spreaders after the frames are set and
anchored.
5. Remove wood spreaders and braces only after the walls are built and jamb anchors
are secured.
B. Floor Anchors:
1. Anchor the bottom of door frames to floor with two 6 mm (1/4 inch) diameter
expansion bolts. Use 9 mm (3/8 inch) bolts on lead lined frames.
2. Power actuated drive pins may be used to secure frame anchors to concrete floors.
C. Jamb Anchors:
3. Secure anchors to sides of studs with two fasteners through anchor tabs. Use steel
drill screws to steel studs.
4. Frames set in prepared openings of masonry or concrete: Expansion bolt to wall with
6 mm (1/4 inch) expansion bolts through spacers. Where subframes or rough bucks
are used, 6 mm (1/4 inch) expansion bolts on 600 mm (24 inch) centers or power
activated drive pins 600 mm (24 inches) on centers. Secure two piece frames to
subframe or rough buck with machine screws on both faces.
275
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
- - - E N D OF SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES- - -
SECTION 08 14 00
INTERIOR WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies interior flush doors with prefinish, prefit option.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Metal door frames: Section 08 11 13, HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES.
B. Door hardware including hardware location (height): Section 08 71 00, DOOR
HARDWARE.
C. Installation of doors and hardware: Section 08 11 13, HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES, Section 08 14 00, WOOD DOORS, or Section 08 71 00, DOOR
HARDWARE.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Samples:
1.
Veneer sample 200 mm (8 inch) by 275 mm (11 inch) by 6 mm (1/4 inch) showing
specified wood species with transparent finish. Factory finish veneer sample where
the prefinished option is accepted.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Show every door in project and schedule location in building.
2. Indicate type, grade, finish and size.
3. Provide information concerning specific requirements not included in the
manufacturer's literature and data submittal.
D. Laboratory Test Reports:
1. Screw holding capacity test report in accordance with WDMA T.M.10.
2. Split resistance test report in accordance with WDMA T.M.5.
3. Cycle/Slam test report in accordance with WDMA T.M.7.
4. Hinge-Loading test report in accordance with WDMA T.M.8.
276
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Doors are subject to terms of Article titled “Warranty of Construction”, FAR clause
52.246-21, except that warranty shall be as follows:
1. For interior doors, manufacturer’s warranty for lifetime of original installation.
1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Factory seal doors and accessories in minimum of 6 mill polyethylene bags or cardboard
packages which shall remain unbroken during delivery and storage.
B. Store in accordance with WDMA I.S.1-A, J-1 Job Site Information.
C. Label package for door opening where used.
1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced.
Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.
A. Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA):
I.S.1-A-04 ..............................Architectural Wood Flush Doors
I.S.4-07A ................................Water-Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure Treatment for
Millwork
T.M.5-90 ................................Split Resistance Test Method
T.M.6-08 ................................Adhesive (Glue Bond) Durability Test Method
T.M.7-08 ................................Cycle-Slam Test Method
T.M.8-08 ................................Hinge Loading Test Method
T.M.10-08 ..............................Screwholding Test Method
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
E90-04 ....................................Laboratory Measurements of Airborne Sound Transmission
Loss
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLUSH DOORS
A. General:
1. Meet requirements of WDMA I.S.1-A, Extra Heavy Duty.
2. Adhesive: Type II
3. Thickness: 45 mm (1-3/4 inches) unless otherwise shown or specified.
277
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Face Veneer:
1. In accordance with WDMA I.S.1-A.
2. One species throughout the project unless scheduled or otherwise shown.
3. For transparent finishes: Premium Grade, rotary cutwhite Birch
a. A grade face veneer standard optional.
b. AA grade face veneer
c. Match face veneers for doors for uniform effect of color and grain at joints.
d. Door edges shall be same species as door face veneer.
e. In existing buildings, where doors are required to have transparent finish, use wood
species and grade of face veneers to match adjacent existing doors.
4. Factory sand doors for finishing.
C. Stiles and Rails:
1. Option for wood stiles and rails:
a. Composite material having screw withdrawal force greater than minimum
performance level value when tested in accordance with WDMA T.M.10.
2.2 PREFINISH, PREFIT OPTION
A. Flush doors may be factory machined to receive hardware, bevels, undercuts, cutouts,
accessories and fitting for frame.
B. Factory fitting to conform to specification for shop and field fitting, including factory
application of sealer to edge and routings.
C. Flush doors to receive transparent finish (in addition to being prefit) shall be factory
finished as follows:
1. WDMA I.S.1-A Section F-3 specification for System TR-4, Conversion Varnish or
System TR-5, Catalyzed Vinyl.
2. Use stain when required to produce the finish specified..
2.3 IDENTIFICATION MARK:
A. On top edge of door.
B. Either a stamp, brand or other indelible mark, giving manufacturer’s name, door’s trade
name, construction of door, code date of manufacture and quality.
C. Accompanied by either of the following additional requirements:
278
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. An identification mark or a separate certification including name of inspection
organization.
2. Identification of standards for door, including glue type.
3. Identification of veneer and quality certification.
2.4 SEALING:
Give top and bottom edge of doors two coats of catalyzed polyurethane or water resistant
sealer before sealing in shipping containers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DOOR PREPARATION
A. Clearances between Doors and Frames and Floors:
1. Maximum 3 mm (1/8 inch) clearance at the jambs, heads, and meeting stiles, and a 19
mm (3/4 inch) clearance at bottom, except as otherwise specified.
2. Maximum clearance at bottom of sound rated doors, light-proofed doors, doors to
operating rooms, and doors designated to be fitted with mechanical seal: 10 mm (3/8
inch).
B. Provide cutouts for special details required and specified.
C. Rout doors for hardware using templates and location heights specified in Section, 08 71
00 DOOR HARDWARE.
D. Fit doors to frame, bevel lock edge of doors 3 mm (1/8 inch) for each 50 mm (two
inches) of door thickness // undercut where shown. //
E. Immediately after fitting and cutting of doors for hardware, seal cut edges of doors with
two coats of water resistant sealer.
F. Finish surfaces, including both faces, top and bottom and edges of the doors smooth to
touch.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF DOORS APPLICATION OF HARDWARE
Install doors and hardware as specified in Section, INSTALLATION OF DOORS AND
HARDWARE.
3.3 DOOR PROTECTION
A. As door installation is completed, place polyethylene bag or cardboard shipping container
over door and tape in place.
B. Provide protective covering over knobs and handles in addition to covering door.
279
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C. Maintain covering in good condition until removal is approved by Resident Engineer.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 08 14 00 INTERIOR WOOD DOORS- - -
280
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
Door hardware and related items necessary for complete installation and operation of
doors.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Caulking: Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
B. Application of Hardware: Section 08 14 00, WOOD DOORS, Section 08 11 13,
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES,
C. Painting: Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.
1.3 GENERAL
A. All hardware shall comply with UFAS, (Uniform Federal Accessible Standards) unless
specified otherwise.
B. Hardware for application on metal and wood doors and frames shall be made to standard
templates. Furnish templates to the fabricator of these items in sufficient time so as not to
delay the construction.
C. The following items shall be of the same manufacturer, if possible, except as otherwise
specified:
1. Mortise locksets.
2. Hinges for hollow metal and wood doors.
3. Surface applied overhead door closers.
4. Exit devices.
5. Floor closers.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA
AND SAMPLES.
B. Hardware Schedule: Prepare and submit hardware schedule in the following form:
Hardware Quantity
Item
Size
Reference
Publication
Type No.
Finish
Mfr.
Name
and
Catalog
Key
Control
Symbols
UL
ANSI/BHM
Mark (if A Finish
fire rated Designation
and
281
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
No.
listed)
C. Samples and Manufacturers' Literature:
1. Samples: All hardware items (proposed for the project) that have not been previously
approved by Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association shall be submitted for
approval. Tag and mark all items with manufacturer's name, catalog number and
project number.
2. Samples are not required for hardware listed in the specifications by manufacturer's
catalog number, if the contractor proposes to use the manufacturer's product
specified.
D. Certificate of Compliance and Test Reports: Submit certificates that hardware conforms
to the requirements specified herein. Certificates shall be accompanied by copies of
reports as referenced. The testing shall have been conducted either in the manufacturer's
plant and certified by an independent testing laboratory or conducted in an independent
laboratory, within four years of submittal of reports for approval.
1.5 DELIVERY AND MARKING
Deliver items of hardware to job site in their original containers, complete with necessary
appurtenances including screws, keys, and instructions. Tag one of each different item of
hardware and deliver to Resident Engineer for reference purposes. Tag shall identify
items by Project Specification number and manufacturer's catalog number. These items
shall remain on file in Resident Engineer's office until all other similar items have been
installed in project, at which time the Resident Engineer will deliver items on file to
Contractor for installation in predetermined locations on the project.
1.6 INSTRUCTIONS
A. Hardware Set Symbols on Drawings: Except for protective plates, door stops, mutes,
thresholds and the like specified herein, hardware requirements for each door are
indicated on drawings by symbols. Symbols for hardware sets consist of letters "HW"
282
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
followed by a number. Each number designates a set of hardware items applicable to a
door type.
B. Manufacturers' Catalog Number References: Where manufacturers' products are specified
herein, products of other manufacturers which are considered equivalent to those
specified may be used. Manufacturers whose products are specified are identified by
abbreviations as follows:
Adams-Rite
Adams Rite Mfg. Co.
Glendale, CA
Glynn Johnson
Glynn Johnson Co.
Chicago, IL
LCN
LCN Closers
Princeton, IL
Firemark
Rixon-Firemark Co.
Chicago, IL
Hager
Hager Hinge Company
Saint Louis, MO
Stanley
The Stanley Works
New Britain, CT
Trimco
Triangle Brass Mfg. Co.
Los Angeles, CA
Unican
Simplex Security Systems
Collinsville, CT
Von Duprin
Von Duprin Hardware Co.
Indianapolis, IN
Zero
Zero Weather Stripping Co.
New York, NY
C. Keying: All cylinders shall be keyed into existing Grand Master Key System. Provide
removable core cylinders that are removable only with a special key or tool without
disassembly of knob or lockset. Cylinders shall be 6 pin type. Keying information shall
be furnished at a later date by the Resident Engineer.
1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. In text,
hardware items are referred to by series, types, etc., listed in such specifications and
standards, except as otherwise specified.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
F883-04 ..................................Padlocks
C. American National Standards Institute/Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
(ANSI/BHMA):
A156.1-00 ..............................Butts and Hinges
283
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
A156.2-03 ..............................Bored and Pre-assembled Locks and Latches
A156.3-01 ..............................Exit Devices
A156.4-00 ..............................Door Controls (Closers)
A156.5-01 ..............................Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products
A156.6-05 ..............................Architectural Door Trim
A156.8-05 ..............................Door Controls-Overhead Stops and Holders
A156.13-05 ............................Mortise Locks and Latches Series 1000
A156.15-06 ............................Release Devices-Closer Holder, Electromagnetic and
Electromechanical
A156.16-02 ............................American National Standard for Auxiliary Hardware
A156.18-00 ............................Materials and Finishes
A156.21-06 ............................Thresholds
A156.22-05 ............................Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems
A156.23-04 ............................Electromagnetic Locks
A156.24-03 ............................Delayed Egress Locking Systems
A156.26-00 ............................Continuous Hinges
A156.31 .................................American National Standard for Electric Strikes and Frame
Mounted Actuators
A250.8-03 ..............................Standard Steel Doors and Frames
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
80-06 ......................................Fire Doors and Fire Windows
101-05 ....................................Life Safety Code
E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
Building Materials Directory (2007)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BUTT HINGES
A. ANSI A156.1. The following types of butt hinges shall be used for the types of doors
listed, except where otherwise specified:
1. Exterior Doors: Type A2112 for doors 900 mm (3 feet) wide or less and Type A2111
for doors over 900 mm (3 feet) wide. Hinges for exterior doors shall have
non-removable pins.
284
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Interior Doors: Type 8112 for doors 900 mm (3 feet) wide or less and Type A8111
for doors over 900 mm (3 feet) wide.
3. Automatic doors hung on butts, provide Type A2111 for exterior doors and aluminum
doors, and Type A8111 for other doors.
4. Any door installed in structural steel frames: Type A2412, A8412, A2411 or A8411
as applicable, except where otherwise specified. Such hinges shall be of same quality
and weight as other hinges listed above for applicable door sizes.
5. Labeled Wood Fire Doors: Type 8411 or Type 8412; these hinges shall be thru bolted
to door with hex nuts and bolts.
B. See Articles "MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE" and "HARDWARE SETS" for pivots
and hinges other than butts specified above and continuous hinges specified below.
2.2 CONTINUOUS HINGES
A. ANSI/BHMA A156.26, Grade 1-150
1. Listed under Category N in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory."
B. General: Minimum 0.120-inch- (3.0-mm-) thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall
width of 4 inches (102 mm); fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template
screw locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are complete:
1. Fire Pins: Steel pins to hold labeled fire doors in place if required by tested listing.
C. Continuous, Barrel-Type Hinges: Hinge with knuckles formed around a pin that extends
entire length of hinge.
1. Base Metal for Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel.
2. Base Metal for Interior Hinges: Stainless steel.
3. Base Metal for Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Stainless steel .
4. Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies.
b. Markar Architectural Products, Inc.; a Subsidiary of Adams Rite Manufacturing
Co.
c. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
d. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Division. of the Stanley Works and Zero
International.
285
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
D. Continuous, Gear-Type Hinges: Extruded-aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves; joined
by a continuous extruded-aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self-lubricating thrust
bearings.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Bommer Industries, Inc.
b. Hager Companies.
c. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
d. Pemko Manufacturing Co.
e. Select Products Limited.
f. Zero International.
2.3 DOOR CLOSING DEVICES
Closing devices shall be products of one manufacturer.
2.4 OVERHEAD CLOSERS
A. Conform to ANSI A156.4, Grade 1.
B. Closers shall conform to the following:
1. The closer shall have 50 percent adjustable closing force over minimum value for that
closer and have adjustable hydraulic back check effective between 60 degrees and 85
degrees of door opening.
2. Where specified, closer shall have hold-open feature.
3. Size Requirements: Size closers in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations
or provide multi-size closers, sizes 1 through 6.
4. Material of closer shall be forged or cast iron or cast aluminum.
5. Arm and brackets for closers shall be steel, malleable iron or high strength ductile
cast iron.
6. Closers shall have full size cover.
7. Closers shall have adjustable hydraulic back-check and separate valves for closing
and latching speed.
2.5 COMBINATION CLOSER – HOLDER
A. Conform to ANSI A156.15; combination closer-holder with built-in electronic release.
B. Combination closer-holder shall have the following features:
286
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. Control door closing and latching sequence by hydraulic action.
2. Wiring for 24V DC current. Current draw shall not exceed 0.16 amperes.
3. Double level arm closing action, and adjustable hydraulic back-check.
4. Spring power for closing force shall conform to ANSI A156.4 and have 50% spring
power adjustment.
5. Closer Size Requirements:
a. Doors, 900 mm (3 feet) and less in width: Size III closer.
b. Doors over 900 mm (3 feet) and less than 1050 mm (3 feet 6 inches) in width:
Size IV closer.
c. Doors 1050 mm (3 feet 6 inches) and over in width: Size V closer.
6. Hold open mechanism shall hold door open between 85 degrees and 180 degrees
depending on wall and frame conditions. Mount device to provide maximum door
opening permitted by building construction or equipment.
7. Electronic release shall release door when signaled by smoke detector. Smoke
detectors shall not be incorporated as an integral part of door holders. Smoke
detectors are specified in the ELECTRICAL Section.
8. All closers to have full covers.
9. All closers shall have a 1 ½” piston and an adjustable back check position valve.
2.6 DOOR STOPS
A. Conform to ANSI A156.16.
B. Provide door stops wherever an opened door or any item of hardware thereon would
strike a wall, column, equipment or other parts of building construction. For concrete,
masonry or quarry tile construction, use lead expansion shields for mounting door stops.
C. Where cylindrical locks with turn pieces or pushbuttons occur, equip wall bumpers Type
L02251 (rubber pads having concave face) to receive turn piece or button.
D. Substitute floor stops Type L02141 or L02161 as appropriate, when wall bumpers would
not provide an effective door stop.
E. Where drywall partitions occur, use floor stops, Type L02141 or L02161.
F. Provide stop Type L02011 or L02181, as applicable for exterior doors.
G. Omit stops where floor mounted door holders are required and where automatic operated
doors occur.
287
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
H. Provide appropriate roller bumper for each set of doors (except where closet doors occur)
where two doors would interfere with each other in swinging.
I. Provide appropriate door mounted stop on doors in individual toilets where floor or wall
mounted stops cannot be used.
J. Provide overhead surface applied stop Type C02541, ANSI A156.8 on patient toilet
doors in bedrooms where toilet door could come in contact with the bedroom door.
K. Provide door stops on doors where combination closer magnetic holders are specified.
2.7 OVERHEAD DOOR HOLDERS
Conform to ANSI Standard A156.8. Overhead holders shall be of sizes recommended by
holder manufacturer for each width of door. Set overhead holders for 110 degree
opening, unless limited by building construction or equipment.
2.8 LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Conform to ANSI A156.2. Locks and latches for doors 45 mm (1-3/4 inch) thick or over
shall have beveled fronts. Lock cylinders shall have not less than six pins . Cylinders for
all locksets shall be removable core type. Cylinders shall be furnished with construction
removable cores and construction master keys. Cylinder shall be removable by special
key or tool. Construct all cores so that they will be interchangeable into the core housings
of all mortise locks, rim locks, cylindrical locks, and any other type lock included in the
Great Grand Master Key System. Disassembly of lever or lockset shall not be required to
remove core from lockset. All locksets or latches on double doors with fire label shall
have latch bolt with 19 mm (3/4 inch) throw. Provide temporary keying device or
construction core of allow opening and closing during construction and prior to the
installation of final cores.
B. In addition to above requirements, locks and latches shall comply with following
requirements:
1. Mortise Lock and Latch Sets: Conform to ANSI/BHMA A156.13. Mortise locksets
shall be series 1000, minimum Grade 2. All locksets and latchsets, except on
designated doors in Psychiatric (Mental Health) areas, shall have lever handles
similar to Falcon S-lever Design. Lever handle shall be fabricated from wrought
stainless steel. No substitute lever design or material shall be accepted. All locks and
latchsets shall be furnished with curved lip strike and wrought box. Lock function
288
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
F02 shall be furnished with key plates similar to Russwin's No. A70. All lock cases
installed on lead lined doors shall be lead lined before applying final hardware finish.
Furnish armored fronts for all mortise locks.
2. Cylindrical Lock and Latch Sets: levers shall meet ADA (Americans with Disabilities
Act) requirements. Cylindrical locksets shall be series 4000 Grade I. Knobs for series
4000 lock and latch sets shall have 57 mm (2-1/4 inch) diameters. Where two turn
pieces are specified for lock F76, turn piece on inside knob shall lock and unlock
inside knob, and turn piece on outside knob shall unlock outside knob when inside
knob is in the locked position. (This function is intended to allow emergency entry
into these rooms without an emergency key or any special tool.)
3. Auxiliary locks shall be as specified under hardware sets and conform to ANSI
A156.5.
4. Locks on designated doors in Psychiatric (Mental Health) areas shall be paddle type
with arrow projection covers and be UL Listed. Provide these locks with paddle in the
down position on both sides of the door. Locks shall be fabricated of wrought
stainless steel.
2.9 PUSH-BUTTON COMBINATION LOCKS
A. ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. Mechanical or electrically operated as indicated.
B. Construction: Heavy duty cylindrical lock housing conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.2,
Grade 1. Lever handles and operating components in compliance with the UFAS and the
ADA Accessibility Guidelines.
C. Special Features: Key override to permit a master keyed security system and a key
activated passage feature to allow access without using the entry code.
D. Manufacturers:
1. Alarm Lock.
2. Code Locks, LLC
3. Locknetics; an Ingersoll Rand company.
4. Kaba Ilco.
289
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2.10 KEYS
A. Stamp all keys with change number and key set symbol. Furnish keys in quantities as
follows:
Locks/Keys
Quantity
Cylinder locks
2 keys each
Cylinder lock change key blanks
100 each different key way
Master-keyed sets
6 keys each
Grand Master sets
6 keys each
Great Grand Master set
5 keys
Control key
1 key
2.11 ARMOR PLATES, COMBINATION KICK-MOP PLATES AND DOOR EDGING
A. Conform to ANSI Standard A156.6.
B. Provide protective plates as specified below:
1. Kick-mop plates and armor plates metal, Type J100 series.
2. Provide kick-mop plates for both sides of each door, except where noted as not
required. Kick-mop plates shall be 200 mm (8 inches) high. On push side of doors
where jamb stop extends to floor, make combination kick-mop plates 38 mm (1-1/2
inches) less than width of door, except pairs of metal doors which shall have plates 25
mm (1 inch) less than width of each door. Extend all other combination kick-mop
plates to within 6 mm (1/4 inch) of each edge of doors. Kick mop plates shall butt
astragals. For jamb stop requirements, see specification sections pertaining to door
frames.
3. Kick-mop plates are not required on following door sides:
a) Armor plate side of doors;
b) Exterior side of exterior doors;
c) Closet side of closet doors;
d) Storage side of doors to or from storage spaces; and
e) Both sides of aluminum entrance doors.
4. Armor plates for doors are listed under Article "Hardware Sets". Armor plates shall
be 875 mm (35 inches) high and 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) less than width of doors,
290
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
except on pairs of metal doors. Plates on pairs of metal doors shall be 25 mm (1 inch)
less than width of each door. Where top of intermediate rail of door is less than 875
mm (35 inches) from door bottom, extend armor plates to within 13 mm (1/2 inch) of
top rail. On doors equipped with panic devices, extend armor plates to within 13 mm
(1/2 inch) of panic bolt cross bar.
5. Where louver or grille occurs in lower portion of doors, substitute stretcher plate and
kick-mop plate in place of armor plate. Size of stretcher plate and kick-mop plate
shall be 200 mm (8 inches) high.
2.12 DOOR PULLS
Conform to ANSI A156.6. Pull plate 90 mm by 350 mm (3-1/2 inches by 14 inches),
unless otherwise specified. Cut plates of door pulls for cylinders, or turn pieces where
required.
2.13 PUSH PLATES
Conform to ANSI A156.6. Plastic, Type J302, 200 mm (8 inches) wide by 350 mm (14
inches) high. Provide plastic Type J300 plates 100 mm (4 inches wide by 350 mm (14
inches) high) where push plates are specified for doors with stiles less than 200 mm (8
inches) wide. Color shall be as specified for kick-mop plates in Section 09 06 00,
SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES. Cut plates for cylinders, and turn pieces where required.
When wood grain plastic plates are specified in SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES Section,
grain in plates shall run in same direction as grain of face veneer of wood doors.
2.14 COMBINATION PUSH AND PULL PLATES
Conform to ANSI 156.6. Type J303, stainless steel 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick, 80 mm (3-1/3
inches) wide by 800 mm (16 inches) high), top and bottom edges shall be rounded.
Secure plates to wood doors with 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) long No. 12 wood screws. Cut
plates for turn pieces, and cylinders where required. Pull shall be mounted down.
2.15 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE
A. Access Doors (including Sheet Metal, Screen and Woven Wire Mesh Types): Except for
fire-rated doors and doors to Temperature Control Cabinets, equip each single or double
metal access door with Lock Type E76213, conforming to ANSI A156.5. Key locks as
directed. Ship lock prepaid to the door manufacturer. Hinges shall be provided by door
manufacturer.
291
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Cylinders for Various Partitions and Doors: Key cylinders same as entrance doors of area
in which partitions and door occur. Provide cylinders to operate locking devices where
specified for following partitions and doors:
1. Folding doors and partitions.
2. Wicket door (in roll-up door assemblies).
3. Slide-up doors.
4. Swing-up doors.
5. Fire-rated access doors-Engineer's key set.
6. Doors from corridor to electromagnetic shielded room.
7. Day gate on vault door.
C. Mutes: Conform to ANSI A156.16. Provide door mutes or door silencers Type L03011,
of white or light gray color, on each steel door frame, except lead-lined frames and
frames for sound-resistant, lightproof and electromagnetically shielded doors. Furnish 3
mutes for single doors and 2 mutes for each pair of doors, except double-acting doors.
Provide 4 mutes or silencers for frames for each Dutch type door. Provide 2 mutes for
each edge of sliding door which would contact door frame.
2.16 FINISHES
A. Exposed surfaces of hardware shall have ANSI A156.18, finishes as specified below.
Finishes on all hinges, pivots, closers, thresholds, etc., shall be as specified below under
"Miscellaneous Finishes." For field painting (final coat) of ferrous hardware, see Section
09 91 00, PAINTING.
B. 626 or 630: All surfaces on exterior and interior of buildings, except where other finishes
are specified.
C. Miscellaneous Finishes:
1. Hinges --exterior doors: 626 or 630.
2. Hinges --interior doors: 652.
3. Pivots: Match door trim.
4. Door Closers: Factory applied paint finish. Dull or Satin Aluminum color.
5. Thresholds: Mill finish aluminum.
6. Cover plates for floor hinges and pivots: 630.
7. Other primed steel hardware: 652.
292
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
D. Hardware Finishes for Existing Buildings: U.S. Standard finishes shall match finishes of
hardware in (similar) existing spaces .
E. Color of Plastic Items: Where colors other than chocolate brown or black are specified,
color of core material may be different than color of face.
F. Special Finish: Exposed surfaces of hardware for dark bronze anodized aluminum doors
shall have oxidized oil rubbed bronze finish (dark bronze) finish on door closers shall
closely match doors.
2.17 BASE METALS
Apply specified U.S. Standard finishes on different base metals as following:
Finish
Base Metal
652
Steel
626
Brass or bronze
630
Stainless steel
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HARDWARE HEIGHTS
A.
For existing buildings locate hardware on doors at heights to match existing hardware.
The Contractor shall visit the site, verify location of existing hardware and submit
locations to Resident Engineer for approval.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Closer devices, including those with hold-open features, shall be equipped and mounted
to provide maximum door opening permitted by building construction or equipment.
Closers shall be mounted regular arm. Where closers are mounted on doors they shall be
mounted with sex nuts and bolts; foot shall be fastened to frame with machine screws.
B. Substitute parallel arm or top jamb mounting for regular arm mounting where the
following conditions occur:
1. Where door swing, in full open position, would be limited to less than 90 degrees due
to partition construction and closer location.
2. Where door to room opens outward into corridor.
3. Where exterior doors open outward.
4. On doors equipped with roller latch.
293
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C. Hinge Size Requirements:
Door Thickness
Door Width
Hinge Height
45 mm (1-3/4 inch)
900 mm (3 feet) and less
113 mm (4-1/2 inches)
45 mm (1-3/4 inch)
Over 900 mm (3 feet) but
not more than 1200 mm (4 feet)
Not over 1200 mm (4 feet)
125 mm (5 inches)
35 mm (1-3/8 inch)
(hollow core wood
doors)
113 mm (4-1/2 inches)
D. Hinge leaves shall be sufficiently wide to allow doors to swing clear of door frame trim.
E. Where new hinges are specified for new doors in existing frames or existing doors in new
frames, sizes of new hinges shall match sizes of existing hinges; or, contractor may reuse
existing hinges provided hinges are restored to satisfactory operating condition as
approved by Resident Engineer. Existing hinges shall not be reused on door openings
having new doors and new frames. Coordinate preparation for hinge cut-outs and screwhole locations on doors and frames.
F. Hinges Required Per Door:
Doors 1500 mm (5 ft) or less in height
2 butts
Doors over 1500 mm (5 ft) high and not over 2280 mm (7 ft 6 in)
high
3 butts
Doors over 2280 mm (7 feet 6 inches) high
4 butts
Dutch type doors
4 butts
Doors with spring hinges 1370 mm (4 feet 6 inches) high or less
2 butts
Doors with spring hinges over 1370 mm (4 feet 6 inches)
3 butts
G. Fastenings: Suitable size and type and shall harmonize with hardware as to material and
finish. Provide machine screws and lead expansion shields to secure hardware to
concrete, ceramic or quarry floor tile, or solid masonry. Fiber or rawl plugs and adhesives
are not permitted. All fastenings exposed to weather shall be of nonferrous metal.
294
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
H. After locks have been installed; show in presence of Resident Engineer that keys operate
their respective locks in accordance with keying requirements. (All keys, Master Key
level and above shall be sent Registered Mail to the Medical Center Director along with
the bitting list. Also a copy of the invoice shall be sent to the Resident Engineer for his
records.) Installation of locks which do not meet specified keying requirements shall be
considered sufficient justification for rejection and replacement of all locks installed on
project.
3.3 HARDWARE SETS
Following sets of hardware correspond to hardware symbols shown on drawings. Where
hardware set for a single door is specified for a pair of doors; equip each leaf of such pair
of doors with set noted. Only those hardware sets that are shown on drawings will be
required. Disregard hardware sets listed in specifications but not shown on drawings.
HARDWARE SETS
HW 1
Butts as required
Door pull
Push plate
Closer C02011
HW 2
Butts as required
Door pull
Push plate
Closer C02011
Armor plate
HW 3
Butts as required
Door pull
Push plate
Closer C02011
Armor plate
Holder C22511
HW 4
Butts as required
Door pull
Push plate
Closer C02011
Armor plate
Holder C22511
HW 5
Butts as required
Door pull
Push plate
Closer C02051
Roller latch
HW 6
Butts as required
Door pulls
Push plates
Combination closer holder C00241
Armor plate
295
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
HARDWARE SETS
HW 7
Butts as required
Push/Pull latch 1562
By Trimco
HW 8
Butts as required
Lock F17
Door pull
Push plate
Combination closer holder C00241
Armor plate
HW 9
Butts as required
Deadlock F16 x rectangular strike (no
lip)
Door pull
Closer C02011 (on outside of
bedroom)
Note: No trim on room side of door
except cylinder.
HW 10
Butts as required
Deadlock F18 x rectangular
strike (no lip)
Push pull plate J303
Note: No cylinder or trim on room side of
door.
HW 11
Butts as required
Push plate
Arm pull double base arm J400
Closer C02051
HW 12
Butts as required
Push-pull plate J303
Arm pull double base J400
Closer C02051
HW 13
Butts as required
Lock F07 or F86
HW 14
Butts as required
Lock F02-MOD or F76
Provide turn piece on both sides of lock
HW 15
Butts as required
Door closer CO2011
Push-pull latch HL-6E, 628 by
Glynn Johnson
HW 16
Butts as required
Door Closer CO2011
Push-pull latch HL-6E, 628 by
Glynn Johnson
Deadlock cylindrical type with
70 mm (2-3/4 inch) backset with thumb turn on
each side by Falcon No. D881 spec. Mount
deadlock below latch at 840 mm (33 inches) to
centerline of strike.
HW 17
Butts as required
Lock F13
Note: Install cylinder on toilet side of
door.
HW 18
Butts as required
Lock F02 or F76
Provide emergency key
296
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
HARDWARE SETS
HW 19
Butts as required
Lock F13 or F82
HW 20
3 spring hinges, size as required
Lock F07 or F86
HW 21
2 spring hinges, size as required
Latch F01 or F75
HW 22
Butts as required
Lock F14 or F91
HW 23
Butts as required
Lock F04 or F81
HW 24
Butts as required
Lock F08
Closer C02011
HW 25
Butts as required
Lock F05 or F84
HW 26
Butts as required
Locks F07 or F86 (lower left)
Flush bolt (in edge of top leaf) to emerge in
lower leaf
HW 27
Butts as required
Latch F01 or F75 (lower leaf)
Flush bolts (in edge or top leaf) to
engage in lower leaf
HW 28
Butts as required
2 Flush bolts
Lock F07 or F86
HW 29
Butts as required
2 Flush bolts
Latch F01 or F75
HW 30
Butts as required
2 Flush bolts
Lock F13 or F82
HW 31
Butts as required
Lock F04 or F81 (lower leaf)
Flush bolts (in edge of top leaf to
engage in lower leaf)
HW 32
Butts as required
2 Flush bolts
Lock F07 or F86
2 Armor plates
HW 33
6 Spring hinges
2 Automatic flush bolts
Lock F07 or F86
Coordinator
HW 34
Butts as required
Lock F04 or F81
Armor plate
297
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
HARDWARE SETS
HW 35
Pivot set (Rixon) 127-3/4
Emergency door
Stop Stanley ES-1
Push-pull latch HL-6E, 628 by Glynn
Johnson.
1 Dead-lock cylinder type with 125
mm (5 inch) backset with thumb turn
on each side by Falcon No. D9670
Spec.
Mount deadlock 70 mm (2 3/4 inches)
below bottom of push pulls of latch set
HW 36
1 Pivot set (Rixon) 127-3/4
Emergency door
Stop Stanley ES-1
Latch set F02-MOD or F76
Provide turn piece on both sides of lock.
HW 37
Bypassing door hardware
Hager 9570 Series
HW 38
Butts as required
Latch F01 or F75
Closer C02011
HW 39
Butts as required
Latch F01 or F75
Closer C02051
HW 40
Butts as required
Lock F05 or F84
Closer C02051
HW 41
Butts as required
Latch F01 or F75
x 19 mm (3/4 inch) throw
Closer C02011
HW 42
Butts as required
Lock F87 or 161 W-4
Closer C02011
Holder C22511
HW 43
Butts as required
Lock F07 or F86
Closer C02011
HW 44
Butts as required
Lock F13 or F82
Closer C02011
HW 45
Butts as required
Lock F04 or F81
Closer C02011
HW 46
Butts as required
Lock F14 or F91
Closer C02011
HW 47
Butts as required
Lock F05 or F84
2 Closers C02011
Flush bolts
HW 48
Floor closer C16041
Intermediate Pivot C17321
Panic bolt Von Duprin 33EO
298
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
HARDWARE SETS
HW 49
2 Floor closers C16041
2 Intermediate pivots C17321
Panic bolt Von Duprin
3347 EO X 3347 TP
2 Holders C22511
HW 50
Butts as required
Lock F17 or E16071
Arm pull double base J400
Push-pull plate J3303
Concealed closer C25032
Holder C22511
HW 51
Butts as required
Lock F07 or F86
Closer C02011
Holder L11301
HW 52
Butts as required
Lock F04 or F81
Closer C02051
HW 53
Butts as required
Lock F04 or F81
Closer C02011
Armor plate
HW 54
Butts as required
Lock F14 or F91
Closer C02051
HW 55
Butts as required
Lock F13 or F82
Closer C02051
Armor plate
HW 56
Butts as required
2 Flush bolts
Lock F13 or F82
1 Closer C02011
2 Holders L11301
HW 57
Butts as required
2 Flush bolts
Lock F13 or F82
2 Closers C02011
Coordinators
HW 58
Butts as required
Lock F13 or F82
2 Flush bolts
2 Closers C02011
2 Holders L11301
HW 59
Butts as required
2 Flush bolts
Lock F04 or F81
2 Closers C02011
HW 60
Butts as required
2 Flush bolts
Lock F07 or F86
2 Closers C02011
Coordinators
299
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
HARDWARE SETS
HW 61
Butts as required
2 Automatic flush bolts
Lock F07 or F86
Coordinator
2 Closers C02011
HW 62
Butts as required
Lock F04 or F81
X 19 mm (3/4 inch) throw
2 Automatic flush bolts
2 Closers C02011
Coordinator
2 Armor plates
HW 63
Butts as required
2 Automatic flush bolts
Latch F01 or F75
x 19 mm (3/4 inch) throw
2 Closers C02011
Coordinator 836
2 Armor plates
HW 64
Butts as required
2 Automatic flush bolts
Lock F07 or F86
2 Closers C02011
Coordinator
2 Armor plates
HW 65
Butts as required
2 Automatic flush bolts
Lock F91
2 Closer C02011
2 Armor plates
Coordinator
Note: Lock series 86 is not permitted
under hardware set
HW 66
Butts as required
Latch F01 or F75
2 Automatic flush bolts
2 Closers C02011
Armor Plate
Coordinator
HW 67
Butts as required
Lock F17 or E16071
Door pull
Push-pull plate J300
Closer C02051
HW 68
Butts as required
Lock F17 or E16071
Door pull
Push-pull plate J303 Closer C02011
HW 69
Butts as required
Lock F17 or E16071
Door pull
Push-pull plate J303
Closer C02051
Armor plate
HW 70
Butts as required
Lock F17 or E16071
Push plate
Door pull
Closer C02011
Armor plate
Holder C22511
300
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
HARDWARE SETS
HW 71
Butts as required
Lock F17 or E16071
Push plate
Door pull
Closer C02011
Armor plate
Holder L11301
HW 72
Butts as required
Lock F17 or E16071
Arm pull double base J400
Push-pull plate J303
Closer C02011
Armor plate
Holder C22511
HW 73
Butts as required
Lock F17 or E16071
Door pull
Push-pull plate J303
Closer C02011
Holder C22511
HW 74
Butts as required
Lock F17 or E16071
Arm pull double base J400
Push-pull plate J303
Closer C02051
HW 75
Butts as required
Lock Adams-Rite MS1851A
x two cylinders
Push Bar Type J500
Pull Bar Type J500
Closer C04011
HW 76
Butts as required
Lock F17 or E16071
Door pull
Push-pull plate J303
Closer C02051
HW 77
Butts as required
2 Automatic flush bolts
Lock F17 or E16061
Lock F87
2 Closers C02011
2 Armor plates
Coordinator
HW 78
Butts required
HW 79
Butts as required
Lock F17 or E16071
2 Flush bolts
2 Arm pulls double base J400
2 Push-pull plates J303
2 Armor plates
2 Closers C02011
2 Holders C22511
HW 80
Butts as required
2 Flush bolts
Lock F17 or E16061
2 Door pulls
2 Push-pull plates J303
2 Closers C02011
2 Armor plates
2 Holders L11301
2 Arm pulls double base J400
2 Push-pull plates J303
2 Armor plates
2 Closer C04011
2 Holders L11301
301
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
HARDWARE SETS
HW 81
Butts as required
Lock F17 or E16071
2 Flush bolts
2 Door pulls
2 Push-pull plates J303
2 Closers C02051
HW 82
Butts as required
Lock F17 or E16071
2 Flush bolts
2 Door pulls
2 Push-pull plates J303
2 Closers C02011
2 Holders C22511
2 Armor plates
HW 83
Butts as required
Panic bolt Type 1 - Function 09
(Always locked - Key Removable only
when locked)
Closer C02011
HW 84
Butts as required
Panic bolt Type 1 - Function 08
Closer C02011
HW 85
Butts as required
Panic bolt Type 1 - Function 08
Closer C02011
HW 86
Butts as required
Panic bolt Type 2 - Function 01 and Type 2 Function 08
2 Closers C02011
2 Holders C22511
HW 87
Butts as required
Panic bolt Type 2 - Function 01 and
Type 2 - Function 09
2 Closers C02011
HW 88
Butts as required
Panic bolt Type 2- Function 01 and Type 2 Function 08
2 Closers C02011
HW 89
Butts as required
Panic bolt Type 2- Function 01 and
Type 2 - Function 08
2 Closers C02011
2 Armor plates
HW 90
Butts as required
Panic bolt Type 2- Function 01 and Type 2 Function 08
2 Combination closer holders C00241
HW 91
Butts as required
Panic bolt Type 2 - Function 01 and
Type 2 - Function 08
2 Closers C02011
2 Armor plates
2 Holders L11301
HW 92
Butts as required
2 Panic bolts Type 2 - Function 08
2 Combination closer holders C00241
302
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
HARDWARE SETS
HW 93
Butts as required
Panic bolt Type 2 - Function 01 and
Type 2 - Function 08
2 Holders C22511
2 Closers C02011
2 Armor plates
HW 94
Butts as required
2 panic bolts Type 2 - Function 01
2 Closers C02011
HW 95
Butts as required
2 Panic bolts Type 2 - Function 01
2 Combination closer holders C00241
HW 96
Sliding door assembly (Hager 9885 Series)
with adjustable top plate assembly - Sliding
door
lock (Adams-Rite MS 1850 ANSI - 505).
Hager 9882
2 Dropping ring pulls J403
HW 97
Sliding door assembly (Hager 9885
series) with adjustment top plate
assembly
Sliding door lock (Merit) 1781C
Edge pull, Hager 9882
2 Flush cup pulls 3403
HW 98
Sliding Door Hardware (Hager 9885 Series
Complete, Edge pull, Hager 9882
2 Flush cup pulls J403
HW 99
Floor Closer C16041
Intermediate pivot C17321
Push bars, Type J500
Pull bars, Type J500
Holder C22511
HW 100
Floor Closer C16041 Intermediate Pivot
C17321
Lock Adams-Rite MS1851A
x two cylinder
Door pull, Type J500
Push bars, Type J500
Holder C22511
HW 101
Offset Pivot set C17121
Intermediate pivot C17321
Lock E16071
Closer C02051
Door pull
Push-pull plate J303
Armor plate
HW 102
Floor Closer C16041
Intermediate pivot C17321
Lock E16071 provide with a thumb turn
cylinder outside Door pull
Push-pull plate J303
303
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
HARDWARE SETS
HW 103
Offset pivot set C17121
Intermediate pivot C17321
Closer C02051
Door pull
Push plate
Armor plate
HW 104
Offset pivot set C17121
Intermediate pivot C17321
Door pull
Push plate
Closer C02051
HW 105
Offset pivot set C17111
Intermediate pivot C17311
Closer C02011
Lock E16071 (Turn piece on both sides
of lock)
Door pull
Push-pull plate J303
HW 106
Offset pivot set C17111
Intermediate pivot C17311
Lock E16071
Door pull
Push-pull plate J303
Closer LCN 4010
Armor plate
Holder C22511
HW 107
Offset pivot set C17111
Intermediate pivot C17311
Lock E 16071
Door pull
Push plate J300
Closer LCN 4010 size 6
Armor plate
HW 108
Offset pivot set C17111
Intermediate pivot C17311
Door pull
Push plate J300
Closer LCN 4010 size 6
HW 109
2 Offset pivot sets C17121
2 Intermediate pivots C17321
Lock E16071
2 Flush bolts
2 Door pulls J 405
2 Push-pulls J303
2 Armor plates
2 Closers LCN 4010 size 6
2 Holders C22511
1 Lead lined astragal
Coordinator
HW 110
Floor closer C16041
Intermediate pivot C17321
Panic bolt Von Duprin 33 L x 20
304
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
HARDWARE SETS
HW 111
Hardware as required
Magnetic lock unit, Securitron iMXD24
Power Supply – BPS-24-1
Key Pad – DK11
Push Button – PB-2E
HW 112
Floor closer C16011
2 Push plates
2 Armor plates J303
Holder C21511 (Double acting)
HW 113
Concealed closer C75062
2 Push plates J303
2 Armor plates
Holder 1168
HW 114
Floor closer
2 Push plates
2 Armor plates
HW 115
Floor closer with hold open
Lock F17 or E16071
2 Flush bolts
4 Push-pull plates J303
4 Armor plates
HW 116
Floor closer
Lock F17 or E16071
2 Push-pull plates J303
2 Armor plates
HW 117
Floor closer
Lock F17
Intermediate pivot C17321
Door pull
Push plate
HW 119
Butts as required 2 Door pulls
Armor plate
Note: For automatic door operator, see
specification Section 08 71 13.
HW 120
Butts as required
Lock F17 or E16071
Door pull
Armor plate
Note: For automatic door operator, see
specification Section 08 71 13.
HW 121
Bi-parting door lock E8291
HW 122
Sliding door lock - E16131
2 Flush cup pulls 459
Note: For automatic door operator, see
specification Section 08 71 13.
305
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
HARDWARE SETS
HW 123
2 Lock (Adams-Rite) MS1861
Cylinder outside thumbturn inside
4 Pull bars J500
Note: For automatic door operator, see
specification Section 08 71 13.
HW 124
Lock (Adams-Rite) MS1861
Cylinder outside thumbturn inside Pull bar
J500
Note: For automatic door operator, see
specification Section 08 71 13.
HW 125
4 Pull bars J500
Note: For automatic door operator, see
specification Section 08 71 13.
HW 126
Butts as required
Lock F17 or E16071
2 Push-pull plates J300
2 Door pulls
2 Armor plates
I Push Bolt
Coordinator
Note: For automatic door operator, see
specification Section 08 71 13.
HW 127
2 Flush cup pulls J403
Note: For automatic door operator, see
specification Section 08 71 13.
HW 128
Butts as required
2 Door pulls
2 Push plates
2 Armor plates
Note: For automatic door operator, see
specification Section 08 71 13.
HW 129
Butts as required
Armor plate
Push plate
Door pull J303
Note: For automatic door operators, see
specification Section 08 71 13.
HW 130
Butts as required
2 Locks E16071 or F17 in top rail
2 Push-pull plates J303
2 Armor plates
Note: For automatic door operators, see
specification Section 08 71 13.
HW 131
Biparting door lock
Adams-Rite MS1850-A-505
Cylinder outside thumbturn inside
Note: For automatic door operators, see
specification Section 08 71 13.
HW 132
Butts as required
Lock F07 or F86
Electrical door release ( Folger Adam 310-2
¾")
Closer C02011
306
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
HARDWARE SETS
HW 133
Butts as required
Lock F07 or F86
Jimmyproof deadlock ( type EO6261)
2 Cylinders
Closer C02011
HW 134
Butts as required
Push-pull Corbin Russwin H10
Closer C02011
Armor plate
HW 135
Butts as required
Panic bolt Type 2 - Function 01
and Type 2 - Function 01
2 Closers C02051
HW 136
2 Floor closer
Lock F17 or E16071
2 Flush bolts 1049
2 Push bars
HW 137
Butts as required
Lock (Adams-Rite) MS1851A
x two cylinders
2 Flush bolts (Modified)
2 Pull bars J500
2 Push bars J500
2 Closers C02011
2 Holders C22511
HW 138
Butts as required
Lock (Adams-Rite) MS1851A
x two cylinders
Pull bar J502
Push bar J502
Closer C02011
Holder C22511
HW 139
Butts as required
Lock F87
Closer C02051
2 Flush bolts and 1 coordinator (For
pairs of doors only)
HW 140
Butts as required
Lock F02-MOD, provide turnpiece on both
side of lock
Closer C02011
307
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
HARDWARE SETS
HW 141
Sliding Door Hardware Set:
2 Hangers (HW) No.126
Track (RW) No. 30 1/2-length as
required x end and intermediate
brackets x end closures
2 Stay rollers (RW) No. 68
2 Flush pulls (RW) No. 535-4
Jimmyproof deadlock-cylinder x
turnpiece, mounted on jamb.
Strike on face of door.
Tamperproof fastenings.
Table on Sliding Doors:
Ball bearing drop forged
Wheels - End stops
Trucks on metal doors
Hangers on wood doors
HW 142
Folding Door Hardware Set:
(Hager 9870 Series) 2 Flush pulls J403
Lock E16151 cylinder outside thumb turn
inside
HW 143
Floor Closer
2 Push-pull plates J303
HW 144
2 Floor closers
2 Flush bolts
Lock F17 or E16071
4 Push-pull plates J303
2 Holders C26513
HW 145
Butts as required
Lock F14 or F91
HW 146
Butts as required
Lock F07 x 19 mm (3/4 inch) throw
2 Automatic flush bolts
2 Closers C72011
Coordinator 836
HW 147
Butts as required
Lock E16071 or F17
2 Flush bolts
2 Door pulls
2 Push plates
2 Combination /closer holders C00241
Coordinator 836
HW 148
Butts as required
Latch F01 or F75
Combination closer holders C00241
HW 149
Butts as required
Lock F13 or F82
Combination closer holder C00241
HW 150
Butts as required
2 Automatic flush bolts
2 Combination closer holders C00241
Coordinator 836
308
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
HARDWARE SETS
HW 151
Butts as required
Lock F05 or F84
Combination closer holders C00241
HW 152
Butts as required
Lock F14 or F91
Combination closer holder C00241
HW 153
Butts as required
Lock F04 or F81
Combination closer holder C00241
HW 154
Butts as required
2 Flush bolts
Lock F14 or F91
HW 155
Panic bolt Adams-Rite 8600 series
Note: For automatic door operator,
see specification Section 08 71 13.
HW 156
Panic bolt Von Duprin 3347 TP X 3347 EO
Delete bottom latch bolt
Note: For automatic door operator
see specification Section 08 71 13.
HW 157
Butts as required (Hospital tip)
Lockset (Unican Lock Co.)
1001 - Mechanical lock with 5-button
combination and 19 mm (3/4 inch)
throw latch bolt Lock E16071 with 19
mm (3/4 inch) throw deadbolt - Mount
deadlock at 1500 mm (60 inches) to
centerline of strike from finished floor
on this hardware set only
Closer C02011
Flush bolts Ives 454 by 300 mm (12
inch) for pairs of doors.
HW 158
2 Locks (Adams-Rite) MS1861A cylinder
outside thumb turn
inside 4 Push-pull bars J500
HW 160 (Opposite Swing Aluminum
Entrance Doors)
INSWINGING DOORS:
Lock (Adams-Rite) MS 1851
Cylinder outside thumb turn inside
2 Pull bars J500
OUTSWINGING DOORS:
Panic bolt Von Duprin 3347 TP
Delete bottom latch bolt
Note: For automatic door operator see
Specification Section, 08 71 13
HW 161
2 Pivots set C17162
2 Intermediate pivots C17321
4 Push-pull bars J500
2 Door closers 4113 H cush-n-stop by LCN
309
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
HARDWARE SETS
HW 162
2 Cylinders as required. Balance of
hardware by door manufacturer.
HW 163
Continuous hinge
Lock F07 (Storeroom)
Electric strike
Dead bolt
Card reader with PIN or Biometric
Closer
HW 164
Continuous hinge
Lock F07 (Storeroom)
Electric strike
Card reader
Door monitor with alarm
Closer
HW 165
Butts as required
Card reader or push-button combination lock
Closer
HW 166 (15 minute FE rating)
Continuous hinge
Lock F07 (Storeroom)
Electric strike
Card reader
Closer
HW 167
Continuous hinge
E01 alarmed exit device, Type 3
Closer
HW 168
Continuous hinge
Card reader
Magnetic lock
Door pull
Request to exit button
E01 Exit device
Closer
- - - E N D OF SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE- - -
SECTION 08 80 00
GLAZING
310
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies glass, related glazing materials and accessories. Glazing products
specified apply to factory or field glazed items.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Factory glazed by manufacturer in following units:
1. Mirrors: Section 10 28 00, TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES.
1.3 LABELS
A. Temporary labels:
1. Provide temporary label on each light of glass identifying manufacturer or brand and
glass type, quality and nominal thickness.
2. Label in accordance with NFRC (National Fenestration Rating Council) label
requirements.
3. Temporary labels shall remain intact until glass is approved by Resident Engineer.
B. Permanent labels:
1. Locate in corner for each pane.
2. Label in accordance with ANSI Z97.1 and SGCC (Safety Glass Certification Council)
label requirements.
a. Tempered glass.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Glass Thickness:
1. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full
recovery of glazing materials.
2. Test in accordance with ASTM E 330.
3. Thicknesses listed are minimum. Coordinate thicknesses with framing system
manufacturers.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES.
B. Warranty: Submit written guaranty, conforming to General Condition requirements, and
to “Warranty of Construction” Article in this Section.
311
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Glass, each kind required.
2. Transparent (one-way vision glass) mirrors.
3. Elastic compound for metal sash glazing.
4. Glazing cushion.
5. Sealing compound.
D. Samples:
1. Size: 150 mm by 150 mm (6 inches by 6 inches).
2. Transparent (one-way vision glass) mirrors.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Schedule delivery to coincide with glazing schedules so minimum handling of
crates is required. Do not open crates except as required for inspection for shipping
damage.
B. Storage: Store cases according to printed instructions on case, in areas least subject to
traffic or falling objects. Keep storage area clean and dry.
C. Handling: Unpack cases following printed instructions on case. Stack individual windows
on edge leaned slightly against upright supports with separators between each.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Field measure openings before ordering tempered glass products.
Be responsible for proper fit of field measured products.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Conform to terms of "Warranty of Construction", FAR clause 52.246-21.
1.9 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced.
Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
Z97.1-04 .................................Safety Glazing Material Used in Building - Safety
Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C1363-05................................Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies, by Means of
A Hot Box Apparatus
312
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C542-05..................................Lock-Strip Gaskets.
C716-06..................................Installing Lock-Strip Gaskets and Infill Glazing Materials.
C864-05..................................Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting
Blocks, and Spacers.
C920-05..................................Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
C1036-06................................Flat Glass.
C1048-04................................Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and
Uncoated Glass.
C1376-03................................Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat Glass.
E84-08 ....................................Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
E330-02 ..................................Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference.
D. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):
16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; 1977, with 1984
Revision.
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
80-08 ......................................Fire Doors and Windows.
F. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC):
Certified Products Directory (Latest Edition).
G. Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC):
Certified Products Directory (Issued Semi-Annually).
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 GLASS
A. Use thickness stated unless specified otherwise in assemblies.
B. Clear Glass:
1. ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3.
2. Thickness, 6 mm (1/4 inch).
2.2 HEAT-TREATED GLASS
A. Clear Tempered Glass:
1. ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3.
313
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Thickness, 6 mm (1/4 inch).
2.3 COATED GLASS
A. Transparent Mirror (One-Way-Vision Glass):
1. ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2 or Class 3, Quality q3; Grey Glass.
2. Thickness, 6 mm (1/4 inch).
3. Coated one face with a hard adherent reflective film of chromium or other coating of
proven equivalent durability.
4. Visible light transmittance; eight percent, plus or minus two percent.
5. Visible reflectance; sixty percent, plus or minus five percent.
6. Light ratio; mirror side 10 or more; observer side one or less.
7. Assemble with coating covered and protected with a layer of clear glass not less than
3 mm (1/8 inch) thick.
8. Clean interface glass prior to assembly.
9. Tape edge to seal interface and hold panes together.
2.12 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A. As required to supplement the accessories provided with the items to be glazed and to
provide a complete installation. Ferrous metal accessories exposed in the finished work
shall have a finish that will not corrode or stain while in service.
B. Setting Blocks: ASTM C864:
1. Channel shape; having 6 mm (1/4 inch) internal depth.
2. Shore a hardness of 80 to 90 Durometer.
3. Block lengths: 50 mm (two inches).
4. Block width: Approximately 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) less than the full width of the rabbet.
5. Block thickness: Minimum 4.8 mm (3/16 inch). Thickness sized for rabbet depth as
required.
C. Spacers: ASTM C864:
1. Channel shape having a 6 mm (1/4 inch) internal depth.
2. Flanges not less 2.4 mm (3/32 inch) thick and web 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick.
3. Lengths: One to 25 to 76 mm (one to three inches).
4. Shore a hardness of 40 to 50 Durometer.
D. Sealing Tapes:
314
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. Semi-solid polymeric based material exhibiting pressure-sensitive adhesion and
withstanding exposure to sunlight, moisture, heat, cold, and aging.
2. Shape, size and degree of softness and strength suitable for use in glazing application
to prevent water infiltration.
E. Spring Steel Spacer: Galvanized steel wire or strip designed to position glazing in
channel or rabbeted sash with stops.
F. Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C864:
1. Firm dense wedge shape for locking in sash.
2. Soft, closed cell with locking key for sash key.
3. Flanges may terminate above the glazing-beads or terminate flush with top of beads.
G. Glazing Sealants: ASTM C920, silicone neutral cure:
1. Type S.
2. Class 25
3. Grade NS.
4. Shore A hardness of 25 to 30 Durometer.
H. Color:
1. Color of glazing compounds, gaskets, and sealants used for aluminum color frames
shall match color of the finished aluminum and be nonstaining.
2. Color of other glazing compounds, gaskets, and sealants which will be exposed in the
finished work and unpainted shall be black, gray, or neutral color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Examine openings for glass and glazing units; determine they are proper size; plumb;
square; and level before installation is started.
2. Verify that glazing openings conform with details, dimensions and tolerances
indicated on manufacturer’s approved shop drawings.
B. Advise Contractor of conditions which may adversely affect glass and glazing unit
installation, prior to commencement of installation: Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
315
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3.2 PREPARATION
A. For sealant glazing, prepare glazing surfaces in accordance with GANA-02 Sealant
Manual.
B. Determine glazing unit size and edge clearances by measuring the actual unit to receive
the glazing.
C. Shop fabricate and cut glass with smooth, straight edges of full size required by openings
to provide GANA recommended edge clearances.
D. Verify that components used are compatible.
E. Clean and dry glazing surfaces.
F. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealantsubstrate testing.
3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install in accordance with GANA-01 Glazing Manual and GANA-02 Sealant Manual
unless specified otherwise.
B. Glaze in accordance with recommendations of glazing and framing manufacturers, and as
required to meet the Performance Test Requirements specified in other applicable
sections of specifications.
C. Set glazing without bending, twisting, or forcing of units.
D. Do not allow glass to rest on or contact any framing member.
E. Glaze doors and operable sash, in a securely fixed or closed and locked position, until
sealant, glazing compound, or putty has thoroughly set.
F. Tempered Glass: Install with roller distortions in horizontal position unless otherwise
directed.
G. Transparent (One-Way Vision Glass) Mirror: Use continuous channel glazing gasket.
3.4 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT)
A. Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops, projecting 1.6 mm (1/16
inch) above sight line.
B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 150 mm (6 inches) from
corners.
C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of
pane or unit.
316
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
D. Install removable stops, spacer shims inserted between glazing and applied stops at 600
mm (24 inch) intervals, 6 mm (1/4 inch) below sight line.
E. Fill gaps between pane and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite on glazing, to
uniform and level line.
F. Trim protruding tape edge.
3.5 REPLACEMENT AND CLEANING
A. Clean new glass surfaces removing temporary labels, paint spots, and defacement after
approval by Resident Engineer.
B. Replace cracked, broken, and imperfect glass, or glass which has been installed
improperly.
C. Leave glass, putty, and other setting material in clean, whole, and acceptable condition.
3.6 PROTECTION
Protect finished surfaces from damage during erection, and after completion of work.
Strippable plastic coatings on colored anodized finish are not acceptable.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 08 00 00 GLAZING- - -
SECTION 09 22 16
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
317
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies steel studs wall systems, ceiling or soffit suspended or furred
framing, wall furring, fasteners, and accessories for the screw attachment of gypsum
board other building boards.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Ceiling suspension systems for acoustical tile or panels and lay in gypsum board panels:
Section 09 51 00, ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS, Section 09 29 00, GYPSUM BOARD.
1.3 TERMINOLOGY
A. Description of terms shall be in accordance with ASTM C754, ASTM C11, ASTM C841
and as specified.
B. Underside of Structure Overhead: In spaces where steel trusses or bar joists are shown,
the underside of structure overhead shall be the underside of the floor or roof construction
supported by beams, trusses, or bar joists. In interstitial spaces with walk-on floors the
underside of the walk-on floor is the underside of structure overhead.
C. Thickness of steel specified is the minimum bare (uncoated) steel thickness.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Studs, runners and accessories.
2. Hanger inserts.
3. Channels (Rolled steel).
4. Furring channels.
5. Screws, clips and other fasteners.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Typical ceiling suspension system.
2. Typical metal stud and furring construction system including details around openings
and corner details.
4. Typical fire rated assembly showing details of construction same as that used in fire
rating test.
318
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
D. Test Results: Fire rating test designation, each fire rating required for each assembly.
1.5 DELIVERY, IDENTIFICATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE
In accordance with the requirements of ASTM C754.
1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM)
A123-02 .................................Zinc (Hot-dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products
A653/A653M-07 ....................Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy
Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
A641-03 .................................Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire
C11-07....................................Terminology Relating to Gypsum and Related Building
Materials and Systems
C635-04..................................Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal
Suspension System for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel
Ceilings
C636-06..................................Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels
C645-07..................................Non-Structural Steel Framing Members
C754-04..................................Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products
C841-03..................................Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring
C954-04..................................Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel
Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033
in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness
C1002-04................................Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of
Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood
Studs or Steel Studs
319
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
E580-06 ..................................Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical
Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Moderate
Seismic Restraint.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PROTECTIVE COATING
Galvanize steel studs, runners (track), rigid (hat section) furring channels, and resilient
furring channels, with coating designation of G-60 minimum, per ASTM 123.
2.2 STEEL STUDS AND RUNNERS (TRACK)
A. ASTM C645, modified for thickness specified and sizes and shown.
1. Use ASTM A525 steel, 0.9 mm (0.0359-inch) thick bare metal (20 gauge).
2. Runners same thickness as studs.
B. Provide not less than two cutouts in web of each stud, approximately 300 mm (12 inches)
from each end, and intermediate cutouts on approximately 600 mm (24-inch) centers.
C. Doubled studs for openings and studs for supporting concrete backer-board.
D. Studs 3600 mm (12 feet) or less in length shall be in one piece.
2.3 FASTENERS, CLIPS, AND OTHER METAL ACCESSORIES
A. ASTM C754, except as otherwise specified.
B. For fire rated construction: Type and size same as used in fire rating test.
C. Fasteners for steel studs thicker than 0.84 mm (0.033-inch) thick. Use ASTM C954 steel
drill screws of size and type recommended by the manufacturer of the material being
fastened.
D. Clips: ASTM C841 (paragraph 6.11), manufacturer’s standard items. Clips used in lieu
of tie wire shall have holding power equivalent to that provided by the tie wire for the
specific application.
E. Tie Wire and Hanger Wire:
1. ASTM A641, soft temper, Class 1 coating.
2. Gage (diameter) as specified in ASTM C754 or ASTM C841.
F. Attachments for Wall Furring:
1. Manufacturers standard items fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.
320
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. For concrete or masonry walls: Metal slots with adjustable inserts or adjustable wall
furring brackets. Spacers may be fabricated from 1 mm (0.0396-inch) thick
galvanized steel with corrugated edges.
G. Power Actuated Fasteners: Type and size as recommended by the manufacturer of the
material being fastened.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION CRITERIA
A. Where fire rated construction is required for walls, partitions, columns, beams and
floor-ceiling assemblies, the construction shall be same as that used in fire rating test.
B. Construction requirements for fire rated assemblies and materials shall be as shown and
specified, the provisions of the Scope paragraph (1.2) of ASTM C754 and ASTM C841
regarding details of construction shall not apply.
3.2 INSTALLING STUDS
A. Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754, except as otherwise shown or specified.
B. Space studs not more than 400 mm (16 inches) on center.
C. Cut studs 6 mm to 9 mm (1/4 to 3/8-inch) less than floor to underside of structure
overhead when extended to underside of structure overhead.
D. Where studs are shown to terminate above suspended ceilings, provide bracing as shown
or extend studs to underside of structure overhead.
E. Extend studs to underside of structure overhead for fire, rated partitions, smoke
partitions, shafts, and sound rated partitions.
F. Openings:
1. Frame jambs of openings in stud partitions and furring with two studs placed back to
back or as shown.
2. Fasten back to back studs together with 9 mm (3/8-inch) long Type S pan head
screws at not less than 600 mm (two feet) on center, staggered along webs.
3. Studs fastened flange to flange shall have splice plates on both sides approximately
50 X 75 mm (2 by 3 inches) screwed to each stud with two screws in each stud.
Locate splice plates at 600 mm (24 inches) on center between runner tracks.
321
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
G. Fastening Studs:
1. Fasten studs located adjacent to partition intersections, corners and studs at jambs of
openings to flange of runner tracks with two screws through each end of each stud
and flange of runner.
2. Do not fasten studs to top runner track when studs extend to underside of structure
overhead.
H. Chase Wall Partitions:
1. Locate cross braces for chase wall partitions to permit the installation of pipes,
conduits, carriers and similar items.
2. Use studs or runners as cross bracing not less than 63 mm (2-1/2 inches wide).
I. Form building seismic or expansion joints with double studs back to back spaced 75 mm
(three inches) apart plus the width of the seismic or expansion joint.
J. Form control joint, with double studs spaced 13 mm (1/2-inch) apart.
3.3 INSTALLING WALL FURRING FOR FINISH APPLIED TO ONE SIDE ONLY
A. In accordance with ASTM C754, or ASTM C841 except as otherwise specified or shown.
B. Wall furring-Stud System:
1. Framed with 63 mm (2-1/2 inch) or narrower studs, 400 mm (16 inches) on center.
2. Brace as specified in ASTM C754 for Wall Furring-Stud System or brace with
sections or runners or studs placed horizontally at not less than three foot vertical
intervals on side without finish.
3. Securely fasten braces to each stud with two Type S pan head screws at each bearing.
C. Installing Wall Furring-Bracket System: Space furring channels not more than 400 mm
(16 inches) on center.
3.4 INSTALLING SUPPORTS REQUIRED BY OTHER TRADES
A. Provide for attachment and support of electrical outlets, plumbing, laboratory or heating
fixtures, recessed type plumbing fixture accessories, access panel frames, wall bumpers,
chalkboards, tackboards, wall-hung casework, handrail brackets, recessed fire
extinguisher cabinets and other items like auto door buttons and auto door operators
supported by stud construction.
B. Provide additional studs where required. Install metal backing plates, or special metal
shapes as required, securely fastened to metal studs.
322
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3.5 INSTALLING FURRED AND SUSPENDED CEILINGS OR SOFFITS
A. Install furred and suspended ceilings or soffits in accordance with ASTM C754 or ASTM
C841 except as otherwise specified or shown for screw attached gypsum board ceilings
and for plaster ceilings or soffits.
1. Space framing at 400 mm (16-inch) centers for metal lath anchorage.
2. Space framing at 600 mm (24-inch) centers for gypsum board anchorage.
B. Concrete slabs on steel decking composite construction:
1. Use pull down tabs when available.
2. Use power activated fasteners when direct attachment to structural framing can not be
accomplished.
C. Where bar joists or beams are more than 1200 mm (48 inches) apart, provide
intermediate hangers so that spacing between supports does not exceed 1200 mm (48
inches). Use clips, bolts, or wire ties for direct attachment to steel framing.
D.
Existing concrete construction exposed or concrete on steel decking:
1. Use power actuated fasteners either eye pin, threaded studs or drive pins for type of
hanger attachment required.
2. Install fasteners at approximate mid height of concrete beams or joists. Do not install
in bottom of beams or joists.
E. Steel decking without concrete topping:
1. Do not fasten to steel decking 0.76 mm (0.0299-inch) or thinner.
2. Toggle bolt to decking 0.9 mm (0.0359-inch) or thicker only where anchorage to steel
framing is not possible.
F. Installing suspended ceiling system for gypsum board (ASTM C635 Option):
1. Install only for ceilings to receive screw attached gypsum board.
2. Install in accordance with ASTM C636.
a. Install main runners spaced 1200 mm (48 inches) on center.
b. Install 1200 mm (four foot) tees not over 600 mm (24 inches) on center; locate for
edge support of gypsum board.
c. Install wall track channel at perimeter.
G. Installing Ceiling Bracing System:
323
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. Construct bracing of 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) channels for lengths up to 2400 mm (8 feet)
and 50 mm (2 inch) channels for lengths over 2400 mm (8 feet) with ends bent to
form surfaces for anchorage to carrying channels and over head construction. Lap
channels not less than 600 mm (2 feet) at midpoint back to back. Screw or bolt lap
together with two fasteners.
2. Install bracing at an approximate 45 degree angle to carrying channels and structure
overhead; secure as specified to structure overhead with two fasteners and to carrying
channels with two fasteners or wire ties.
3. Brace suspended ceiling or soffit framing in seismic areas in accordance with ASTM
E580.
3.7 TOLERANCES
A. Fastening surface for application of subsequent materials shall not vary more than 3 mm
(1/8-inch) from the layout line.
B. Plumb and align vertical members within 3 mm (1/8-inch.)
C. Level or align ceilings within 3 mm (1/8-inch.)
- - - E N D OF SECTION 09 22 16 NO STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING- - -
324
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 09 29 00
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies installation and finishing of gypsum board.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Installation of steel framing members for walls, partitions, furring, soffits, and ceilings:
Section 09 22 16, NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING.
B. Acoustical insulation: Section 07 21 13, THERMAL INSULATION.
C. Acoustical Sealants: Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.
1.3 TERMINOLOGY
A. Definitions and description of terms shall be in accordance with ASTM C11, C840, and
as specified.
B. Underside of Structure Overhead: In spaces where steel trusses or bar joists are shown,
the underside of structure overhead shall be the underside of the floor or roof construction
supported by the trusses or bar joists.
C. "Yoked": Gypsum board cut out for opening with no joint at the opening (along door
jamb or above the door).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Cornerbead and edge trim.
2. Finishing materials.
3. Laminating adhesive.
4. Gypsum board, each type.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Typical gypsum board installation, showing corner details, edge trim details and the
like.
2. Typical sound rated assembly, showing treatment at perimeter of partitions and
penetrations at gypsum board.
325
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
4. Typical fire rated assembly indicating details of construction same as that used in fire
rating test.
D. Samples:
1. Cornerbead.
2. Edge trim.
3. Control joints.
E. Test Results:
1. Fire rating test, each fire rating required for each assembly.
2. Sound rating test.
1.5 DELIVERY, IDENTIFICATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE
In accordance with the requirements of ASTM C840.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
In accordance with the requirements of ASTM C840.
1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American Society for Testing And Materials (ASTM):
C11-08....................................Terminology Relating to Gypsum and Related Building
Materials and Systems
C475-02..................................Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum
Board
C840-08..................................Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board
C919-08..................................Sealants in Acoustical Applications
C954-07..................................Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or
Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Stud from 0.033 in. (0.84mm)
to 0.112 in. (2.84mm) in thickness
C1002-07................................Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of
Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood
Studs or Steel Studs
C1047-05................................Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer
Base
326
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C1177-06................................Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing
C1396-06................................Gypsum Board
E84-08 ....................................Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
Latest Edition .........................Fire Resistance Directory
D. Inchcape Testing Services (ITS):
Latest Editions .......................Certification Listings
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM BOARD
A. Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396, Type X, 16 mm (5/8 inch) thick unless shown otherwise.
Shall contain a minimum of 20 percent recycled gypsum.
B. Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C620, Type X, 16 mm (5/8 inch) thick.
C. Gypsum cores shall contain a minimum of 95 percent post industrial recycled gypsum
content. Paper facings shall contain 100 percent post-consumer recycled paper content.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. ASTM C1047, except form of 0.39 mm (0.015 inch) thick zinc coated steel sheet or rigid
PVC plastic.
B. Flanges not less than 22 mm (7/8 inch) wide with punchouts or deformations as required
to provide compound bond.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. ASTM C1002 and ASTM C840, except as otherwise specified.
B. ASTM C954, for steel studs thicker than 0.04 mm (0.33 inch).
C. Select screws of size and type recommended by the manufacturer of the material being
fastened.
D. For fire rated construction, type and size same as used in fire rating test.
E. Clips: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; gypsum board manufacturer's standard items.
2.4 FINISHING MATERIALS AND LAMINATING ADHESIVE
ASTM C475 and ASTM C840. Free of antifreeze, vinyl adhesives, preservatives,
biocides and other VOC. Adhesive shall contain a maximum VOC content of 50 g/l.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
327
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3.1 GYPSUM BOARD HEIGHTS
A. Extend all layers of gypsum board from floor to underside of structure overhead on
following partitions and furring:
1. Two sides of partitions:
a. Fire rated partitions.
b. Smoke partitions.
c. Sound rated partitions.
d. Full height partitions shown (FHP).
2. One side of partitions or furring:
a. Inside of exterior wall furring or stud construction.
b. Room side of room without suspended ceilings.
c. Furring for pipes and duct shafts, except where fire rated shaft wall construction is
shown.
3. Extend all layers of gypsum board construction used for fireproofing of columns from
floor to underside of structure overhead, unless shown otherwise.
B. In locations other than those specified, extend gypsum board from floor to heights as
follows:
1. Not less than 100 mm (4 inches) above suspended acoustical ceilings.
2. At ceiling of suspended gypsum board ceilings.
3. At existing ceilings.
3.2 INSTALLING GYPSUM BOARD
A. Coordinate installation of gypsum board with other trades and related work.
B. Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840, except as otherwise specified.
C. Use gypsum boards in maximum practical lengths to minimize number of end joints.
D. Bring gypsum board into contact, but do not force into place.
E. Ceilings:
1. For single-ply construction, use perpendicular application.
2. For two-ply assembles:
a. Use perpendicular application.
b. Apply face ply of gypsum board so that joints of face ply do not occur at joints of
base ply with joints over framing members.
328
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
F. Walls:
1. When gypsum board is installed parallel to framing members, space fasteners 300
mm (12 inches) on center in field of the board, and 200 mm (8 inches) on center
along edges.
2. When gypsum board is installed perpendicular to framing members, space fasteners
300 mm (12 inches) on center in field and along edges.
3. Stagger screws on abutting edges or ends.
4. For single-ply construction, apply gypsum board with long dimension either parallel
or perpendicular to framing members as required to minimize number of joints except
gypsum board shall be applied vertically over "Z" furring channels.
5. No offset in exposed face of walls and partitions will be permitted because of singleply and two-ply or three-ply application requirements.
6. Control Joints ASTM C840 and as follows:
a. Locate at both side jambs of openings if gypsum board is not "yoked". Use one
system throughout.
b. Not required for wall lengths less than 9000 mm (30 feet).
c. Extend control joints the full height of the wall or length of soffit/ceiling
membrane.
G. Acoustical or Sound Rated Partitions, Fire and Smoke Partitions:
1. Cut gypsum board for a space approximately 3 mm to 6 mm (1/8 to 1/4 inch) wide
around partition perimeter.
2. Coordinate for application of caulking or sealants to space prior to taping and
finishing.
3. For sound rated partitions, use sealing compound (ASTM C919) to fill the annular
spaces between all receptacle boxes and the partition finish material through which
the boxes protrude to seal all holes and/or openings on the back and sides of the
boxes. STC minimum values as shown.
H. Accessories:
1. Set accessories plumb, level and true to line, neatly mitered at corners and
intersections, and securely attach to supporting surfaces as specified.
2. Install in one piece, without the limits of the longest commercially available lengths.
329
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3. Corner Beads:
a. Install at all vertical and horizontal external corners and where shown.
b. Use screws only. Do not use crimping tool.
4. Edge Trim (casings Beads):
a. At both sides of expansion and control joints unless shown otherwise.
b. Where gypsum board terminates against dissimilar materials and at perimeter of
openings, except where covered by flanges, casings or permanently built-in
equipment.
c. Where gypsum board surfaces of non-load bearing assemblies abut load bearing
members.
d. Where shown.
3.3 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD
A. Finish joints, edges, corners, and fastener heads in accordance with ASTM C840. Use
Level 5 finish for all finished areas open to public view.
B. Before proceeding with installation of finishing materials, assure the following:
1. Gypsum board is fastened and held close to framing or furring.
2. Fastening heads in gypsum board are slightly below surface in dimple formed by
driving tool.
C. Finish joints, fasteners, and all openings, including openings around penetrations, on that
part of the gypsum board extending above suspended ceilings to seal surface of non
decorated smoke barrier, fire rated and sound rated gypsum board construction. After the
installation of hanger rods, hanger wires, supports, equipment, conduits, piping and
similar work, seal remaining openings and maintain the integrity of the smoke barrier,
fire rated and sound rated construction. Sanding is not required of non decorated surfaces.
3.4 REPAIRS
A. After taping and finishing has been completed, and before decoration, repair all damaged
and defective work, including nondecorated surfaces.
B. Patch holes or openings 13 mm (1/2 inch) or less in diameter, or equivalent size, with a
setting type finishing compound or patching plaster.
330
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C. Repair holes or openings over 13 mm (1/2 inch) diameter, or equivalent size, with 16 mm
(5/8 inch) thick gypsum board secured in such a manner as to provide solid substrate
equivalent to undamaged surface.
D. Tape and refinish scratched, abraded or damaged finish surfaces including cracks and
joints in non decorated surface to provide smoke tight construction, fire protection
equivalent to the fire rated construction and STC equivalent to the sound rated
construction.
3.5 UNACCESSIBLE CEILINGS
At Mental Health and Behavioral Nursing Units, areas accessible to patients and not
continuously observable by staff (e.g., patient bedrooms, day rooms), ceilings should be a
solid material such as gypsum board. This will limit patient access. Access doors are
needed to access electrical and mechanical equipment above the ceiling. These doors
should be locked to prevent unauthorized access and secured to ceiling using tamper
resistant fasteners.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD- - -
331
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 09 30 13
CERAMIC/PORCELAIN TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies ceramic, porcelain tile, marble thresholds, .
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Sealing of joints where specified: Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Samples:
1. Mosaic floor tile panels, 225 mm by 225 mm (9 inches by 9 inches), each type, color,
size and pattern.
2. Wall (or wainscot) tile, each color, size and pattern.
3. Trim shapes, bullnose cap and cove including bullnose cap and base pieces at internal
and external corners of vertical surfaces, each type, color, and size.
C. Product Data:
1. Ceramic and porcelain tile, marked to show each type, size, and shape required.
2. Dry-set Portland cement mortar and grout.
3. Reinforcing tape.
4. Leveling compound.
5. Latex-Portland cement mortar and grout.
6. Commercial Portland cement grout.
7. Fasteners.
D. Certification:
1. Master grade, ANSI A137.1.
2. Manufacturer's certificates indicating that the following materials comply with
specification requirements:
a. Commercial Portland cement grout.
b. Dry-set Portland cement mortar and grout.
332
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
c. Reinforcing tape.
d. Latex-Portland cement mortar and grout.
e. Leveling compound.
1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials in containers with labels legible and intact and grade-seals unbroken.
B. Store material to prevent damage or contamination.
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
A10.20-05 ..............................Safety Requirements for Ceramic Tile, Terrazzo, and
Marble Works
A108.1B-05 ............................Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement
Mortar Setting Bed with dry-Set or latex-Portland Cement
Mortar
A108.5-05 ..............................Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement
Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar
A108.10-05 ............................Installation of Grout in Tilework
A118.1-05 ..............................Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar
A118.4-05 ..............................Latex-Portland Cement Mortar
A118.6-05 ..............................Standard Cement Grouts for Tile Installation
A137.1-88 ..............................Ceramic Tile
C. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM):
A185-07 .................................Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcing
C109/C109M-07 ....................Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2 inch. or [50-mm] Cube
Specimens)
C241-90 (R2005) ...................Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic
C348-02..................................Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of HydraulicCement Mortars
333
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C627-93(R2007) ....................Evaluating Ceramic Floor Tile Installation Systems Using
the Robinson-Type Floor Tester
C954-07..................................Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board on
Metal Plaster Base to Steel Studs from 0.033 in (0.84 mm)
to 0.112 in (2.84 mm) in thickness
C979-05..................................Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete
C1002-07................................Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of
Panel Products
C1027-99(R2004) ..................Determining “Visible Abrasion Resistance on Glazed
Ceramic Tile”
C1028-07................................Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic
Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal
Dynamometer Pull Meter Method
C1127-01................................Standard Guide for Use of High Solids Content, Cold
Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane with
an Integral Wearing Surface
C1178/C1178M-06 ................Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat WaterResistant Gypsum Backing Panel
D4397-02 ...............................Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for
Construction, Industrial and Agricultural Applications
D5109-99(R2004) ..................Standard Test Methods for Copper-Clad Thermosetting
Laminates for Printed Wiring Boards
D. Marble Institute of America (MIA): Design Manual III-2007
E. Tile Council of America, Inc. (TCA):
2007........................................Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TILE
A. Comply with ANSI A137.1, Standard Grade, except as modified:
1. Inspection procedures listed under the Appendix of ANSI A137.1.
2. Abrasion Resistance Classification:
a. Tested in accordance with values listed in Table 1, ASTM C 1027.
334
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
b. Class V, 12000 revolutions for floors in Corridors, Kitchens, Storage including
Refrigerated Rooms
c. Class IV, 6000 revolutions for remaining areas.
3. Slip Resistant Tile for Floors:
a. Coefficient of friction, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1028, required
for level of performance:
1) Not less than 0.7 (wet condition) for bathing areas.
2) Not less than 0.6, except for wet conditions for other areas.
4. Mosaic tile may be mounted or joined together by a resinous bonding material along
tile edges.
5. Factory Blending: For tile with color variations, within the ranges selected during
sample submittals blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one
package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match
approved samples.
6. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating:
a. Protect exposed face surfaces (top surface) of tile against adherence of mortar and
grout by pre-coating with a continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied
hot.
b. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.
c. Pre-wax tiles set or grouted with latex modified mortars.
B. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Nominal 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick with cushion edges.
C. Glazed Wall Tile: Cushion edges, glazing, as specified in the finish schedule on the
drawings.
D. Trim Shapes:
1. Conform to applicable requirements of adjoining floor and wall tile.
2. Use trim shapes sizes conforming to size of adjoining field wall tile including
existing spaces unless detailed or specified otherwise.
3. Internal and External Corners:
a. Square internal and external corner joints are not acceptable.
b. External corners including edges: Use bullnose shapes.
c. Internal corners: Use cove shapes.
335
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
d. Base to floor internal corners: Use special shapes providing integral cove vertical
and horizontal joint.
e. Base to floor external corners: Use special shapes providing bullnose vertical
edge with integral cove horizontal joint. Use stop at bottom of openings having
bullnose return to wall.
f. Wall top edge internal corners: Use special shapes providing integral cove vertical
joint with bullnose top edge.
g. Wall top edge external corners: Use special shapes providing bullnose vertical
and horizontal joint edge.
h. For unglazed ceramic mosaic installed in Portland cement mortar setting bed, use
cove and bullnose shapes as applicable. When ceramic mosaic wall and base tile
is required, use C Series cove and bullnose shapes.
i. For unglazed ceramic mosaic tile installed in dry-set Portland cement mortar,
latex-Portland cement mortar, use cove and surface bullnose shapes as applicable.
2.2 SETTING MATERIALS OR BOND COATS
A. Conform to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
B. Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1.
C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4.
1. For wall applications, provide non-sagging, latex-Portland cement mortar complying
with ANSI A118.4.
2. Prepackaged Dry-Mortar Mix: Factory-prepared mixture of Portland cement; dry,
redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to which only
water needs to be added at Project site.
D. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1. For wall applications, provide nonsagging, latex-Portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A118.4.
2.3 GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Coloring Pigments:
1. Pure mineral pigments, limeproof and nonfading, complying with ASTM C979.
2. Add coloring pigments to grout by the manufacturer.
3. Job colored grout is not acceptable.
336
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
4. Use is required in Commercial Portland Cement Grout, Dry-Set Grout, and
Latex-Portland Cement Grout.
B. White Portland Cement Grout:
1. ANSI A118.6.
2. Use one part white Portland cement to one part white sand passing a number 30
screen.
3. Color additive not permitted.
C. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6 color as specified.
1. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 3.2 mm (1/8 inch) and narrower.
2. Sanded grout mixture for joints 3.2 mm (1/8 inch) and wider.
2.4 PATCHING AND LEVELING COMPOUND
A. Portland cement base, polymer-modified, self-leveling compound, manufactured
specifically for resurfacing and leveling concrete floors. Products containing gypsum are
not acceptable.
B. Shall have minimum following physical properties:
1. Compressive strength - 25 MPa (3500 psig) per ASTM C109/C109M.
2. Flexural strength - 7 MPa (1000 psig) per ASTM C348 (28 day value).
3. Tensile strength - 600 psi per ANSI 118.7.
4. Density – 1.9.
C. Capable of being applied in layers up to 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) thick without fillers and up
to 100 mm (four inches) thick with fillers, being brought to a feather edge, and being
trowelled to a smooth finish.
D. Primers, fillers, and reinforcement as required by manufacturer for application and
substrate condition.
E. Ready for use in 48 hours after application.
2.5 MARBLE
A. Soundness Classification in accordance with MIA Design Manual III Groups.
B. Thresholds:
1. Group A, Minimum abrasive hardness (Ha) of 10.0 per ASTM C241.
2. Honed finish on exposed faces.
3. Thickness and contour as shown.
337
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
4. Fabricate from one piece without holes, cracks, or open seams; full depth of wall or
frame opening by full width of wall or frame opening; 19 mm (3/4-inch) minimum
thickness and 6 mm (1/4-inch) minimum thickness at beveled edge.
5. Set not more than 13 mm (1/2-inch) above adjoining finished floor surfaces, with
transition edges beveled on a slope of no greater than 1:2. On existing floor slabs
provide 13 mm (1/2-inch) above ceramic tile surface with bevel edge joint top flush
with adjacent floor.
6. One piece full width of door opening. Notch thresholds to match profile of door
jambs.
2.6 WATER
Clean, potable and free from salts and other injurious elements to mortar and grout
materials.
2.7 CLEANING COMPOUNDS
A. Specifically designed for cleaning masonry and concrete and which will not prevent bond
of subsequent tile setting materials including patching and leveling compounds and
elastomeric waterproofing membrane and coat.
B. Materials containing acid or caustic material not acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain ambient temperature of work areas at not less than 16 degree C (60 degrees F),
without interruption, for not less than 24 hours before installation and not less than three
days after installation.
B. Maintain higher temperatures for a longer period of time where required by
manufacturer's recommendation and ANSI Specifications for installation.
C. Do not install tile when the temperature is above 38 degrees C (100 degrees F).
D. Do not install materials when the temperature of the substrate is below 16 degrees C (60
degrees F).
E. Do not allow temperature to fall below 10 degrees C (50 degrees F) after fourth day of
completion of tile work.
338
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3.2 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCE
A. Variation in plane of sub-floor, including concrete fills leveling compounds and mortar
beds:
1. Not more than 1 in 500 (1/4 inch in 10 feet) from required elevation where Portland
cement mortar setting bed is used.
2. Not more than 1 in 1000 (1/8 inch in 10 feet) where dry-set Portland cement, and
latex-Portland cement mortar setting beds and chemical-resistant bond coats are used.
B. Variation in Plane of Wall Surfaces:
1. Not more than 1 in 400 (1/4 inch in eight feet) from required plane where Portland
cement mortar setting bed is used.
2. Not more than 1 in 800 (1/8 inch in eight feet) where dry-set or latex-Portland cement
mortar or organic adhesive setting materials is used.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Patching and Leveling:
1. Mix and apply patching and leveling compound in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Fill holes and cracks and align concrete floors that are out of required plane with
patching and leveling compound.
a. Thickness of compound as required to bring finish tile system to elevation shown.
b. Float finish except finish smooth for elastomeric waterproofing.
c. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same
width to continue through underlayment.
3. Apply patching and leveling compound to concrete and masonry wall surfaces that
are out of required plane.
4. Apply leveling coats of material compatible with wall surface and tile setting material
to wall surfaces, other than concrete and masonry that are out of required plane.
B. Walls:
2. Apply patching and leveling compound to concrete and masonry surfaces that are out
of required plane.
3. Apply leveling coats of material compatible with wall surface and tile setting material
to wall surfaces, other than concrete and masonry that are out of required plane.
339
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C. Existing Floors and Walls:
1. Remove existing composition floor finishes and adhesive. Prepare surface by
grinding, chipping, self-contained power blast cleaning or other suitable mechanical
methods to completely expose uncontaminated concrete or masonry surfaces. Follow
safety requirements of ANSI A10.20.
2. Remove existing concrete fill or topping to structural slab. Clean and level the
substrate for new setting bed and waterproof membrane or cleavage membrane.
3. Where new tile bases are required to finish flush with plaster above or where they are
extensions of similar bases in conjunction with existing floor tiles cut channel in floor
slab and expose rough wall construction sufficiently to accommodate new tile base
and setting material.
3.4 MARBLE
A. Secure thresholds and stools in position with minimum of two stainless steel dowels.
B. Set in dry-set Portland cement mortar or latex-Portland cement mortar bond coat.
C. Set threshold to finish 12mm (1/2 inch) above ceramic tile floor unless shown otherwise,
with bevel edge joint top flush with adjacent floor similar to TCA detail TR611-02.
3.5 CERAMIC TILE - GENERAL
A. Comply with ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards in "Specifications for
Installation of Ceramic Tile" applicable to methods of installation.
B. Comply with TCA Installation Guidelines.
C. Setting Beds or Bond Coats:
1. Set wall tile installed over gypsum board in dry-set Portland cement mortar, or
latex-Portland cement mortar, ANSI 118.4.and TCA System W243-07.
2. Set trim shapes in same material specified for setting adjoining tile.
D. Workmanship:
1. Lay out tile work so that no tile less than one-half full size is used. Make all cuts on
the outer edge of the field.
2. Set tile firmly in place with finish surfaces in true planes. Align tile flush with
adjacent tile unless shown otherwise.
3. Form intersections and returns accurately.
4. Cut and drill tile neatly without marring surface.
340
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
5. Cut edges of tile abutting penetrations, finish, or built-in items:
a. Fit tile closely around electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and fittings, so that plates,
escutcheons, collars and flanges will overlap cut edge of tile.
b. Seal tile joints water tight as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS,
around electrical outlets, piping fixtures and fittings before cover plates and
escutcheons are set in place.
6. Completed work shall be free from hollow sounding areas and loose, cracked or
defective tile.
7. Remove and reset tiles that are out of plane or misaligned.
8. Floors:
a. Extend floor tile beneath casework and equipment, except those units mounted in
wall recesses.
b. Align finish surface of new tile work flush with other and existing adjoining floor
finish where shown.
c. In areas where floor drains occur, slope to drains where shown.
d. Shove and vibrate tiles over 200 mm (8 inches) square to achieve full support of
bond coat.
9. Walls:
a. Cover walls and partitions, including pilasters, furred areas, and freestanding
columns from floor to ceiling, or from floor to nominal wainscot heights shown
with tile.
b. Finish reveals of openings with tile, except where other finish materials are shown
or specified.
c. At window openings, provide tile stools and reveals, except where other finish
materials are shown or specified.
d. Finish wall surfaces behind and at sides of casework and equipment, except those
units mounted in wall recesses, with same tile as scheduled for room proper.
10. Joints:
a. Keep all joints in line, straight, level, perpendicular and of even width unless
shown otherwise.
b. Make joints 2 mm (1/16 inch) wide for glazed wall tile and mosaic tile work.
341
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
d. Make joints in Paver tile, porcelain type; maximum 3 mm (1/8 inch) wide.
11. Back Buttering: For installations indicated below, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage
by complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in
referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards:
a. Tile wall installations composed of tiles 200 by 200 mm (8 by 8 inches or larger.
3.6 PORCELAIN TILE INSTALLED WITH LATEX PORTLAND CEMENT BONDONG
MORTAR
Due to the denseness of porcelain tile use latex Portland cement bonding mortar that meets
the requirements of ANSI A118.4. Bonding mortars shall be mixed in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions. Improper liquid ratios and dwell time before placement of
bonding mortar and tile shall affect bond.
3.7 GROUTING
A. Grout Type and Location:
1. Grout for glazed wall and base tile, paver tile and unglazed mosaic tile, Portland
cement grout, latex-Portland cement grout, dry-set grout, or commercial Portland
cement grout.
B. Workmanship:
1. Install and cure grout in accordance with the applicable standard.
2. Portland Cement grout: ANSI A108.10.
5. Dry-set grout: ANSI A108.5.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Thoroughly sponge and wash tile. Polish glazed surfaces with clean dry cloths.
B. Methods and materials used shall not damage or impair appearance of tile surfaces.
C. The use of acid or acid cleaners on glazed tile surfaces is prohibited.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Keep traffic off tile floor, until grout and setting material is firmly set and cured.
B. Where traffic occurs over tile floor, cover tile floor with not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch)
thick plywood, wood particle board, or hardboard securely taped in place. Do not remove
protective cover until time for final inspection. Clean tile of any tape, adhesive and stains.
3.10 TESTING FINISH FLOOR
A. Test floors in accordance with ASTM C627 to show compliance with codes 1 through 10.
342
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
- - - E N D OF SECTION 09 30 13 CERAMIC PROCELAIN TILING- - -
SECTION 09 51 00
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Metal ceiling suspension system for acoustical ceilings.
B. Acoustical units.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Color, pattern, and location of each type of acoustical unit:
as scheduled on the Drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Samples:
1. Acoustical units, each type, with label indicating conformance to specification
requirements.
C. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Ceiling suspension system, each type, showing complete details of installation. 2.
Acoustical units, each type
D. Manufacturer's Certificates: Acoustical units, each type, in accordance with specification
requirements.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard definitions as defined in ASTM C634.
B. Terminology as defined in ASTM E1264.
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced.
Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A641/A641M-03 ....................Zinc-coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire
343
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
A653/A653M-07 ....................Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloycoated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
C423-07..................................Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by
the Reverberation Room Method
C634-02 (E2007) ...................Standard Terminology Relating to Environmental
Acoustics
C635-04..................................Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in
Panel Ceilings
C636-06..................................Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels
E84-07 ....................................Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
E119-07 ..................................Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
E413-04 ..................................Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.
E580-06 ..................................Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical
Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic
Restraint
E1264-(R2005) ......................Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. ASTM C635, heavy-duty system, except as otherwise specified.
1. Ceiling suspension system members may be fabricated from either of the following
unless specified otherwise.
a. Galvanized cold-rolled steel, bonderized.
b. Extruded aluminum.
c. All grid shall be fire rated.
2. Use same construction for cross runners as main runners. Use of lighter-duty sections
for cross runners is not acceptable.
B. Exposed grid suspension system for support of lay-in panels:
1. Exposed grid width not less than 22 mm (7/8 inch) with not less than 8 mm (5/16
inch) panel bearing surface.
344
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Fabricate wall molding and other special molding from the same material with same
exposed width and finish as the exposed grid members.
3. On exposed metal surfaces apply baked-on enamel flat texture finish in color to
match adjacent acoustical units unless specified otherwise in the finish schedule.
2.2 WIRE
A. ASTM A641.
B. For wire hangers: Minimum diameter 2.68 mm (0.1055 inch).
C. For bracing wires: Minimum diameter 3.43 mm (0.1350 inch).
2.3 ANCHORS AND INSERTS
A. Use anchors or inserts to support twice the loads imposed by hangers attached thereto.
B. Hanger Inserts:
1. Fabricate inserts from steel, zinc-coated (galvanized after fabrication).
C. Clips:
1. Galvanized steel.
2. Designed to clamp to steel beam or bar joists, or secure framing member together.
3. Designed to rigidly secure framing members together.
4. Designed to sustain twice the loads imposed by hangers or items supported.
2.4 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. General:
1. ASTM E1264, weighing 3.6 kg/m2 (3/4 psf) minimum for mineral fiber panels or tile.
2. Class A Flame Spread: ASTM 84
3. Minimum NRC (Noise Reduction Coefficient): 0.55 unless specified otherwise:
ASTM C423.
4. Minimum CAC (Ceiling Attenuation Class): 40-44 range unless specified otherwise:
ASTM E413.
5. Manufacturers standard finish, minimum Light Reflectance (LR) coefficient of 0.75
on the exposed surfaces, except as specified otherwise or indicated on the finish
schedule..
6. Lay-in panels: Sizes as shown, with square edges.
345
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Type III Units - Mineral base with water-based painted finish less than 10 g/l VOC, Form
2 - Water felted, minimum 16 mm (5/8 inch) thick. Mineral base to contain minimum 65
percent recycled content.
2.5 ACCESS IDENTIFICATION
A. Markers:
1. Use colored markers with pressure sensitive adhesive on one side.
2. Make colored markers of paper of plastic, 6 to 9 mm (1/4 to 3/8 inch) in diameter.
B. Use markers of the same diameter throughout building.
C. Color Code: Use following color markers for service identification:
Color ......................................Service
Red .........................................Sprinkler System: Valves and Controls
Green ......................................Domestic Water: Valves and Controls
Yellow ....................................Chilled Water and Heating Water
Orange ....................................Ductwork: Fire Dampers
Blue ........................................Ductwork: Dampers and Controls
Black ......................................Gas: Laboratory, Medical, Air and Vacuum
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CEILING TREATMENT
A. Treatment of ceilings shall include sides and soffits of ceiling beams, furred work 600
mm (24 inches) wide and over, and vertical surfaces at changes in ceiling heights unless
otherwise shown. Install acoustic tiles after wet finishes have been installed and solvents
have cured.
B. Lay out acoustical units symmetrically about center lines of each room or space unless
shown otherwise on reflected ceiling plan.
C. Moldings:
1. Install metal wall molding at perimeter of room, column, or edge at vertical surfaces.
2. Install special shaped molding at changes in ceiling heights and at other breaks in
ceiling construction to support acoustical units and to conceal their edges.
3.2 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General:
346
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. Install metal suspension system for acoustical tile and lay-in panels in accordance
with ASTM C636, except as specified otherwise.
2. Use direct hung suspension system or combination thereof as defined in ASTM C635.
3. Support a maximum area of 1.48 m2 (16 sf) of ceiling per hanger.
4. Prevent deflection in excess of 1/360 of span of cross runner and main runner.
5. Provide extra hangers, minimum of one hanger at each corner of each item of
mechanical, electrical and miscellaneous equipment supported by ceiling suspension
system not having separate support or hangers.
6. Provide not less than 100 mm (4 inch) clearance from the exposed face of the
acoustical units to the underside of ducts, pipe, conduit, secondary suspension
channels, concrete beams or joists; and steel beam or bar joist unless furred system is
shown,
7. Use main runners not less than 1200 mm (48 inches) in length.
8. Install hanger wires vertically. Angled wires are not acceptable except for seismic
restraint bracing wires.
B. Anchorage to Structure:
1. Concrete:
b. Use eye pins or threaded studs with screw-on eyes in existing or already placed
concrete structures to support hanger and bracing wire. Install in sides of concrete
beams or joists at mid height.
2. Steel:
a. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing
required, install carrying channels for attachment of hanger wires.
(1) Size and space carrying channels to insure that the maximum deflection
specified will not be exceeded.
(2) Attach hangers to steel carrying channels, spaced four feet on center, unless
area supported or deflection exceeds the amount specified.
b. Attach carrying channels to the bottom flange of steel beams spaced not 1200 mm
(4 feet) on center before fire proofing is installed. Weld or use steel clips to attach
to beam to develop full strength of carrying channel.
347
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
c. Attach hangers to bottom chord of bar joists or to carrying channels installed
between the bar joists when hanger spacing prevents anchorage to joist. Rest
carrying channels on top of the bottom chord of the bar joists, and securely wire
tie or clip to joist.
C.
Direct Hung Suspension System:
1. As illustrated in ASTM C635.
2. Support main runners by hanger wires attached directly to the structure overhead.
3. Maximum spacing of hangers, 1200 mm (4 feet) on centers unless interference occurs
by mechanical systems. Use indirect hung suspension system where not possible to
maintain hanger spacing.
D.
Seismic Ceiling Bracing System:
1. Construct system is accordance with ASTM E580.
2. Connect bracing wires to structure above as specified for anchorage to structure and
to main runner or carrying channels of suspended ceiling at bottom.
3.3 ACOUSTICAL UNIT INSTALLATION
A. Cut acoustic units for perimeter borders and penetrations to fit tight against penetration
for joint not concealed by molding.
B. Install lay-in acoustic panels in exposed grid with not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) bearing
at edges on supports.
1. Install tile to lay level and in full contact with exposed grid.
2. Replace cracked, broken, stained, dirty, or tile not cut for minimum bearing.
C. Markers:
1. Install markers of color code specified to identify the various concealed piping,
mechanical, and plumbing systems.
2. Attach colored markers to exposed grid on opposite sides of the units providing
access.
3. Attach marker on exposed ceiling surface of upward access acoustical unit.
3.4 CLEAN-UP AND COMPLETION
A. Replace damaged, discolored, dirty, cracked and broken acoustical units.
B. Leave finished work free from defects.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CELINGS- - -
348
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 09 65 13
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the installation of vinyl or rubber base.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Description of each product.
2. Base material manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives.
3. Application and installation instructions.
C. Samples:
1. Base: 150 mm (6 inches) long, each type and color.
4. Adhesive: Literature indicating each type.
1.3 DELIVERY
A. Deliver materials to the site in original sealed packages or containers, clearly marked
with the manufacturer's name or brand, type and color, production run number and date
of manufacture.
B. Materials from containers which have been distorted, damaged or opened prior to
installation will be rejected.
1.4 STORAGE
A. Store materials in weather tight and dry storage facility.
B. Protect material from damage by handling and construction operations before, during,
and after installation.
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publication listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
F1861-02 ................................Resilient Wall Base
C. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
349
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
RR-T-650E.............................Treads, Metallic and Non-Metallic, Nonskid
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
Use only products by the same manufacturer and from the same production run.
2.2 RESILIENT BASE
A. ASTM F1861, 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick, 100 mm (4 inches) high, Type TP Rubber,
Thermoplastics, Group 2-layered with molded top. Style B-cove.
B. Use only one type of base throughout.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Use products recommended by the material manufacturer for the conditions of use.
B. Use low-VOC adhesive during installation. Water based adhesive with low VOC is
preferred over solvent based adhesive.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperature of materials above 21o C (70 F), for 48 hours before installation.
B. Maintain temperature of rooms where work occurs, between 21o C and 27o C (70oF and
80oF) for at least 48 hours, before, during, and after installation.
C. Do not install materials until building is permanently enclosed and wet construction is
complete, dry, and cured.
3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The respective manufacturer's instructions for application and installation will be
considered for use when approved by the Resident Engineer.
B. Submit proposed installation deviation from this specification to the Resident Engineer
indicating the differences in the method of installation.
C. The Resident Engineer reserves the right to have test portions of material installation
removed to check for non-uniform adhesion and spotty adhesive coverage.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Examine surfaces on which material is to be installed.
B. Do not use adhesive for leveling or filling.
C. Grind, sand, or cut away protrusions.
D. Clean substrate area of oil, grease, dust, paint, and deleterious substances.
350
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
E. Preparation of existing installation:
1. Remove existing base including adhesive.
2. Do not use solvents to remove adhesives.
3. Prepare substrate as specified.
3.4 BASE INSTALLATION
A. Location:
1. Unless otherwise specified or shown, where base is scheduled, install base over toe
space of base of casework, lockers, laboratory, pharmacy furniture island cabinets and
where other equipment occurs.
2. Extend base scheduled for room into adjacent closet, alcoves, and around columns.
B. Application:
1. Apply adhesive uniformly with no bare spots.
2. Set base with joints aligned and butted to touch for entire height.
3. Before starting installation, layout base material to provide the minimum number of
joints with no strip less than 600 mm (24 inches) length.
a. Short pieces to save material will not be permitted.
b. Locate joints as remote from corners as the material lengths or the wall
configuration will permit.
C. Form corners and end stops as follows:
1. Score back of outside corner.
2. Score face of inside corner and notch cove.
D. Roll base for complete adhesion.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean all exposed surfaces of base and adjoining areas of adhesive spatter before it sets.
B. Clean and polish materials in the following order:
1. After two weeks, scrub resilient base materials with a minimum amount of water and
a mild detergent. Leave surfaces clean and free of detergent residue. Polish resilient
base to a gloss finish.
C. Replace damaged materials and re-clean resilient materials. Damaged materials are
defined as having cuts, gouges, scrapes or tears and not fully adhered.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE ACCESSORINGS- - 351
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 09 65 19
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the installation of solid vinyl tile flooring, vinyl composition tile
flooring, and accessories.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Color and pattern and location in room finish schedule: As shown on the Drawings.
B. Resilient Base: Section 09 65 13, RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Description of each product.
2. Resilient material manufacturers recommendations for adhesives, underlayment,
primers and polish.
3. Application and installation instructions.
C. Samples:
1. Tile: 300 mm by 300 mm (12 inches by 12 inches) for each type, pattern and color.
2. Edge Strips: 150 mm (6 inches) long, each type.
3. Feature Strips: 150 mm (6 inches) long.
D. Shop Drawings:
1. Layout of patterns shown on the drawings and in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR
FINISHES.
2. Edge strip locations showing types and detail cross sections.
E. Test Reports:
1. Abrasion resistance: Depth of wear for each tile type and color and volume loss of
tile, certified by independent laboratory.
2. Tested per ASTM F510.
352
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.4 DELIVERY
A. Deliver materials to the site in original sealed packages or containers, clearly marked
with the manufacturer's name or brand, type and color, production run number and date
of manufacture.
B. Materials from containers which have been distorted, damaged or opened prior to
installation will be rejected.
1.5 STORAGE
A. Store materials in weathertight and dry storage facility.
B. Protect from damage from handling, water, and temperature.
1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
D4078-02 ...............................Water Emulsion Floor Finish
E648-08 ..................................Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a
Radiant Energy Source
E662-06 ..................................Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid
Materials
E1155-96 (R2008) .................Determining Floor Flatness and Floor Levelness Numbers
F510-93 (R 2004) ...................Resistance to Abrasion of Resilient Floor Coverings Using
an Abrader with a Grit Feed Method
F710-08 ..................................Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring
F1066-04 ................................Vinyl Composition Floor Tile
F1344-04 ................................Rubber Floor Tile
F1700-04 ................................Solid Vinyl Floor Tile
C. Resilient Floor Covering Institute (RFCI):
IP #2 .......................................Installation Practice for Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT)
D. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
SS-T-312 ................................Tile Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl and Vinyl Composition
353
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Furnish product type, materials of the same production run and meeting following
criteria.
B. Use adhesives, underlayment, primers and polish recommended by the floor resilient
material manufacturer.
C. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more, Class I, per ASTM E 648.
D. Smoke density: Less than 450 per ASTM E662.
2.2 SOLID VINYL-TILE
A. ASTM F1700, 4500 mm (18 inches) square, 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick, homogenous
throughout.
B. Color and Pattern uniformly distributed throughout thickness.
C. Where solid vinyl tiles are specified, seek products with recycled content.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials Green Seal
(GS-36) for commercial adhesive.
B. Use low-VOC adhesive during installation. Water based is preferred over solvent based
adhesives.
2.4 PRIMER (FOR CONCRETE SUBFLOORS)
As recommended by the adhesive and tile manufacturer.
2.5 LEVELING COMPOUND (FOR CONCRETE FLOORS)
A. Provide cementitious products with latex or polyvinyl acetate resins in the mix.
B. Determine the type of underlayment selected for use by the condition to be corrected.
2.6 POLISH AND CLEANERS
A. Cleaners RFCI CL-1.
B. Polish: ASTM D4078.
2.7 EDGE STRIPS
A. 28 mm (1-1/8 inch) wide unless shown otherwise.
B. Bevel from maximum thickness to minimum thickness for flush joint unless shown
otherwise.
C. Extruded aluminum, mill finish, mechanically cleaned:
354
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. Drill and counter sink edge strip for flat head screws.
2. Space holes near ends and approximately 225 mm (9 inches) on center between.
D. Resilient Edge Strip or Reducer Strip: Fed. Specs. SS-T-312, Solid vinyl.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperature of materials a minimum of 22 C (70 F,) for 48 hours before
installation.
B. Maintain temperature of rooms where work occurs between 21 C and 27 C (70 F and
80 F), for at least 48 hours, before, during and after installation.
C. Do not install flooring until building is permanently enclosed and wet construction in or
near areas to receive tile materials is complete, dry and cured.
3.2 SUBFLOOR PREPARATION
A. Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710. At existing slabs, determine
levelness by F-number method in accordance with ASTM E1155. Overall value shall not
exceed as follows:
FF30/FL20
B. Correct conditions which will impair proper installation.
C. Fill cracks, joints and other irregularities in concrete with leveling compound:
1. Do not use adhesive for filling or leveling purposes.
2. Do not use leveling compound to correct imperfections which can be corrected by
spot grinding.
3. Trowel to smooth surface free of trowel marks, pits, dents, protrusions, cracks or
joints.
D. Clean floor of oil, paint, dust, and deleterious substances: Leave floor dry and cured free
of residue from existing curing or cleaning agents.
E. Concrete Subfloor Testing:
Determine Adhesion and dryness of the floor by bond and moisture tests as
recommended by RFCI manual MRP.
F. Perform additional subfloor preparation to obtain satisfactory adherence of flooring if
subfloor test patches allows easy removal of tile.
355
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
G. Prime the concrete subfloor if the primer will seal slab conditions that would inhibit
bonding, or if priming is recommended by the tile or adhesive manufacturers.
H. Preparation of existing installation shall include the removal of existing resilient floor and
existing adhesive. Do not use solvents to remove adhesives.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for application and installation
unless specified otherwise.
B. Mix tile from at least two containers. An apparent line either of shades or pattern variance
will not be accepted.
C. Tile Layout:
1. If layout is not shown on drawings, lay tile symmetrically about center of room or
space with joints aligned.
2. No tile shall be less than 150 mm (6 inches) and of equal width at walls.
3. Place tile pattern in the same direction; do not alternate tiles.
D. Trim tiles to touch for the length of intersections at pipes and vertical projections, seal
joints at pipes with waterproof cement.
E. Application:
1. Apply adhesive uniformly with no bare spots.
a. Conform to RFC1-TM-6 for joint tightness and for corner intersection unless
layout pattern shows random corner intersection.
b. More than 5 percent of the joints not touching will not be accepted.
2. Roll tile floor with a minimum 45 kg (100 pound) roller. No exceptions.
3. The Resident Engineer may have test tiles removed to check for non-uniform
adhesion, spotty adhesive coverage, and ease of removal. Install new tile for broken
removed tile.
F. Installation of Edge Strips:
1. Locate edge strips under center line of doors unless otherwise shown.
2. Set resilient edge strips in adhesive. Anchor metal edge strips with anchors and
screws specified.
3. Where tile edge is exposed, butt edge strip to touch along tile edge.
356
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
4. Where thin set ceramic tile abuts resilient tile, set edge strip against floor file and
against the ceramic tile edge.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adhesive marks on exposed surfaces during the application of resilient materials
before the adhesive sets. Exposed adhesive is not acceptable.
B. Keep traffic off resilient material for a minimum 72 hours after installation.
C. Clean and polish materials in the following order:
1. For the first two weeks sweep and damp mopped only.
2. After two weeks, scrub resilient materials with a minimum amount of water and a
mild detergent. Leave surface clean and free of detergent residue.
3. Apply polish to the floors in accordance with the polish manufacturer's instructions.
D. When construction traffic occurs over tile, cover resilient materials with reinforced kraft
paper properly secured and maintained until removal is directed by Resident Engineer. At
entrances and where wheeled vehicles or carts are used, cover tile with plywood,
hardboard, or particle board over paper, secured and maintained until removal is directed
by Resident Engineer.
E. When protective materials are removed and immediately prior to acceptance, replace any
damage tile, re-clean resilient materials, lightly re-apply polish and buff floors.
3.5 LOCATION
A. Unless otherwise specified or shown, install tile flooring, on floor under areas where
casework, laboratory and pharmacy furniture and other equipment occurs, except where
mounted in wall recesses.
B. Extend tile flooring for room into adjacent closets and alcoves.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 09 65 19 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING- - -
357
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 09 91 00
PAINTING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Section specifies field painting.
B. Section specifies prime coats which may be applied in shop under other sections.
C. Painting includes shellacs, stains, varnishes, coatings specified, and striping or markers
and identity markings.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Shop prime painting of steel and ferrous metals: Division 08 – OPENINGS, Division 21
– FIRE SUPPRESSION, Division 22 - PLUMBING, Division 23 – HEATING,
VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING, Division 26 - ELECTRICAL, Division
27 - COMMUNICATIONS, and Division 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND
SECURITY sections.
B. Type of Finish, Color, and Gloss Level of Finish Coat: As shown on the Drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
Before work is started, or sample panels are prepared, submit manufacturer's literature,
the current Master Painters Institute (MPI) "Approved Product List" indicating brand
label, product name and product code as of the date of contract award, will be used to
determine compliance with the submittal requirements of this specification. The
Contractor may choose to use subsequent MPI "Approved Product List", however, only
one list may be used for the entire contract and each coating system is to be from a single
manufacturer. All coats on a particular substrate must be from a single manufacturer. No
variation from the MPI "Approved Product List" where applicable is acceptable.
C. Sample Panels:
1. After painters' materials have been approved and before work is started submit
sample panels showing each type of finish and color specified.
358
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Panels to show color: Composition board, 100 by 250 by 3 mm (4 inch by 10 inch by
1/8 inch).
3. Attach labels to panel stating the following:
a. Federal Specification Number or manufacturers name and product number of
paints used.
b. Specification code number specified on the drawings.
c. Product type and color.
d. Name of project.
4. Strips showing not less than 50 mm (2 inch) wide strips of undercoats and 100 mm (4
inch) wide strip of finish coat.
D. Sample of identity markers if used.
E. Manufacturers' Certificates indicating compliance with specified requirements:
1. Manufacturer's paint substituted for Federal Specification paints meets or exceeds
performance of paint specified.
1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's sealed container marked to show following:
1. Name of manufacturer.
2. Product type.
3. Batch number.
4. Instructions for use.
5. Safety precautions.
B. In addition to manufacturer's label, provide a label legibly printed as following:
1. Federal Specification Number, where applicable, and name of material.
2. Surface upon which material is to be applied.
3. If paint or other coating, state coat types; prime, body or finish.
C. Maintain space for storage, and handling of painting materials and equipment in a neat
and orderly condition to prevent spontaneous combustion from occurring or igniting
adjacent items.
D. Store materials at site at least 24 hours before using, at a temperature between 18 and 30
degrees C (65 and 85 degrees F).
359
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.
B. American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH):
ACGIH TLV-BKLT-2008 .....Threshold Limit Values (TLV) for Chemical Substances
and Physical Agents and Biological Exposure Indices
(BEIs)
ACGIH TLV-DOC-2008 .......Documentation of Threshold Limit Values and Biological
Exposure Indices, (Seventh Edition)
C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
A13.1-07 ................................Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems
D. Master Painters Institute (MPI):
No. 43-07 ...............................Interior Satin Latex, MPI Gloss Level 4
No. 44-07 ...............................Interior Low Sheen Latex, MPI Gloss Level 2
No. 45-07 ...............................Interior Primer Sealer
No. 46-07 ...............................Interior Enamel Undercoat
No. 49-07 ...............................Interior Alkyd, Flat, MPI Gloss Level 1 (AK)
No. 50-07 ...............................Interior Latex Primer Sealer
No. 52-07 ...............................Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level 3 (LE)
No. 53-07 ...............................Interior Latex, Flat, MPI Gloss Level 1 (LE)
No. 54-07 ...............................Interior Latex, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5 (LE)
No. 95-07 ...............................Fast Drying Metal Primer
No. 114-07 .............................Interior Latex, Gloss (LE) and (LG)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Plastic Tape:
1. Pigmented vinyl plastic film in colors as specified.
2. Pressure sensitive adhesive back.
3. Widths as shown.
360
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Identity markers options:
1. Pressure sensitive vinyl markers.
2. Snap-on coil plastic markers.
C. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (EO): MPI 9.
D. Interior Satin Latex: MPI 43.
E. Interior Low Sheen Latex: MPI 44.
F. Interior Primer Sealer: MPI 45.
G. Interior Enamel Undercoat: MPI 47.
H. Interior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss (AK): MPI 47.
I. Interior Latex Primer Sealer: MPI 50.
J. Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level 3 (LE): MPI 52.
K. Interior Latex, Flat, MPI Gloss Level 1 (LE): MPI 53.
L. Interior Latex, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5 (LE): MPI 54.
M. Interior latex, Gloss (LE) and (LG): MPI 114.
2.2 PAINT PROPERTIES
A. Use ready-mixed (including colors), except two component epoxies, polyurethanes,
polyesters, paints having metallic powders packaged separately and paints requiring
specified additives.
B. Where no requirements are given in the referenced specifications for primers, use primers
with pigment and vehicle, compatible with substrate and finish coats specified.
2.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS/QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Paint materials shall conform to the restrictions of the local Environmental and Toxic
Control jurisdiction.
1. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC): VOC content of paint materials shall not
exceed 10g/l for interior latex paints/primers and 50g/l for exterior latex paints and
primers.
2. Lead-Base Paint:
a. Comply with Section 410 of the Lead-Based Paint Poisoning Prevention Act, as
amended, and with implementing regulations promulgated by Secretary of
Housing and Urban Development.
361
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
b. Regulations concerning prohibition against use of lead-based paint in federal and
federally assisted construction, or rehabilitation of residential structures are set
forth in Subpart F, Title 24, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Housing
and Urban Development.
c. For lead-paint removal, see Section 02 83 33.13, LEAD-BASED PAINT
REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL.
3. Asbestos: Materials shall not contain asbestos.
4. Chromate, Cadmium, Mercury, and Silica: Materials shall not contain zinc-chromate,
strontium-chromate, Cadmium, mercury or mercury compounds or free crystalline
silica.
5. Human Carcinogens: Materials shall not contain any of the ACGIH-BKLT and
ACGHI-DOC confirmed or suspected human carcinogens.
6. Use high performance acrylic paints in place of alkyd paints, where possible.
7. VOC content for solvent-based paints shall not exceed 250g/l and shall not be
formulated with more than one percent aromatic hydro carbons by weight.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Safety: Observe required safety regulations and manufacturer's warning and instructions
for storage, handling and application of painting materials.
1. Take necessary precautions to protect personnel and property from hazards due to
falls, injuries, toxic fumes, fire, explosion, or other harm.
2. Deposit soiled cleaning rags and waste materials in metal containers approved for that
purpose. Dispose of such items off the site at end of each days work.
B. Atmospheric and Surface Conditions:
1. Do not apply coating when air or substrate conditions are:
a. Less than 3 degrees C (5 degrees F) above dew point.
b. Below 10 degrees C (50 degrees F) or over 35 degrees C (95 degrees F), unless
specifically pre-approved by the Contracting Officer and the product
manufacturer. Under no circumstances shall application conditions exceed
manufacturer recommendations.
2. Maintain interior temperatures until paint dries hard.
362
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3. Do no exterior painting when it is windy and dusty.
4. Do not paint in direct sunlight or on surfaces that the sun will soon warm.
5. Apply only on clean, dry and frost free surfaces except as follows:
a. Apply water thinned acrylic and cementitious paints to damp (not wet) surfaces
where allowed by manufacturer's printed instructions.
b. Dampened with a fine mist of water on hot dry days concrete and masonry
surfaces to which water thinned acrylic and cementitious paints are applied to
prevent excessive suction and to cool surface.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Method of surface preparation is optional, provided results of finish painting produce
solid even color and texture specified with no overlays.
B. General:
1. Remove prefinished items not to be painted such as lighting fixtures, escutcheon
plates, hardware, trim, and similar items for reinstallation after paint is dried.
2. Remove items for reinstallation and complete painting of such items and adjacent
areas when item or adjacent surface is not accessible or finish is different.
3. See other sections of specifications for specified surface conditions and prime coat.
4. Clean surfaces for painting with materials and methods compatible with substrate and
specified finish. Remove any residue remaining from cleaning agents used. Do not
use solvents, acid, or steam on concrete and masonry.
C. Ferrous Metals:
1. Remove oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, flux and other detrimental
foreign matter in accordance with SSPC-SP 1 (Solvent Cleaning).
2. Remove loose mill scale, rust, and paint, by hand or power tool cleaning, as defined
in SSPC-SP 2 (Hand Tool Cleaning) and SSPC-SP 3 (Power Tool Cleaning).
Exception: where high temperature aluminum paint is used, prepare surface in
accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions.
3. Fill dents, holes and similar voids and depressions in flat exposed surfaces of hollow
steel doors and frames, access panels, roll-up steel doors and similar items specified
to have semi-gloss or gloss finish with TT-F-322D (Filler, Two-Component Type,
For Dents, Small Holes and Blow-Holes). Finish flush with adjacent surfaces.
363
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
a. This includes flat head countersunk screws used for permanent anchors.
b. Do not fill screws of item intended for removal such as glazing beads.
4. Spot prime abraded and damaged areas in shop prime coat which expose bare metal
with same type of paint used for prime coat. Feather edge of spot prime to produce
smooth finish coat.
5. Spot prime abraded and damaged areas which expose bare metal of factory finished
items with paint as recommended by manufacturer of item.
D. Gypsum Board:
1. Remove efflorescence, loose and chalking plaster or finishing materials.
2. Remove dust, dirt, and other deterrents to paint adhesion.
3. Fill holes, cracks, and other depressions with CID-A-A-1272A [Plaster, Gypsum
(Spackling Compound) finished flush with adjacent surface, with texture to match
texture of adjacent surface. Patch holes over 25 mm (1-inch) in diameter as specified
in Section for gypsum board.
3.3 PAINT PREPARATION
A. Thoroughly mix painting materials to ensure uniformity of color, complete dispersion of
pigment and uniform composition.
B. Do not thin unless necessary for application and when finish paint is used for body and
prime coats. Use materials and quantities for thinning as specified in manufacturer's
printed instructions.
C. Remove paint skins, then strain paint through commercial paint strainer to remove lumps
and other particles.
D. Mix two component and two part paint and those requiring additives in such a manner as
to uniformly blend as specified in manufacturer's printed instructions unless specified
otherwise.
E. For tinting required to produce exact shades specified, use color pigment recommended
by the paint manufacturer.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Start of surface preparation or painting will be construed as acceptance of the surface as
satisfactory for the application of materials.
364
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Unless otherwise specified, apply paint in three coats; prime, body, and finish. When two
coats applied to prime coat are the same, first coat applied over primer is body coat and
second coat is finish coat.
C. Apply each coat evenly and cover substrate completely.
D. Allow not less than 48 hours between application of succeeding coats, except as allowed
by manufacturer's printed instructions, and approved by Resident Engineer.
E. Finish surfaces to show solid even color, free from runs, lumps, brushmarks, laps,
holidays, or other defects.
F. Apply by brush, roller or spray, except as otherwise specified.
G. Do not spray paint in existing occupied spaces unless approved by Resident Engineer,
except in spaces sealed from existing occupied spaces.
1. Apply painting materials specifically required by manufacturer to be applied by
spraying.
2. In areas, where paint is applied by spray, mask or enclose with polyethylene, or
similar air tight material with edges and seams continuously sealed including items
specified in WORK NOT PAINTED, motors, controls, telephone, and electrical
equipment, fronts of sterilizes and other recessed equipment and similar prefinished
items.
H. Do not paint in closed position operable items such as access doors and panels, window
sashes, overhead doors, and similar items except overhead roll-up doors and shutters.
3.5 PRIME PAINTING
A. After surface preparation prime surfaces before application of body and finish coats,
except as otherwise specified.
B. Spot prime and apply body coat to damaged and abraded painted surfaces before
applying succeeding coats.
C. Additional field applied prime coats over shop or factory applied prime coats are not
required except for exterior exposed steel apply an additional prime coat.
D. Prime rebates for stop and face glazing of wood, and for face glazing of steel.
365
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
E. Gypsum Board :
1. Surfaces scheduled to have MPI 53 (Interior Latex, Flat), MPI Gloss Level 1 LE),
MPI 52 (Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level 3 (LE), MPI 54 (Interior Latex, Semi-Gloss,
MPI Gloss Level 5 (LE)), MPI 114 (Interior Latex, Gloss (LE) and (LG)) finish: Use
MPI 53 (Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level 3 (LE), MPI 52 (Interior Latex, MPI Gloss
Level 3 (LE), MPI 54 (Interior Latex, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5 (LE), MPI 114
(Interior Latex, Gloss (LE) and (LG)respectively.
2. Primer: MPI 50(Interior Latex Primer Sealer) except use MPI 45 (Interior Primer
Sealer) in shower and bathrooms.
3.6 INTERIOR FINISHES
A. Apply following finish coats over prime coats in spaces or on surfaces as shown on the
Drawings.
B. Metal Work:
1. Apply to exposed surfaces.
2. Omit body and finish coats on surfaces concealed after installation except electrical
conduit containing conductors over 600 volts.
3. Ferrous Metal, Galvanized Metal, and Other Metals Scheduled:
a. Apply two coats of MPI 47 (Interior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss (AK)) unless specified
otherwise.
C. Gypsum Board:
1. One coat of MPI 45 (Interior Primer Sealer).
2. One coat of MPI 45 (Interior Primer Sealer) plus one coat of MPI 54 (Interior Latex,
Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5 (LE) or MPI 114 (Interior Latex, Gloss (LE) and
(LG).
3.7 REFINISHING EXISTING PAINTED SURFACES
A. Clean, patch and repair existing surfaces as specified under surface preparation.
B. Remove and reinstall items as specified under surface preparation.
C. Remove existing finishes or apply separation coats to prevent non compatible coatings
from having contact.
D. Patched or Replaced Areas in Surfaces and Components: Apply spot prime and body
coats as specified for new work to repaired areas or replaced components.
366
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
E. Except where scheduled for complete painting apply finish coat over plane surface to
nearest break in plane, such as corner, reveal, or frame.
F. Refinish areas as specified for new work to match adjoining work unless specified or
scheduled otherwise.
G. Sand or dull glossy surfaces prior to painting.
H. Sand existing coatings to a feather edge so that transition between new and existing finish
will not show in finished work.
3.8 PAINT COLOR
A. Color and gloss of finish coats is specified on the Drawings.
B. For additional requirements regarding color see Articles, REFINISHING EXISTING
PAINTED SURFACE and MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL FIELD PAINTING
SCHEDULE.
C. Coat Colors:
1. Color of priming coat: Lighter than body coat.
2. Color of body coat: Lighter than finish coat.
3. Color prime and body coats to not show through the finish coat and to mask surface
imperfections or contrasts.
D. Painting, Caulking, Closures, and Fillers Adjacent to Casework:
1. Paint to match color of casework where casework has a paint finish.
2. Paint to match color of wall where casework is stainless steel, plastic laminate, or
varnished wood.
3.9 BUILDING AND STRUCTURAL WORK FIELD PAINTING
A. Painting and finishing of interior work except as specified under paragraph 3.11 B.
1. Painting and finishing of new and existing work including colors and gloss of finish
selected is specified in Finish Schedule shown on the Drawings.
2. Painting of disturbed, damaged and repaired or patched surfaces when entire space is
not scheduled for complete repainting or refinishing.
3. Painting of ferrous metal and galvanized metal.
5. Identity painting and safety painting.
B. Building and Structural Work not Painted:
1. Prefinished items:
367
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
a. Casework, doors, elevator entrances and cabs, metal panels, wall covering, and
similar items specified factory finished under other sections.
b. Factory finished equipment and pre-engineered metal building components such
as metal roof and wall panels.
2. Finished surfaces:
a. Hardware except ferrous metal.
b. Anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plating, copper, and brass, except
as otherwise specified.
c. Signs, fixtures, and other similar items integrally finished.
3. Concealed surfaces:
a. Inside dumbwaiter, elevator and duct shafts, interstitial spaces, pipe basements,
crawl spaces, pipe tunnels, above ceilings, attics, except as otherwise specified.
b. Inside walls or other spaces behind access doors or panels.
c. Surfaces concealed behind permanently installed casework and equipment.
4. Moving and operating parts:
a. Shafts, chains, gears, mechanical and electrical operators, linkages, and sprinkler
heads, and sensing devices.
b. Tracks for overhead or coiling doors, shutters, and grilles.
5. Labels:
a. Code required label, such as Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Inchcape Testing
Services, Inc., or Factory Mutual Research Corporation.
b. Identification plates, instruction plates, performance rating, and nomenclature.
6. Galvanized metal:
c. Except where specifically specified to be painted.
7. Gaskets.
8. Structural steel encased in concrete, masonry, or other enclosure.
9. Structural steel to receive sprayed-on fire proofing.
10. Ceilings, walls, columns in interstitial spaces.
11. Ceilings, walls, and columns in pipe basements.
368
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3.10 PROTECTION CLEAN UP, AND TOUCH-UP
A. Protect work from paint droppings and spattering by use of masking, drop cloths,
removal of items or by other approved methods.
B. Upon completion, clean paint from hardware, glass and other surfaces and items not
required to be painted of paint drops or smears.
C. Before final inspection, touch-up or refinished in a manner to produce solid even color
and finish texture, free from defects in work which was damaged or discolored.
---END--APPENDIX
Coordinate the following abbreviations used in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING, with other
Sections, especially Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES and other
COATING SECTIONS listed. Use the same abbreviation and terms consistently.
Paint or coating
Abbreviation
Acrylic Emulsion
AE (MPI 10 – flat/MPI 11 – semigloss/MPI 119 - gloss)
Alkyd Flat
Ak (MPI 49)
Alkyd Gloss Enamel G (MPI 48)
Alkyd Semigloss Enamel
SG (MPI 47)
Aluminum Paint
AP (MPI 1)
Cementitious Paint
CEP (TT-P-1411)
Exterior Latex EL(MPI 10 / 11 / 119)
Heat Resistant Paint HR (MPI 22)
Latex Emulsion
LE (MPI 53, flat/MPI 52, eggshell/MPI 54, semigloss/MPI
114, gloss Level 6
Latex Flat
LF (MPI 138)
Latex Gloss
LG (MPI 114)
Latex Semigloss
SG (MPI 141)
Latex Low Luster
LL (MPI 139)
- - - E N D OF SECTION 09 91 00 PAINTING- - -
369
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 10 26 00
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies corner guards and high impact wall covering.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Color and texture of aluminum and resilient material: As shown on the Drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Shop Drawings: Show design and installation details.
C. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Corner Guards.
2. High Impact Wall covering
D. Test Report: Showing that resilient material complies with specified fire and safety code
requirements.
1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials to the site in original sealed packages or containers marked with the
name and brand, or trademark of the manufacturer.
B. Protect from damage from handling and construction operations before, during and after
installation.
C. Store in a dry environment of approximately 21° C (70 degrees F) for at least 48 hours
prior to installation.
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced.
Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A167-99(R2004) ....................Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip
B221-07..................................Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Shapes, and Tubes
370
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
D256-06 .................................Impact Resistance of Plastics
D635-06 .................................Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of
Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position
E84-07 ....................................Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
C. The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):
AMP 500 Series .....................Metal Finishes Manual
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
80-06 ......................................Standard for Fire Doors and Windows
E. Society of American Automotive Engineers (SAE):
J 1545-05................................Instrumental Color Difference Measurement for Exterior
Finishes.
F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
Annual Issue...........................Building Materials Directory
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extruded: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063, Temper T5 or T6.
B. Resilient Material:
1. Extruded and injection molded acrylic vinyl or extruded polyvinyl chloride meeting
following requirements:
a. Minimum impact resistance of 1197 ps (25 ft lbs per sq.ft) when tested in
accordance with ASTM D256 (Izod impact, ft.lbs. per inch notch).
b. Class 1 fire rating when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, having a
maximum flame spread of 25 and a smoke developed rating of 450 or less.
c. Rated self extinguishing when tested in accordance with ASTM D635.
d. Material shall be labeled and tested by Underwriters Laboratories or other
approved independent testing laboratory.
e. Integral color with all colored components matched in accordance with SAE J
1545 to within plus or minus 1.0 on the CIE-LCH scales.
f. Same finish on exposed surfaces.
371
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2.2 CORNER GUARDS
A. Resilient, Shock-Absorbing Corner Guards: Surface mounted type of 6 mm (1/4-inch
corner) formed to profile shown.
1. Snap-on corner guard formed from resilient material, minimum 2 mm (0.078-inch)
thick, free floating on a continuous 1.6 mm (0.063-inch) thick extruded aluminum
retainer. Provide appropriate mounting hardware, cushions and base plates as
required.
2. Provide factory fabricated end closure caps at top and bottom of surface mounted
corner guards.
2.3 HIGH IMPACT WALL COVERING
A. Fabricate from vinyl acrylic or polyvinyl chloride resilient material minimum 6mm
(0.040 inch) thick designed specially for interior use.
B. Coordinate with door protection material and supplier for proper fit, installation and
color.
C. Provide adhesive as recommended by the wall covering manufacturer.
2.4 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS
A. Provide fasteners and anchors as required for each specific type of installation.
B. Where type, size, spacing or method of fastening is not shown or specified, submit shop
drawings showing proposed installation details.
2.5 FINISH
A. In accordance with NAAMM AMP 500 series.
B. Aluminum:
1. Exposed aluminum: AAC22A31 chemically etched medium matte, with clear anodic
coating, Class II Architectural, 0.4 mil thick.
2. Concealed aluminum: Mill finish as fabricated, uniform in color and free from
surface blemishes.
C. Resilient Material: Embossed texture and color in accordance with SAE J 1545.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.1 RESILIENT CORNER GUARDS
Install corner guards on walls in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
372
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3.2 HIGH IMPACT WALL COVERING
A. Surfaces to receive protection shall be clean, smooth and free of obstructions.
C. Apply with adhesive in controlled environment according to manufacture’s
recommendations.
D. Protection installed on fire rated doors and frames shall be installed according to NFPA
80 and installation procedures listed in UL Building Materials Directory; or, equal listing
by other approved independent testing laboratory establishing the procedures.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 10 26 00 WALL & DOOR PROTECTION- - -
373
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 10 28 00
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies manufactured items usually used in toilets and at sinks in related
spaces.
B. Items Specified:
1. Paper towel dispenser.
2. Toilet tissue dispenser.
3. Grab Bars
4. Clothes hooks, robe or coat.
5. Metal framed mirror.
C. This section also specifies custom fabricated items used in toilets and related spaces.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Each product specified.
2. Paper towel dispenser.
3. Metal framed mirrors, showing shelf where required, fillers, and design and
installation of units when installed on ceramic tile wainscots and offset surfaces.
4. Grab bars, showing design and each different type of anchorage.
C. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. All accessories specified.
2. Show type of material, gages or metal thickness in inches, finishes, and when
required, capacity of accessories.
3. Show working operations of spindle for toilet tissue dispensers.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Each product shall meet, as a minimum, the requirements specified, and shall be a
standard commercial product of a manufacturer regularly presently manufacturing items
of type specified.
374
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Each accessory type shall be the same and be made by the same manufacturer.
C. Each accessory shall be assembled to the greatest extent possible before delivery to the
site.
D. Include additional features, which are not specifically prohibited by this specification, but
which are a part of the manufacturer's standard commercial product.
1.5 PACKAGING AND DELIVERY
A. Pack accessories individually to protect finish.
B. Deliver accessories to the project only when installation work in rooms is ready to
receive them.
C. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site at appropriate time for building-in.
D. Deliver products to site in sealed packages of containers; labeled for identification with
manufacturer's name, brand, and contents.
1.6 STORAGE
A. Store products in weathertight and dry storage facility.
B. Protect from damage from handling, weather and construction operations before, during
and after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A167-99(R2004) ....................Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,
Sheet and Strip.
A176-99(R2004) ....................Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip
A269-07 .................................Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service
A312/A312M-06 ....................Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes
A653/A653M-07 ....................Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron AlloyCoated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
B221-06..................................Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Shapes, and Tubes
375
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B456-03..................................Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus
Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium
C1036-06................................Flat Glass
C1048-04................................Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and
Uncoated Glass
D635-06 .................................Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self
Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position
F446-85 (R2004) ....................Consumer Safety Specification for Grab Bars and
Accessories Installed in the Bathing Area.
A269-07 .................................Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service
C. The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):
AMP 500 Series .....................Metal Finishes Manual
AMP 500-505-88 ...................Metal Finishes Manual and Finishes for Stainless Steel
D. American Welding Society (AWS):
D10.4-86 (R2000) ..................Welding Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel
Piping and Tubing
E. Federal Specifications (Fed. Specs.):
A-A-3002 ...............................Mirrors, Glass
FF-S-107C (2) ........................Screw, Tapping and Drive
FF-S-107C..............................Screw, Tapping and Drive.
WW-P-541E(1) ......................Plumbing Fixtures (Accessories, Land Use) Detail
Specification
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5 and alloy 6463-T5.
B. Stainless Steel:
1. Plate or sheet: ASTM A167, Type 302, 304, or 304L, except ASTM A176 where Type
430 is specified, 0.0299-inch thick unless otherwise specified.
2. Tube: ASTM A269, Alloy Type 302, 304, or 304L.
C. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, Grade 304 or 304L, seamless or welded.
376
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
D. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A312; Grade TP 304 or TP 304L.
E. Steel Sheet: ASTM A653, zinc-coated (galvanized) coating designation G90.
F. Glass:
1. ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q2, for mirrors.
2.2 FASTENERS
A. Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel or chromium plated brass, finish to match adjacent
surface.
B. Concealed Fasteners: Steel, hot-dip galvanized (except in high moisture areas such as
showers or bath tubs use stainless steel).
C. Toggle Bolts: For use in hollow masonry or frame construction.
D. Hex bolts: For through bolting on thin panels.
E. Expansion Shields: Lead or plastic as recommended by accessory manufacturer for
component and substrate for use in solid masonry or concrete.
F. Screws:
1. ASME B18.6.4.
2. Fed Spec. FF-S-107, Stainless steel Type A.
G. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer for products to be joined.
2.3 FINISH
A. In accordance with NAAMM AMP 500 series.
B. Anodized Aluminum:
1. AA-C22A41 Chemically etched medium matte, with clear anodic coating, Class I
Architectural, 0.7-mil thick.
C. AA-M32 Mechanical finish, medium satin.
1. Chromium Plating: ASTM B456, satin or bright as specified, Service Condition No.
SC2.
2. Stainless Steel: NAAMM AMP 503, finish number 4.
3. Ferrous Metal:
a. Shop Prime: Clean, pretreat and apply one coat of primer and bake.
b. Finish: Over primer apply two coats of alkyd or phenolic resin enamel, and bake.
2.4 FABRICATION - GENERAL
A. Welding, AWS D10.4.
377
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Grind dress, and finish welded joints to match finish of adjacent surface.
C. Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints.
D. Provide steel anchors and components required for secure installation.
E. Form flat surfaces without distortion. Keep exposed surfaces free from scratches and
dents. Reinforce doors to prevent warp or twist.
F. Isolate aluminum from dissimilar metals and from contact with building materials as
required to prevent electrolysis and corrosion.
G. Hot-dip galvanized steel, except stainless steel, anchors and fastening devices.
H. Shop assemble accessories and package with all components, anchors, fittings, fasteners
and keys.
I. Key items alike.
J. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
K. Round and deburr edges of sheets to remove sharp edges.
2.5 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS (OWNER SUPPLIED, CONTRATOR INSTALLED)
A. Surface mounted type with sloping top.
2.6 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS (OWNER SUPPLIED, CONTRACTOR
INSTALLED)
A. Double roll surface mounted type.
B. Mount on continuous backplate.
C. Removable spindle ABS plastic or chrome plated plastic.
2.7 GRAB BARS
A. Fed. Spec WW-P-541/8B, Type IV, bars, surface mounted, Class 2, grab bars and ASTM
F446.
B. Fabricate of stainless steel:
1. Stainless steel: Grab bars, flanges, mounting plates, supports, screws, bolts, and
exposed nuts and washers.
C. Concealed mount.
D. Bars:
1. Fabricate from 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) outside diameter tubing.
a. Stainless steel, minimum 1.2 mm (0.0478 inch) thick.
2. Fabricate in one continuous piece with ends turned toward walls.
3. Continuous weld intermediate support to the grab bar.
378
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
4. Swing up bars manually operated. Designed to prevent bar from falling when in
raised position.
E. Flange for Concealed Mounting:
1. Minimum of 2.65 mm (0.1046 inch) thick, approximately 75 mm (3 inch) diameter by
13 mm (1/2 inch) deep, with provisions for not less than three set screws for securing
flange to back plate.
2. Insert grab bar through center of the flange and continuously weld perimeter of grab
bar flush to back side of flange.
G. In lieu of providing flange for concealed mounting, and back plate as specified, grab rail
may be secured by being welded to a back plate and be covered with flange.
H. Back Plates:
1. Minimum 2.65 mm (0.1046 inch) thick metal.
2. Fabricate in one piece, approximately 6 mm (1/4 inch) deep, with diameter sized to fit
flange. Provide slotted holes to accommodate anchor bolts.
2.8 CLOTHES HOOKS-ROBE OR COAT
A. Fabricate hook units either of chromium plated brass with a satin finish, or stainless steel,
using 6 mm (1/4 inch) minimum thick stock, with edges and corners rounded smooth to
the thickness of the metal, or 3 mm (1/8 inch) minimum radius.
B. Fabricate each unit as a double hook on a single shaft, integral with or permanently
fastened to the wall flange, provided with concealed fastenings.
2.9 METAL FRAMED MIRRORS
A. Fed. Spec. A-A-3002 metal frame; // anodized aluminum or stainless steel, type 302 or
304.
B. Mirror Glass:
1. Minimum 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick.
2. Set mirror in a protective vinyl glazing tape.
C. Frames:
1. Channel or angle shaped section with face of frame not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch)
wide. Fabricate with square corners.
2. Use either 0.9 mm (0.0359 inch) thick stainless steel, chrome finished steel, or
extruded aluminum, with clear anodized finish 0.4 mils thick.
379
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3. Filler:
a. Where mirrors are mounted on walls having ceramic tile wainscots not flush with
wall above, provide fillers at void between back of mirror and wall surface.
b. Fabricate fillers from same material and finish as the mirror frame, contoured to
conceal the void behind the mirror at sides and top.
4. Attached Shelf for Mirrors:
a. Fabricate shelf of the same material and finish as the mirror frame.
b. Make shelf approximately 125 mm (five inches) in depth, and extend full width of
the mirror.
c. Close the ends and the front edge of the shelf to the same thickness as the mirror
frame width.
d. Form shelf for aluminum framed mirror as an integral part of the bottom frame
member. Form stainless steel shelf with concealed brackets to attach to mirror
frame.
D. Back Plate:
1. Fabricate backplate for concealed wall hanging of either zinc-coated, or cadmium
plated 0.9 mm (0.036 inch) thick sheet steel, die cut to fit face of mirror frame, and
furnish with theft resistant concealed wall fastenings.
2. Use set screw type theft resistant concealed fastening system for mounting mirrors.
E. Mounting Bracket:
1. Designed to support mirror tight to wall.
2. Designed to retain mirror with concealed set screw fastenings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before starting work notify Resident Engineer in writing of any conflicts detrimental to
installation or operation of units.
B. Verify with the Resident Engineer the exact location of accessories.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Set work accurately, in alignment and where shown. Items shall be plumb, level, free of
rack and twist, and set parallel or perpendicular as required to line and plane of surface.
380
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Toggle bolt to steel anchorage plates in frame partitions or hollow masonry.
C. Install accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and ASTM
F446.
D. Install accessories plumb and level and securely anchor to substrate.
E. Install accessories in a manner that will permit the accessory to function as designed and
allow for servicing as required without hampering or hindering the performance of other
devices.
F. Align mirrors, dispensers and other accessories even and level, when installed in battery.
G. Install accessories to prevent striking by other moving, items or interference with
accessibility.
H. Install wall mirrors with tamper resistant screws that are flush mounted.
3.3 CLEANING
After installation, clean as recommended by the manufacturer and protect from damage
until completion of the project.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH & LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES- - -
381
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 10 51 16
WOOD LOCKERS
GENERAL
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
Wood lockers with plastic-laminate-faced wood doors.
Related Section:
Division 06 Section FINISH CARPENTRY.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for wood
lockers.
Shop Drawings: For wood lockers.
attachments to other work.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
Show details full size.
Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in wood lockers.
Show wood locker fillers, trim, base, sloping tops, and accessories.
Show wood locker numbering sequence.
Samples for Verification: For the following:
Plastic-laminate-clad panels, not less than 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each
type, color, pattern, and surface finish.
Thermoset decorative-overlay-surfaced panels, not less than 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250
mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.
Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.
Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing wood locker doors and latching
mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody
by an FSC-accredited certification body.
382
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Source Limitations: Obtain wood lockers and accessories from single source from single
manufacturer.
Regulatory Requirements: Where wood lockers are indicated to comply with accessibility
requirements, comply with [the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers
Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers
Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Do not deliver wood lockers until painting and similar operations that could damage wood
lockers have been completed in installation areas. If wood lockers must be stored in
other-than-installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions are
same as that in final installation.
Deliver combination control charts to Owner.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood lockers until spaces are enclosed
and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system
is operating and maintaining ambient temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32
deg C) and humidity conditions between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of
the construction period.
Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of concealed framing, blocking, and
reinforcements that support wood lockers by field measurements before fabrication.
COORDINATION
Coordinate sizes and locations of concealed wood support bases.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood lockers can be supported
and installed as indicated.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as follows:
383
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.
Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to
less than 15 percent moisture content.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage.
Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of
exterior walls and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings.
Provide toothed-steel or lead-expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
Wood Support Base: Manufacturer’s integral 4 inch high base.
achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per
ASTM E 84.
WOOD LOCKER HARDWARE
General: Provide manufacturer's standard wood locker hardware complying with the
requirements in this Section.
Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), five-knuckle steel hinges; back mounted.
Provide two hinges for doors 36 inches (910 mm) high and less.
Provide three hinges for doors more than 36 inches high.
Accessible Handle: Metal, fixed, graspable lever handle and rose trim; surface mounted.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: Black.
DOOR LOCKS
General: Fabricate wood lockers to receive locking devices. Provide one locking device for
each wood locker door unless otherwise indicated.
Cam Padlock Hasp: Surface mounted, steel; finished to match other wood locker hardware.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED WOOD LOCKERS
Construction Style: Reveal overlay
Locker Body: Fabricated from particleboard-core panels covered on both sides with
thermoset decorative overlay.
384
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Side Panels: Manufacturer's standard 3/4 or 5/8 inch (19 or 16 mm) thick.
Back Panel: Manufacturer's standard 1/2 or 3/8 inch (13 or 9.5 mm) thick.
Top Panel: Manufacturer's standard 3/4 or 5/8 inch (19 or 16 mm) thick.
Bottom Panel: Manufacturer's standard 3/4 or 5/8 inch (19 or 16 mm) thick.
Exposed Panel Edges: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS, to match panels.
Plastic-Laminate-Faced Wood Doors: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS, over
both sides of particleboard.
Thickness: Manufacturer's standard 3/4 or 5/8 inch (19 or 16 mm) thick.
Panel Edges: 3-mm-thick PVC.
End Panels: Match style, material, construction, and finish of plastic-laminate-faced wood
doors.
Shelves: Fabricated from particleboard-core panels covered on both sides with thermoset
decorative overlay; fixed.
Thickness: [3/4 inch (19 mm).
Exposed Edges: 3-mm-thick PVC.
Corners and Filler Panels: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick panels.
construction, and finish of plastic-laminate-faced wood doors.
Match style, material,
Plastic-Laminate Colors, Patterns, and Finishes:
As selected by Architect from plastic-laminate manufacturer's full range of wood grains.
LOCKER ACCESSORIES
Hooks: Manufacturer's standard, ball-pointed aluminum or steel. Attach hooks with at least
two fasteners.
Provide one double-prong ceiling hook for each compartment of interlocking wood
lockers.
Number Plates: 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter, etched, embossed, or stamped, aluminum
plates with black numbers and letters at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. Finish plates to
match other wood locker hardware.
Continuous Finish Base: Plastic-laminate-faced, 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick panel that matches
door faces; fabricated in lengths as long as practical to enclose base and base ends of
wood lockers.
Continuously Sloping Tops: Plastic-laminate-faced, 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick panel that
matches door faces for installation over wood lockers with separate flat tops. Fabricate
tops in lengths as long as practical, without visible fasteners at splice locations. Provide
fasteners, supports, and closures, as follows:
385
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Closures: Vertical-end type.
Sloping-top corner fillers, mitered.
FABRICATION
Fabricate each wood locker with shelves, an individual door and frame, an individual top, a
bottom, and a back, and with common intermediate uprights separating compartments.
Fabricate wood lockers to dimensions in double tier “S” type configuration.
Fabricate components square, rigid, without warp, and with finished faces flat and free of
scratches and chips. Accurately machine components for attachments in factory. Make
joints tight and true.
Fabricate wood lockers using manufacturer's standard construction with joints made
with dowels, dados, or rabbets. Dado side panels to receive shelving except
where indicated to be adjustable.
Fabricate wood lockers with joints that are dadoed or rabbeted, glued full length, and
stapled. Dado side panels to receive shelving except where indicated to be
adjustable.
Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows:
Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches (381 mm) above the floor.
Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than 48
inches (1219 mm) above the floor.
Number Plates: Inlay number plates flush in each wood locker door, near top, centered.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as
necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide
ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be
removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check
measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop
Drawings before disassembling for shipment.
Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware and similar items.
Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce
accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and
burrs.
Attach PVC edging to panels by thermally fusing edging to panels after panel fabrication.
386
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting wood locker
installation.
Verify that furring is attached to concrete and masonry walls that are to receive wood lockers.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
Condition wood lockers to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installation.
Before installing wood lockers, examine factory-fabricated work for completeness and
complete work as required, including removal of packing.
INSTALLATION
Assemble knocked-down wood lockers with manufacturer's standard fasteners, with no
exposed fasteners on face frames.
Install wood lockers level, plumb, and true; use concealed shims.
Connect groups of wood lockers together with manufacturer's standard fasteners, through
predrilled holes, with no exposed fasteners on face frames. Fit wood lockers accurately
together to form flush, tight, hairline joints.
Install wood lockers without distortion so doors fit openings properly and are accurately
aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors in openings, providing unencumbered
operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
Installation Tolerance: No more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow,
or other variation from a straight line. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Fasten wood lockers through back, near top and bottom, at ends spaced not more than
16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
Scribe and cut corner and filler panels to fit adjoining work using fasteners concealed where
practical. Repair damaged finish at cuts.
Attach sloping-top units to wood lockers, with end panels covering exposed ends.
Install number plates after wood lockers are in place.
387
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Attach number plate on each wood locker door, near top, centered, with at least two
screws with finish matching number plate.
Anchor locker benches to floors.
ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors to operate easily without binding. Verify
that integral locking devices operate properly.
Protect wood lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit use during
construction.
Touch up marred finishes, or replace wood lockers that cannot be restored to factory-finished
appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by wood
locker manufacturer.
- - END OF SECTION 10 51 00 WOOD LOCKERS- -
SECTION 11 31 00
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
GENERAL
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
Cooking appliances.
388
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Refrigeration appliances.
Electric fireplace insert.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, dimensions, furnished accessories, and finishes for each appliance.
Product Schedule: For appliances. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For each residential appliance to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintains, within 25 miles of Project site, a service center
capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of residential appliance from single manufacturer.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following:
NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
WARRANTY
Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
Microwave Oven: Full warranty including parts and labor for first year and parts thereafter
for on-site service.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Refrigerator/Freezer, Sealed System: Full warranty including parts and labor for first year
and parts thereafter for on-site service on the product.
Warranty Period for Sealed Refrigeration System: Two years from date of Substantial
Completion.
Warranty Period for Other Components: Two years from date of Substantial
Completion.
389
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
PRODUCTS
MICROWAVE OVENS
Microwave Oven:
Mounting: Wall cabinet.
Type: Conventional
Dimensions:
Width: 21 inches.
Depth: 16-1/2 inches.
Height: 12 inches.
Capacity: 1.2 cu. ft.
Oven Door: Door with observation window and push-button latch release
Microwave Power Rating: 1100 W.
Controls: Digital panel controls and timer display.
Other Features: Temperature probe.
Material: Stainless steel
REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER
Refrigerator/Freezer: Two-door refrigerator/freezer with freezer on top and complying with
AHAM HRF-1.
Type: Freestanding.
Dimensions:
Width: 30 inches.
Depth: 32 inches.
Height: 66 inches.
Storage Capacity:
Refrigeration Compartment Volume: 13.7 cu. ft.
Freezer Volume: 5.3 cu. ft.
Shelf Area: Four adjustable shelves in refrigerator, one adjustable shelf in
freezer.
General Features:
Door Configuration: Overlay.
Refrigerator Features:
Interior light in refrigeration compartment.
Compartment Storage: Two vegetable crispers meat compartment drawer.
390
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Door Storage: Modular adjustable bin compartments.
Freezer Features: One freezer compartment.
Automatic defrost.
Interior light in freezer compartment.
Energy Performance, ENERGY STAR: Provide appliances that qualify for the
EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program.
Front Panels: Stainless steel.
ELECTRIC FIREPLACE INSERT
Electric fireplace insert.
Type: Built in.
Width: 34.1 inches.
Height: 26.06 inches.
Depth: 11.3 inches.
Viewable area: 31.25 inches wide by 20.75 inches high.
Features:
Remote control operation.
120V plug-in with 5 foot cord.
LED technology.
Sound effects with volume control.
Adjustable heat setting.
Adjustable flame brightness settings.
Front Panel: Black frame glass front face.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
391
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances, power connections, and other conditions affecting installation
and performance of residential appliances.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting construction with concealed
fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough
openings are completely concealed.
Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in
each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.
Utilities: See Division 26 for electrical requirements.
- - - END OF SECTION 11 31 00 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES- - -
SECTION 21 05 11
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The requirements of this Section apply to all sections of Division 21.
B. Definitions:
1. Exposed: Piping and equipment exposed to view in finished rooms.
392
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Option or optional: Contractor's choice of an alternate material or method.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. GENERAL CONDITIONS.
B. Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
C. Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.
D. Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.
E. Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.
F. Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Products Criteria:
1. Standard Products: Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least 3
years. See other specification sections for any exceptions.
2. Equipment Service: Products shall be supported by a service organization which
maintains a complete inventory of repair parts and is located reasonably close to the
site.
3. Multiple Units: When two or more units of materials or equipment of the same type
or class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.
4. Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components
made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product.
5. Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall
be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast
integrally with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of
equipment.
6. Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.
B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where installation procedures or any part thereof are
required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the
material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to
the Resident Engineer prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to
proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these
recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material.
393
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C. Guaranty: Section 00 72 00, GENERAL CONDITIONS.
D. Supports for sprinkler piping shall be in conformance with NFPA 13.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Submit under the pertinent section rather than under
this section.
1. Equipment and materials identification.
2. Fire-stopping materials.
3. Hangers, inserts, supports and bracing. Provide load calculations for variable spring
and constant support hangers.
4. Wall, floor, and ceiling plates.
C. Coordination Drawings: In accordance with Section 00 72 00, GENERAL
CONDITIONS, Article, SUBCONTRACTS AND WORK COORDINATION. Provide
detailed layout drawings of all piping systems. In addition provide details of the
following.
1. Hangers, inserts, supports, and bracing.
2. Pipe sleeves.
3. Equipment penetrations of floors, walls, ceilings, or roofs.
D. Maintenance Data and Operating Instructions:
1. Maintenance and operating manuals in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS, Article, INSTRUCTIONS, for systems and equipment.
2. Provide a listing of recommended replacement parts for keeping in stock supply,
including sources of supply, for equipment. Include in the listing belts for equipment.
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A36/A36M-2001 ....................Carbon Structural Steel
A575-96 .................................Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades R (2002)
394
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
E84-2003 ................................Standard Test Method for Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
E119-2000 ..............................Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building
Construction and Materials
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
90A-96 ...................................Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
101-97 ....................................Life Safety Code
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LIFTING ATTACHMENTS
Provide equipment with suitable lifting attachments to enable equipment to be lifted in its
normal position. Lifting attachments shall withstand any handling conditions that might
be encountered, without bending or distortion of shape, such as rapid lowering and
braking of load.
2.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS IDENTIFICATION
A. Use symbols, nomenclature and equipment numbers specified, shown on the drawings
and shown in the maintenance manuals. Identification for piping is specified in Section
09 91 00, PAINTING.
B. Interior (Indoor) Equipment: Engraved nameplates, with letters not less than 48 mm
(3/16-inch) high of brass with black-filled letters, or rigid black plastic with white letters
specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING permanently fastened to the equipment.
Identify unit components such as coils, filters, fans, etc.
2.3 FIRESTOPPING
Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING specifies an effective barrier against the spread of
fire, smoke and gases where penetrations occur for piping.
2.4 GALVANIZED REPAIR COMPOUND
Mil. Spec. DOD-P-21035B, paint form.
2.5 PIPE PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves during construction for other than blocked out floor openings for risers in
mechanical bays.
B. To prevent accidental liquid spills from passing to a lower level, provide the following:
395
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. For sleeves: Extend sleeve 25 mm (one inch) above finished floor and provide sealant
for watertight joint.
2. For blocked out floor openings: Provide 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) angle set in silicone
adhesive around opening.
3. For drilled penetrations: Provide 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) angle ring or square set in
silicone adhesive around penetration.
C. Penetrations are not allowed through beams or ribs, but may be installed in concrete
beam flanges. Any deviation from this requirement must receive prior approval of
Resident Engineer.
D. Sheet Metal, Plastic, or Moisture-resistant Fiber Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing
through floors, interior walls, and partitions, unless brass or steel pipe sleeves are
specifically called for below.
E. Cast Iron or Zinc Coated Pipe Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through exterior walls
below grade. Make space between sleeve and pipe watertight with a modular or link
rubber seal. Seal shall be applied at both ends of sleeve.
F. Galvanized Steel or an alternate Black Iron Pipe with asphalt coating Sleeves: Provide for
pipe passing through concrete beam flanges, except where brass pipe sleeves are called
for. Provide sleeve for pipe passing through floor of mechanical rooms, laundry work
rooms, and animal rooms above basement. Except in mechanical rooms, connect sleeve
with floor plate.
G. Brass Pipe Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through quarry tile, terrazzo or ceramic tile
floors. Connect sleeve with floor plate.
H. Sleeves are not required for wall hydrants for fire department connections or in drywall
construction.
I. Sleeve Clearance: Sleeve through floors, walls, partitions, and beam flanges shall be one
inch greater in diameter than external diameter of pipe. Sleeve for pipe with insulation
shall be large enough to accommodate the insulation. Interior openings shall be caulked
tight with fire stopping material and sealant to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and
gases.
J. Sealant and Adhesives: Shall be as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.
396
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2.6 TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
A. Furnish, and turn over to the Resident Engineer, special tools not readily available
commercially, that are required for disassembly or adjustment of equipment and
machinery furnished.
B. Grease Guns with Attachments for Applicable Fittings: One for each type of grease
required for each motor or other equipment.
C. Tool Containers: Hardwood or metal, permanently identified for in tended service and
mounted, or located, where directed by the Resident Engineer.
D. Lubricants: A minimum of 0.95 L (one quart) of oil, and 0.45 kg (one pound) of grease,
of equipment manufacturer's recommended grade and type, in unopened containers and
properly identified as to use for each different application.
2.7 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES
A. Material and Type: Chrome plated brass or chrome plated steel, one piece or split type
with concealed hinge, with set screw for fastening to pipe, or sleeve. Use plates that fit
tight around pipes, cover openings around pipes and cover the entire pipe sleeve
projection.
B. Thickness: Not less than 2.4 mm (3/32-inch) for floor plates. For wall and ceiling plates,
not less than 0.64 mm (0.025-inch) for up to 80 mm (3-inch pipe), 0.89 mm (0.035-inch)
for larger pipe.
C. Locations: Use where pipe penetrates floors, walls and ceilings in exposed locations, in
finished areas only. Use also where insulation ends on exposed water supply pipe drop
from overhead. Provide a watertight joint in spaces where brass or steel pipe sleeves are
specified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate location of piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, and equipment. Locate piping,
sleeves, inserts, hangers, and equipment clear of windows, doors, openings, light outlets,
and other services and utilities. Follow manufacturer's published recommendations for
installation methods not otherwise specified.
B. Protection and Cleaning:
397
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. Equipment and materials shall be carefully handled, properly stored, and adequately
protected to prevent damage before and during installation, in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the Resident Engineer.
Damaged or defective items in the opinion of the Resident Engineer, shall be
replaced.
2. Protect all finished parts of equipment, such as shafts and bearings where accessible,
from rust prior to operation by means of protective grease coating and wrapping.
Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. Tightly cover and protect
equipment against dirt, water chemical, or mechanical injury. At completion of all
work thoroughly exposed materials and equipment.
C. Concrete and Grout: Use concrete and shrink compensating grout 25 MPa (3000 psi)
minimum, specified in Section 03 30 00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
D. Install gages, valves, and other devices with due regard for ease in reading or operating
and maintaining said devices. Locate and position gages to be easily read by operator or
staff standing on floor or walkway provided. Servicing shall not require dismantling
adjacent equipment or pipe work.
E. Work in Existing Building:
1. Perform as specified in Article, OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS, Article,
ALTERATIONS, and Article, RESTORATION of the Section 01 00 00, GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS for relocation of existing equipment, alterations and restoration of
existing building(s).
2. As specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article,
OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS, make alterations to existing service piping
at times that will least interfere with normal operation of the facility.
3. Cut required openings through existing masonry and reinforced concrete using
diamond core drills. Use of pneumatic hammer type drills, impact type electric drills,
and hand or manual hammer type drills, will be permitted only with approval of the
Resident Engineer. Locate openings that will least effect structural slabs, columns,
ribs or beams. Refer to the Resident Engineer for determination of proper design for
openings through structural sections and opening layouts approval, prior to cutting or
398
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
drilling into structure. After Resident Engineer's approval, carefully cut opening
through construction no larger than absolutely necessary for the required installation.
F. Inaccessible Equipment:
1. Where the Government determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not
conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, equipment shall be removed
and reinstalled or remedial action performed as directed at no additional cost to the
Government.
2. The term "conveniently accessible" is defined as capable of being reached without the
use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as
motors, fans, pumps, belt guards, transformers, high voltage lines, piping, and
ductwork.
3.2 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. Prior to the final inspection, perform required tests as specified in Section 01 00 00,
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, TESTS and submit the test reports and records
to the Resident Engineer.
B. Should evidence of malfunction in any tested system, or piece of equipment or
component part thereof, occur during or as a result of tests, make proper corrections,
repairs or replacements, and repeat tests at no additional cost to the Government.
C. When completion of certain work or system occurs at a time when final control settings
and adjustments cannot be properly made to make performance tests, then make
performance tests for heating systems and for cooling systems respectively during first
actual seasonal use of respective systems following completion of work.
3.6 INSTRUCTIONS TO VA PERSONNEL
Provide in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS.
- - E N D OF SECTION 05 11 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE
SUPPRESSION- - -
SECTION 21 13 13
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
399
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Design, installation and testing shall be in accordance with
NFPA 13 except for specified exceptions.
B. The design and installation of a hydraulically calculated automatic wet system complete
and ready for operation, for all portions of the scope area.
C. Modification of the existing sprinkler system as indicated on the drawings and as further
required by these specifications.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.
B. Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING, Treatment of penetrations through rated enclosures.
C. Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.
D. Section 21 05 11 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Reliability: The installer shall possess a valid State of New York fire sprinkler
contractor's license. The installer shall have been actively and successfully engaged in the
installation of commercial automatic sprinkler systems for the past ten years.
B. Materials and Equipment: All equipment and devices shall be of a make and type listed
by UL and approved by FM, or other nationally recognized testing laboratory for the
specific purpose for which it is used. All materials, devices, and equipment shall be
approved by the VA.
C. Submittals: Submit as one package in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP
DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Prepare detailed working drawings
that are signed by a NICET Level III or Level IV Sprinkler Technician or stamped by a
Registered Professional Engineer practicing in the field of Fire Protection Engineering.
As Government review is for technical adequacy only, the installer remains responsible
for correcting any conflicts with other trades and building construction that arise during
installation. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Material submittals shall be approved
prior to the purchase or delivery to the job site. Suitably bind submittals in notebooks or
binders and provide index referencing the appropriate specification section. Submittals
shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Qualifications
400
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
a. Provide a copy of the installing contractors fire sprinkler and Mew York state
contractor’s license.
b. Provide a copy of the NICET certification for the NICET Level III or Level IV
Sprinkler Technician who prepared and signed the detailed working drawings
unless the drawings are stamped by a Registered Professional Engineer practicing
in the field of Fire Protection Engineering.
2. Drawings: Submit detailed 1:100 (1/8 inch) scale (minimum) working drawings
conforming to NFPA 13. Include a site plan showing the piping to the water supply
test location.
3. Manufacturers Data Sheets:
a. Provide for materials and equipment proposed for use on the system. Include
listing information and installation instructions in data sheets. Where data sheet
describes items in addition to that item being submitted, clearly identify proposed
item on the sheet.
4. Calculation Sheets: Submit hydraulic calculation sheets in tabular form conforming to
the requirements and recommendations of NFPA 13.
5. Final Document Submittals: Provide as-built drawings, testing and maintenance
instructions in accordance with the requirements in Section 01 33 23, SHOP
DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Submittals shall include, but not
be limited to, the following:
a. One complete set of reproducible as-built drawings showing the installed system
with the specific interconnections between the waterflow switch or pressure
switch and the fire alarm equipment.
b. Complete, simple, understandable, step-by-step, testing instructions giving
recommended and required testing frequency of all equipment, methods for
testing all equipment, and a complete trouble shooting manual. Provide
maintenance instructions on replacing any components of the system including
internal parts, periodic cleaning and adjustment of the equipment and components
with information as to the address and telephone number of both the manufacturer
and the local supplier of each item.
401
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
c. Material and Testing Certificate: Upon completion of the sprinkler system
installation or any partial section of the system, including testing and flushing,
provide a copy of a completed Material and Testing Certificate as indicated in
NFPA 13.
d. Certificates shall document all parts of the installation.
e. Instruction Manual: Provide one copy of the instruction manual covering the
system in a flexible protective cover and mount in an accessible location adjacent
to the riser.
D. Design Basis Information: Provide design, materials, equipment, installation, inspection,
and testing of the automatic sprinkler system in accordance with the requirements of
NFPA 13. Recommendations in appendices shall be treated as requirements.
1. Perform hydraulic calculations in accordance with NFPA 13 utilizing the
Area/Density method. Do not restrict design area reductions permitted for using quick
response sprinklers throughout by the required use of standard response sprinklers in
the areas identified in this section.
2. Sprinkler Protection: To determining spacing and sizing, apply the following
coverage classifications:
a. Light Hazard Occupancies: Patient care, treatment, and customary access areas.
b. Request clarification from the Government for any hazard classification not
identified.
3. Hydraulic Calculations: Calculated demand including hose stream requirements shall
fall no less than 10 percent below the available water supply curve.
4. Water Supply: Base water supply on a flow test of:
a. Location ___________________________________
b. Elevation Static Test Gauge ____________________ m (_______________ ft)
c. Elevation Residual Test Gauge __________________ m (_______________ ft)
d. Static pressure: ______ kPa ( ______ psi)
e. Residual pressure: ______ kPa ( ______ psi)
f. Flow: ______ L/s ( ______ gpm)
g. Date: ______ Time ______
402
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.4 APPLICABLE PUIBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
13-2002 ..................................Installation of Sprinkler Systems
101-22003 ..............................Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures (Life
Safety Code)
170-1999 ................................Fire Safety Symbols
C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
Fire Protection Equipment Directory – 2001
D. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM):
Approval Guide – 2001
E. Uniform Building Code – 1997
F. Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research-2005
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING & FITTINGS
A. Sprinkler systems in accordance with NFPA 13. Use nonferrous piping in MRI Scanning
Rooms.
2.2 SPRINKLERS
A. Type: Sprinklers shall be UL listed or FM approved. Sprinklers shall be of all brass body
construction with a metal Belleville spring seal, coated on both sides with Teflon film.
Sprinklers utilizing non-metal parts in the sealing portion of the sprinkler are strictly
prohibited. Provide quick response sprinklers in all areas.
B. Temperature Ratings: In accordance with NFPA 13.
2.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Supports, hangers, etc., of an approved pattern placement to conform to NFPA 13.
System piping shall be substantially supported to the building structure. The installation
of hangers and supports shall adhere to the requirements set forth in NFPA 13, Standard
for Installation of Sprinkler Systems. Materials used in the installation or construction of
hangers and supports shall be listed and approved for such application. Hangers or
403
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
supports not specifically listed for service shall be designed and bear the seal of a
professional engineer. //
2.4 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES
Provide chrome plated steel escutcheon plates for exposed piping passing though walls,
floors or ceilings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be accomplished by the licensed contractor. Provide a qualified
technician, experienced in the installation and operation of the type of system being
installed, to supervise the installation and testing of the system.
B. Installation of Piping: Accurately cut pipe to measurements established by the installer
and work into place without springing or forcing. In any situation where bending of the
pipe is required, use a standard pipe-bending template. Install concealed piping in spaces
that have finished ceilings. Where ceiling mounted equipment exists, such as in operating
and radiology rooms, install sprinklers so as not to obstruct the movement or operation of
the equipment. Sidewall heads may need to be utilized. Locate piping in stairways as near
to the ceiling as possible to prevent tampering by unauthorized personnel, and to provide
a minimum headroom clearance of 2250 mm (seven feet six inches). To prevent an
obstruction to egress, provide piping clearances in accordance with NFPA 101.
C. Welding: Conform to the requirements and recommendations of NFPA 13.
D. Drains: Pipe drains to discharge at safe points outside of the building or to sight cones
attached to drains of adequate size to readily carry the full flow from each drain under
maximum pressure. Do not provide a direct drain connection to sewer system or
discharge into sinks. Install drips and drains where necessary and required by NFPA 13.
E. Affix cutout disks, which are created by cutting holes in the walls of pipe for flow
switches and non-threaded pipe connections to the respective water flow switch or pipe
connection near to the pipe from where they were cut.
F. Sleeves: Provide for pipes passing through masonry or concrete. Provide space between
the pipe and the sleeve in accordance with NFPA 13. Seal this space with a UL Listed
through penetration fire stop material in accordance with Section 07 84 00,
FIRESTOPPING. Where core drilling is used in lieu of sleeves, also seal space. Seal
404
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
penetrations of walls, floors and ceilings of other types of construction, in accordance
with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.
G. Firestopping shall comply with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.
H. Repairs: Repair damage to the building or equipment resulting from the installation of the
sprinkler system by the installer at no additional expense to the Government.
I. Interruption of Service: There shall be no interruption of the existing sprinkler protection,
water, electric, or fire alarm services without prior permission of the Contracting Officer.
Contractor shall develop an interim fire protection program where interruptions involve
in occupied spaces. Request in writing at least one week prior to the planned interruption.
3.2 INSPECTION AND TEST
A. Preliminary Testing: Flush newly installed systems prior to performing hydrostatic tests
in order to remove any debris which may have been left as well as ensuring piping is
unobstructed. Hydrostatically test system, including the fire department connections, as
specified in NFPA 13, in the presence of the Contracting Officers Technical
Representative (COTR) or his designated representative. Test and flush underground
water line prior to performing these hydrostatic tests.
B. Final Inspection and Testing: Subject system to tests in accordance with NFPA 13, and
when all necessary corrections have been accomplished, advise COTR/Resident Engineer
to schedule a final inspection and test. Connection to the fire alarm system shall have
been in service for at least ten days prior to the final inspection, with adjustments made to
prevent false alarms. Furnish all instruments, labor and materials required for the tests
and provide the services of the installation foreman or other competent representative of
the installer to perform the tests. Correct deficiencies and retest system as necessary,
prior to the final acceptance. Include the operation of all features of the systems under
normal operations in test.
3.3 INSTRUCTIONS
Furnish the services of a competent instructor for not less than two hours for instructing
personnel in the operation and maintenance of the system, on the dates requested by the
COTR/Resident Engineer.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 21 13 13 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM- - -
405
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 22 05 11
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The requirements of this Section apply to all sections of Division 22.
B. Definitions:
1. Exposed: Piping and equipment exposed to view in finished rooms.
2. Option or optional: Contractor's choice of an alternate material or method.
1.2 RELATED WORK
D. GENERAL CONDITIONS.
E. Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
F. Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.
G. Section 02 82 11, TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT.
E. Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.
F. Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.
G. Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.
H. Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION.
I. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Products Criteria:
1. Standard Products: Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least 3
years. However, digital electronics devices, software and systems such as controls,
instruments, computer work station, shall be the current generation of technology and
basic design that has a proven satisfactory service record of at least three years. See
other specification sections for any exceptions.
2. Equipment Service: There shall be permanent service organizations, authorized and
trained by manufacturers of the equipment supplied, located within 100 miles of the
project. These organizations shall come to the site and provide acceptable service to
restore operations within four hours of receipt of notification by phone, e-mail or fax
in event of an emergency, such as the shut-down of equipment; or within 24 hours in
406
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
a non-emergency. Submit names, mail and e-mail addresses and phone numbers of
service organizations providing service under these conditions for (as applicable to
the project): pumps, critical instrumentation, computer workstation and programming.
3. All items furnished shall be free from defects that would adversely affect the
performance, maintainability and appearance of individual components and overall
assembly.
4. Conform to codes and standards as required by the specifications. Conform to local
codes, if required by local authorities such as the natural gas supplier, if the local
codes are more stringent then those specified. Refer any conflicts to the Resident
Engineer (RE)/Contracting Officers Technical Representative (COTR).
5. Multiple Units: When two or more units of materials or equipment of the same type
or class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.
6. Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components
made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product.
7. Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall
be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast
integrally with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of
equipment.
8. Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.
B. Welding: Before any welding is performed, contractor shall submit a certificate certifying
that welders comply with the following requirements:
1. Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications".
2. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 series "Code for Pressure Piping".
3. Certify that each welder has passed American Welding Society (AWS) qualification
tests for the welding processes involved, and that certification is current.
C. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where installation procedures or any part thereof are
required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the
material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to
the Resident Engineer prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to
407
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these
recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material.
C. Execution (Installation, Construction) Quality:
1. Apply and install all items in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
Refer conflicts between the manufacturer's instructions and the contract drawings and
specifications to the RE/COTR for resolution. Provide written hard copies or
computer files of manufacturer’s installation instructions to the RE/COTR at least
two weeks prior to commencing installation of any item.
2. All items that require access, such as for operating, cleaning, servicing, maintenance,
and calibration, shall be easily and safely accessible by persons standing at floor
level, or standing on permanent platforms, without the use of portable ladders.
Examples of these items include, but are not limited to: all types of valves, filters and
strainers, transmitters, control devices. Prior to commencing installation work, refer
conflicts between this requirement and contract drawings to the RE/COTR for
resolution.
3. Provide complete layout drawings required by Paragraph, SUBMITTALS. Do not
commence construction work on any system until the layout drawings have been
approved.
D. Guaranty: Section 00 72 00, GENERAL CONDITIONS.
E. Plumbing Systems: NAPHCC National Standard Plumbing Code.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Information and material submitted under this section shall be marked "SUBMITTED
UNDER SECTION 22 05 11, COMNON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING", with
applicable "Group" number.
C. Contractor shall make all necessary field measurements and investigations to assure that
the equipment and assemblies will meet contract requirements.
D. If equipment is submitted which differs in arrangement from that shown, provide
drawings that show the rearrangement of all associated systems. Approval will be given
408
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
only if all features of the equipment and associated systems, including accessibility, are
equivalent to that required by the contract.
E. Prior to submitting shop drawings for approval, contractor shall certify in writing that
manufacturers of all major items of equipment have each reviewed drawings and
specifications, and have jointly coordinated and properly integrated their equipment and
controls to provide a complete and efficient installation.
F. Upon request by Government, provide lists of previous installations for selected items of
equipment. Include contact persons who will serve as references, with telephone
numbers and e-mail addresses.
G. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Submit under the pertinent section rather than under
this section.
1. Submit electric motor data and variable speed drive data with the driven equipment.
2. Equipment and materials identification.
3. Fire-stopping materials.
4. Hangers, inserts, supports and bracing. Provide load calculations for variable spring
and constant support hangers.
5. Wall, floor, and ceiling plates.
H. Coordination Drawings: In accordance with Section 00 72 00, GENERAL
CONDITIONS, Article, SUBCONTRACTS AND WORK COORDINATION. Submit
complete consolidated and coordinated layout drawings for all new systems, and for
existing systems that are in the same areas. The drawings shall include plan views,
elevations and sections of all systems and shall be on a scale of not less than 1:32 (3/8inch equal to one foot). Clearly identify and dimension the proposed locations of the
principal items of equipment. The drawings shall clearly show the proposed location and
adequate clearance for all equipment, piping, pumps, valves and other items. Show the
access means for all items requiring access for operations and maintenance. Do not install
equipment foundations, equipment or piping until layout drawings have been approved.
Provide detailed layout drawings of all piping systems. In addition provide details of the
following.
1. Hangers, inserts, supports, and bracing.
2. Pipe sleeves.
409
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3. Equipment penetrations of floors, walls, ceilings, or roofs.
I. Maintenance Data and Operating Instructions:
1. Maintenance and operating manuals in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS, Article, INSTRUCTIONS, for systems and equipment.
2. Provide a listing of recommended replacement parts for keeping in stock supply,
including sources of supply, for equipment. Include in the listing belts for equipment:
Belt manufacturer, model number, size and style, and distinguished whether of
multiple belt sets.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protection of Equipment:
1. Equipment and material placed on the job site shall remain in the custody of the
Contractor until phased acceptance, whether or not the Government has reimbursed
the Contractor for the equipment and material. The Contractor is solely responsible
for the protection of such equipment and material against any damage.
2. Place damaged equipment in first class, new operating condition; or, replace same as
determined and directed by the RE/COTR. Such repair or replacement shall be at no
additional cost to the Government.
3. Protect interiors of new equipment and piping systems against entry of foreign matter.
Clean both inside and outside before painting or placing equipment in operation.
4. Existing equipment and piping being worked on by the Contractor shall be under the
custody and responsibility of the Contractor and shall be protected as required for
new work.
B. Cleanliness of Piping and Equipment Systems:
1. Exercise care in storage and handling of equipment and piping material to be
incorporated in the work. Remove debris arising from cutting, threading and welding
of piping.
2. Piping systems shall be flushed, blown or pigged as necessary to deliver clean
systems.
3. Clean interior of all tanks prior to delivery for beneficial use by the Government.
4. Contractor shall be fully responsible for all costs, damage, and delay arising from
failure to provide clean systems.
410
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC):
SEC IX-98 ..............................Qualifications Standard for Welding and Brazing
Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing
Operators
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A36/A36M-2001 ....................Carbon Structural Steel
A575-96 .................................Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades R (2002)
E84-2003 ................................Standard Test Method for Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
E119-2000 ..............................Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building
Construction and Materials
D. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc:
SP-58-93 ................................Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design and
Manufacture
SP 69-2003 .............................Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and Application
E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
MG1-2003, Rev. 1-2004 ........Motors and Generators
F. National Association of Plumbing - Heating - Cooling Contractors (NAPHCC):
1996........................................National Standard Plumbing Code
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FACTORY-ASSEMBLED PRODUCTS
A. Provide maximum standardization of components to reduce spare part requirements.
B. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies that include components made by others shall
assume complete responsibility for final assembled unit.
1. All components of an assembled unit need not be products of same manufacturer.
2. Constituent parts that are alike shall be products of a single manufacturer.
411
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for
intended service.
4. Contractor shall guarantee performance of assemblies of components, and shall repair
or replace elements of the assemblies as required to deliver specified performance of
the complete assembly.
C. Components of equipment shall bear manufacturer's name and trademark, model number,
serial number and performance data on a name plate securely affixed in a conspicuous
place, or cast integral with, stamped or otherwise permanently marked upon the
components of the equipment.
D. Major items of equipment, which serve the same function, must be the same make and
model. Exceptions will be permitted if performance requirements cannot be met.
2.2 COMPATIBILITY OF RELATED EQUIPMENT
Equipment and materials installed shall be compatible in all respects with other items
being furnished and with existing items so that the result will be a complete and fully
operational plant that conforms to contract requirements.
2.3 LIFTING ATTACHMENTS
Provide equipment with suitable lifting attachments to enable equipment to be lifted in its
normal position. Lifting attachments shall withstand any handling conditions that might
be encountered, without bending or distortion of shape, such as rapid lowering and
braking of load.
2.4 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS IDENTIFICATION
A. Use symbols, nomenclature and equipment numbers specified, shown on the drawings
and shown in the maintenance manuals. Identification for piping is specified in Section
09 91 00, PAINTING.
B. Interior (Indoor) Equipment: Engraved nameplates, with letters not less than 48 mm
(3/16-inch) high of brass with black-filled letters, or rigid black plastic with white letters
specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING permanently fastened to the equipment.
Identify unit components such as coils, filters, fans, etc.
E. Valve Tags and Lists:
1. Plumbing: Provide for all valves (Fixture stops not included).
412
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Valve tags: Engraved black filled numbers and letters not less than 13 mm ( 1/2-inch)
high for number designation, and not less than 6.4 mm(1/4-inch) for service
designation on 19 gage 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) round brass disc, attached with brass
"S" hook or brass chain.
3. Valve lists: Typed or printed plastic coated card(s), sized 216 mm(8-1/2 inches) by
280 mm (11 inches) showing tag number, valve function and area of control, for each
service or system. Punch sheets for a 3-ring notebook.
4. Provide detailed plan for each floor of the building indicating the location and valve
number for each valve. Identify location of each valve with a color coded thumb tack
in ceiling.
2.5 FIRESTOPPING
Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING specifies an effective barrier against the spread of
fire, smoke and gases where penetrations occur for piping. Refer to Section 23 07 11,
HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION, for firestop pipe
insulation.
2.6 GALVANIZED REPAIR COMPOUND
Mil. Spec. DOD-P-21035B, paint form.
2.7 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTS
A. In lieu of the paragraph which follows, suspended equipment support and restraints may
be designed and installed in accordance with the National Uniform Seismic Installation
Guidelines (NUSIG), most current edition. Submittals based on either the NUSIG
guidelines or the following paragraphs of this Section shall be stamped and signed by a
professional engineer registered in a state where the project is located. Support of
suspended equipment over 227 kg (500 pounds) shall be submitted for approval of the
Resident Engineer in all cases. See paragraph 2.8.M for lateral force design requirements.
B. Type Numbers Specified: MSS SP-58. For selection and application refer to MSS SP-69.
Refer to Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS, for miscellaneous metal support
materials and prime coat painting.
C. For Attachment to Concrete Construction:
1. Concrete insert: Type 18, MSS SP-58.
413
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Self-drilling expansion shields and machine bolt expansion anchors: Permitted in
concrete not less than 102 mm (four inches) thick when approved by the Resident
Engineer for each job condition.
3. Power-driven fasteners: Permitted in existing concrete or masonry not less than 102
mm (four inches) thick when approved by the Resident Engineer for each job
condition.
D. For Attachment to Steel Construction: MSS SP-58.
1. Welded attachment: Type 22.
2. Beam clamps: Types 20, 21, 28 or 29. Type 23 C-clamp may be used for individual
copper tubing up to 23mm (7/8-inch) outside diameter.
E. Attachment to Metal Pan or Deck: As required for materials specified in Section 05 31
00, STEEL DECKING.
F. Hanger Rods: Hot-rolled steel, ASTM A36 or A575 for allowable load listed in MSS
SP-58. For piping, provide adjustment means for controlling level or slope. Types 13 or
15 turn-buckles shall provide 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) minimum of adjustment and
incorporate locknuts. All-thread rods are acceptable.
G. Multiple (Trapeze) Hangers: Galvanized, cold formed, lipped steel channel horizontal
member, not less than 41mm by 41mm (1-5/8 inches by 1-5/8 inches), 2.7 mm (No. 12
gage), designed to accept special spring held, hardened steel nuts. Not permitted for
steam supply and condensate piping.
1. Allowable hanger load: Manufacturers rating less 91kg (200 pounds).
2. Guide individual pipes on the horizontal member of every other trapeze hanger with 6
mm (1/4-inch) U-bolt fabricated from steel rod. Provide Type 40 insulation shield,
secured by two 13mm (1/2-inch) galvanized steel bands, or preinsulated calcium
silicate shield for insulated piping at each hanger.
H. Pipe Hangers and Supports: (MSS SP-58), use hangers sized to encircle insulation on
insulated piping. Refer to Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER
PLANT INSULATION for insulation thickness. To protect insulation, provide Type 39
saddles for roller type supports or preinsulated calcium silicate shields. Provide Type 40
insulation shield or preinsulated calcium silicate shield at all other types of supports and
hangers including those for preinsulated piping.
414
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. General Types (MSS SP-58):
a. Standard clevis hanger: Type 1; provide locknut.
b. Riser clamps: Type 8.
c. Wall brackets: Types 31, 32 or 33.
d. Roller supports: Type 41, 43, 44 and 46.
e. Saddle support: Type 36, 37 or 38.
f. Turnbuckle: Types 13 or 15. preinsulate
g. U-bolt clamp: Type 24.
h. Copper Tube:
1) Hangers, clamps and other support material in contact with tubing shall be
painted with copper colored epoxy paint, plastic coated or taped with non
adhesive isolation tape to prevent electrolysis.
2) For vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps.
3) For supporting tube to strut: Provide epoxy painted pipe straps for copper tube
or plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps.
4) Insulated Lines: Provide pre-insulated calcium silicate shields sized for copper
tube.
i. Supports for plastic or glass piping: As recommended by the pipe manufacturer
with black rubber tape extending one inch beyond steel support or clamp. //b.
Spring Supports (Expansion and contraction of vertical piping):
1) Movement up to 20 mm (3/4-inch): Type 51 or 52 variable spring unit with
integral turn buckle and load indicator.
2) Movement more than 20 mm (3/4-inch): Type 54 or 55 constant support unit
with integral adjusting nut, turn buckle and travel position indicator. //
2. Plumbing Piping (Other Than General Types):
a. Horizontal piping: Type 1, 5, 7, 9, and 10.
b. Chrome plated piping: Chrome plated supports.
c. Hangers and supports in pipe chase: Prefabricated system ABS self-extinguishing
material, not subject to electrolytic action, to hold piping, prevent vibration and
compensate for all static and operational conditions.
415
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
d. Blocking, stays and bracing: Angle iron or preformed metal channel shapes, 1.3
mm (18 gage) minimum.
I. Pre-insulated Calcium Silicate Shields:
1. Provide 360 degree water resistant high density 965 kPa (140 psi) compressive
strength calcium silicate shields encased in galvanized metal.
2. Pre-insulated calcium silicate shields to be installed at the point of support during
erection.
3. Shield thickness shall match the pipe insulation.
4. The type of shield is selected by the temperature of the pipe, the load it
must
carry, and the type of support it will be used with.
a. Shields for supporting chilled or cold water shall have insulation that extends a
minimum of 1 inch past the sheet metal. Provide for an adequate vapor barrier in
chilled lines.
b. The pre-insulated calcium silicate shield shall support the maximum allowable
water filled span as indicated in MSS-SP 69. To support the load, the shields may
have one or more of the following features: structural inserts 4138 kPa (600 psi)
compressive strength, an extra bottom metal shield, or formed structural steel
(ASTM A36) wear plates welded to the bottom sheet metal jacket.
5. Shields may be used on steel clevis hanger type supports, roller supports or flat
surfaces.
J. Seismic Restraint of Piping: Refer to Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT
REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS.
2.8 PIPE PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves during construction for other than blocked out floor openings for risers in
mechanical bays.
B. To prevent accidental liquid spills from passing to a lower level, provide the following:
1. For sleeves: Extend sleeve 25 mm (one inch) above finished floor and provide sealant
for watertight joint.
2. For blocked out floor openings: Provide 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) angle set in silicone
adhesive around opening.
416
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3. For drilled penetrations: Provide 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) angle ring or square set in
silicone adhesive around penetration.
C. Penetrations are not allowed through beams or ribs, but may be installed in concrete
beam flanges. Any deviation from these requirements must receive prior approval of
Resident Engineer.
D. Sheet Metal, Plastic, or Moisture-resistant Fiber Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing
through floors, interior walls, and partitions, unless brass or steel pipe sleeves are
specifically called for below.
E. Cast Iron or Zinc Coated Pipe Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through exterior walls
below grade. Make space between sleeve and pipe watertight with a modular or link
rubber seal. Seal shall be applied at both ends of sleeve.
F. Galvanized Steel or an alternate Black Iron Pipe with asphalt coating Sleeves: Provide for
pipe passing through concrete beam flanges, except where brass pipe sleeves are called
for. Provide sleeve for pipe passing through floor of mechanical rooms, laundry work
rooms, and animal rooms above basement. Except in mechanical rooms, connect sleeve
with floor plate.
G. Brass Pipe Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through quarry tile, terrazzo or ceramic tile
floors. Connect sleeve with floor plate.
H. Sleeves are not required for wall hydrants for fire department connections or in drywall
construction.
I. Sleeve Clearance: Sleeve through floors, walls, partitions, and beam flanges shall be one
inch greater in diameter than external diameter of pipe. Sleeve for pipe with insulation
shall be large enough to accommodate the insulation. Interior openings shall be caulked
tight with fire stopping material and sealant to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and
gases.
J. Sealant and Adhesives: Shall be as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.
2.9 TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
A. Furnish, and turn over to the Resident Engineer, special tools not readily available
commercially, that are required for disassembly or adjustment of equipment and
machinery furnished.
417
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Grease Guns with Attachments for Applicable Fittings: One for each type of grease
required for each motor or other equipment.
C. Tool Containers: Hardwood or metal, permanently identified for in tended service and
mounted, or located, where directed by the Resident Engineer.
D. Lubricants: A minimum of 0.95 L (one quart) of oil, and 0.45 kg (one pound) of grease,
of equipment manufacturer's recommended grade and type, in unopened containers and
properly identified as to use for each different application.
2.10 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES
A. Material and Type: Chrome plated brass or chrome plated steel, one piece or split type
with concealed hinge, with set screw for fastening to pipe, or sleeve. Use plates that fit
tight around pipes, cover openings around pipes and cover the entire pipe sleeve
projection.
B. Thickness: Not less than 2.4 mm (3/32-inch) for floor plates. For wall and ceiling plates,
not less than 0.64 mm (0.025-inch) for up to 80 mm (3-inch pipe), 0.89 mm (0.035-inch)
for larger pipe.
C. Locations: Use where pipe penetrates floors, walls and ceilings in exposed locations, in
finished areas only. Use also where insulation ends on exposed water supply pipe drop
from overhead. Provide a watertight joint in spaces where brass or steel pipe sleeves are
specified.
2.11 ASBESTOS
Materials containing asbestos are not permitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ARRANGEMENT AND INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING
A. Coordinate location of piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, and equipment, access
provisions, and work of all trades.. Locate piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, and
equipment clear of windows, doors, openings, light outlets, and other services and
utilities. Prepare equipment layout drawings to coordinate proper location and personnel
access of all facilities. Submit the drawings for review as required by Part 1.
Follow manufacturer's published recommendations for installation methods not otherwise
specified.
418
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Operating Personnel Access and Observation Provisions: Select and arrange all
equipment and systems to provide clear view and easy access, without use of portable
ladders, for maintenance and operation of all devices including, but not limited to: all
equipment items, valves, filters, strainers, transmitters, sensors, control devices. All gages
and indicators shall be clearly visible by personnel standing on the floor or on permanent
platforms. Do not reduce or change maintenance and operating space and access
provisions that are shown on the drawings.
C. Equipment and Piping Support: Coordinate structural systems necessary for pipe and
equipment support with pipe and equipment locations to permit proper installation.
D. Location of pipe sleeves, trenches and chases shall be accurately coordinated with
equipment and piping locations.
E. Cutting Holes:
1. Cut holes through concrete and masonry by rotary core drill. Pneumatic hammer,
impact electric, and hand or manual hammer type drill will not be allowed, except as
permitted by RE/COTR where working area space is limited.
2. Locate holes to avoid interference with structural members such as beams or grade
beams. Holes shall be laid out in advance and drilling done only after approval by
RE/COTR. If the Contractor considers it necessary to drill through structural
members, this matter shall be referred to RE/COTR for approval.
3. Do not penetrate membrane waterproofing.
F. Interconnection of Instrumentation or Control Devices: Generally, electrical and
pneumatic interconnections are not shown but must be provided.
G. Minor Piping: Generally, small diameter pipe runs from drips and drains, water cooling,
and other service are not shown but must be provided.
H. Protection and Cleaning:
1. Equipment and materials shall be carefully handled, properly stored, and adequately
protected to prevent damage before and during installation, in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the Resident Engineer.
Damaged or defective items in the opinion of the Resident Engineer, shall be
replaced.
419
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Protect all finished parts of equipment, such as shafts and bearings where accessible,
from rust prior to operation by means of protective grease coating and wrapping.
Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. Tightly cover and protect
fixtures and equipment against dirt, water chemical, or mechanical injury. At
completion of all work thoroughly clean fixtures, exposed materials and equipment.
I. Concrete and Grout: Use concrete and shrink compensating grout 25 MPa (3000 psi)
minimum, specified in Section 03 30 00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. J.
Install
gages, thermometers, valves and other devices with due regard for ease in reading or
operating and maintaining said devices. Locate and position thermometers and gages to
be easily read by operator or staff standing on floor or walkway provided. Servicing shall
not require dismantling adjacent equipment or pipe work.
K. Electrical and Pneumatic Interconnection of Controls and Instruments: This generally not
shown but must be provided. This includes interconnections of sensors, transmitters,
transducers, control devices, control and instrumentation panels, instruments and
computer workstations. Comply with NFPA-70.
L. Work in Existing Building:
1. Perform as specified in Article, OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS, Article,
ALTERATIONS, and Article, RESTORATION of the Section 01 00 00, GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS for relocation of existing equipment, alterations and restoration of
existing building(s).
2. As specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article,
OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS, make alterations to existing service piping
at times that will least interfere with normal operation of the facility.
3. Cut required openings through existing masonry and reinforced concrete using
diamond core drills. Use of pneumatic hammer type drills, impact type electric drills,
and hand or manual hammer type drills, will be permitted only with approval of the
Resident Engineer. Locate openings that will least effect structural slabs, columns,
ribs or beams. Refer to the Resident Engineer for determination of proper design for
openings through structural sections and opening layouts approval, prior to cutting or
drilling into structure. After Resident Engineer's approval, carefully cut opening
through construction no larger than absolutely necessary for the required installation.
420
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
M. Inaccessible Equipment:
1. Where the Government determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not
conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, equipment shall be removed
and reinstalled or remedial action performed as directed at no additional cost to the
Government.
2. The term "conveniently accessible" is defined as capable of being reached without the
use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as
motors, fans, pumps, belt guards, transformers, high voltage lines, piping, and
ductwork.
3.2 TEMPORARY PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. Continuity of operation of existing facilities will generally require temporary installation
or relocation of equipment and piping.
B. The Contractor shall provide all required facilities in accordance with the requirements of
phased construction and maintenance of service. All piping and equipment shall be
properly supported, sloped to drain, operate without excessive stress, and shall be
insulated where injury can occur to personnel by contact with operating facilities. The
requirements of Para. 3.1 apply.
C. Temporary facilities and piping shall be completely removed and any openings in
structures sealed. Provide necessary blind flanges and caps to seal open piping remaining
in service.
3.3 RIGGING
A. Design is based on application of available equipment. Openings in building structures
are planned to accommodate design scheme.
B. Alternative methods of equipment delivery may be offered by Contractor and will be
considered by Government under specified restrictions of phasing and maintenance of
service as well as structural integrity of the building.
C. Close all openings in the building when not required for rigging operations to maintain
proper environment in the facility for Government operation and maintenance of service.
D. Contractor shall provide all facilities required to deliver specified equipment and place on
foundations. Attachments to structures for rigging purposes and support of equipment on
421
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
structures shall be Contractor's full responsibility. Upon request, the Government will
check structure adequacy and advise Contractor of recommended restrictions.
E. Contractor shall check all clearances, weight limitations and shall offer a rigging plan
designed by a Registered Professional Engineer. All modifications to structures,
including reinforcement thereof, shall be at Contractor's cost, time and responsibility.
F. Rigging plan and methods shall be referred to RE/COTR for evaluation prior to actual
work.
3.4 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Where hanger spacing does not correspond with joist or rib spacing, use structural steel
channels secured directly to joist and rib structure that will correspond to the required
hanger spacing, and then suspend the equipment and piping from the channels. Drill or
burn holes in structural steel only with the prior approval of the Resident Engineer.
B. Use of chain, wire or strap hangers; wood for blocking, stays and bracing; or, hangers
suspended from piping above will not be permitted. Replace or thoroughly clean rusty
products and paint with zinc primer.
C. Use hanger rods that are straight and vertical. Turnbuckles for vertical adjustments may
be omitted where limited space prevents use. Provide a minimum of 15 mm (1/2-inch)
clearance between pipe or piping covering and adjacent work.
D. Plumbing horizontal and vertical pipe supports, refer to the NAPHCC National Standard
Plumbing Code.
E. Overhead Supports:
1. The basic structural system of the building is designed to sustain the loads imposed
by equipment and piping to be supported overhead.
2. Provide steel structural members, in addition to those shown, of adequate capability
to support the imposed loads, located in accordance with the final approved layout of
equipment and piping.
3. Tubing and capillary systems shall be supported in channel troughs.
F. Floor Supports:
1. Provide concrete bases, concrete anchor blocks and pedestals, and structural steel
systems for support of equipment and piping. Anchor and dowel concrete bases and
422
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
structural systems to resist forces under operating and seismic conditions (if
applicable) without excessive displacement or structural failure.
2. Do not locate or install bases and supports until equipment mounted thereon has been
approved. Size bases to match equipment mounted thereon plus 50 mm (2 inch)
excess on all edges.Refer to structural drawings. Bases shall be neatly finished and
smoothed, shall have chamfered edges at the top, and shall be suitable for painting.
3. All equipment shall be shimmed, leveled, firmly anchored, and grouted with epoxy
grout. Anchor bolts shall be placed in sleeves, anchored to the bases. Fill the annular
space between sleeves and bolts with a granular material to permit alignment and
realignment.
4. For seismic anchoring, refer to Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT
REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS.
3.5 LUBRICATION
A. Lubricate all devices requiring lubrication prior to initial operation. Field-check all
devices for proper lubrication.
B. Equip all devices with required lubrication fittings or devices. Provide a minimum of one
liter (one quart) of oil and 0.5 kg (one pound) of grease of manufacturer's recommended
grade and type for each different application; also provide 12 grease sticks for lubricated
plug valves. Deliver all materials to RE/COTR in unopened containers that are properly
identified as to application.
C. Provide a separate grease gun with attachments for applicable fittings for each type of
grease applied.
D. All lubrication points shall be accessible without disassembling equipment, except to
remove access plates.
3.6 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
A. Rigging access, other than indicated on the drawings, shall be provided by the Contractor
after approval for structural integrity by the RE/COTR. Such access shall be provided
without additional cost or time to the Government. Where work is in an operating plant,
provide approved protection from dust and debris at all times for the safety of plant
personnel and maintenance of plant operation and environment of the plant.
423
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. In an operating plant, maintain the operation, cleanliness and safety. Government
personnel will be carrying on their normal duties of operating, cleaning and maintaining
equipment and plant operation. Confine the work to the immediate area concerned;
maintain cleanliness and wet down demolished materials to eliminate dust. Do not permit
debris to accumulate in the area to the detriment of plant operation. Perform all flame
cutting to maintain the fire safety integrity of this plant. Adequate fire extinguishing
facilities shall be available at all times. Perform all work in accordance with recognized
fire protection standards. Inspection will be made by personnel of the VA Medical
Center, and Contractor shall follow all directives of the RE or COTR with regard to
rigging, safety, fire safety, and maintenance of operations.
C. Completely remove all piping, wiring, conduit, and other devices associated with the
equipment not to be re-used in the new work. This includes all pipe, valves, fittings,
insulation, and all hangers including the top connection and any fastenings to building
structural systems. Seal all openings, after removal of equipment, pipes, ducts, and other
penetrations in roof, walls, floors, in an approved manner and in accordance with plans
and specifications where specifically covered. Structural integrity of the building system
shall be maintained. Reference shall also be made to the drawings and specifications of
the other disciplines in the project for additional facilities to be demolished or handled.
D. All valves including gate, globe, ball, butterfly and check, all pressure gages and
thermometers with wells shall remain Government property and shall be removed and
delivered to RE/COTR and stored as directed. The Contractor shall remove all other
material and equipment, devices and demolition debris under these plans and
specifications. Such material shall be removed from Government property expeditiously
and shall not be allowed to accumulate.
E. Asbestos Insulation Removal: Conform to Section 02 82 11, TRADITIONAL
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT.
3.7 CLEANING AND PAINTING
A. Prior to final inspection and acceptance of the plant and facilities for beneficial use by the
Government, the plant facilities, equipment and systems shall be thoroughly cleaned and
painted. Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.
B. In addition, the following special conditions apply:
424
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. Cleaning shall be thorough. Use solvents, cleaning materials and methods
recommended by the manufacturers for the specific tasks. Remove all rust prior to
painting and from surfaces to remain unpainted. Repair scratches, scuffs, and
abrasions prior to applying prime and finish coats.
2. Material And Equipment Not To Be Painted Includes:
a. Motors, controllers, control switches, and safety switches.
b. Control and interlock devices.
c. Regulators.
d. Pressure reducing valves.
e. Control valves and thermostatic elements.
f. Lubrication devices and grease fittings.
g. Copper, brass, aluminum, stainless steel and bronze surfaces.
h. Valve stems and rotating shafts.
i. Pressure gauges and thermometers.
j. Glass.
k. Name plates.
3. Control and instrument panels shall be cleaned, damaged surfaces repaired, and shall
be touched-up with matching paint obtained from panel manufacturer.
4. Pumps, motors, steel and cast iron bases, and coupling guards shall be cleaned, and
shall be touched-up with the same color as utilized by the pump manufacturer
5. Temporary Facilities: Apply paint to surfaces that do not have existing finish coats.
6. Final result shall be smooth, even-colored, even-textured factory finish on all items.
Completely repaint the entire piece of equipment if necessary to achieve this.
3.8 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS
A. Provide laminated plastic signs, with engraved lettering not less than 5 mm (3/16-inch)
high, designating functions, for all equipment, switches, motor controllers, relays, meters,
control devices, including automatic control valves. Nomenclature and identification
symbols shall correspond to that used in maintenance manual, and in diagrams specified
elsewhere. Attach by chain, adhesive, or screws.
B. Factory Built Equipment: Metal plate, securely attached, with name and address of
manufacturer, serial number, model number, size, performance.
425
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C. Pipe Identification: Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.
3.9 STARTUP AND TEMPORARY OPERATION
Start up equipment as described in equipment specifications. Verify that vibration is
within specified tolerance prior to extended operation. Temporary use of equipment is
specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, TEMPORARY
USE OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT.
3.10 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. Prior to the final inspection, perform required tests as specified in Section 01 00 00,
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, TESTS and submit the test reports and records
to the Resident Engineer.
B. Should evidence of malfunction in any tested system, or piece of equipment or
component part thereof, occur during or as a result of tests, make proper corrections,
repairs or replacements, and repeat tests at no additional cost to the Government.
C. When completion of certain work or system occurs at a time when final control settings
and adjustments cannot be properly made to make performance tests, then make
performance tests for heating systems and for cooling systems respectively during first
actual seasonal use of respective systems following completion of work.
3.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Provide four bound copies. Deliver to RE/COTR not less than 30 days prior to
completion of a phase or final inspection.
B. Include all new and temporary equipment and all elements of each assembly.
C. Data sheet on each device listing model, size, capacity, pressure, speed, horsepower,
impeller size, other data.
D. Manufacturer’s installation, maintenance, repair, and operation instructions for each
device. Include assembly drawings and parts lists. Include operating precautions and
reasons for precautions.
E. Lubrication instructions including type and quantity of lubricant.
F. Schematic diagrams and wiring diagrams of all control systems corrected to include all
field modifications.
G. Set points of all interlock devices.
H. Trouble-shooting guide for control systems.
426
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
I. Operation of the combustion control system.
J. Emergency procedures.
3.10 INSTRUCTIONS TO VA PERSONNEL
Provide in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 22 05 11 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING- - -
427
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 22 11 00
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
Domestic water systems, including piping, equipment and all necessary accessories as
designated in this section.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Penetrations in rated enclosures: Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.
B. Preparation and finish painting and identification of piping systems: Section 09 91 00,
PAINTING.
C. Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING.
D. Pipe Insulation: Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT
INSULATION.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Piping.
2. Strainers.
3. All items listed in Part 2 - Products.
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
A-A-1427C ............................Sodium Hypochlorite Solution
A-A-59617 .............................Unions, Brass or Bronze Threaded, Pipe Connections and
Solder-Joint Tube Connections
C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): (Copyrighted Society)
A13.1-96 ................................Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems
B16.3-98.................................Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ANSI/ASME
428
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B16.4-98.................................Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250
ANSI/ASME
B16.9-01.................................Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings
ANSI/ASME
B16.11-01...............................Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded
ANSI/ASME
B16.12-98...............................Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings ANSI/ASME
B16.15-85(R 1994) ................Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings ANSI/ASME
B16.18-01...............................Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings
ANSI/ASME
B16.22-01...............................Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings ANSI/ASME
Element ANSI/ASME
D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A47-99 ...................................Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings Revision 1989
A53-02 ...................................Pipe, Steel, Black And Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded
and Seamless
A74-03 ...................................Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
A183-83(R1998) ....................Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
A312-03 .................................Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe
A536-84(R1999) E1...............Ductile Iron Castings
A733-03 .................................Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic
Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples
B32-03....................................Solder Metal
B61-02....................................Steam or Bronze Castings
B62-02....................................Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings
B75-99(Rev A).......................Seamless Copper Tube
B88-03....................................Seamless Copper Water Tube
B584-00..................................Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications
Revision A
B687-99..................................Brass, Copper, and Chromium-Plated Pipe Nipples
429
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C564-03..................................Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
D2000-01 ...............................Rubber Products in Automotive Applications
D4101-03b
Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion Materials
D2447-93 ...............................Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40 and 80, Based
on Outside Diameter
D2564-94 ...............................Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Pipe and Fittings
D2665-94 Revision A ............Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and
Vent Pipe and Fittings
D4101-03b .............................Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion Materials
E1120 .....................................Standard Specification For Liquid Chlorine
E1229 .....................................Standard Specification For Calcium Hypochlorite
E. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
C110-03/ A21.10-03 ..............Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings - 75 mm thru 1200 mm
(3 inch thru 48 inches) for Water and other liquids AWWA/
ANSI
C151-00/ A21.51-02 ..............Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or
Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids AWWA/
ANSI
C203-02..................................Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water
Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - Hot Applied AWWA/ ANSI
C651-99..................................Disinfecting Water Mains
F. American Welding Society (AWS):
A5.8-92 ..................................Filler Metals for Brazing
G. National Association of Plumbing - Heating - Cooling Contractors (PHCC):
National Standard Plumbing Code - 1996
H. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO):
Uniform Plumbing Code - 2000
IS6-93 .....................................Installation Standard
I. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS):
430
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SP-72-99 ................................Ball Valves With Flanged or Butt Welding For General
Purpose
SP-110-96 ..............................Ball Valve Threaded, Socket Welding, Solder Joint,
Grooved and Flared Ends
J. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE):
1001-02 ..................................Pipe Applied Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers
1018-01 ..................................Performance for trap seal primer valve-water supply fed
1020-04 ..................................Vacuum Breakers, Anti-Siphon, Pressure Type
K. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI):
PDI WH-201 ..........................Water Hammer Arrestor
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER SERVICE CONNECTIONS TO BUILDINGS
A. From inside face of exterior wall to a distance of approximately 1500 mm (5 feet) outside
of building and underground inside building, material selected shall be the same for the
size specified.
B. Seventy five millimeters (3 inch) Diameter and Over: Ductile iron, AWWA C151, 850
kPa (125 pounds) water steam pressure (WSP), exterior bituminous coating, cement
lined. Provide flanged and anchored connection to interior piping.
C. Under 75 mm (3 inch) Diameter: Copper tubing, ASTM B88, Type K, seamless,
annealed. Fittings as specified under Article, INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING.
Use brazing alloys, AWS A5.8, Classification BCuP.
D. Flexible Expansion Joint: Ductile iron with ball joints rated for 1725 kPa (250 psi)
working pressure conforming to ANSI/AWWA A21.53/C153, capable of deflecting a
minimum of 30 degrees and expanding simultaneously to the amount shown on the
drawings. Flexible expansion joint shall have the expansion capability designed as an
integral part of the ductile iron ball castings. Pressure containing parts shall be lined with
a minimum of 15 mils of fusion bonded epoxy conforming to the applicable requirements
of ANSI/AWWA C213 and shall be factory holiday tested with a 1500 volt spark test.
Flexible expansion joint shall have flanged connections conforming to ANSI/AWWA
A21.11/C110. Bolts and nuts shall be 316 stainless steel and gaskets shall be neoprene.
431
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2.2 INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. Pipe: Copper tube, ASTM B88, Type K or L, drawn. For pipe 150 mm (6 inches) and
larger, stainless, steel ASTM A312, schedule 10 may be used.
B. Fittings for Copper Tube:
1. Wrought copper or bronze castings conforming to ANSI B16.18 and B16.22. Unions
shall be bronze, MSS SP72 & SP 110, Solder or braze joints.
2. Grooved fittings, 50 to 150 mm (2 to 6 inch) wrought copper ASTM B75 C12200,
125 to 150 mm (5 to 6 inch) bronze casting ASTM B584, CDA 844. Mechanical
grooved couplings, ductile iron, ASTM A536 (Grade 65-45-12), or malleable iron,
ASTM A47 (Grade 32510) housing, with EPDM gasket, steel track head bolts,
ASTM A183, coated with copper colored alkyd enamel.
3. Mechanically formed tee connection: Form mechanically extracted collars in a
continuous operation by drilling pilot hole and drawing out tube surface to form
collar, having a height of not less than three times the thickness of tube wall.
Adjustable collaring device shall insure proper tolerance and complete uniformity of
the joint. Notch and dimple joining branch tube in a single process to provide free
flow where the branch tube penetrates the fitting. Braze joints.
C. Fittings for Stainless Steel:
1. Stainless steel butt-welded fittings, Type 316, Schedule 10, conforming to ANSI
B16.9.
2. Grooved fittings, stainless steel, Type 316, Schedule 10, conforming to ASTM A403.
Segmentally fabricated fittings are not allowed. Mechanical grooved couplings,
ductile iron, ASTM A536 (Grade 65-45-12), or Malleable iron, ASTM A47 (Grade
32510) housing, with EPDM gasket, steel track head bolts, ASTM A183, coated with
copper colored alkyd enamel.
D. Adapters: Provide adapters for joining screwed pipe to copper tubing.
E. Solder: ASTM B32 Composition Sb5 HA or HB. Provide non-corrosive flux.
F. Brazing alloy: AWS A5.8, Classification BCuP.
2.3 EXPOSED WATER PIPING
A. Finished Room: Use full iron pipe size chrome plated brass piping for exposed water
piping connecting fixtures, casework, cabinets, equipment and reagent racks when not
432
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
concealed by apron including those furnished by the Government or specified in other
sections.
1. Pipe: Fed. Spec. WW-P-351, standard weight.
2. Fittings: ANSI B16.15 cast bronze threaded fittings with chrome finish, (125 and
250).
3. Nipples: ASTM B 687, Chromium-plated.
4. Unions: Mss SP-72, SP-110, Brass or Bronze with chrome finish. Unions 65 mm
(2-1/2 inches) and larger shall be flange type with approved gaskets.
B. Unfinished Rooms, Mechanical Spaces: Chrome-plated brass piping is not required. Paint
piping systems as specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.
2.4 WATERPROOFING
A. Provide at points where pipes pass through membrane waterproofed floors or walls in
contact with earth.
B. Floors: Provide cast iron stack sleeve with flashing device and a underdeck clamp. After
stack is passed through sleeve, provide a waterproofed caulked joint at top hub.
C. Walls: See detail shown on drawings.
2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
Provide dielectric couplings or unions between ferrous and non-ferrous pipe.
2.6 WATER HAMMER ARRESTER:
Closed copper tube chamber with permanently sealed 410 kPa (60 psig) air charge above
a Double O-ring piston. Two high heat Buna-N 0-rings pressure packed and lubricated
with FDA approved Dow Corning No. 11 silicone compound. All units shall be designed
in accordance with ASSE 1010 for sealed wall installations without an access panel. Size
and install in accordance with Plumbing and Drainage Institute requirements (PDI WH
201). Unit shall be as manufactured by Precision Plumbing Products Inc., Watts or Sioux
Chief. Provide water hammer arrestors at all solenoid valves, at all groups of two or more
flush valves, at all quick opening or closing valves, and at all medical washing
equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the PHCC National Standard Plumbing Code and the following:
433
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. Install branch piping for water from the piping system and connect to all fixtures,
valves, cocks, outlets, casework, cabinets and equipment, including those furnished
by the Government or specified in other sections.
2. Pipe shall be round and straight. Cutting shall be done with proper tools. Pipe, except
for plastic and glass, shall be reamed to full size after cutting.
3. All pipe runs shall be laid out to avoid interference with other work.
4. Install union and shut-off valve on pressure piping at connections to equipment.
5. Pipe Hangers, Supports and Accessories:
a. All piping shall be supported per of the National Standard Plumbing Code,
Chapter No. 8.
b. Shop Painting and Plating: Hangers, supports, rods, inserts and accessories used
for Pipe supports shall be shop coated with red lead or zinc Chromate primer
paint. Electroplated copper hanger rods, hangers and accessories may be used
with copper tubing.
c. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates, Supports, Hangers:
1) Solid or split unplated cast iron.
2) All plates shall be provided with set screws.
3) Pipe Hangers: Height adjustable clevis type.
4) Adjustable Floor Rests and Base Flanges: Steel.
5) Concrete Inserts: "Universal" or continuous slotted type.
6) Hanger Rods: Mild, low carbon steel, fully threaded or Threaded at each end
with two removable nuts at each end for positioning rod and hanger and
locking each in place.
7) Riser Clamps: Malleable iron or steel.
8) Rollers: Cast iron.
9) Self-drilling type expansion shields shall be "Phillips" type, with case
hardened steel expander plugs.
10)Hangers and supports utilized with insulated pipe and tubing shall have 180
degree (min.) metal protection shield Centered on and welded to the hanger
and support. The shield shall be 4 inches in length and be 16 gauge steel. The
shield shall be sized for the insulation.
434
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
11)Miscellaneous Materials: As specified, required, directed or as noted on the
drawings for proper installation of hangers, supports and accessories. If the
vertical distance exceeds 6 m (20 feet) for cast iron pipe additional support
shall be provided in the center of that span. Provide all necessary auxiliary
steel to provide that support.
6. Install cast escutcheon with set screw at each wall, floor and ceiling penetration in
exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.
7. Penetrations:
a. Fire Stopping: Where pipes pass through fire partitions, fire walls, smoke
partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the
spread of fire, smoke and gases as specified in Section 07 84 00,
FIRESTOPPING. Completely fill and seal clearances between raceways and
openings with the fire stopping materials.
b. Waterproofing: At floor penetrations, completely seal clearances around the pipe
and make watertight with sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT
SEALANTS.
B. Piping shall conform to the following:
1. Domestic Water:
a. Where possible, grade all lines to facilitate drainage. Provide drain valves at
bottom of risers. All unnecessary traps in circulating lines shall be avoided.
b. Connect branch lines at bottom of main serving fixtures below and pitch down so
that main may be drained through fixture. Connect branch lines to top of main
serving only fixtures located on floor above.
3.2 TESTS
A. General: Test system either in its entirety or in sections.
B. Potable Water System: Test after installation of piping and domestic water heaters, but
before piping is concealed, before covering is applied, and before plumbing fixtures are
connected. Fill systems with water and maintain hydrostatic pressure of 690 kPa (100 psi)
gage for two hours. No decrease in pressure is allowed. Provide a pressure gage with a
shutoff and bleeder valve at the highest point of the piping being tested.
435
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C. Reagent Grade Water Systems: Fill system with water and maintain hydrostatic pressure
of 690 kPa (100 psi) gage during inspection and prove tight.
D. All Other Piping Tests: Test new installed piping under 1 1/2 times
- - - E N D OF SECTION 22 11 00 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION- - -
436
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 22 13 00
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
Sanitary sewerage systems, including piping, equipment and all necessary accessories as
designated in this section.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Penetrations in rated enclosures: Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.
B. Preparation and finish painting and identification of piping systems: Section 09 91 00,
PAINTING.
C. Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING.
D. Pipe Insulation: Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT
INSULATION.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Piping.
2. Floor Drains.
3. Cleanouts.
4. All items listed in Part 2 - Products.
C. Detailed shop drawing of clamping device and extensions when required in connection
with the waterproofing membrane or the floor drain.
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): (Copyrighted Society)
A112.1.1M-91 ........................Floor Drains ANSI/ASME
A13.1-96 ................................Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems
B16.3-98.................................Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ANSI/ASME
437
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B16.4-98.................................Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250
ANSI/ASME
B16.12-98...............................Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings ANSI/ASME
B16.15-85(R 1994) ................Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings ANSI/ASME
Element ANSI/ASME
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A47-99 ...................................Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings Revision 1989
A53-02 ...................................Pipe, Steel, Black And Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded
and Seamless
A74-03 ...................................Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
A183-83(R1998) ....................Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
A536-84(R1999) E1...............Ductile Iron Castings
B32-03....................................Solder Metal
B75-99(Rev A).......................Seamless Copper Tube
B306-02..................................Copper Drainage Tube (DWV)
B584-00..................................Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications
Revision A
C564-03..................................Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
D2000-01 ...............................Rubber Products in Automotive Applications
D2564-94 ...............................Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Pipe and Fittings
D2665-94 Revision A ............Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and
Vent Pipe and Fittings
D. National Association of Plumbing - Heating - Cooling Contractors (PHCC):
National Standard Plumbing Code - 1996
E. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI):
301-04 ....................................Hubless Cast Iron Soil and Fittings
F. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO):
Uniform Plumbing Code - 2000
IS6-93 .....................................Installation Standard
438
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
G. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE):
1018-01 ..................................Performance for trap seal primer valve-water supply fed
H. Factory Mutual (FM):
a. Coupling Used in Hubless Cast Iron Systems for Drains, Waste and Vent Systems.
I. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI):
PDI WH-201 ..........................Water Hammer Arrestor
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SANITARY PIPING
A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: Used for pipe buried in or in contact with earth and for
extension of pipe to a distance of approximately 1500 mm (5 feet) outside of building
walls and interior waste and vent piping above grade. Pipe shall be bell and spigot,
modified hub, or plain end (no-hub) as required by selected jointing method:
1. Material, (Pipe and Fittings): ASTM A74, C1SP1-301, Service Class.
2. Joints: Provide any one of the following types to suit pipe furnished.
a. Lead and oakum and caulked by hand.
b. Double seal, compression-type molded neoprene gasket. Gaskets shall suit class
of pipe being jointed.
c. Mechanical: Meet the requirements and criteria for pressure, leak, deflection and
shear tests as outlined in Factory Mutual No. 1680 for Class 1 couplings.
1) Stainless steel clamp type coupling of elastomeric sealing sleeve, ASTM
C564 and a Series 300 stainless steel shield and clamp assembly. Sealing
sleeve with center-stop to prevent contact between pipes/fittings being joined
shall be marked ASTM C564.
2) Cast Iron coupling with neoprene gasket and stainless steel bolts and nuts.
d. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Shall consist of ductile iron (ASTM A536,
Grade 65-45-12), or malleable iron (ASTM A47, Grade 32510) housings, a
pressure responsive elastomeric gasket (ASTM D2000), and steel track head
bolts. Shall be for use on pipe and fittings grooved to the manufacturer's
specifications. Couplings and fittings to be of the same manufacturer.
439
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
e. Adapters: Where service weight pipe is connected to extra heavy pipe and extra
heavy fittings of chair carriers, provide adapters or similar system to make tight,
leakproof joints.
B. Steel Pipe and Fittings: May be used for vent piping above grade.
1. Pipe Galvanized: ASTM A53, standard weight.
2. Fittings:
a. Soil, Waste and Drain Piping: Cast iron, ANSI B16.12, threaded, galvanized.
b. Sanitary and Exhaust Vent Piping: Malleable iron, ANSI B16.3, or cast iron,
ANSI B16.4. All piping shall be of the same kind. Couplings of vent piping may
be standard couplings furnished with pipe.
c. Unions: Tucker connection or equivalent type throughout.
d. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Shall consist of ductile iron (ASTM A536,
Grade 65-45-12), or malleable iron (ASTM A47, Grade 32510) housings, a
pressure responsive elastomeric gasket (ASTM D2000), and steel track head
bolts. Shall be for use on pipe and fittings grooved to the manufacturer's
specifications. Couplings and fittings to be of the same manufacturer.
C. Copper Tube, (DWV): May be used for piping above ground, except for urinal drains.
1. Tube: ASTM B306.
2. Fittings:
a. Solder type.
b. Grooved fittings, 50 to 150 mm (2 to 6 inch) wrought copper conforming to
ASTM B75 C12200, 125 to 150 mm (5 to 6 inch) bronze casting conforming to
ASTM B584, CDA 844(81-3-7-9). Mechanical grooved couplings, ductile iron,
ASTM A536 (Grade 65-45-12), or malleable iron, ASTM A47 (Grade 32510)
housings, with EPDM gasket, steel track head bolts, ASTM A183, coated with
copper colored alkyd enamel.
3. Joints: ASTM B32, 50/50, special alloy, lead free. Solder using non-corrosive flux.
D. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): Schedule 40. Shall not be used where waste temperature may
exceed 60C (140F), such as mechanical equipment rooms, and kitchen, SPD, and
sterilizer areas. In nursing homes, restrict PVC to patient toilet areas and use other
440
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
specified material for trunk sewer. PVC shall not be used in waste risers due to higher
noise than other specified material.
1. Pipe: Shall be manufactured from Type I normal impact resins in conformance with
ASTM D2665 and ASTM B16.12.
2. Fittings:
a. Solvent Welded Socket Type: Use solvent cement, ASTM D2564.
b. Threaded Type: Molded threads only. Use tape or lubricant specifically intended
for use with PVC plastic pipe.
2.2 EXPOSED WASTE PIPING
A. Finished Room: Use full iron pipe size chrome plated brass piping for exposed waste
piping connecting fixtures, casework, cabinets, equipment and reagent racks when not
concealed by apron including those furnished by the Government or specified in other
sections.
1. Pipe: Fed. Spec. WW-P-351, standard weight.
2. Fittings: ANSI B16.15 cast bronze threaded fittings with chrome finish, (125 and
250).
3. Nipples: ASTM B 687, Chromium-plated.
4. Unions: Brass or Bronze with chrome finish. Unions 65 mm (2-1/2 inches) and larger
shall be flange type with approved gaskets.
B. Unfinished Rooms, Mechanical Rooms and Kitchens: Chrome-plated brass piping is not
required. Paint piping systems as specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.
2.3 CLEANOUTS
A. Same size as the pipe, up to 100 mm (4 inches); not less than 100 mm (4 inches) for
larger pipe. Cleanouts shall be easily accessible and shall be gastight and watertight.
Provide a minimum clearance of 600 mm (24 inches) for the rodding.
B. In Floors: Floor cleanouts shall have cast iron body and frame with square adjustable
scoriated secured nickel bronze top. Unit shall be vertically adjustable for a minimum of
50 mm (2 inches). When a waterproof membrane is used in the floor system, provide
clamping collars on the cleanouts. Cleanouts shall consist of "Y" fittings and 3 mm (1/8
inch) bends with brass or bronze screw plugs. Cleanouts in the resilient tile floors, quarry
tile and ceramic tile floors shall be provided with square top covers recessed for tile
441
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
insertion. In the carpeted areas, provide carpet cleanout markers. Provide two way
cleanouts where indicated on drawings.
C. Provide cleanouts at or near the base of the vertical stacks with the cleanout plug located
approximately 600 mm (24 inches) above the floor. If there are no fixtures installed on
the lowest floor, the cleanout shall be installed at the base of the stack. Extend the
cleanouts to the wall access cover. Cleanout shall consist of sanitary tees. Furnish
nickel-bronze square frame and stainless steel cover with minimum opening of 150 by
150 mm (6 by 6 inches) at each wall cleanout. Where the piping is concealed, a fixture
trap or a fixture with integral trap, readily removable without disturbing concealed
roughing work, shall be accepted as a cleanout equivalent providing the opening to be
used as a cleanout opening is the size required by the NPHCC National Standard
Plumbing Code.
D. In horizontal runs above grade, cleanouts shall consist of cast brass tapered screw plug in
fitting or caulked/no hub cast iron ferrule. Plain end (no-hub) piping in interstitial space
or above ceiling may use plain end (no-hub) blind plug and clamp.
2.4 WATERPROOFING
A. Provide at points where pipes pass through membrane waterproofed floors or walls in
contact with earth.
B. Floors: Provide cast iron stack sleeve with flashing device and a underdeck clamp. After
stack is passed through sleeve, provide a waterproofed caulked joint at top hub.
C. Walls: See detail shown on drawings.
2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
Provide dielectric couplings or unions between ferrous and non-ferrous pipe.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the PHCC National Standard Plumbing Code and the following:
1. Install branch piping for waste from the respective piping systems and connect to all
fixtures, valves, cocks, outlets, casework, cabinets and equipment, including those
furnished by the Government or specified in other sections.
2. Pipe shall be round and straight. Cutting shall be done with proper tools. Pipe, except
for plastic and glass, shall be reamed to full size after cutting.
442
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3. All pipe runs shall be laid out to avoid interference with other work.
4. Install valves with stem in horizontal position whenever possible. All valves shall be
easily accessible. Install valve in each water connection to fixture.
5. All gravity waste drain lines inside the building with vertical drops over 6 m (20 feet)
shall be provided with joint restraint on the vertical drop and horizontal offset or
branch below the vertical drop. Joint restraint shall be accomplished by threaded,
soldered, lead and oakum or grooved joints or a combination of pipe clamps and tierods as detailed in NFPA 24. Vertical joint restraint shall be provided from the fitting
at the bottom of the vertical drop through every joint up to the riser clamp at the floor
penetration of the floor above. Horizontal joint restraint shall be provided from the
same fitting at the bottom of the vertical drop through every joint on the horizontal
offset or branch for a minimum of 18 m (60 feet) or to anchoring point from the
building structure. Joint restraint below ground shall be accomplished by thrust
blocks detailed in NFPA 24.
6. Pipe Hangers, Supports and Accessories:
a. All piping shall be supported per of the National Standard Plumbing Code,
Chapter No. 8.
b. Shop Painting and Plating: Hangers, supports, rods, inserts and accessories used
for Pipe supports shall be shop coated with red lead or zinc Chromate primer
paint. Electroplated copper hanger rods, hangers and accessories may be used
with copper tubing.
c. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates, Supports, Hangers:
1) Solid or split unplated cast iron.
2) All plates shall be provided with set screws.
3) Pipe Hangers: Height adjustable clevis type.
4) Adjustable Floor Rests and Base Flanges: Steel.
5) Concrete Inserts: "Universal" or continuous slotted type.
6) Hanger Rods: Mild, low carbon steel, fully threaded or Threaded at each end
with two removable nuts at each end for positioning rod and hanger and
locking each in place.
7) Riser Clamps: Malleable iron or steel.
443
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
8) Rollers: Cast iron.
9) Self-drilling type expansion shields shall be "Phillips" type, with case
hardened steel expander plugs.
10) Hangers and supports utilized with insulated pipe and tubing shall have 180
degree (min.) metal protection shield Centered on and welded to the hanger
and support. The shield shall be 4 inches in length and be 16 gauge steel. The
shield shall be sized for the insulation.
11) Miscellaneous Materials: As specified, required, directed or as noted on the
drawings for proper installation of hangers, supports and accessories. If the
vertical distance exceeds 6 m (20 feet) for cast iron pipe additional support
shall be provided in the center of that span. Provide all necessary auxiliary
steel to provide that support.
7. Install cast escutcheon with set screw at each wall, floor and ceiling penetration in
exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.
8. Penetrations:
a. Fire Stopping: Where pipes pass through fire partitions, fire walls, smoke
partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the
spread of fire, smoke and gases as specified in Section 07 84 00,
FIRESTOPPING. Completely fill and seal clearances between raceways and
openings with the fire stopping materials.
b. Waterproofing: At floor penetrations, completely seal clearances around the pipe
and make watertight with sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT
SEALANTS.
B. Piping shall conform to the following:
1. Waste and Vent Drain to main stacks:
Pipe Size
Minimum Pitch
80 mm (3 inches) and
smaller
1 : 50 (1/4" to the foot).
80 mm (4 inches) and larger
1 : 100 (1/8" to the foot).
444
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Exhaust Vent: Extend separately through roof. Sanitary vents shall not connect to
exhaust vents.
3.2 TESTS
A. General: Test system either in its entirety or in sections.
B. Waste Systems: Conduct before trenches are backfilled or fixtures are connected.
Conduct water test or air test, as directed.
1. Water Test: If entire system is tested, tightly close all openings in pipes except
highest opening, and fill system with water to point of overflow. If system is tested in
sections, tightly plug each opening except highest opening of section under test, fill
each section with water and test with at least a 3 m (10 foot) head of water. In testing
successive sections, test at least upper 3 m (10 feet) of next preceding section so that
each joint or pipe except upper most 3 m (10 feet) of system has been submitted to a
test of at least a 3 m (10 foot) head of water. Keep water in system, or in portion
under test, for at least 15 minutes before inspection starts. System shall then be tight
at all joints.
2. Air Test: Maintain air pressure of 35 kPa (5 psi) gage for at least 15 minutes without
leakage. Use force pump and mercury column gage.
3. Final Tests: Either one of the following tests may be used.
a. Smoke Test: After fixtures are permanently connected and traps are filled with
water, fill entire drainage and vent systems with smoke under pressure of 1.3 kPa
(one inch of water) with a smoke machine. Chemical smoke is prohibited.
b. Peppermint Test: Introduce (two ounces) of peppermint into each line or stack.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 22 13 00 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE- - -
445
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 22 40 00
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
Plumbing fixtures, associated trim and fittings necessary to make a complete installation
from wall or floor connections to rough piping, and certain accessories.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Sealing between fixtures and other finish surfaces: Section 07 92 00, JOINT
SEALANTS.
B. Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Submit plumbing fixture information in an assembled brochure, showing cuts and full
detailed description of each fixture.
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American National Standard Institute (ANSI):
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
A112.6.1M-02 ........................Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public
Use
A112.19.1M-04 ......................Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing fixtures
A112.19.2M-03 ......................Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures
A112.19.3-2001 .....................Stainless Steel Plumbing fixtures (Designed for Residential
Use)
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A276-2003 .............................Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes
D. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): NAAMM AMP
500-505
Metal Finishes Manual (1988)
446
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
E. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE):
1016-05 ..................................Performance Requirements for Individual Thermostatic,
Pressure Balancing and Combination Pressure Balancing
and Thermostatic Control Valves for Individual Fixture
Fittings
F. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standard 61-2000
G. American with Disabilities Act(A.D.A) Section 4-19.4 Exposed Pipes and Surfaces
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STAINLESS STEEL
A. Corrosion-resistant Steel (CRS):
1. Plate, Sheet and Strip: CRS flat products shall conform to chemical composition
requirements of any 300 series steel specified in ASTM A276.
2. Finish: Exposed surfaces shall have standard polish (ground and polished) equal to
NAAMM finish Number 4.
B. Die-cast zinc alloy products are prohibited.
2.2 STOPS
A. Provide lock-shield loose key or screw driver pattern angle stops, straight stops or stops
integral with faucet, with each compression type faucet whether specifically called for or
not, including sinks in wood and metal casework, laboratory furniture and pharmacy
furniture. Locate stops centrally above or below fixture in accessible location.
B. Furnish keys for lock shield stops to Resident Engineer.
C. Supply from stops not integral with faucet shall be chrome plated copper flexible tubing
or flexible stainless steel with inner core of non-toxic polymer.
D. Supply pipe from wall to valve stop shall be rigid threaded IPS copper alloy pipe, i.e. red
brass pipe nipple.
2.3 ESCUTCHEONS
Heavy type, chrome plated, with set screws. Provide for piping serving plumbing fixtures
and at each wall, ceiling and floor penetrations in exposed finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork.
447
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2.4 LAMINAR FLOW CONTROL DEVICE
A. Smooth, bright stainless steel or satin finish, chrome plated metal laminar flow device
shall provide non-aeration, clear, coherent laminar flow that will not splash in basin.
Device shall also have a flow control restrictor and have vandal resistant housing.
B. Flow Control Restrictor:
1. Capable of restricting flow from 95 to 110 mL/s (1.5 to 1.7 gpm) for lavatories; 125
to 140 mL/s (2.0 to 2.2 gpm) for sinks P-505 through P-520, P-524 and P-528; and
170 to 190 mL/s (2.75 to 3.0 gpm) for dietary food preparation and rinse sinks.
2. Compensates for pressure fluctuation maintaining flow rate specified above within 10
percent between 170 and 550 kPa (25 and 80 psi).
3. Operates by expansion and contraction, eliminates mineral/sediment build-up with
self-clearing action, and is capable of easy manual cleaning.
C. Device manufactured by OMNI Products, Inc. or equal.
2.5 CARRIERS
A. ASME/ANSI A112.6.1M, with adjustable gasket faceplate chair carriers for wall hung
closets with auxiliary anchor foot assembly, hanger rod support feet, and rear anchor tie
down.
B. ASME/ANSI A112.6.1M, lavatory, steel plate as detailed on drawing.
C. Where water closets, lavatories or sinks are installed back-to-back and carriers are
specified, provide one carrier to serve both fixtures in lieu of individual carriers. The
drainage fitting of the back to back carrier shall be so constructed that it prevents the
discharge from one fixture from flowing into the opposite fixture.
2.6 WATER CLOSETS
A. (P-103) Water Closet (Wall Hung, ASME/ANSI A112.19.2M, Figure 9) office and
industrial, elongated bowl, siphon jet 6 L (1.6 gallons) per flush, wall outlet. Top of rim
shall be between 410 and 435 mm (16 to 17 inches) above finished floor. Handicapped
water closet shall have rim set 460 mm (18 inches) above finished floor.
1. Seat: Institutional/Industrial, extra heavy duty, chemical resistant, solid plastic, open
front less cover for elongated bowls, integrally molded bumpers, concealed check
hinge with stainless steel post. Seat shall be posture contoured body design. Color
shall be white.
448
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Fittings and Accessories: Gaskets - neoprene; bolts with chromium plated caps nuts
and washers.
3. Flush valve: Large chloramines resistant diaphragm, semi-red brass valve body,
exposed chrome plated, battery powered active infra-red sensor for automatic
operation with courtesy flush button for manual operation water saver design 6 L (1.6
gallons) per flush with maximum 10 percent variance, 25mm (one-inch) screwdriver
back check angle stop with vandal resistant cap, adjustable tailpiece, a high back
pressure vacuum breaker, spud coupling for 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) top spud, wall and
spud flanges, and sweat solder adapter with cover tube and set screw wall flange.
Valve body, cover, tailpiece and control stop shall be in conformance with ASTM
alloy classification for semi-red brass. Seat bumpers shall be integral part of flush
valve. Set centerline of inlet 292 mm (11-1/2 inches) above rim.
2.7 LAVATORIES
A. Dimensions for lavatories are specified, Length by width (distance from wall) and depth.
B. Brass components in contact with water shall contain no more than 3 percent lead content
by dry weight.
C. (P-418) Lavatory (Sensor Control, Gooseneck Spout, ASME/ANSI A112.19.2M, Figure
16) straight back, approximately 500 by 450 mm (20 by 18 inches) and a 102mm (4-inch)
maximum apron, first quality vitreous china with punching for gooseneck spout. Set rim
864 mm (34 inches) above finished floor.
1. Faucet: Solid cast brass construction, chrome plated, gooseneck spout with outlet 102
to 127 mm (4 to 5 inches) above rim. Electronic sensor operated, 102 mm (4 inch)
center set mounting, wiring box 120/24 volt solenoid, solid brass hot-cold water
mixer adjusted from top deck with barrier free design control handle, and inline filter.
Provide laminar flow control device. Breaking the light beam shall activate the water
flow. Flow shall stop when user moves away from light beam. All connecting wiring
between transformer, solenoid valve and sensor shall be cut to length with no excess
hanging or wrapped up wiring allowed.
2. Drain: Cast or wrought brass with flat grid strainer with offset tailpiece, brass,
chrome plated.
3. Stops: Angle type. See paragraph 2.2.Stops
449
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
4. Trap: Cast copper alloy, 40 by 32 mm (1-1/2 by 1-1/4 inch) P-trap. Adjustable with
connected elbow and 17 gage tubing extension to wall. Exposed metal trap surface
and connection hardware shall be chrome plated with a smooth bright finish. Set trap
parallel to wall.
5. Provide cover for drain, stops and trap per A.D.A 4-19.4.
2.8 SINKS
A. Dimensions for sinks and laundry tubs are specified, length by width (distance from wall)
and depth.
B. (P-528) Sink (CRS, Single Compartment, Counter Top ASME/ANSI A112.19.2M,
Kitchen Sinks, Figure 5) self rimming, back faucet ledge, approximately 533 by 558 mm
(21 by 22 inches) with single compartment inside dimensions approximately 406 by 483
by 190 mm (16 by 19 by 7 ½ inches) deep. Shall be minimum of 1.3 mm thick (18 gauge)
CRS. Corners and edges shall be well rounded:
1. Faucet: Solid brass construction, deck mounted combination faucet with monel or
ceramic seats, removable replacement unit containing all parts subject to ware, swivel
gooseneck spout with approximately 200 mm (8-inche) reach with spout outlet 150
mm (6-inches above deck and 102 mm (4 inch) wrist blades with hose spray. Faucet
shall be polished chrome plated.
2. Drain: Drain plug with cup strainer, stainless steel.
3. Trap: Cast copper alloy 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) P-trap with cleanout plug. Provide wall
connection and escutcheon.
4. Provide cover for drain, stops and trap per A.D.A 4-19.4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Fixture Setting: Opening between fixture and floor and wall finish shall be sealed as
specified under Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.
B. Supports and Fastening: Secure all fixtures, equipment and trimmings to partitions, walls
and related finish surfaces. Exposed heads of bolts and nuts in finished rooms shall be
hexagonal, polished chrome plated brass with rounded tops.
C. Through Bolts: For free standing marble and metal stud partitions refer to Section 10 21
13, TOILET COMPARTMENTS.
D. Toggle Bolts: For hollow masonry units, finished or unfinished.
450
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
E. Expansion Bolts: For brick or concrete or other solid masonry. Shall be 6 mm (1/4-inch)
diameter bolts, and to extend at least 75 mm (3-inches) into masonry and be fitted with
loose tubing or sleeves extending into masonry. Wood plugs, fiber plugs, lead or other
soft metal shields are prohibited.
F. Power Set Fasteners: May be used for concrete walls, shall be 6 mm (1/4-inch) threaded
studs, and shall extend at least 35 mm (1-1/4 inches) into wall.
G. Tightly cover and protect fixtures and equipment against dirt, water and chemical or
mechanical injury.
H. Where water closet waste pipe has to be offset due to beam interference, provide correct
and additional piping necessary to eliminate relocation of water closet.
I. Do not use aerators on lavatories and sinks.
3.2 CLEANING
At completion of all work, fixtures, exposed materials and equipment shall be thoroughly
cleaned.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES- - -
451
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 23 05 11
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The requirements of this Section apply to all sections of Division 23.
B. Definitions:
1. Exposed: Piping, ductwork, and equipment exposed to view in finished rooms.
2. Option or optional: Contractor's choice of an alternate material or method.
3. RE: Resident Engineer
4. COTR: Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative.
1.2 RELATED WORK
H. GENERAL CONDITIONS.
I. Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
J. Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.
D. Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.
E. Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.
F. Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mechanical, electrical and associated systems shall be safe, reliable, efficient, durable,
easily and safely operable and maintainable, easily and safely accessible, and in
compliance with applicable codes as specified. The systems shall be comprised of high
quality institutional-class and industrial-class products of manufacturers that are
experienced specialists in the required product lines. All construction firms and personnel
shall be experienced and qualified specialists in industrial and institutional HVAC or
steam boiler plant construction, as applicable.
B. Flow Rate Tolerance for HVAC Equipment: Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING,
AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.
C. Equipment Vibration Tolerance:
1. Refer to Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT and 23 05 51, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
452
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
FOR BOILER PLANT. Equipment shall be factory-balanced to this tolerance and rebalanced on site, as necessary.
2. After HVAC air balance work is completed and permanent drive sheaves are in place,
perform field mechanical balancing and adjustments required to meet the specified
vibration tolerance.
D. Products Criteria:
1. Standard Products: Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least 3
years. The design, model and size of each item shall have been in satisfactory and
efficient operation on at least three installations for approximately three years.
However, digital electronics devices, software and systems such as controls,
instruments, computer work station, shall be the current generation of technology and
basic design that has a proven satisfactory service record of at least three years. See
other specification sections for any exceptions.
2. All items furnished shall be free from defects that would adversely affect the
performance, maintainability and appearance of individual components and overall
assembly.
3. Conform to codes and standards as required by the specifications. Conform to local
codes, if required by local authorities such as the natural gas supplier, if the local
codes are more stringent then those specified. Refer any conflicts to the Resident
Engineer (RE)/Contracting Officers Technical Representative (COTR).
4. Multiple Units: When two or more units of materials or equipment of the same type
or class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.
5. Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components
made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product.
6. Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall
be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast
integrally with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of
equipment.
7. Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.
E. Equipment Service Organizations:
453
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. HVAC: Products and systems shall be supported by service organizations that
maintain a complete inventory of repair parts and are located reasonably close to the
site.
F. HVAC Mechanical Systems Welding: Before any welding is performed, contractor shall
submit a certificate certifying that welders comply with the following requirements:
1. Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications".
2. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 series "Code for Pressure Piping".
3. Certify that each welder has passed American Welding Society (AWS) qualification
tests for the welding processes involved, and that certification is current.
G. Execution (Installation, Construction) Quality:
1. Apply and install all items in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
Refer conflicts between the manufacturer's instructions and the contract drawings and
specifications to the RE/COTR for resolution. Provide written hard copies or
computer files of manufacturer’s installation instructions to the RE/COTR at least
two weeks prior to commencing installation of any item. Installation of the item will
not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish
these recommendations is a cause for rejection of the material.
2. All items that require access, such as for operating, cleaning, servicing, maintenance,
and calibration, shall be easily and safely accessible by persons standing at floor
level, or standing on permanent platforms, without the use of portable ladders.
Examples of these items include, but are not limited to: all types of valves, filters and
strainers, transmitters, control devices. Prior to commencing installation work, refer
conflicts between this requirement and contract drawings to the RE/COTR for
resolution.
3. Provide complete layout drawings required by Paragraph, SUBMITTALS. Do not
commence construction work on any system until the layout drawings have been
approved.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES, and with requirements in the individual specification sections.
454
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Contractor shall make all necessary field measurements and investigations to assure that
the equipment and assemblies will meet contract requirements.
C. If equipment is submitted which differs in arrangement from that shown, provide
drawings that show the rearrangement of all associated systems. Approval will be given
only if all features of the equipment and associated systems, including accessibility, are
equivalent to that required by the contract.
D. Prior to submitting shop drawings for approval, contractor shall certify in writing that
manufacturers of all major items of equipment have each reviewed drawings and
specifications, and have jointly coordinated and properly integrated their equipment and
controls to provide a complete and efficient installation.
E. Upon request by Government, provide lists of previous installations for selected items of
equipment. Include contact persons who will serve as references, with telephone
numbers and e-mail addresses.
F. Submittals and shop drawings for interdependent items, containing applicable descriptive
information, shall be furnished together and complete in a group. Coordinate and
properly integrate materials and equipment in each group to provide a completely
compatible and efficient installation. Final review and approvals will be made only by
groups.
G. Ungrouped submittal items for boiler plants, which may be submitted individually,
include, but are not limited to:
1. Pipe, valves and fittings identified as to service application.
2. Steam traps with orifice sizes and pressure ratings.
3. Dielectric fittings and unions.
4. Heating and ventilating equipment.
5. Insulation, field-applied.
H. Samples: Samples will not be required, except for insulation or where materials offered
differ from specification requirements. Samples shall be accompanied by full description
of characteristics different from specification. The Government, at the Government’s
expense, will perform evaluation and testing if necessary. The Contractor may submit
samples of additional material at the Contractor's option; however, if additional samples
of materials are submitted later, pursuant to Government request, adjustment in contract
455
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
price and time will be made as provided under Article CHANGES of Section 00 72 00,
GENERAL CONDITIONS.
I. Layout Drawings:
1. Submit complete consolidated and coordinated layout drawings for all new systems,
and for existing systems that are in the same areas. Refer to GENERAL
CONDITIONS, Article, SUBCONTRACTS AND WORK COORDINATION.
2. The drawings shall include plan views, elevations and sections of all systems and
shall be on a scale of not less than 1:32 (3/8-inch equal to one foot). Clearly identify
and dimension the proposed locations of the principal items of equipment. The
drawings shall clearly show locations and adequate clearance for all equipment,
piping, valves, control panels and other items. Show the access means for all items
requiring access for operations and maintenance. Provide detailed layout drawings of
all piping and duct systems.
3. Do not install equipment foundations, equipment or piping until layout drawings have
been approved.
4. In addition, for HVAC systems, provide details of the following:
a. Mechanical equipment rooms.
b. Interstitial space.
c. Hangers, inserts, supports, and bracing.
d. Pipe sleeves.
e. Duct or equipment penetrations of floors, walls, ceilings, or roofs.
J. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Submit under the pertinent section rather than under
this section.
1. Submit belt drive with the driven equipment. Submit selection data for specific drives
when requested by the Resident Engineer.
2. Submit electric motor data and variable speed drive data with the driven equipment.
3. Equipment and materials identification.
4. Fire-stopping materials.
5. Hangers, inserts, supports and bracing. Provide load calculations for variable spring
and constant support hangers. For boiler plants, refer to Section 23 21 11, BOILER
PLANT PIPING SYSTEMS, for additional requirements.
456
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
6. Wall, floor, and ceiling plates.
K. HVAC Maintenance Data and Operating Instructions:
1. Maintenance and operating manuals in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS, Article, INSTRUCTIONS, for systems and equipment.
2. Provide a listing of recommended replacement parts for keeping in stock supply,
including sources of supply, for equipment. Include in the listing belts for equipment:
Belt manufacturer, model number, size and style, and distinguished whether of
multiple belt sets.
L. Provide copies of approved HVAC equipment submittals to the Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing Subcontractor.
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI):
430-99 ....................................Central Station Air-Handling Units
C. American National Standard Institute (ANSI):
B31.1-2004.............................Power Piping
D. Rubber Manufacturers Association (ANSI/RMA):
IP-20-2007 .............................Drives Using Classical V-Belts and Sheaves
IP-21-1991(1997) ...................Drives Using Double-V (Hexagonal) Belts
IP-22-2007 .............................Drives Using Narrow V-Belts and Sheaves
E. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA):
410-96 ....................................Recommended Safety Practices for Air Moving Devices
F. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC):
Section I-2007 ........................Power Boilers
Section IX-2007 .....................Welding and Brazing Qualifications
Code for Pressure Piping:
B31.1-2004.............................Power Piping, with Amendments
G. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A36/A36M-05 ........................Carbon Structural Steel
457
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
A575-96(2002) .......................Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades R (2002)
E84-07 ....................................Standard Test Method for Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
E119-07 ..................................Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building
Construction and Materials
H. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc:
SP-58-2002 ............................Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design and
Manufacture
SP 69-2003 .............................Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and Application
SP 127-2001 ...........................Bracing for Piping Systems, Seismic – Wind – Dynamic,
Design, Selection, Application
J. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
MG-1-2006 ............................Motors and Generators
K. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
31-06 ......................................Standard for Installation of Oil-Burning Equipment
54-06 ......................................National Fuel Gas Code
70-08 ......................................National Electrical Code
85-07 ......................................Boiler and Combustion Systems Hazard Code
90A-02 ...................................Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
101-06 ....................................Life Safety Code
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protection of Equipment:
1. Equipment and material placed on the job site shall remain in the custody of the
Contractor until phased acceptance, whether or not the Government has reimbursed
the Contractor for the equipment and material. The Contractor is solely responsible
for the protection of such equipment and material against any damage.
2. Place damaged equipment in first class, new operating condition; or, replace same as
determined and directed by the RE/COTR. Such repair or replacement shall be at no
additional cost to the Government.
3. Protect interiors of new equipment and piping systems against entry of foreign matter.
Clean both inside and outside before painting or placing equipment in operation.
458
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
4. Existing equipment and piping being worked on by the Contractor shall be under the
custody and responsibility of the Contractor and shall be protected as required for
new work.
B. Cleanliness of Piping and Equipment Systems:
1. Exercise care in storage and handling of equipment and piping material to be
incorporated in the work. Remove debris arising from cutting, threading and welding
of piping.
2. Piping systems shall be flushed, blown or pigged as necessary to deliver clean
systems.
3. Contractor shall be fully responsible for all costs, damage, and delay arising from
failure to provide clean systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FACTORY-ASSEMBLED PRODUCTS
A. Provide maximum standardization of components to reduce spare part requirements.
B. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies that include components made by others shall
assume complete responsibility for final assembled unit.
1. All components of an assembled unit need not be products of same manufacturer.
2. Constituent parts that are alike shall be products of a single manufacturer.
3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for
intended service.
4. Contractor shall guarantee performance of assemblies of components, and shall repair
or replace elements of the assemblies as required to deliver specified performance of
the complete assembly.
C. Components of equipment shall bear manufacturer's name and trademark, model number,
serial number and performance data on a name plate securely affixed in a conspicuous
place, or cast integral with, stamped or otherwise permanently marked upon the
components of the equipment.
D. Major items of equipment, which serve the same function, must be the same make and
model. Exceptions will be permitted if performance requirements cannot be met.
459
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2.2 COMPATIBILITY OF RELATED EQUIPMENT
Equipment and materials installed shall be compatible in all respects with other items
being furnished and with existing items so that the result will be a complete and fully
operational plant that conforms to contract requirements.
2.3 LIFTING ATTACHMENTS
Provide equipment with suitable lifting attachments to enable equipment to be lifted in its
normal position. Lifting attachments shall withstand any handling conditions that might
be encountered, without bending or distortion of shape, such as rapid lowering and
braking of load.
2.4 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS IDENTIFICATION
A. Use symbols, nomenclature and equipment numbers specified, shown on the drawings
and shown in the maintenance manuals. Identification for piping is specified in Section
09 91 00, PAINTING.
B. Interior (Indoor) Equipment: Engraved nameplates, with letters not less than 48 mm
(3/16-inch) high of brass with black-filled letters, or rigid black plastic with white letters
specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING permanently fastened to the equipment.
Identify unit components such as coils, filters, fans, etc.
C. Control Items: Label all temperature and humidity sensors, controllers and control
dampers. Identify and label each item as they appear on the control diagrams.
D. Valve Tags and Lists:
1. HVAC and Boiler Plant: Provide for all valves other than for equipment in Section 23
82 00, CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS.
2. Valve tags: Engraved black filled numbers and letters not less than 13 mm (1/2-inch)
high for number designation, and not less than 6.4 mm(1/4-inch) for service
designation on 19 gage 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) round brass disc, attached with brass
"S" hook or brass chain.
3. Valve lists: Typed or printed plastic coated card(s), sized 216 mm(8-1/2 inches) by
280 mm (11 inches) showing tag number, valve function and area of control, for each
service or system. Punch sheets for a 3-ring notebook.
460
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
4. Provide detailed plan for each floor of the building indicating the location and valve
number for each valve. Identify location of each valve with a color coded thumb tack
in ceiling.
2.5 FIRESTOPPING
Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING specifies an effective barrier against the spread of
fire, smoke and gases where penetrations occur for piping and ductwork. Refer to Section
23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION, for firestop pipe
and duct insulation.
2.6 GALVANIZED REPAIR COMPOUND
Mil. Spec. DOD-P-21035B, paint form.
2.7 HVAC PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTS
A. Vibration Isolators: Refer to Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.
B. Pipe Hangers and Supports for Boiler Plant: Refer to Section 23 21 11, BOILER PLANT
PIPING SYSTEMS.
C. Pipe Supports: Comply with MSS SP-58. Type Numbers specified refer to this standard.
For selection and application comply with MSS SP-69. Refer to Section 05 50 00,
METAL FABRICATIONS, for miscellaneous metal support materials and prime coat
painting requirements.
D. Attachment to Concrete Building Construction:
1. Concrete insert: MSS SP-58, Type 18.
2. Self-drilling expansion shields and machine bolt expansion anchors: Permitted in
concrete not less than 102 mm (four inches) thick when approved by the Resident
Engineer for each job condition.
3. Power-driven fasteners: Permitted in existing concrete or masonry not less than 102
mm (four inches) thick when approved by the Resident Engineer for each job
condition.
E. Attachment to Steel Building Construction:
1. Welded attachment: MSS SP-58, Type 22.
2. Beam clamps: MSS SP-58, Types 20, 21, 28 or 29. Type 23 C-clamp may be used for
individual copper tubing up to 23mm (7/8-inch) outside diameter.
461
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
F. Attachment to Metal Pan or Deck: As required for materials specified in Section 05 31
00, STEEL DECKING .
G. Hanger Rods: Hot-rolled steel, ASTM A36 or A575 for allowable load listed in MSS
SP-58. For piping, provide adjustment means for controlling level or slope. Types 13 or
15 turn-buckles shall provide 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) minimum of adjustment and
incorporate locknuts. All-thread rods are acceptable.
H. Hangers Supporting Multiple Pipes (Trapeze Hangers): Galvanized, cold formed, lipped
steel channel horizontal member, not less than 41 mm by 41 mm (1-5/8 inches by 1-5/8
inches), 2.7 mm (No. 12 gage), designed to accept special spring held, hardened steel
nuts. Not permitted for steam supply and condensate piping.
1. Allowable hanger load: Manufacturers rating less 91kg (200 pounds).
2. Guide individual pipes on the horizontal member of every other trapeze hanger with 6
mm (1/4-inch) U-bolt fabricated from steel rod. Provide Type 40 insulation shield,
secured by two 13mm (1/2-inch) galvanized steel bands, or preinsulated calcium
silicate shield for insulated piping at each hanger.
I. Supports for Piping Systems:
1. Select hangers sized to encircle insulation on insulated piping. Refer to Section 23 07
11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION for insulation
thickness. To protect insulation, provide Type 39 saddles for roller type supports or
preinsulated calcium silicate shields. Provide Type 40 insulation shield or
preinsulated calcium silicate shield at all other types of supports and hangers
including those for preinsulated piping.
2. Piping Systems except High and Medium Pressure Steam (MSS SP-58):
a. Standard clevis hanger: Type 1; provide locknut.
b. Riser clamps: Type 8.
c. Wall brackets: Types 31, 32 or 33.
d. Roller supports: Type 41, 43, 44 and 46.
e. Saddle support: Type 36, 37 or 38.
f. Turnbuckle: Types 13 or 15. Preinsulate.
g. U-bolt clamp: Type 24.
h. Copper Tube:
462
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1) Hangers, clamps and other support material in contact with tubing shall be
painted with copper colored epoxy paint, plastic coated or taped with non
adhesive isolation tape to prevent electrolysis.
2) For vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps.
3) For supporting tube to strut: Provide epoxy painted pipe straps for copper tube
or plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps.
4) Insulated Lines: Provide pre-insulated calcium silicate shields sized for copper
tube.
i. Supports for plastic or glass piping: As recommended by the pipe manufacturer
with black rubber tape extending one inch beyond steel support or clamp.
J. Pre-insulated Calcium Silicate Shields:
1. Provide 360 degree water resistant high density 965 kPa (140 psi) compressive
strength calcium silicate shields encased in galvanized metal.
2. Pre-insulated calcium silicate shields to be installed at the point of support during
erection.
3. Shield thickness shall match the pipe insulation.
4. The type of shield is selected by the temperature of the pipe, the load it
must
carry, and the type of support it will be used with.
a. Shields for supporting chilled or cold water shall have insulation that extends a
minimum of 1 inch past the sheet metal. Provide for an adequate vapor barrier in
chilled lines.
b. The pre-insulated calcium silicate shield shall support the maximum allowable
water filled span as indicated in MSS-SP 69. To support the load, the shields may
have one or more of the following features: structural inserts 4138 kPa (600 psi)
compressive strength, an extra bottom metal shield, or formed structural steel
(ASTM A36) wear plates welded to the bottom sheet metal jacket.
6. Shields may be used on steel clevis hanger type supports, roller supports or flat
surfaces.
2.8 PIPE PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves during construction for other than blocked out floor openings for risers in
mechanical bays.
463
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. To prevent accidental liquid spills from passing to a lower level, provide the following:
1. For sleeves: Extend sleeve 25 mm (one inch) above finished floor and provide sealant
for watertight joint.
2. For blocked out floor openings: Provide 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) angle set in silicone
adhesive around opening.
3. For drilled penetrations: Provide 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) angle ring or square set in
silicone adhesive around penetration.
C. Penetrations are not allowed through beams or ribs, but may be installed in concrete
beam flanges. Any deviation from these requirements must receive prior approval of
Resident Engineer.
D. Sheet Metal, Plastic, or Moisture-resistant Fiber Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing
through floors, interior walls, and partitions, unless brass or steel pipe sleeves are
specifically called for below.
E. Cast Iron or Zinc Coated Pipe Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through exterior walls
below grade. Make space between sleeve and pipe watertight with a modular or link
rubber seal. Seal shall be applied at both ends of sleeve.
F. Galvanized Steel or an alternate Black Iron Pipe with asphalt coating Sleeves: Provide for
pipe passing through concrete beam flanges, except where brass pipe sleeves are called
for. Provide sleeve for pipe passing through floor of mechanical rooms, laundry work
rooms, and animal rooms above basement. Except in mechanical rooms, connect sleeve
with floor plate.
G. Brass Pipe Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through quarry tile, terrazzo or ceramic tile
floors. Connect sleeve with floor plate.
H. Sleeves are not required for wall hydrants for fire department connections or in drywall
construction.
I. Sleeve Clearance: Sleeve through floors, walls, partitions, and beam flanges shall be one
inch greater in diameter than external diameter of pipe. Sleeve for pipe with insulation
shall be large enough to accommodate the insulation. Interior openings shall be caulked
tight with fire stopping material and sealant to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and
gases.
J. Sealant and Adhesives: Shall be as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.
464
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2.9 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
A. Furnish, and turn over to the RE/COTR, special tools not readily available commercially,
that are required for disassembly or adjustment of equipment and machinery furnished.
B. Grease Guns with Attachments for Applicable Fittings: One for each type of grease
required for each motor or other equipment.
C. Tool Containers: Hardwood or metal, permanently identified for in tended service and
mounted, or located, where directed by the Resident Engineer.
D. Lubricants: A minimum of 0.95 L (one quart) of oil, and 0.45 kg (one pound) of grease,
of equipment manufacturer's recommended grade and type, in unopened containers and
properly identified as to use for each different application.
2.10 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES
A. Material and Type: Chrome plated brass or chrome plated steel, one piece or split type
with concealed hinge, with set screw for fastening to pipe, or sleeve. Use plates that fit
tight around pipes, cover openings around pipes and cover the entire pipe sleeve
projection.
B. Thickness: Not less than 2.4 mm (3/32-inch) for floor plates. For wall and ceiling plates,
not less than 0.64 mm (0.025-inch) for up to 80 mm (3-inch pipe), 0.89 mm (0.035-inch)
for larger pipe.
C. Locations: Use where pipe penetrates floors, walls and ceilings in exposed locations, in
finished areas only. Use also where insulation ends on exposed water supply pipe drop
from overhead. Provide a watertight joint in spaces where brass or steel pipe sleeves are
specified.
2.11 ASBESTOS
Materials containing asbestos are not permitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ARRANGEMENT AND INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING
A. Coordinate location of piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, ductwork and equipment. Locate
piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, ductwork and equipment clear of windows, doors,
openings, light outlets, and other services and utilities. Prepare equipment layout
drawings to coordinate proper location and personnel access of all facilities. Submit the
465
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
drawings for review as required by Part 1. Follow manufacturer's published
recommendations for installation methods not otherwise specified.
B. Operating Personnel Access and Observation Provisions: Select and arrange all
equipment and systems to provide clear view and easy access, without use of portable
ladders, for maintenance and operation of all devices including, but not limited to: all
equipment items, valves, filters, strainers, transmitters, sensors, control devices. All gages
and indicators shall be clearly visible by personnel standing on the floor or on permanent
platforms. Do not reduce or change maintenance and operating space and access
provisions that are shown on the drawings.
C. Equipment and Piping Support: Coordinate structural systems necessary for pipe and
equipment support with pipe and equipment locations to permit proper installation.
D. Location of pipe sleeves, trenches and chases shall be accurately coordinated with
equipment and piping locations.
E. Cutting Holes:
1. Cut holes through concrete and masonry by rotary core drill. Pneumatic hammer,
impact electric, and hand or manual hammer type drill will not be allowed, except as
permitted by RE/COTR where working area space is limited.
2. Locate holes to avoid interference with structural members such as beams or grade
beams. Holes shall be laid out in advance and drilling done only after approval by
RE/COTR. If the Contractor considers it necessary to drill through structural
members, this matter shall be referred to RE/COTR for approval.
3. Do not penetrate membrane waterproofing.
F. Minor Piping: Generally, small diameter pipe runs from drips and drains, water cooling,
and other service are not shown but must be provided.
G. Protection and Cleaning:
1. Equipment and materials shall be carefully handled, properly stored, and adequately
protected to prevent damage before and during installation, in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the Resident Engineer.
Damaged or defective items in the opinion of the Resident Engineer, shall be
replaced.
466
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Protect all finished parts of equipment, such as shafts and bearings where accessible,
from rust prior to operation by means of protective grease coating and wrapping.
Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. Tightly cover and protect
fixtures and equipment against dirt, water chemical, or mechanical injury. At
completion of all work thoroughly clean fixtures, exposed materials and equipment.
H. Concrete and Grout: Use concrete and shrink compensating grout 25 MPa (3000 psi)
minimum, specified in Section 03 30 00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
I. Work in Existing Building:
1. Perform as specified in Article, OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS, Article,
ALTERATIONS, and Article, RESTORATION of the Section 01 00 00, GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS for relocation of existing equipment, alterations and restoration of
existing building(s).
2. As specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article,
OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS, make alterations to existing service piping
at times that will least interfere with normal operation of the facility.
3. Cut required openings through existing masonry and reinforced concrete using
diamond core drills. Use of pneumatic hammer type drills, impact type electric drills,
and hand or manual hammer type drills, will be permitted only with approval of the
Resident Engineer. Locate openings that will least effect structural slabs, columns,
ribs or beams. Refer to the Resident Engineer for determination of proper design for
openings through structural sections and opening layouts approval, prior to cutting or
drilling into structure. After Resident Engineer's approval, carefully cut opening
through construction no larger than absolutely necessary for the required installation.
J. Inaccessible Equipment:
1. Where the Government determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not
conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, equipment shall be removed
and reinstalled or remedial action performed as directed at no additional cost to the
Government.
2. The term "conveniently accessible" is defined as capable of being reached without the
use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as
467
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
motors, fans, pumps, belt guards, transformers, high voltage lines, piping, and
ductwork.
3.2 TEMPORARY PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. Continuity of operation of existing facilities will generally require temporary installation
or relocation of equipment and piping.
B. The Contractor shall provide all required facilities in accordance with the requirements of
phased construction and maintenance of service. All piping and equipment shall be
properly supported, sloped to drain, operate without excessive stress, and shall be
insulated where injury can occur to personnel by contact with operating facilities. The
requirements of Para. 3.1 apply.
C. Temporary facilities and piping shall be completely removed and any openings in
structures sealed. Provide necessary blind flanges and caps to seal open piping remaining
in service.
3.3 RIGGING
A. Design is based on application of available equipment. Openings in building structures
are planned to accommodate design scheme.
B. Alternative methods of equipment delivery may be offered by Contractor and will be
considered by Government under specified restrictions of phasing and maintenance of
service as well as structural integrity of the building.
C. Close all openings in the building when not required for rigging operations to maintain
proper environment in the facility for Government operation and maintenance of service.
D. Contractor shall provide all facilities required to deliver specified equipment and place on
foundations. Attachments to structures for rigging purposes and support of equipment on
structures shall be Contractor's full responsibility. Upon request, the Government will
check structure adequacy and advise Contractor of recommended restrictions.
E. Contractor shall check all clearances, weight limitations and shall offer a rigging plan
designed by a Registered Professional Engineer. All modifications to structures,
including reinforcement thereof, shall be at Contractor's cost, time and responsibility.
F. Rigging plan and methods shall be referred to RE/COTR for evaluation prior to actual
work.
G. Restore building to original condition upon completion of rigging work.
468
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3.4 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Where hanger spacing does not correspond with joist or rib spacing, use structural steel
channels secured directly to joist and rib structure that will correspond to the required
hanger spacing, and then suspend the equipment and piping from the channels. Drill or
burn holes in structural steel only with the prior approval of the RE/COTR.
B. Use of chain, wire or strap hangers; wood for blocking, stays and bracing; or, hangers
suspended from piping above will not be permitted. Replace or thoroughly clean rusty
products and paint with zinc primer.
C. Use hanger rods that are straight and vertical. Turnbuckles for vertical adjustments may
be omitted where limited space prevents use. Provide a minimum of 15 mm (1/2-inch)
clearance between pipe or piping covering and adjacent work.
D. HVAC Horizontal Pipe Support Spacing: Refer to MSS SP-69. Provide additional
supports at valves, strainers, in-line pumps and other heavy components. Provide a
support within one foot of each elbow.
E. HVAC Vertical Pipe Supports:
1. Up to 150 mm (6-inch pipe), 9 m (30 feet) long, bolt riser clamps to the pipe below
couplings, or welded to the pipe and rests supports securely on the building structure.
2. Vertical pipe larger than the foregoing, support on base elbows or tees, or substantial
pipe legs extending to the building structure.
F. Overhead Supports:
1. The basic structural system of the building is designed to sustain the loads imposed
by equipment and piping to be supported overhead.
2. Provide steel structural members, in addition to those shown, of adequate capability
to support the imposed loads, located in accordance with the final approved layout of
equipment and piping.
3. Tubing and capillary systems shall be supported in channel troughs.
G. Floor Supports:
1. Provide concrete bases, concrete anchor blocks and pedestals, and structural steel
systems for support of equipment and piping. Anchor and dowel concrete bases and
structural systems to resist forces under operating and seismic conditions (if
applicable) without excessive displacement or structural failure.
469
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Do not locate or install bases and supports until equipment mounted thereon has been
approved. Size bases to match equipment mounted thereon plus 50 mm (2 inch)
excess on all edges. Boiler foundations shall have horizontal dimensions that exceed
boiler base frame dimensions by at least 150 mm (6 inches) on all sides. Refer to
structural drawings. Bases shall be neatly finished and smoothed, shall have
chamfered edges at the top, and shall be suitable for painting.
3. All equipment shall be shimmed, leveled, firmly anchored, and grouted with epoxy
grout. Anchor bolts shall be placed in sleeves, anchored to the bases. Fill the annular
space between sleeves and bolts with a granular material to permit alignment and
realignment.
5. For seismic anchoring, refer to Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT
REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS.
3.5 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
A. Rigging access, other than indicated on the drawings, shall be provided by the Contractor
after approval for structural integrity by the RE/COTR. Such access shall be provided
without additional cost or time to the Government. Where work is in an operating plant,
provide approved protection from dust and debris at all times for the safety of plant
personnel and maintenance of plant operation and environment of the plant.
B. Completely remove all piping, wiring, conduit, and other devices associated with the
equipment not to be re-used in the new work. This includes all pipe, valves, fittings,
insulation, and all hangers including the top connection and any fastenings to building
structural systems. Seal all openings, after removal of equipment, pipes, ducts, and other
penetrations in roof, walls, floors, in an approved manner and in accordance with plans
and specifications where specifically covered. Structural integrity of the building system
shall be maintained. Reference shall also be made to the drawings and specifications of
the other disciplines in the project for additional facilities to be demolished or handled.
C. All valves including gate, globe, ball, butterfly and check, all pressure gages and
thermometers with wells shall remain Government property and shall be removed and
delivered to RE/COTR and stored as directed. The Contractor shall remove all other
material and equipment, devices and demolition debris under these plans and
470
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
specifications. Such material shall be removed from Government property expeditiously
and shall not be allowed to accumulate.
3.6 CLEANING AND PAINTING
A. Prior to final inspection and acceptance of the plant and facilities for beneficial use by the
Government, the plant facilities, equipment and systems shall be thoroughly cleaned and
painted. Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.
B. In addition, the following special conditions apply:
3. Cleaning shall be thorough. Use solvents, cleaning materials and methods
recommended by the manufacturers for the specific tasks. Remove all rust prior to
painting and from surfaces to remain unpainted. Repair scratches, scuffs, and
abrasions prior to applying prime and finish coats.
4. Material And Equipment Not To Be Painted Includes:
a. Motors, controllers, control switches, and safety switches.
b. Control and interlock devices.
c. Regulators.
d. Pressure reducing valves.
e. Control valves and thermostatic elements.
f. Lubrication devices and grease fittings.
g. Copper, brass, aluminum, stainless steel and bronze surfaces.
h. Valve stems and rotating shafts.
i. Pressure gauges and thermometers.
j. Glass.
k. Name plates.
3. Control and instrument panels shall be cleaned, damaged surfaces repaired, and shall
be touched-up with matching paint obtained from panel manufacturer.
4. Pumps, motors, steel and cast iron bases, and coupling guards shall be cleaned, and
shall be touched-up with the same color as utilized by the pump manufacturer
5. Boilers, Burners, Fuel Trains and Accessories: Retain manufacturer's factory finish.
Touch up or recoat as necessary to provide smooth, even-colored and even-textured
finish.
6. Temporary Facilities: Apply paint to surfaces that do not have existing finish coats.
471
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
7. Paint shall withstand the following temperatures without peeling or discoloration:
a. Boiler stack and breeching -- 65 degrees C (150 degrees F) on insulation jacket
surface and 315 degrees C (600 degrees F) on metal surface of stacks and
breeching.
b. Condensate and feedwater -- 38 degrees C (100 degrees F) on insulation jacket
surface and 120 degrees C (250 degrees F) on metal pipe surface.
c. Steam -- 52 degrees C (125 degrees F) on insulation jacket surface and 190
degrees C (375 degrees F) on metal pipe surface.
8. Final result shall be smooth, even-colored, even-textured factory finish on all items.
Completely repaint the entire piece of equipment if necessary to achieve this.
3.7 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS
A. Provide laminated plastic signs, with engraved lettering not less than 5 mm (3/16-inch)
high, designating functions, for all equipment, switches, motor controllers, relays, meters,
control devices, including automatic control valves. Nomenclature and identification
symbols shall correspond to that used in maintenance manual, and in diagrams specified
elsewhere. Attach by chain, adhesive, or screws.
B. Factory Built Equipment: Metal plate, securely attached, with name and address of
manufacturer, serial number, model number, size, performance.
C. Pipe Identification: Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.
3.8 LUBRICATION
A. Lubricate all devices requiring lubrication prior to initial operation. Field-check all
devices for proper lubrication.
B. Equip all devices with required lubrication fittings or devices. Provide a minimum of one
liter (one quart) of oil and 0.5 kg (one pound) of grease of manufacturer's recommended
grade and type for each different application; also provide 12 grease sticks for lubricated
plug valves. Deliver all materials to RE/COTR in unopened containers that are properly
identified as to application.
C. Provide a separate grease gun with attachments for applicable fittings for each type of
grease applied.
D. All lubrication points shall be accessible without disassembling equipment, except to
remove access plates.
472
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3.10 STARTUP AND TEMPORARY OPERATION
Start up equipment as described in equipment specifications. Verify that vibration is
within specified tolerance prior to extended operation. Temporary use of equipment is
specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, TEMPORARY
USE OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT.
3.11 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. Prior to the final inspection, perform required tests as specified in Section 01 00 00,
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, TESTS, and Section 23 08 11,
DEMONSTRATIONS AND TESTS FOR BOILER PLANT, and submit the test reports
and records to the RE/COTR.
B. Should evidence of malfunction in any tested system, or piece of equipment or
component part thereof, occur during or as a result of tests, make proper corrections,
repairs or replacements, and repeat tests at no additional cost to the Government.
C. When completion of certain work or system occurs at a time when final control settings
and adjustments cannot be properly made to make performance tests, then make
performance tests for heating systems and for cooling systems respectively during first
actual seasonal use of respective systems following completion of work.
3.12 INSTRUCTIONS TO VA PERSONNEL
Provide in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS, and Section 23 08 11, DEMONSTRATIONS AND TESTS FOR
BOILER PLANT.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 23 05 11 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC & STEAM
GEN- - -
473
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 23 05 41
NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
Noise criteria, vibration tolerance and vibration isolation for HVAC and plumbing work.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM
GENERATION: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to
more than one section of Division 23.
B. Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS: requirements for flexible duct
connectors, sound attenuators and sound absorbing duct lining.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to article, QUALITY ASSURANCE in specification Section 23 05 11, COMMON
WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.
B. Noise Criteria:
1. Noise levels in all 8 octave bands due to equipment and duct systems shall not exceed
following NC levels:
TYPE OF ROOM
NC LEVEL
Bathrooms and Toilet Rooms
40
Corridors (Nurse Stations)
40
Corridors(Public)
40
Dining Rooms, Food Services/ Serving
35
Locker Rooms
50
Offices, small private (2 or fewer occupants)
35
Recreation Rooms
50
X-Ray & general Work Rooms
40
2. For equipment which has no sound power ratings scheduled on the plans, the
contractor shall select equipment such that the fore-going noise criteria, local
ordinance noise levels, and OSHA requirements are not exceeded. Selection
474
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
procedure shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, Chapter 7,
Sound and Vibration.
3. An allowance, not to exceed 5db, may be added to the measured value to compensate
for the variation of the room attenuating effect between room test condition prior to
occupancy and design condition after occupancy which may include the addition of
sound absorbing material, such as, furniture. This allowance may not be taken after
occupancy. The room attenuating effect is defined as the difference between sound
power level emitted to room and sound pressure level in room.
4. In absence of specified measurement requirements, measure equipment noise levels
three feet from equipment and at an elevation of maximum noise generation.
C. Seismic Restraint Requirements:
1. Equipment:
a. All mechanical equipment not supported with isolators external to the unit shall
be securely anchored to the structure. Such mechanical equipment shall be
properly supported to resist a horizontal force of 20 percent of the weight of the
equipment furnished.
b. All mechanical equipment mounted on vibration isolators shall be provided with
seismic restraints capable of resisting a horizontal force of 50 percent of the
weight of the equipment furnished.
2. Piping: Refer to specification Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.
3. Ductwork: Refer to specification Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS.
D. Allowable Vibration Tolerances for Rotating, Non-reciprocating Equipment: Not to
exceed a self-excited vibration maximum velocity of 5 mm per second (0.20 inch per
second) RMS, filter in, when measured with a vibration meter on bearing caps of
machine in vertical, horizontal and axial directions or measured at equipment mounting
feet if bearings are concealed. Measurements for internally isolated fans and motors may
be made at the mounting feet.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with specification Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS,
PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.
475
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Vibration isolators:
a. Floor mountings
b. Hangers
c. Snubbers
d. Thrust restraints
2. Bases.
3. Seismic restraint provisions and bolting.
4. Acoustical enclosures.
C. Isolator manufacturer shall furnish with submittal load calculations for selection of
isolators, including supplemental bases, based on lowest operating speed of equipment
supported.
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
(ASHRAE):
2005........................................Fundamentals Handbook, Chapter 7, Sound and Vibration
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A123/A123M-02 ....................Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
A307-04 .................................Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,
60,000 PSI Tensile Strength
D2240-05 ...............................Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer
Hardness
D. Manufacturers Standardization (MSS):
SP-58-02 ................................Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design and
Manufacture
E. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
29 CFR 1910.95 .....................Occupational Noise Exposure
476
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Type of isolator, base, and minimum static deflection shall be as required for each
specific equipment application as recommended by isolator or equipment manufacturer
but subject to minimum requirements indicated herein and in the schedule on the
drawings.
B. Elastometric Isolators shall comply with ASTM D2240 and be oil resistant neoprene with
a maximum stiffness of 60 durometer and have a straight-line deflection curve.
C. Uniform Loading: Select and locate isolators to produce uniform loading and deflection
even when equipment weight is not evenly distributed.
E. Color code isolators by type and size for easy identification of capacity.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Vibration Isolation:
1. No metal-to-metal contact will be permitted between fixed and floating parts.
2. Connections to Equipment: Allow for deflections equal to or greater than equipment
deflections. Electrical, drain, piping connections, and other items made to rotating or
reciprocating equipment (pumps, compressors, etc.) which rests on vibration
isolators, shall be isolated from building structure for first three hangers or supports.
3. Common Foundation: Mount each electric motor on same foundation as driven
machine. Hold driving motor and driven machine in positive rigid alignment with
provision for adjusting motor alignment and belt tension. Bases shall be level
throughout length and width. Provide shims to facilitate pipe connections, leveling,
and bolting.
4. Provide heat shields where elastomers are subject to temperatures over 38 degrees C
(l00 degrees F).
5. Extend bases for pipe elbow supports at discharge and suction connections at pumps.
Pipe elbow supports shall not short circuit pump vibration to structure.
6. Non-rotating equipment such as heat exchangers and convertors shall be mounted on
isolation units having the same static deflection as the isolation hangers or support of
the pipe connected to the equipment.
477
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Inspection and Adjustments: Check for vibration and noise transmission through
connections, piping, ductwork, foundations, and walls. Adjust, repair, or replace isolators
as required to reduce vibration and noise transmissions to specified levels.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust vibration isolators after piping systems are filled and equipment is at operating
weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating
height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of
contact during normal operation.
C. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4inch (6-mm)
movement during start and stop.
D. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
E. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's recommendations.
F. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of
operation.
G. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's recommendations to resist
seismic forces.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 23 05 41 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT - -
478
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 23 07 11
HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Field applied insulation for thermal efficiency and condensation control for
1. HVAC piping, ductwork and equipment.
2. Plumbing piping and equipment.
B. Definitions
1. ASJ: All service jacket, white finish facing or jacket.
2. Air conditioned space: Space having air temperature and/or humidity controlled by
mechanical equipment.
3. Cold: Equipment, ductwork or piping handling media at design temperature of 16
degrees C (60 degrees F) or below.
4. Concealed: Ductwork and piping above ceilings and in chases.
5. Exposed: Piping, ductwork, and equipment exposed to view in finished areas
including mechanical, Boiler Plant and electrical equipment rooms or exposed to
outdoor weather. Attics and crawl spaces where air handling units are located are
considered to be mechanical rooms. Shafts, chases, pipe basements are not considered
finished areas.
6. FSK: Foil-scrim-kraft facing.
7. Hot: HVAC Ductwork handling air at design temperature above 16 degrees C (60
degrees F);HVAC and plumbing equipment or piping handling media above 41
degrees C (105 degrees F); and piping media and equipment 32 to 230 degrees C(90
to 450 degrees F)
8. Density: kg/m3 - kilograms per cubic meter (Pcf - pounds per cubic foot).
9. Runouts: Branch pipe connections up to 25-mm (one-inch) nominal size to fan coil
units or reheat coils for terminal units.
10. Thermal conductance: Heat flow rate through materials.
a. Flat surface: Watt per square meter (BTU per hour per square foot).
b. Pipe or Cylinder: Watt per square meter (BTU per hour per linear foot).
479
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
11. Thermal Conductivity (k): Watt per meter, per degree C (BTU per inch thickness, per
hour, per square foot, per degree F temperature difference).
12. LPS: Low pressure steam (103 kPa [15 psig] and below).
13. LPR: Low pressure steam condensate gravity return.
14. HWH: Hot water heating supply.
15. HWHR: Hot water heating return.
16. CW: Cold water.
17. HW: Hot water.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02 82 11, TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT: Insulation containing
asbestos material.
B. Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING: Mineral fiber and bond breaker behind sealant.
C. Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM
GENERATION: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to
more than one section of Division 23.
D. Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM
GENERATION: General requirements pertaining to mechanical Boiler Plant work.
E. Section 23 21 13, HYDRONIC PIPING and Section 23 22 13, STEAM AND
CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING: Piping and equipment.
F. Section 23 21 13, HYDRONIC PIPING: Chilled water piping.
G. Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS: Ductwork, plenum and fittings.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to article QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK
RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.
B. Criteria:
1. Comply with NFPA 90A, particularly paragraphs 4.3.3.1 through 4.3.3.6, 4.3.10.2.6,
and 5.4.6.4, parts of which are quoted as follows:
4.3.3.1 Pipe insulation and coverings, duct coverings, duct linings, vapor retarder
facings, adhesives, fasteners, tapes, and supplementary materials added to air
ducts, plenums, panels, and duct silencers used in duct systems, unless otherwise
provided for in 4.3.3.1.2 or 4.3.3.1.3, shall have, in the form in which they are
used, a maximum flame spread index of 25 without evidence of continued
progressive combustion and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when
480
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
tested in accordance with NFPA 255, Standard Method of Test of Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
4.3.3.1.1 Where these products are to be applied with adhesives, they shall be
tested with such adhesives applied, or the adhesives used shall have a maximum
flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when in
the final dry state. (See 4.2.4.2.)
4.3.3.1.2 The flame spread and smoke developed index requirements of 4.3.3.1.1
shall not apply to air duct weatherproof coverings where they are located entirely
outside of a building, do not penetrate a wall or roof, and do not create an
exposure hazard.
4.3.3.1.3 Smoke detectors required by 6.4.4 shall not be required to meet flame
spread index or smoke developed index requirements.
4.3.3.2 Closure systems for use with rigid and flexible air ducts tested in
accordance with UL 181, Standard for Safety Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air
Connectors, shall have been tested, listed, and used in accordance with the
conditions of their listings, in accordance with one of the following:
(1)
UL 181A, Standard for Safety Closure Systems for Use with Rigid Air
Ducts and Air Connectors
(2)
UL 181B, Standard for Safety Closure Systems for Use with Flexible Air
Ducts and Air Connectors
4.3.3.3 Air duct, panel, and plenum coverings and linings, and pipe insulation and
coverings shall not flame, glow, smolder, or smoke when tested in accordance
with a similar test for pipe covering, ASTM C 411, Standard Test Method for
Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature Thermal Insulation, at the
temperature to which they are exposed in service.
4.3.3.3.1 In no case shall the test temperature be below 121°C (250°F).
4.3.3.4 Air duct coverings shall not extend through walls or floors that are
required to be fire stopped or required to have a fire resistance rating, unless such
coverings meet the requirements of 5.4.6.4.
4.3.3.5* Air duct linings shall be interrupted at fire dampers to prevent
interference with the operation of devices.
4.3.3.6 Air duct coverings shall not be installed so as to conceal or prevent the use
of any service opening.
4.3.10.2.6 Materials exposed to the airflow shall be noncombustible or limited
combustible and have a maximum smoke developed index of 50 or comply with
the following.
4.3.10.2.6.1 Electrical wires and cables and optical fiber cables shall be listed as
noncombustible or limited combustible and have a maximum smoke developed
index of 50 or shall be listed as having a maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or
less, an average optical density of 0.15 or less, and a maximum flame spread
distance of 1.5 m (5 ft) or less when tested in accordance with NFPA 262,
481
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for
Use in Air-Handling Spaces.
4.3.10.2.6.2 Pneumatic tubing for control systems shall be listed as having a
maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average optical density of 0.15 or
less, and a maximum flame spread distance of 1.5 m (5 ft) or less when tested in
accordance with UL 1820, Standard for Safety Fire Test of Pneumatic Tubing for
Flame and Smoke Characteristics.
4.3.10.2.6.3 Nonferrous fire sprinkler piping shall be listed as having a maximum
peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average optical density of 0.15 or less, and a
maximum flame spread distance of 1.5 m (5 ft) or less when tested in accordance
with UL 1887, Standard for Safety Fire Test of Plastic Sprinkler Pipe for Visible
Flame and Smoke Characteristics.
4.3.10.2.6.4 Optical-fiber and communication raceways shall be listed as having a
maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average optical density of 0.15 or
less, and a maximum flame spread distance of 1.5 m (5 ft) or less when tested in
accordance with UL 2024, Standard for Safety Optical-Fiber Cable Raceway.
4.3.10.2.6.5 Loudspeakers and recessed lighting fixtures, including their
assemblies and accessories, shall be permitted in the ceiling cavity plenum where
listed as having a maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average optical
density of 0.15 or less, and a peak heat release rate of 100 kW or less when tested
in accordance with UL 2043, Standard for Safety Fire Test for Heat and Visible
Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their Accessories Installed in AirHandling Spaces.
4.3.10.2.6.6 Supplementary materials for air distribution systems shall be
permitted when complying with the provisions of 4.3.3.
4.3.10.2.6.7 Smoke detectors shall not be required to meet the provisions of this
section.
5.4.6.4 Where air ducts pass through walls, floors, or partitions that are required
to have a fire resistance rating and where fire dampers are not required, the
opening in the construction around the air duct shall be as follows:
(1)
Not exceeding a 25.4 mm (1 in.) average clearance on all sides
(2) Filled solid with an approved material capable of preventing the passage of
flame and hot gases sufficient to ignite cotton waste when subjected to the timetemperature fire conditions required for fire barrier penetration as specified
in NFPA 251, Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building
Construction and Materials
2. Test methods: ASTM E84, UL 723, or NFPA 255.
3. Specified k factors are at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F) mean temperature unless stated
otherwise. Where optional thermal insulation material is used, select thickness to
provide thermal conductance no greater than that for the specified material. For pipe,
482
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
use insulation manufacturer's published heat flow tables. For domestic hot water
supply and return, run out insulation and condensation control insulation, no
thickness adjustment need be made.
4. All materials shall be compatible and suitable for service temperature, and shall not
contribute to corrosion or otherwise attack surface to which applied in either the wet
or dry state.
C. Every package or standard container of insulation or accessories delivered to the job site
for use must have a manufacturer's stamp or label giving the name of the manufacturer
and description of the material.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. All information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with
drawings and specifications and ASTM, federal and military specifications.
a. Insulation materials: Specify each type used and state surface burning
characteristics.
b. Insulation facings and jackets: Each type used. Make it clear that white finish will
be furnished for exposed ductwork, casings and equipment.
c. Insulation accessory materials: Each type used.
d. Manufacturer's installation and fitting fabrication instructions for flexible
unicellular insulation.
e. Make reference to applicable specification paragraph numbers for coordination.
C. Samples:
1. Each type of insulation: Minimum size 100 mm (4 inches) square for board/block/
blanket; 150 mm (6 inches) long, full diameter for round types.
2. Each type of facing and jacket: Minimum size 100 mm (4 inches square).
3. Each accessory material: Minimum 120 ML (4 ounce) liquid container or 120 gram
(4 ounce) dry weight for adhesives / cement / mastic.
483
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIAL
Store materials in clean and dry environment, pipe covering jackets shall be clean and
unmarred. Place adhesives in original containers. Maintain ambient temperatures and
conditions as required by printed instructions of manufacturers of adhesives, mastics and
finishing cements.
1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.
B. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
L-P-535E (2)-91 .....................Plastic Sheet (Sheeting): Plastic Strip; Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) and Poly (Vinyl Chloride - Vinyl Acetate), Rigid.
C. Military Specifications (Mil. Spec.):
MIL-A-3316C (2)-90 .............Adhesives, Fire-Resistant, Thermal Insulation
MIL-A-24179A (1)-87 ...........Adhesive, Flexible Unicellular-Plastic
Thermal Insulation
MIL-C-19565C (1)-88 ...........Coating Compounds, Thermal Insulation, Fire-and WaterResistant, Vapor-Barrier
MIL-C-20079H-87 .................Cloth, Glass; Tape, Textile Glass; and Thread, Glass and
Wire-Reinforced Glass
D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A167-99 .................................Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
B209-04..................................Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate
C411-97..................................Standard test method for Hot-Surface Performance of
High-Temperature Thermal Insulation
C449-00..................................Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting
Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement
C533-04..................................Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe
Thermal Insulation
484
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C534-05..................................Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric
Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form
C547-06..................................Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber pipe Insulation
C552-03..................................Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal
Insulation
C553-02..................................Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal
Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications
C585-90..................................Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid
Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing
(NPS System) R (1998)
C612-04..................................Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board
Thermal Insulation
C1126-04................................Standard Specification for Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular
Phenolic Thermal Insulation
C1136-06................................Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor
Retarders for Thermal Insulation
D1668-97a (2006) ..................Standard Specification for Glass Fabrics (Woven and
Treated) for Roofing and Waterproofing
E84-06 ....................................Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics
of Building
Materials
E119-05a ................................Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building
Construction and Materials
E136-04 ..................................Standard Test Methods for Behavior of Materials in a
Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 degrees C (1380 F)
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
90A-02 ...................................Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
96-04 ......................................Standards for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of
Commercial Cooking Operations
101-06 ....................................Life Safety Code
485
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
251-06 ....................................Standard methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building
Construction Materials
255-06 ....................................Standard Method of tests of Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials
F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL):
723..........................................UL Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials with Revision of
08/03
G. Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry (MSS):
SP58-2002 ..............................Pipe Hangers and Supports Materials, Design, and
Manufacture
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MINERAL FIBER
A. ASTM C612 (Board, Block), Class 1 or 2, k = 0.037 Watt per meter, per degree C (0.26),
external insulation for temperatures up to 204 degrees C (400 degrees F).
B. ASTM C553 (Blanket, Flexible) Type I, Class B-3, Density 16 kg/m3 (1 pcf), k = 0.045
(0.31)
C. ASTM C547 (Pipe Fitting Insulation and Preformed Pipe Insulation), Class 1, k = 0.037
(0.26) for use at temperatures 230 degrees C (450 degrees F).
2.2 MINERAL WOOL OR REFRACTORY FIBER
A. Comply with Standard ASTM C612, Class 3, 450 degrees C (850 degrees F).
2.3 RIGID CELLULAR PHENOLIC FOAM
A. Preformed (molded) pipe insulation, ASTM C1126, type III, grade 1, k = 0.021(0.15), for
temperatures up to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F) with vapor retarder and all service
jacket with polyvinyl chloride premolded fitting covering.
B. Equipment and Duct Insulation, ASTM C 1126, type II, grade 1, k = 0.021 (0.15), for
temperatures up to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F) with rigid cellular phenolic insulation
and covering, vapor retarder and all service jacket.
2.4 CELLULAR GLASS CLOSED-CELL
A. Comply with Standard ASTM C177, C518, density 120 kg/m3 (7.5 pcf) nominal, k =
0.033 (0.29) at 0 degrees C (75 degrees F).
486
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Pipe insulation for temperatures up to 200 degrees C (400 degrees F).
2.5 POLYISOCYANURATE CLOSED-CELL RIGID
A. Preformed (fabricated) pipe insulation, ASTM C591, type IV, K=0.027(0.19), for use at
temperatures up to 149 degree C (300 degree F) with factory applied PVDC or all service
jacket vapor retarder with polyvinyl chloride premolded fitting covers.
B. Equipment and duct insulation, ASTM C 591,type IV, K=0.027(0.19), for use at
temperatures up to 149 degrees C (300 degrees F) with PVDC or all service jacket vapor
retarder jacket.
2.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR THERMAL
A. ASTM C177, C518, k = 0.039 Watt per meter, per degree C (0.27), at 24 degrees C (75
degrees F), flame spread not over 25, smoke developed not over 50, for temperatures
from minus 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) to 93 degrees C (200 degrees F). No jacket
required.
2.7 CALCIUM SILICATE
A. Preformed pipe Insulation: ASTM C533, Type I and Type II with indicator denoting
asbestos-free material.
B. Premolded Pipe Fitting Insulation: ASTM C533, Type I and Type II with indicator
denoting asbestos-free material.
C. Equipment Insulation: ASTM C533, Type I and Type II
D. Characteristics:
Insulation Characteristics
ITEMS
TYPE I
TYPE II
649 (1200)
927 (1700)
232 (14.5)
288 (18)
Min W/ m K (Btu in/h ft2 degrees F)@
0.059
0.078 (0.540)
mean temperature of 93 degrees C (200
(0.41)
Temperature, maximum degrees C (degrees
F)
Density (dry), Kg/m3 (lb/ ft3)
Thermal conductivity:
degrees F)
Surface burning characteristics:
487
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Flame spread Index, Maximum
0
0
Smoke Density index, Maximum
0
0
2.8 INSULATION FACINGS AND JACKETS
A. Vapor Retarder, higher strength with low water permeance = 0.02 or less perm rating,
Beach puncture 50 units for insulation facing on exposed ductwork, casings and
equipment, and for pipe insulation jackets. Facings and jackets shall be all service type
(ASJ) or PVDC Vapor Retarder jacketing.
B. ASJ jacket shall be white kraft bonded to 0.025 mm (1 mil) thick aluminum foil,
fiberglass reinforced, with pressure sensitive adhesive closure. Comply with ASTM
C1136. Beach puncture 5 units, Suitable for painting without sizing. Jackets shall have
minimum 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) lap on longitudinal joints and minimum 100 mm (4 inch)
butt strip on end joints. Butt strip material shall be same as the jacket. Lap and butt strips
shall be self-sealing type with factory-applied pressure sensitive adhesive.
C. Vapor Retarder medium strength with low water vapor permeance of 0.02 or less perm
rating), Beach puncture 25 units: Foil-Scrim-Kraft (FSK) or PVDC vapor retarder
jacketing type for concealed ductwork and equipment.
D. Glass Cloth Jackets: Presized, minimum 0.18 kg per square meter (7.8 ounces per square
yard), 2000 kPa (300 psig) bursting strength with integral vapor retarder where required
or specified. Weather proof if utilized for outside service.
E. Factory composite materials may be used provided that they have been tested and
certified by the manufacturer.
F. Pipe fitting insulation covering (jackets): Fitting covering shall be premolded to match
shape of fitting and shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conforming to Fed Spec L-P-335,
composition A, Type II Grade GU, and Type III, minimum thickness 0.7 mm (0.03
inches). Provide color matching vapor retarder pressure sensitive tape.
2.9 PIPE COVERING PROTECTION SADDLES
A. Cold pipe support: Premolded pipe insulation 180 degrees (half-shells) on bottom half of
pipe at supports. Material shall be cellular glass or high density Polyisocyanurate
insulation of the same thickness as adjacent insulation. Density of Polyisocyanurate
insulation shall be a minimum of 48 kg/m3 (3.0 pcf).
488
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Nominal Pipe Size and Accessories Material (Insert Blocks)
Nominal Pipe Size mm (inches)
Insert Blocks mm (inches)
Up through 125 (5)
150 (6) long
B. Warm or hot pipe supports: Premolded pipe insulation (180 degree half-shells) on bottom
half of pipe at supports. Material shall be high density Polyisocyanurate (for
temperatures up to 149 degrees C [300 degrees F]), cellular glass or calcium silicate.
Insulation at supports shall have same thickness as adjacent insulation. Density of
Polyisocyanurate insulation shall be a minimum of 48 kg/m3 (3.0 pcf).
2.10
ADHESIVE, MASTIC, CEMENT
A. Mil. Spec. MIL-A-3316, Class 1: Jacket and lap adhesive and protective finish coating
for insulation.
B. Mil. Spec. MIL-A-3316, Class 2: Adhesive for laps and for adhering insulation to metal
surfaces.
C. Mil. Spec. MIL-A-24179, Type II Class 1: Adhesive for installing flexible unicellular
insulation and for laps and general use.
D. Mil. Spec. MIL-C-19565, Type I: Protective finish for outdoor use.
E. Mil. Spec. MIL-C-19565, Type I or Type II: Vapor barrier compound for indoor use.
F. ASTM C449: Mineral fiber hydraulic-setting thermal insulating and finishing cement.
G. Other: Insulation manufacturers' published recommendations.
2.11 MECHANICAL FASTENERS
A. Pins, anchors: Welded pins, or metal or nylon anchors with tin-coated or fiber washer, or
clips. Pin diameter shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
B. Staples: Outward clinching monel or stainless steel.
C. Wire: 1.3 mm thick (18 gage) soft annealed galvanized or 1.9 mm (14 gage) copper clad
steel or nickel copper alloy.
D. Bands: 20 mm (3/4 inch) nominal width, brass, galvanized steel, aluminum or stainless
steel.
2.12 REINFORCEMENT AND FINISHES
A. Glass fabric, open weave: ASTM D1668, Type III (resin treated) and Type I (asphalt
treated).
489
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Glass fiber fitting tape: Mil. Spec MIL-C-20079, Type II, Class 1.
C. Tape for Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: As recommended by the insulation
manufacturer.
D. Hexagonal wire netting: 25 mm (one inch) mesh, 0.85 mm thick (22 gage) galvanized
steel.
E. Corner beads: 50 mm (2 inch) by 50 mm (2 inch), 0.55 mm thick (26 gage) galvanized
steel; or, 25 mm (1 inch) by 25 mm (1 inch), 0.47 mm thick (28 gage) aluminum angle
adhered to 50 mm (2 inch) by 50 mm (2 inch) Kraft paper.
F. PVC fitting cover: Fed. Spec L-P-535, Composition A, 11-86 Type II, Grade GU, with
Form B Mineral Fiber insert, for media temperature 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) to 121
degrees C (250 degrees F). Below 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) and above 121 degrees C
(250 degrees F). Provide double layer insert. Provide color matching vapor barrier
pressure sensitive tape.
2.13 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL
Other than pipe and duct insulation, refer to Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
2.14 FLAME AND SMOKE
Unless shown otherwise all assembled systems shall meet flame spread 25 and smoke
developed 50 rating as developed under ASTM, NFPA and UL standards and
specifications. See paragraph 1.3 "Quality Assurance".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Required pressure tests of duct and piping joints and connections shall be completed and
the work approved by the Resident Engineer for application of insulation. Surface shall
be clean and dry with all foreign materials, such as dirt, oil, loose scale and rust removed.
B. Except for specific exceptions, insulate entire specified equipment, piping (pipe, fittings,
valves, accessories), and duct systems. Insulate each pipe and duct individually. Do not
use scrap pieces of insulation where a full length section will fit.
C. Where removal of insulation of piping, ductwork and equipment is required to comply
with Section 02 82 11, TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT and Section
02 82 13.13, GLOVEBAG ASBESTOS ABATEMENT, such areas shall be reinsulated
to comply with this specification.
490
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
D. Insulation materials shall be installed in a first class manner with smooth and even
surfaces, with jackets and facings drawn tight and smoothly cemented down at all laps.
Insulation shall be continuous through all sleeves and openings, except at fire dampers
and duct heaters (NFPA 90A). Vapor retarders shall be continuous and uninterrupted
throughout systems with operating temperature 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) and below.
Lap and seal vapor barrier over ends and exposed edges of insulation. Anchors, supports
and other metal projections through insulation on cold surfaces shall be insulated and
vapor sealed for a minimum length of 150 mm (6 inches).
E. Install vapor stops at all insulation terminations on either side of valves, pumps and
equipment and particularly in straight lengths of pipe insulation.
F. Construct insulation on parts of equipment such as chilled water pumps and heads of
chillers, convertors and heat exchangers that must be opened periodically for
maintenance or repair, so insulation can be removed and replaced without damage. Install
insulation with bolted 1 mm thick (20 gage) galvanized steel or aluminum covers as
complete units, or in sections, with all necessary supports, and split to coincide with
flange/split of the equipment.
G. Insulation on hot piping and equipment shall be terminated square at items not to be
insulated, access openings and nameplates. Cover all exposed raw insulation with white
sealer or jacket material.
H. HVAC work not to be insulated:
1. Internally insulated ductwork and air handling units.
2. Exhaust air ducts and plenums, and ventilation exhaust air shafts.
3. In hot piping: Unions, flexible connectors, control valves, PRVs, safety valves and
discharge vent piping, vacuum breakers, thermostatic vent valves, steam traps 20 mm
(3/4 inch) and smaller, exposed piping through floor for convectors and radiators.
Insulate piping to within approximately 75 mm (3 inches) of uninsulated items.
I. Plumbing work not to be insulated:
1. Piping and valves of fire protection system.
2. Chromium plated brass piping.
3. Water piping in contact with earth.
4. Piping in pipe basement serving wall hydrants.
491
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
5. Small horizontal cold water branch runs in partitions to individual fixtures may be
without insulation for maximum distance of 900 mm (3 feet).
6. Distilled water piping.
J. Apply insulation materials subject to the manufacturer's recommended temperature
limits. Apply adhesives, mastic and coatings at the manufacturer's recommended
minimum coverage.
K. Elbows, flanges and other fittings shall be insulated with the same material as is used on
the pipe straights. The elbow/ fitting insulation shall be field-fabricated, mitered or
factory prefabricated to the necessary size and shape to fit on the elbow/ fitting. Use of
polyurethane spray-foam to fill a PVC elbow jacket is prohibited on cold applications.
K. Firestop Pipe and Duct insulation:
1. Provide firestopping insulation at fire and smoke barriers through penetrations. Fire
stopping insulation shall be UL listed as defines in Section 07 84 00,
FIRESTOPPING.
2. Pipe and duct penetrations requiring fire stop insulation including, but not limited to
the following:
a. Pipe risers through floors
b. Pipe or duct chase walls and floors
c. Smoke partitions
d. Fire partitions
3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Mineral Fiber Board:
1. Faced board: Apply board on pins spaced not more than 300 mm (12 inches) on
center each way, and not less than 75 mm (3 inches) from each edge of board. In
addition to pins, apply insulation bonding adhesive to entire underside of horizontal
metal surfaces. Butt insulation edges tightly and seal all joints with laps and butt
strips. After applying speed clips cut pins off flush and apply vapor seal patches over
clips.
2. Plain board:
a. Insulation shall be scored, beveled or mitered to provide tight joints and be
secured to equipment with bands spaced 225 mm (9 inches) on center for irregular
492
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
surfaces or with pins and clips on flat surfaces. Use corner beads to protect edges
of insulation.
b. For hot equipment: Stretch 25 mm (1 inch) mesh wire, with edges wire laced
together, over insulation and finish with insulating and finishing cement applied
in one coat, 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick, trowel led to a smooth finish.
B. Flexible Mineral Fiber Blanket:
1. Adhere insulation to metal with 100 mm (4 inch) wide strips of insulation bonding
adhesive at 200 mm (8 inches) on center all around duct. Additionally secure
insulation to bottom of ducts exceeding 600 mm (24 inches) in width with pins
welded or adhered on 450 mm (18 inch) centers. Secure washers on pins. Butt
insulation edges and seal joints with laps and butt strips. Staples may be used to assist
in securing insulation. Seal all vapor retarder penetrations with mastic. Sagging duct
insulation will not be acceptable. Install firestop duct insulation where required.
2. Supply air ductwork to be insulated includes main and branch ducts from AHU
discharge to room supply outlets, and the bodies of ceiling outlets to prevent
condensation. Insulate sound attenuator units, coil casings and damper frames. To
prevent condensation insulate trapeze type supports and angle iron hangers for flat
oval ducts that are in direct contact with metal duct.
3. Concealed supply air ductwork.
a. Above ceilings at a roof level: 50 mm (2 inch) thick insulation faced with FSK.
b. Above ceilings for other than roof level: 40 mm (1 ½ inch) thick insulation faced
with FSK.
4. Concealed return air duct above ceilings at a roof level, unconditioned areas, and in
chases with external wall or containing steam piping; 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) thick,
insulation faced with FSK. Concealed return air ductwork in other locations need not
be insulated.
C. Molded Mineral Fiber Pipe and Tubing Covering:
1. Fit insulation to pipe or duct, aligning longitudinal joints. Seal longitudinal joint laps
and circumferential butt strips by rubbing hard with a nylon sealing tool to assure a
positive seal. Staples may be used to assist in securing insulation. Seal all vapor
retarder penetrations on cold piping with a generous application of vapor barrier
493
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
mastic. Provide inserts and install with metal insulation shields at outside pipe
supports. Install freeze protection insulation over heating cable.
2. Contractor's options for fitting, flange and valve insulation:
a. Insulating and finishing cement for sizes less than 100 mm (4 inches) operating at
surface temperature of 16 degrees C (61 degrees F) or more.
b. Factory premolded, one piece PVC covers with mineral fiber, (Form B), inserts.
Provide two insert layers for pipe temperatures below 4 degrees C (40 degrees F),
or above 121 degrees C (250 degrees F). Secure first layer of insulation with
twine. Seal seam edges with vapor barrier mastic and secure with fitting tape.
c. Factory molded, ASTM C547 or field mitered sections, joined with adhesive or
wired in place. For hot piping finish with a smoothing coat of finishing cement.
For cold fittings, 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) or less, vapor seal with a layer of
glass fitting tape imbedded between two 2 mm (1/16 inch) coats of vapor barrier
mastic.
d. Fitting tape shall extend over the adjacent pipe insulation and overlap on itself at
least 50 mm (2 inches).
3. Nominal thickness in millimeters and inches specified in table below, for piping
above ground:
Nominal Thickness of Molded Mineral Fiber Insulation
Nominal Pipe Size, millimeters
(inches):
a. 38-99 degrees C (100-211
degrees F) (LPR, PC,
HWH, HWHR, GH, GHR)
1. Runouts to fan coil
25
(1) &
below
32- 75 (11/4- 3)
100-150
(4-6)
200
(8) and
above
25 (1.0)
40 (1.5)
50 (2.0)
50 (2.0)
15 (0.5)
-
-
-
-
-
units
2. Runouts to terminal
15 (0.5)
-
15 (0.5)
20(0.75)
units
b. Domestic hot water supply
and return
25 (1.0)
40 (1.5)
D. Rigid Cellular Phenolic Foam:
494
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. Rigid closed cell phenolic insulation may be provided for piping, ductwork and
equipment for temperatures up to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F).
2. Note the NFPA 90A burning characteristics requirements of 25/50 in paragraph 1.3.B
3. Provide secure attachment facilities such as welding pins.
4. Apply insulation with joints tightly drawn together
5. Apply adhesives, coverings, neatly finished at fittings, and valves.
6. Final installation shall be smooth, tight, neatly finished at all edges.
7. Minimum thickness in millimeters (inches) specified in table below, for piping above
ground:
Nominal Thickness of Rigid Closed-Cell Phenolic Foam Insulation
Nominal Pipe Size
millimeters (inches):
25
(1) &
below
32-75
(1 1/4-3)
100-150
(4-6)
200-300
(8-12)
350
(14) &
above
1. 100-121 degrees C (212250 degrees F), LPS, Vent
piping from receivers and
flash tanks.
2. 38-99 degrees C (100-211
degrees F), LPR, PC,
HWH, HWHR, GH and
GHR.
15 (0.5)
25 (1)
25 (1)
--
--
15 (0.5)
20 (0.75)
25 (1)
--
--
3. 4-16 degrees C (40-60
degrees F), CH and CHR.
20
(0.75)
20 (0.75)
25 (1)
40 (1.5)
50 (2.0)
15 (0.5)
--
--
--
--
15 (0.5)
20
(0.75)
20
(0.75)
--
a. Run outs to Fan
Units.
Coil
5. Domestic hot water supply 15 (0.5)
and return.
8. Condensation control insulation: Minimum 20 mm (0.75 inch) thick for all pipe sizes.
a. HVAC: Cooling coil condensation piping to waste piping fixture or drain inlet.
Omit insulation on plastic piping in mechanical rooms.
b. Plumbing piping as follows:
1) Cold water piping.
E. Cellular Glass Insulation:
495
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. Pipe and tubing, covering nominal thickness in millimeters and inches as tabulated
below for chilled water and refrigerant piping.
Nominal Thickness of Cellular Glass Insulation
Millimeters (inches)
Thru 38
(11/2)
50- 150
(2-6)
200-300
(8-12)
over 350
(14)
1. 4-16 degrees C (40-60 degrees F) 50 (2.0)
(CH and CHR within chiller room
and pipe chase and underground)
80 (3.0)
80 (3.0)
100 (4.0)
F. Polyisocyanurate Closed-Cell Rigid Insulation:
1. Polyisocyanurate closed-cell rigid insulation (PIR) may be provided for piping,
equipment and ductwork for temperature up to 149 degree C (300 degree F) provided
insulation thickness requirement does not exceed 38 mm (1.5 inches).
2. Install insulation, vapor retarder and jacketing per manufacturer’s recommendations.
Particular attention should be paid to recommendations for joint staggering, adhesive
application, external hanger design, expansion/contraction joint design and spacing
and vapor retarder integrity.
3. Install insulation with all joints tightly butted (except expansion) joints in hot
applications).
4. If insulation thickness exceeds 63 mm (2.5 inches), install as a double layer system
with longitudinal (lap) and butt joint staggering as recommended by manufacturer.
5. For cold applications, vapor retarder shall be installed in a continuous manner. No
staples, rivets, screws or any other attachment device capable of penetrating the vapor
retarder shall be used to attach the vapor retarder or jacketing. No wire ties capable of
penetrating the vapor retarder shall be used to hold the insulation in place. Banding
shall be used to attach PVC or metal jacketing.
6. Elbows, flanges and other fittings shall be insulated with the same material as is used
on the pipe straights. The elbow/ fitting insulation shall be field-fabricated, mitered or
factory prefabricated to the necessary size and shape to fit on the elbow/ fitting. Use
496
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
of polyurethane spray-foam to fill PVC elbow jacket is prohibited on cold
applications.
7. For cold applications, the vapor retarder on elbows/fittings shall be either masticfabric-mastic or 2 mil thick PVDC vapor retarder adhesive tape.
8. All PVC and metal jacketing shall be installed so as to naturally shed water. Joints
shall point down and shall be sealed with either adhesive or caulking (except for
periodic slip joints).
9. Underground piping: Follow instructions for above ground piping but the vapor
retarder jacketing shall be 6 mil thick PVDC or minimum 30 mil thick rubberized
bituminous membrane. Sand bed and backfill shall be a minimum of 150 mm (6
inches) all around insulated pipe.
10. Note the NFPA 90A burning characteristic requirements of 25/50 in paragraph 1.3B.
Refer to paragraph 3.1 for items not to be insulated.
11. Minimum thickness in millimeter (inches) specified in table below, for piping:
Nominal Thickness of Polyisocyanurate Rigid Insulation
Nominal Pipe Size
millimeters(inches):
1. 122-149 degree
C(251-300 degree F)
(HPS, MPS)
2. 100-121 degrees C
(211-250 degrees F),
HPR, MPR, LPS,
Vent piping from
receivers and flash
tanks
3. 38-99 degrees C
(100-211 degrees F),
LPR, PC, HWH, and
HWHR.
a. Run outs to fan
coil units.
25(1)
&
below
40
(1.5)
32-75
(1 1/4-3)
100-150
(4-6)
200-300
(8-12)
--
--
--
20
(0.75)
40(1.5)
40(1.5)
40(1.50)
20
(0.75)
25(1.0)
40(1.5)
40(1.50)
20
(0.75)
--
--
--
497
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Nominal Thickness of Polyisocyanurate Rigid Insulation
4. 4-16 degrees C (40- 25
25 (1.0)
40 (1.50 40(1.5)
60 degrees F), CH,
(1.00
and CHR.
a. Run outs to fan coil 20
25 (1.)
--units.
(0.75)
25
25 (1.0)
40 (1.5) -(1.00
5. 4-16 degrees C(4040
40 (1.5)
40 (1.5) 40 (1.5)
60 degrees F) CH
(1.50
and CHR.
a. Run out to fan coils 40 (1.5) 40 (1.5)
--units.
40 (1.5) 40 (1.5)
40 (1.5) -6. Domestic hot water
15 (0.5) 20 (0.74)
25 (1.0) 25(1.0)
supply and return
12. Condensation control insulation: Minimum 20 mm (0.75 inch) thick for all pipe sizes.
a. HVAC: Cooling coil condensation piping to waste piping fixture or drain inlet.
Omit insulation on plastic piping in mechanical rooms.
b. Plumbing piping as follows:
1) Cold Water Piping.
G. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation:
1. Apply insulation and fabricate fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's
installation instructions and finish with two coats of weather resistant finish as
recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
2. Pipe and tubing insulation:
a. Use proper size material. Do not stretch or strain insulation.
b. To avoid undue compression of insulation, provide cork stoppers or wood inserts
at supports as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Insulation shields are
specified under Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
AND STEAM GENERATION.
c. Where possible, slip insulation over the pipe or tubing prior to connection, and
seal the butt joints with adhesive. Where the slip-on technique is not possible, slit
the insulation and apply it to the pipe sealing the seam and joints with contact
498
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
adhesive. Optional tape sealing, as recommended by the manufacturer, may be
employed. Make changes from mineral fiber insulation in a straight run of pipe,
not at a fitting. Seal joint with tape.
3. Apply sheet insulation to flat or large curved surfaces with 100 percent adhesive
coverage. For fittings and large pipe, apply adhesive to seams only.
4. Pipe insulation: nominal thickness in millimeters (inches as specified in table below
for piping above ground:
Nominal Thickness of Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation
Nominal Pipe Size
millimeters (inches)
1. 38-93 degrees C (100-200
degrees F) (HWH and HWHR)
a. Runouts to fan coil units.
25 (1) &
below
32-75
100-150
(1 1/4-3) (4-6)
25 (1.0)
40 (1.5)
-
-
20
(0.75)
40 (1.5)
-
-
2. 4-16 degrees C (40-60 degrees
F) (CH and CHR)
a. Runouts to fan coil units.
25 (1.0)
40 (1.5)
-
-
20
(0.75)
40 (1.5)
-
-
25 (1.0)
40 (1.5)
-
-
15
(0.50)
20
(0.75)
3. Domestic hot water supply and
return
25 (1.0)
200 (8)
40
(1.50)
5. Minimum 20 mm (0.75 inch) thick insulation for pneumatic control lines for a
minimum distance of 6 m (20 feet) from discharge side of the refrigerated dryer.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 23 07-11 HVAC, PLUMBING & BOILER INSULATION- - -
499
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 23 21 13
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Water piping to connect HVAC equipment, including the following:
1. Heating hot water and drain piping.
2. Extension of domestic water make-up piping.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
B. Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM
GENERATION, which includes welding qualifications.
B. Design Working Pressure for Preinsulated Chilled Water Piping: 861 kPa (125 psig).
C. Submit prior to welding of steel piping a certificate of Welder’s certification. The
certificate shall be current and not more than one year old.
D. Manufacturers Training Service: The Contractor shall obtain the services of an
independent trained representative of the preinsulated chilled water pipe system
manufacturer to instruct contractor's work force in installation procedures for all
preinsulated, prefabricated systems.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Pipe and equipment supports.
2. Pipe and tubing, with specification, class or type, and schedule.
3. Pipe fittings, including miscellaneous adapters and special fittings.
4. Flanges, gaskets and bolting.
5. Valves of all types.
6. Strainers.
7. Flexible connectors for water service.
500
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
8. Pipe alignment guides.
9. Expansion joints.
C. Submit prior to welding of steel piping a certificate of Welder’s certification. The
certificate shall be current and not more than one year old.
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
B1.20.1-83..............................Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)
B16.1-98.................................Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
B16.3-98.................................Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings
B16.4-98.................................Gray Iron Threaded Fittings
B16.5-03.................................Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
B16.9-03.................................Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings
B16.11-05...............................Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded
B16.14-91...............................Ferrous Pipe Plugs, Bushings, and Locknuts with Pipe
Threads
B16.22-01...............................Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure
Fittings
B16.23-02...............................Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings
B16.24-01...............................Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings,
Class 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500 and 2500
B16.39-98...............................Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions, Classes 150, 250,
and 300
B16.42-98...............................Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150
and 300
B31.1-01.................................Power Piping
B31.9-04.................................Building Services Piping
B40.100-05.............................Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments
501
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI):
B16.1 00 .................................Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125
and 250
B16.3 00 .................................Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 150 and 300
B16.5 03 .................................Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS ½ through NPS 24
B16.9 03 .................................Factory Made Wrought Butt Welding Fittings
B16.11 01 ...............................Forged Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded
B16.14 91 ...............................Ferrous Pipe Plugs, Bushings and Locknuts with Pipe
Threads
B16.18-01...............................Cast Copper Alloy Solder joint Pressure fittings
B16.22 00 ...............................Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
B16.24 01 ...............................Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Fittings and Flanged Fittings:
Class 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500 and 2500
B31.1 01 .................................Power Piping
D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A47/A47M-99 (2004) ............Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
A53/A53M-06 ........................Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and HotDipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
A106/A106M-06 ....................Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for
High-Temperature Service
A126-04 .................................Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,
Flanges, and Pipe Fittings
A181/A181M-01 ....................Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for
General-Purpose Piping
A183-03 .................................. Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and
Nuts
A216/A216M-04 .................... Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable
for Fusion Welding, for High Temperature Service
A234/A234M 04 ..................... Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for
Moderate and High Temperature Service
502
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
A307-04 .................................. Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,
60,000 PSI Tensile Strength
A536-84 (2004) ...................... Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
A 615/A 615M-04 .................. Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
A653/A 653M-04 ................... Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy
Coated (Galvannealed) By the Hot-Dip Process
B32-04 .................................... Standard Specification for Solder Metal
B61-02 .................................... Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings
B62-02 .................................... Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce
Metal Castings
B88-03 .................................... Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
B209 04 ................................... Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate
C177 97 .................................. Standard Test Method for Steady State Heat Flux
Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus
C478-03 .................................. Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
C533 03 ................................... Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation
C552 03 ................................... Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation
D 3350-02 .............................. Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials
C591-01 .................................. Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate
Thermal Insulation
D1784 03 ................................ Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and
Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds
D1785 03 ................................ Poly (Vinyl Chloride0 (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80
and 120
D2241 04 ................................ Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure Rated Pipe (SDR
Series)
D2464 99 ................................ Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 80.
503
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
D3139 98 ................................ Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric
Seals
F439-06 ................................... Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
F441/F441M-02 ...................... Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80
F477-02 ................................... Elastomeric Seals Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe
E. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
C110/03 ..................................Ductile Iron and Grey Iron Fittings for Water
C203 00 ..................................Coal Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water
Pipe Lines Enamel and Tape Hot Applied
F. American Welding Society (AWS):
A5.8/A5.8M-04 ......................Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze
Welding
B2.1-02...................................Standard Welding Procedure Specification
G. Copper Development Association, Inc. (CDA):
CDA A4015-95 ......................Copper Tube Handbook
H. Expansion Joint Manufacturer’s Association, Inc. (EJMA):
EMJA-2003 ............................Expansion Joint Manufacturer’s Association Standards,
Eighth Edition
I. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fitting Industry, Inc.:
SP-67-02a...............................Butterfly Valves
SP-70-06 ................................Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
SP-71-05 ................................Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded
Ends
SP-72-99 ................................Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for
General Service
SP-78-05 ................................Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
SP-80-03 ................................Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves
SP-85-02 ................................Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded
Ends
504
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
J. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF):
14 03.......................................Plastic Piping System Components and Related Materials
K. Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association: TEMA 8th Edition, 2000
L. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):
HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 2nd Edition 1997
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS, PIPE SLEEVES, AND WALL AND CEILING
PLATES
Provide in accordance with Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.
2.2 PIPE AND TUBING
A. Heating Hot Water Piping:
1. Steel: ASTM A53 Grade B, seamless or ERW, Schedule 40.
2. Copper water tube option: ASTM B88, Type K or L, hard drawn. Soft drawn tubing,
20 mm (3/4 inch) and larger, may be used for runouts to floor mounted fan coil units.
B. Pipe supports, including insulation shields, for above ground piping: Section 23 05 11,
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.
2.3 FITTINGS FOR STEEL PIPE
A. 65 mm (2-1/2 inches) and Larger: Welded or flanged joints. Mechanical couplings and
fittings are optional for water piping only.
1. Butt welding fittings: ASME B16.9 with same wall thickness as connecting piping.
Elbows shall be long radius type, unless otherwise noted.
2. Welding flanges and bolting: ASME B16.5:
a. Water service: Weld neck or slip-on, plain face, with 6 mm (1/8 inch) thick full
face neoprene gasket suitable for 104 degrees C (220 degrees F).
1) Contractor's option: Convoluted, cold formed 150 pound steel flanges, with
teflon gaskets, may be used for water service.
b. Flange bolting: Carbon steel machine bolts or studs and nuts, ASTM A307, Grade
B.
B. 50 mm (2 inches) and Smaller: Screwed or welded. Mechanical couplings are optional for
water piping only.
1. Butt welding: ASME B16.9 with same wall thickness as connecting piping.
505
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Forged steel, socket welding or threaded: ASME B16.11.
3. Screwed: 150 pound malleable iron, ASME B16.3. 125 pound cast iron, ASME
B16.4, may be used in lieu of malleable iron. Bushing reduction of a single pipe size,
or use of close nipples, is not acceptable.
4. Unions: ASME B16.39.
C. Welded Branch and Tap Connections: Forged steel weldolets, or branchlets and
threadolets may be used for branch connections up to one pipe size smaller than the main.
Forged steel half-couplings, ASME B16.11 may be used for drain, vent and gage
connections.
D. Mechanical Pipe Couplings and Fittings: May be used, with cut or roll grooved pipe, in
water service up to 110 degrees C (230 degrees F) in lieu of welded, screwed or flanged
connections.
1. Grooved mechanical couplings: Malleable iron, ASTM A47 or ductile iron, ASTM
A536, fabricated in two or more parts, securely held together by two or more
track-head, square, or oval-neck bolts, ASTM A183.
2. Gaskets: Rubber product recommended by the coupling manufacturer for the intended
service.
3. Grooved end fittings: Malleable iron, ASTM A47; ductile iron, ASTM A536; or steel,
ASTM A53 or A106, designed to accept grooved mechanical couplings. Tap-in type
branch connections are acceptable.
2.4 FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBING
A. Solder Joint:
1. Joints shall be made up in accordance with recommended practices of the materials
applied. Apply 95/5 tin and antimony on all copper piping.
2. Mechanically formed tee connection in water and drain piping: Form mechanically
extracted collars in a continuous operation by drilling pilot hole and drawing out tube
surface to form collar, having a height of not less than three times the thickness of
tube wall. Adjustable collaring device shall insure proper tolerance and complete
uniformity of the joint. Notch and dimple joining branch tube in a single process to
provide free flow where the branch tube penetrates the fitting.
B. Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24.
506
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Provide where copper tubing and ferrous metal pipe are joined.
B. 50 mm (2 inches) and Smaller: Threaded dielectric union, ASME B16.39.
C. 65 mm (2 1/2 inches) and Larger: Flange union with dielectric gasket and bolt sleeves,
ASME B16.42.
D. Temperature Rating, 99 degrees C (210 degrees F).
2.6 SCREWED JOINTS
A. Pipe Thread: ANSI B1.20.
B. Lubricant or Sealant: Oil and graphite or other compound approved for the intended
service.
2.7 VALVES
A. Asbestos packing is not acceptable.
B. All valves of the same type shall be products of a single manufacturer. Provide gate and
globe valves with packing that can be replaced with the valve under full working
pressure.
C. Provide chain operators for valves 100 mm (4 inches) and larger when the centerline is
located 2400 mm (8 feet) or more above the floor or operating platform.
D. Gate Valves:
1. 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller: MSS-SP80, Bronze, 1034 kPa (150 lb.), wedge disc,
rising stem, union bonnet.
2. 65 mm (2 1/2 inches) and larger: Flanged, outside screw and yoke.
a. MSS-SP 70, iron body, bronze mounted, 861 kPa (125 psig) wedge disc.
E. Globe, Angle and Swing Check Valves:
1. 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller: MSS-SP 80, bronze, 1034 kPa (150 lb.) Globe and
angle valves shall be union bonnet with metal plug type disc.
2. 65 mm (2 1/2 inches) and larger: 861 kPa (125 psig), flanged, iron body, bronze trim,
MSS-SP-85 for globe valves and MSS-SP-71 for check valves.
F. Non-Slam or Silent Check Valve: Spring loaded double disc swing check or internally
guided flat disc lift type check for bubble tight shut-off. Provide where check valves are
shown in chilled water and hot water piping. Check valves incorporating a balancing
feature may be used.
507
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. Body: Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B, or steel, ASTM A216, Class WCB, or ductile
iron, ASTM 536, flanged, grooved, or wafer type.
2. Seat, disc and spring: 18-8 stainless steel, or bronze, ASTM B62. Seats may be
elastomer material.
G. Butterfly Valves: May be used in lieu of gate valves in water service except for direct
buried pipe. Provide stem extension to allow 50 mm (2 inches) of pipe insulation without
interfering with valve operation.
1. MSS-SP 67, flange lug type (for end of line service) or grooved end rated 1205 kPa
(175 psig) working pressure at 93 degrees C (200 degrees F).
a. Body: Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B. Malleable iron, ASTM A47 electroplated, or ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 electro-plated.
b. Trim: Bronze, aluminum bronze, or 300 series stainless steel disc, bronze
bearings, 316 stainless steel shaft and manufacturer's recommended resilient seat.
Resilient seat shall be field replaceable, and fully line the body to completely
isolate the body from the product. A phosphate coated steel shaft or stem is
acceptable, if the stem is completely isolated from the product.
c. Actuators: Field interchangeable. Valves for balancing service shall have
adjustable memory stop to limit open position.
1) Valves 150 mm (6 inches) and smaller: Lever actuator with minimum of
seven locking positions, except where chain wheel is required.
2) Valves 200 mm (8 inches) and larger: Enclosed worm gear with handwheel,
and where required, chain-wheel operator.
H. Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with chrome-plated ball with full port and Teflon seat
at 2760 kPa (400 psig) working pressure rating. Screwed or solder connections. Provide
stem extension to allow operation without interfering with pipe insulation.
I. Water Flow Balancing Valves: For flow regulation and shut-off. Valves shall be line size
rather than reduced to control valve size and be one of the following types.
1. Butterfly valve as specified herein with memory stop.
2. Eccentric plug valve: Iron body, bronze or nickel-plated iron plug, bronze bearings,
adjustable memory stop, operating lever, rated 861 kPa (125 psig) and 121 degrees C
(250 degrees F).
508
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
J. Circuit Setter Valve: A dual purpose flow balancing valve and adjustable flow meter,
with bronze or cast iron body, calibrated position pointer, valved pressure taps or quick
disconnects with integral check valves and preformed polyurethane insulating enclosure.
Provide a readout kit including flow meter, readout probes, hoses, flow charts or
calculator, and carrying case.
K. Automatic Balancing Control Valves: Factory calibrated to maintain constant flow (plus
or minus five percent) over system pressure fluctuations of at least 10 times the minimum
required for control. Provide standard pressure taps and four sets of capacity charts.
Valves shall be line size and be one of the following designs:
1. Gray iron (ASTM A126) or brass body rated 1205 kPa (175 psig) at 93 degrees C
(200 degrees F), with stainless steel piston and spring.
2. Brass or ferrous body designed for 2067 kPa (300 psig) service at 121 degrees C (250
degrees F), with corrosion resistant, tamper proof, self-cleaning piston/spring
assembly that is easily removable for inspection or replacement.
3. Combination assemblies containing ball type shut-off valves, unions, flow regulators,
strainers with blowdown valves and pressure temperature ports shall be acceptable.
4. Provide a readout kit including flow meter, probes, hoses, flow charts and carrying
case.
L. Manual Radiator/Convector Valves: Brass, packless, with position indicator.
2.8 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL
Refer to Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM
GENERATION.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The drawings show the general arrangement of pipe and equipment but do not show all
required fittings and offsets that may be necessary to connect pipes to equipment, fancoils, coils, radiators, etc., and to coordinate with other trades. Provide all necessary
fittings, offsets and pipe runs based on field measurements and at no additional cost to the
government. Coordinate with other trades for space available and relative location of
HVAC equipment and accessories to be connected on ceiling grid. Pipe location on the
509
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
drawings shall be altered by contractor where necessary to avoid interferences and
clearance difficulties.
B. Store materials to avoid excessive exposure to weather or foreign materials. Keep inside
of piping relatively clean during installation and protect open ends when work is not in
progress.
C. Support piping securely. Refer to PART 3, Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK
RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION. Install convertors and other heat
exchangers at height sufficient to provide gravity flow of condensate to the flash tank and
condensate pump.
D. Install piping generally parallel to walls and column center lines, unless shown otherwise
on the drawings. Space piping, including insulation, to provide 25 mm (one inch)
minimum clearance between adjacent piping or other surface. Unless shown otherwise,
slope drain piping down in the direction of flow not less than 25 mm (one inch) in 12 m
(40 feet). Provide eccentric reducers to keep bottom of sloped piping flat.
E. Locate and orient valves to permit proper operation and access for maintenance of
packing, seat and disc. Generally locate valve stems in overhead piping in horizontal
position. Provide a union adjacent to one end of all threaded end valves. Control valves
usually require reducers to connect to pipe sizes shown on the drawing. Install butterfly
valves with the valve open as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent binding of
the disc in the seat.
F. Offset equipment connections to allow valving off for maintenance and repair with
minimal removal of piping. Provide flexibility in equipment connections and branch line
take-offs with 3-elbow swing joints where noted on the drawings.
G. Tee water piping runouts or branches into the side of mains or other branches. Avoid
bull-head tees, which are two return lines entering opposite ends of a tee and exiting out
the common side.
H. Provide manual air vent at all piping system high points and drain valves at all low
points.
I. Connect piping to equipment as shown on the drawings. Install components furnished by
others such as:
1. Water treatment pot feeders and condenser water treatment systems.
510
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Flow elements (orifice unions), control valve bodies, flow switches, pressure taps
with valve, and wells for sensors.
J. Thermometer Wells: In pipes 65 mm (2-1/2 inches) and smaller increase the pipe size to
provide free area equal to the upstream pipe area.
K. Firestopping: Fill openings around uninsulated piping penetrating floors or fire walls,
with firestop material. For firestopping insulated piping refer to Section 23 07 11, HVAC,
PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION.
L. Where copper piping is connected to steel piping, provide dielectric connections.
3.2 PIPE JOINTS
A. Welded: Beveling, spacing and other details shall conform to ASME B31.1 and AWS
B2.1. See Welder’s qualification requirements under "Quality Assurance" in Section 23
05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.
B. Screwed: Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20; joint compound shall be applied to
male threads only and joints made up so no more than three threads show. Coat exposed
threads on steel pipe with joint compound, or red lead paint for corrosion protection.
C. Mechanical Joint: Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with joint manufacturer's
specifications. Lubricate gasket exterior including lips, pipe ends and housing interiors to
prevent pinching the gasket during installation. Lubricant shall be as recommended by
coupling manufacturer.
D. 125 Pound Cast Iron Flange (Plain Face): Mating flange shall have raised face, if any,
removed to avoid overstressing the cast iron flange.
E. Solvent Welded Joints: As recommended by the manufacturer.
3.3 LEAK TESTING ABOVEGROUND PIPING
A. Inspect all joints and connections for leaks and workmanship and make corrections as
necessary, to the satisfaction of the Resident Engineer. Tests may be either of those
below, or a combination, as approved by the Resident Engineer.
B. An operating test at design pressure, and for hot systems, design maximum temperature.
C. A hydrostatic test at 1.5 times design pressure. For water systems the design maximum
pressure would usually be the static head, or expansion tank maximum pressure, plus
pump head. Factory tested equipment (convertors, exchangers, coils, etc.) need not be
511
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
field tested. Isolate equipment where necessary to avoid excessive pressure on
mechanical seals and safety devices.
3.4 FLUSHING AND CLEANING PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Water Piping: Clean systems as recommended by the suppliers of chemicals specified in
Section 23 25 00, HVAC WATER TREATMENT.
1. Initial flushing: Remove loose dirt, mill scale, metal chips, weld beads, rust, and like
deleterious substances without damage to any system component. Provide temporary
piping or hose to bypass coils, control valves, exchangers and other factory cleaned
equipment unless acceptable means of protection are provided and subsequent
inspection of hide-out areas takes place. Isolate or protect clean system components,
including pumps and pressure vessels, and remove any component which may be
damaged. Open all valves, drains, vents and strainers at all system levels. Remove
plugs, caps, spool pieces, and components to facilitate early debris discharge from
system. Sectionalize system to obtain debris carrying velocity of 1.8 m/S (6 feet per
second), if possible. Connect dead-end supply and return headers as necessary. Flush
bottoms of risers. Install temporary strainers where necessary to protect down-stream
equipment. Supply and remove flushing water and drainage by various type hose,
temporary and permanent piping and Contractor's booster pumps. Flush until clean as
approved by the Resident Engineer.
2. Cleaning: Using products supplied in Section 23 25 00, HVAC WATER
TREATMENT, circulate systems at normal temperature to remove adherent organic
soil, hydrocarbons, flux, pipe mill varnish, pipe joint compounds, iron oxide, and like
deleterious substances not removed by flushing, without chemical or mechanical
damage to any system component. Removal of tightly adherent mill scale is not
required. Keep isolated equipment which is "clean" and where dead-end debris
accumulation cannot occur. Sectionalize system if possible, to circulate at velocities
not less than 1.8 m/S (6 feet per second). Circulate each section for not less than four
hours. Blow-down all strainers, or remove and clean as frequently as necessary. Drain
and prepare for final flushing.
3. Final Flushing: Return systems to conditions required by initial flushing after all
cleaning solution has been displaced by clean make-up. Flush all dead ends and
512
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
isolated clean equipment. Gently operate all valves to dislodge any debris in valve
body by throttling velocity. Flush for not less than one hour.
3.5 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TEST AND INSTRUCTION
A. Refer to PART 3, Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND
STEAM GENERATION.
B. Adjust red set hand on pressure gages to normal working pressure.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING- - -
513
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 23 31 00
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Ductwork and accessories for HVAC including the following:
1. Supply air, return air, and exhaust air systems.
B. Definitions:
1. SMACNA Standards as used in this specification means the HVAC Duct
Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.
2. Seal or Sealing: Use of liquid or mastic sealant, with or without compatible tape
overlay, or gasketing of flanged joints, to keep air leakage at duct joints, seams and
connections to an acceptable minimum.
3. Duct Pressure Classification: SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal
and Flexible.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Fire Stopping Material: Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.
B. General Mechanical Requirements: Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.
C. Noise Level Requirements: Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.
D. Duct Insulation: Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT
INSULATION
E. Plumbing Connections: Section 22 11 00, FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to article, QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK
RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.
B. Fire Safety Code: Comply with NFPA 90A.
C. Duct System Construction and Installation: Referenced SMACNA Standards are the
minimum acceptable quality.
514
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
D. Duct Sealing, Air Leakage Criteria, and Air Leakage Tests: Ducts shall be sealed as per
duct sealing requirements of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual for duct
pressure classes shown on the drawings.
E. Duct accessories exposed to the air stream, such as dampers of all types (except smoke
dampers) and access openings, shall be of the same material as the duct or provide at
least the same level of corrosion resistance.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Rectangular ducts:
a. Schedules of duct systems, materials and selected SMACNA construction
alternatives for joints, sealing, gage and reinforcement.
b. Duct liner.
c. Sealants and gaskets.
d. Access doors.
2. Volume dampers, back draft dampers.
3. Upper hanger attachments.
4. Flexible ducts and clamps, with manufacturer's installation instructions.
5. Flexible connections.
6. Details and design analysis of alternate or optional duct systems.
C. Coordination Drawings: Refer to article, SUBMITTALS, in Section 23 05 11,
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA):
500D-98 .................................Laboratory Method of Testing Dampers for Rating
500L-99 ..................................Laboratory Method of Testing Louvers for Rating
C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
ASCE7-98 ..............................Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
515
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A167-99 .................................Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip
A653-01 .................................Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip process
A1011-02 ...............................Standard Specification for Steel Sheet and Strip Hot rolled
Carbon structural, High-Strength Low- Alloy and High
Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability
B209-01..................................Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate
C1071-00................................Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining
Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material)
E84-01 ....................................Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics
of Building Materials
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
90A-99 ...................................Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
96-01 ......................................Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial
Cooking Operations
F. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):
2nd Edition – 1995 .................HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and
Flexible
1st Edition, 1985 ....................HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual
6th Edition – 1992..................Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards
G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
33-93 ......................................UL Standard for Safety Heat Responsive Links for Fire
Protection Service
181-96 ....................................UL Standard for Safety Factory-Made Air Ducts and
Connectors
555-02 ...................................Fire Dampers
555S-02 .................................Smoke Dampers
516
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCT MATERIALS AND SEALANTS
A. General: Except for systems specified otherwise, construct ducts, casings, and accessories
of galvanized sheet steel, ASTM A527, coating G90; or, aluminum sheet, ASTM B209,
alloy 1100, 3003 or 5052.
B. Specified Corrosion Resistant Systems: Stainless steel sheet, ASTM A167, Class 302 or
304, Condition A (annealed) Finish No. 4 for exposed ducts and Finish No. 2B for
concealed duct or ducts located in mechanical rooms.
C. Optional Duct Materials:
D. Joint Sealing: Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, paragraph S1.9.
1. Sealant: Elastomeric compound, gun or brush grade, maximum 25 flame spread and
50 smoke developed (dry state) compounded specifically for sealing ductwork as
recommended by the manufacturer. Generally provide liquid sealant, with or without
compatible tape, for low clearance slip joints and heavy, permanently elastic, mastic
type where clearances are larger. Oil base caulking and glazing compounds are not
acceptable because they do not retain elasticity and bond.
2. Tape: Use only tape specifically designated by the sealant manufacturer and apply
only over wet sealant. Pressure sensitive tape shall not be used on bare metal or on
dry sealant.
3. Gaskets in Flanged Joints: Soft neoprene.
E. Approved factory made joints such as DUCTMATE SYSTEM may be used.
2.2 DUCT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A. Follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
B. Duct Pressure Class: 500 Pa (2 inch) W.G.
C. Seal Class: As shown on the drawings and in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air
Duct Leakage Test Manual.
D. Volume Dampers: Single blade or opposed blade, multi-louver type as detailed in
SMACNA Standards. Refer to SMACNA Detail Figure 2-12 for Single Blade and Figure
2.13 for Multi-blade Volume Dampers.
E. Duct Hangers and Supports: Refer to SMACNA Standards Section IV. Avoid use of
trapeze hangers for round duct.
517
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2.3 DUCT LINER (WHERE INDICATED ON DRAWINGS)
A. Duct sizes shown on drawings for lined duct are clear opening inside lining.
B. Rectangular Duct or Casing Liner: ASTM C1071, Type I (flexible), or Type II (board),
25 mm (one inch) minimum thickness, applied with mechanical fasteners and 100 percent
coverage of adhesive in conformance with SMACNA, Duct Liner Application Standard.
2.4 DUCT ACCESS DOORS, PANELS AND SECTIONS
A. Provide access doors, sized and located for maintenance work, upstream, in the following
locations:
1. Each duct mounted coil and humidifier.
2. Each fire damper (for link service), smoke damper and automatic control damper.
3. Each duct mounted smoke detector.
4. For cleaning operating room supply air duct and kitchen hood exhaust duct, locate
access doors at 6 m (20 feet) intervals and at each change in duct direction.
B. Openings shall be as large as feasible in small ducts, 300 mm by 300 mm (12 inch by 12
inch) minimum where possible. Access sections in insulated ducts shall be double-wall,
insulated. Transparent shatterproof covers are preferred for uninsulated ducts.
1. For rectangular ducts: Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards
(Figure 2-12).
2. For round and flat oval duct: Refer to SMACNA HVAC duct Construction Standards
(Figure 2-11).
2.5 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT CONNECTORS
A. General: Factory fabricated, complying with NFPA 90A for connectors not passing
through floors of buildings. Flexible ducts shall not penetrate any fire or smoke barrier
which is required to have a fire resistance rating of one hour or more. Flexible duct length
shall not exceed 1.5 m (5 feet). Provide insulated acoustical air duct connectors in supply
air duct systems and elsewhere as shown.
B. Flexible ducts shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., complying with UL 181.
Ducts larger than 200 mm (8 inches) in diameter shall be Class 1. Ducts 200 mm (8
inches) in diameter and smaller may be Class 1 or Class 2.
C. Insulated Flexible Air Duct: Factory made including mineral fiber insulation with
maximum C factor of 0.25 at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F) mean temperature, encased
518
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
with a low permeability moisture barrier outer jacket, having a puncture resistance of not
less than 50 Beach Units. Acoustic insertion loss shall not be less than 3 dB per 300 mm
(foot) of straight duct, at 500 Hz, based on 150 mm (6 inch) duct, of 750 m/min (2500
fpm).
D. Application Criteria:
1. Temperature range: -18 to 93 degrees C (0 to 200 degrees F) internal.
2. Maximum working velocity: 1200 m/min (4000 feet per minute).
3. Minimum working pressure, inches of water gage: 2500 Pa (10 inches) positive, 500
Pa (2 inches) negative.
E. Duct Clamps: 100 percent nylon strap, 80 kg (175 pounds) minimum loop tensile strength
manufactured for this purpose or stainless steel strap with cadmium plated worm gear
tightening device. Apply clamps with sealant and as approved for UL 181, Class 1
installation.
2.6 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL
Refer to Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with provisions of Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION, particularly regarding coordination with other
trades and work in existing buildings.
B. Fabricate and install ductwork and accessories in accordance with referenced SMACNA
Standards:
1. Drawings show the general layout of ductwork and accessories but do not show all
required fittings and offsets that may be necessary to connect ducts to equipment,
boxes, diffusers, grilles, etc., and to coordinate with other trades. Fabricate ductwork
based on field measurements. Provide all necessary fittings and offsets at no
additional cost to the government. Coordinate with other trades for space available
and relative location of HVAC equipment and accessories on ceiling grid. Duct sizes
on the drawings are inside dimensions which shall be altered by Contractor to other
dimensions with the same air handling characteristics where necessary to avoid
interferences and clearance difficulties.
519
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Provide duct transitions, offsets and connections to dampers, coils, and other
equipment in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Section II. Provide streamliner,
when an obstruction cannot be avoided and must be taken in by a duct. Repair
galvanized areas with galvanizing repair compound.
3. Provide bolted construction and tie-rod reinforcement in accordance with SMACNA
Standards.
4. Construct casings, eliminators, and pipe penetrations in accordance with SMACNA
Standards, Chapter 6. Design casing access doors to swing against air pressure so that
pressure helps to maintain a tight seal.
C. Install duct hangers and supports in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Chapter 4.
D. Install fire dampers in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to conform to the
installation used for the rating test.
E. Seal openings around duct penetrations of floors and fire rated partitions with fire stop
material as required by NFPA 90A.
F. Flexible duct installation: Refer to SMACNA Standards, Chapter 3. Ducts shall be
continuous, single pieces not over 1.5 m (5 feet) long (NFPA 90A), as straight and short
as feasible, adequately supported. Centerline radius of bends shall be not less than two
duct diameters. Make connections with clamps as recommended by SMACNA. Clamp
per SMACNA with one clamp on the core duct and one on the insulation jacket. Flexible
ducts shall not penetrate floors, or any chase or partition designated as a fire or smoke
barrier, including corridor partitions fire rated one hour or two hour. Support ducts
SMACNA Standards.
G. Where diffusers, registers and grilles cannot be installed to avoid seeing inside the duct,
paint the inside of the duct with flat black paint to reduce visibility.
H. Control Damper Installation:
1. Provide necessary blank-off plates required to install dampers that are smaller than
duct size. Provide necessary transitions required to install dampers larger than duct
size.
2. Assemble multiple sections dampers with required interconnecting linkage and
extend required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper
motors.
520
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3. Provide necessary sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate stratification and provide air
volumes specified. Locate baffles by experimentation, and affix and seal permanently
in place, only after stratification problem has been eliminated.
4. Install all damper control/adjustment devices on stand-offs to allow complete
coverage of insulation.
I. Low Pressure Duct Liner: Install in accordance with SMACNA, Duct Liner Application
Standard.
J. Protection and Cleaning: Adequately protect equipment and materials against physical
damage. Place equipment in first class operating condition, or return to source of supply
for repair or replacement, as determined by Resident Engineer. Protect equipment and
ducts during construction against entry of foreign matter to the inside and clean both
inside and outside before operation and painting. When new ducts are connected to
existing ductwork, clean both new and existing ductwork by mopping and vacuum
cleaning inside and outside before operation.
3.2 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS AND REPAIR
A. Leak testing company shall be independent of the sheet metal company employed by
General Contractor.
B. Ductwork leak test shall be performed for the entire air distribution supply, return,
exhaust system Section by Section including fans, coils and filter Section designated as
static pressure class 750 Pa (3 inch W.G.) and above. All supply ductwork less than 500
Pa (3 inch W.G) shall also be tested where there is no air terminal units employed in the
system.
C. Test procedure, apparatus and report shall conform to SMACNA Leakage Test manual.
The maximum leakage rate allowed is 4 percent of the design air flow rate.
D. All ductwork shall be leak tested first before enclosed in a shaft or covered in other
inaccessible areas.
E. All tests shall be performed in the presence of the Resident Engineer and the Test and
Balance agency. The Test and Balance agency shall measure and record duct leakage and
report to the Resident Engineer and identify leakage source with excessive leakage.
521
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
F. If any portion of the duct system tested fails to meet the permissible leakage level, the
Contractor shall rectify sealing of ductwork to bring it into compliance and shall retest it
until acceptable leakage is demonstrated to the Resident Engineer.
G. All tests and necessary repairs shall be completed prior to insulation or concealment of
ductwork.
H. Make sure all openings used for testing flow and temperatures by TAB Contractor are
sealed properly.
3.3 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB)
Refer to Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.
3.4 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS
Refer to Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM
GENERATION
- - - E N D OF SECTION 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS- - -
SECTION 23 37 00
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
522
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Air outlets and inlets, including the following:
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. General Mechanical Requirements: Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.
B. Noise Level Requirements: Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to article, QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK
RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.
B. Fire Safety Code: Comply with NFPA 90A.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Diffusers, registers, grilles and accessories.
C. Coordination Drawings: Refer to article, SUBMITTALS, in Section 23 05 11,
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. Air Diffusion Council Test Code:
1062 GRD-84 .........................Certification, Rating, and Test Manual 4th Edition
C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
ASCE7-98 ..............................Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A167-99 .................................Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip
523
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
A653-01 .................................Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip process
A1011-02 ...............................Standard Specification for Steel Sheet and Strip Hot rolled
Carbon structural, High-Strength Low- Alloy and High
Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability
B209-01..................................Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate
E84-01 ....................................Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics
of Building Materials
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
90A-99 ...................................Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
96-01 ......................................Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial
Cooking Operations
F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
33-93 ......................................UL Standard for Safety Heat Responsive Links for Fire
Protection Service
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
A. Materials:
1. Steel or aluminum. Provide manufacturer's standard gasket.
2. Exposed Fastenings: The same material as the respective inlet or outlet. Fasteners for
aluminum may be stainless steel.
3. Contractor shall review all ceiling drawings and details and provide all ceiling
mounted devices with appropriate dimensions and trim for the specific locations.
B. Performance Test Data: In accordance with Air Diffusion Council Code 1062GRD. Refer
to Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT for NC criteria.
524
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C. Air Supply Outlets:
1. Ceiling Diffusers: Suitable for surface mounting, exposed T-bar or special tile
ceilings, off-white finish, square or round neck connection as shown on the drawings.
Provide plaster frame for units in plaster ceilings.
a. Square, louver, fully adjustable pattern: Round neck, surface mounting unless
shown otherwise on the drawings. Provide equalizing or control grid and volume
control damper.
b. Louver face type: Square or rectangular, removable core for 1, 2, 3, or 4 way
directional pattern. Provide equalizing or control grid and opposed blade damper.
c. Perforated face type: Manual adjustment for one-, two-, three-, or four-way
horizontal air distribution pattern without change of air volume or pressure.
Provide equalizing or control grid and opposed blade over overlapping blade
damper. Perforated face diffusers for VAV systems shall have the pattern
controller on the inner face, rather than in the neck and designed to discharge air
horizontally at the ceiling maintaining a Coanda effect.
2. Registers: Double deflection type with horizontal face bars and opposed blade
damper with removable key operator.
a. Margin: Flat, 30 mm (1-1/4 inches) wide.
b. Bar spacing: 20 mm (3/4 inch) maximum.
c. Finish: Off white baked enamel for ceiling mounted units. Wall units shall have a
prime coat for field painting, or shall be extruded with manufacturer's standard
finish.
5. Grilles: Same as registers but without the opposed blade damper.
D. Return and Exhaust Registers and Grilles: Provide opposed blade damper without
removable key operator for registers.
1. Finish: Off-white baked enamel for ceiling mounted units. Wall units shall have a
prime coat for field painting, or shall be extruded aluminum with manufacturer's
standard aluminum finish.
2. Standard Type: Fixed horizontal face bars set at 30 to 45 degrees, approximately 30
mm (1-1/4 inch) margin.
3. Perforated Face Type: To match supply units.
525
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
4. Grid Core Type: 13 mm by 13 mm (1/2 inch by 1/2 inch) core with 30 mm (1-1/4
inch) margin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with provisions of Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION, particularly regarding coordination with other
trades and work in existing buildings.
B. Protection and Cleaning: Adequately protect equipment and materials against physical
damage. Place equipment in first class operating condition, or return to source of supply
for repair or replacement, as determined by Resident Engineer. Protect equipment during
construction against entry of foreign matter to the inside and clean both inside and
outside before operation and painting.
3.2 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB)
Refer to Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.
3.3 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS
Refer to Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM
GENERATION
- - - E N D OF SECTION 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS- - -
526
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 23 82 00
CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
Convectors and finned-tube radiation.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM
GENERATION: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to
more than one section of Division 23.
B. Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT: Noise requirements.
C. Section 23 21 13, HYDRONIC PIPING: Heating hot water and chilled water piping.
D. Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS: Ducts and flexible connectors.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Refer to Paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK
RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Convectors.
2. Finned-tube radiation.
D. Certificates:
1. Compliance with paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE.
2. Compliance with specified standards.
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit in accordance with paragraph,
INSTRUCTIONS, in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
527
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI):
440-05 ....................................Room Fan Coils
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
90A-02 ...................................Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
70-05 ......................................National Electrical Code
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
181-05 ....................................Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors
1995-05 ..................................Heating and Cooling Equipment
1.6 GUARANTY
In accordance with Section 00 72 00, GENERAL CONDITIONS.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONVECTORS
A. Ratings: In accordance with ARI 445.
B. Enclosure: Steel panels, minimum 1.3 mm (l8 gage) front and 1.0 mm (20 gage) back and
sides. Provide baked enamel finish in standard manufacturer's colors as selected by the
Architect. Provide easy access to heating elements, valves and controls.
l. Fully recessed units: Flanged enclosure with 13 mm (l/2-inch) thick fiber-glass
insulation on the back. Provide one-piece front panel with integral inlet and outlet
grilles.
2. Wall hung and freestanding units: Sloping top design.
C. Hydronic/Steam Heating Elements: Copper tubing expanded into cast iron or cast brass
headers and aluminum fins with integral collars bonded by mechanical expansion of
tubing. Elements shall withstand 690 kPa (l00 psig) air pressure when factory tested
under water.
2.2 FINNED-TUBE RADIATION
A. Ratings: Certified under the I=B=R program of the Gas Appliance Manufacturer’s
Association.
B. Enclosures: 1.6 mm (l6 gage) steel, sloping top, designed for wall mounting. Provide
baked enamel finish in standard manufacturer's colors as selected by the Architect. End
plates and corner pieces shall be die-formed with round edges and fit flush with enclosure
528
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
surface. Where continuous wall-to-wall installations are shown on the drawings provide
all fillers, corner fittings, sleeves, end caps and other accessories, which shall have the
same profile as the basic unit. Provide access panels or extensions where required for
access to valves, or traps shown on the drawings.
C. Hydronic/Steam Heating Elements: Steel pipe or nonferrous tubing with fins
mechanically bonded by mechanical expansion of the tube. Elements shall be positively
positioned front-to-back with provisions for silent horizontal expansion and contraction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Work shall be installed as shown and according to the manufacturer’s diagrams and
recommendations.
B. Handle and install units in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Support units rigidly so they remain stationary at all times. Cross-bracing or other means
of stiffening shall be provided as necessary. Method of support shall be such that
distortion and malfunction of units cannot occur.
D. Install fiberglass blanket insulation above hydronic radiant panels.
3.2 OPERATIONAL TEST
Refer to Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM
GENERATION.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 23 82 00 CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS- - -
529
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 26 05 11
REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS,
applies to all sections of Division 26.
B. Furnish and install electrical wiring, systems, equipment and accessories in accordance
with the specifications and drawings. Capacities and ratings of motors, transformers,
cable, switchboards, switchgear, panelboards, motor control centers, and other items and
arrangements for the specified items are shown on drawings.
C. Electrical service entrance equipment (arrangements for temporary and permanent
connections to the power company's system) shall conform to the power company's
requirements. Coordinate fuses, circuit breakers and relays with the power company's
system, and obtain power company approval for sizes and settings of these devices.
D. Wiring ampacities specified or shown on the drawings are based on copper conductors,
with the conduit and raceways accordingly sized. Aluminum conductors are prohibited.
1.2 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
A. References to the National Electrical Code (NEC), Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) are minimum installation requirement
standards.
B. Drawings and other specification sections shall govern in those instances where
requirements are greater than those specified in the above standards.
1.3 TEST STANDARDS
A. All materials and equipment shall be listed, labeled or certified by a nationally recognized
testing laboratory to meet Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., standards where test standards
have been established. Equipment and materials which are not covered by UL Standards
will be accepted provided equipment and material is listed, labeled, certified or otherwise
determined to meet safety requirements of a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
Equipment of a class which no nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, certifies,
lists, labels, or determines to be safe, will be considered if inspected or tested in
530
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
accordance with national industrial standards, such as NEMA, or ANSI. Evidence of
compliance shall include certified test reports and definitive shop drawings.
B. Definitions:
1. Listed; equipment or device of a kind mentioned which:
a. Is published by a nationally recognized laboratory which makes periodic
inspection of production of such equipment.
b. States that such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been
tested and found safe for use in a specified manner.
2. Labeled; equipment or device is when:
a. It embodies a valid label, symbol, or other identifying mark of a nationally
recognized testing laboratory such as Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
b. The laboratory makes periodic inspections of the production of such equipment.
c. The labeling indicates compliance with nationally recognized standards or tests to
determine safe use in a specified manner.
3. Certified; equipment or product is which:
a. Has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet
nationally recognized standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner.
b. Production of equipment or product is periodically inspected by a nationally
recognized testing laboratory.
c. Bears a label, tag, or other record of certification.
4. Nationally recognized testing laboratory; laboratory which is approved, in accordance
with OSHA regulations, by the Secretary of Labor.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES)
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and presently produce, as
one of the manufacturer's principal products, the equipment and material specified for
this project, and shall have manufactured the item for at least three years.
B. Product Qualification:
1. Manufacturer's product shall have been in satisfactory operation, on three installations
of similar size and type as this project, for approximately three years.
2. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a list of
installations where the products have been in operation before approval.
531
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C. Service Qualifications: There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or
trained by the manufacturer which will render satisfactory service to this installation
within four hours of receipt of notification that service is needed. Submit name and
address of service organizations.
1.5 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS
A. Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers
regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, for which replacement parts shall be
available.
B. When more than one unit of the same class of equipment is required, such units shall be
the product of a single manufacturer.
C. Equipment Assemblies and Components:
1. Components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer.
2. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which include components made by others,
shall assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit.
3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the
intended service.
4. Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
D. Factory wiring shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on all wiring
diagrams.
E. When Factory Testing Is Specified:
1. The Government shall have the option of witnessing factory tests. The contractor
shall notify the VA through the Resident Engineer a minimum of 15 working days
prior to the manufacturers making the factory tests.
2. Four copies of certified test reports containing all test data shall be furnished to the
Resident Engineer prior to final inspection and not more than 90 days after
completion of the tests.
3. When equipment fails to meet factory test and re-inspection is required, the contractor
shall be liable for all additional expenses, including expenses of the Government.
1.6 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
Where variations from the contract requirements are requested in accordance with
Section 00 72 00, GENERAL CONDITIONS and Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS,
532
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, the connecting work and related components shall
include, but not be limited to additions or changes to branch circuits, circuit protective
devices, conduits, wire, feeders, controls, panels and installation methods.
1.7 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
A. Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical
damage, dirt, moisture, cold and rain:
1. During installation, enclosures, equipment, controls, controllers, circuit protective
devices, and other like items, shall be protected against entry of foreign matter; and
be vacuum cleaned both inside and outside before testing and operating and
repainting if required.
2. Damaged equipment shall be, as determined by the Resident Engineer, placed in first
class operating condition or be returned to the source of supply for repair or
replacement.
3. Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable heavy kraft
paper, sheet vinyl or equal.
4. Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be refinished with the same quality
of paint and workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are not
obvious.
1.8 WORK PERFORMANCE
A. All electrical work must comply with the requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC), NFPA 70B,
NFPA 70E, OSHA Part 1910 subpart J, OSHA Part 1910 subpart S and OSHA Part 1910
subpart K in addition to other references required by contract.
B. Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibility of the contractor.
C. Electrical work shall be accomplished with all affected circuits or equipment deenergized. When an electrical outage cannot be accomplished in this manner for the
required work, the following requirements are mandatory:
1. Electricians must use full protective equipment (i.e., certified and tested insulating
material to cover exposed energized electrical components, certified and tested
insulated tools, etc.) while working on energized systems in accordance with NFPA
70E.
533
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Electricians must wear personal protective equipment while working on energized
systems in accordance with NFPA 70E.
3. Before initiating any work, a job specific work plan must be developed by the
contractor with a peer review conducted and documented by the Resident Engineer
and Medical Center staff. The work plan must include procedures to be used on and
near the live electrical equipment, barriers to be installed, safety equipment to be used
and exit pathways.
4. Work on energized circuits or equipment cannot begin until prior written approval is
obtained from the Director of the Medical Center.
D. For work on existing stations, arrange, phase and perform work to assure electrical
service for other buildings at all times. Refer to Article OPERATIONS AND STORAGE
AREAS under Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
E. New work shall be installed and connected to existing work neatly and carefully.
Disturbed or damaged work shall be replaced or repaired to its prior conditions, as
required by Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
F. Coordinate location of equipment and conduit with other trades to minimize
interferences. See Section 00 72 00, GENERAL CONDITIONS.
1.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment location shall be as close as practical to locations shown on the drawings.
B. Working spaces shall not be less than specified in the NEC for all voltages specified.
C. Inaccessible Equipment:
1. Where the Government determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not
conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, the equipment shall be
removed and reinstalled as directed at no additional cost to the Government.
2. "Conveniently accessible" is defined as being capable of being reached without the
use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as, but
not limited to, motors, pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping, ductwork, conduit
and raceways.
1.10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. In addition to the requirements of the NEC, install an identification sign which clearly
indicates information required for use and maintenance of items such as panelboards,
534
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
cabinets, motor controllers (starters), safety switches, separately enclosed circuit
breakers, individual breakers and controllers in switchboards, switchgear and motor
control assemblies, control devices and other significant equipment.
B. Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core with engraved
lettering, a minimum of 6 mm (1/4 inch) high. Secure nameplates with screws.
Nameplates that are furnished by manufacturer as a standard catalog item, or where other
method of identification is herein specified, are exceptions.
1.11 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. The Government's approval shall be obtained for all equipment and material before
delivery to the job site. Delivery, storage or installation of equipment or material which
has not had prior approval will not be permitted at the job site.
C. All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings
and other data necessary for the Government to ascertain that the proposed equipment
and materials comply with specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for
approval shall be legible and clearly identify equipment being submitted.
D. Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies which consist of more than
one item or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole. Partial
submittals will not be considered for approval.
1. Mark the submittals, "SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION__________________".
2. Submittals shall be marked to show specification reference including the section and
paragraph numbers.
3. Submit each section separately.
E. The submittals shall include the following:
1. Information that confirms compliance with contract requirements. Include the
manufacturer's name, model or catalog numbers, catalog information, technical data
sheets, shop drawings, pictures, nameplate data and test reports as required.
2.
Submittals are required for all equipment anchors and supports. Submittals shall
include weights, dimensions, center of gravity, standard connections, manufacturer's
recommendations and behavior problems (e.g., vibration, thermal expansion,)
535
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
associated with equipment or piping so that the proposed installation can be properly
reviewed.
3. Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams for communication and signal
systems, control system and equipment assemblies. All terminal points and wiring
shall be identified on wiring diagrams.
4. Parts list which shall include those replacement parts recommended by the equipment
manufacturer, quantity of parts, current price and availability of each part.
F. Manuals: Submit in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
1. Maintenance and Operation Manuals: Submit as required for systems and equipment
specified in the technical sections. Furnish four copies, bound in hardback binders,
(manufacturer's standard binders) or an approved equivalent. Furnish one complete
manual as specified in the technical section but in no case later than prior to
performance of systems or equipment test, and furnish the remaining manuals prior to
contract completion.
2. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words "MAINTENANCE AND
OPERATION MANUAL," the name and location of the system, equipment, building,
name of Contractor, and contract number. Include in the manual the names,
addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing the system or
equipment and the local representatives for the system or equipment.
3. Provide a "Table of Contents" and assemble the manual to conform to the table of
contents, with tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The
instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.
4. The manuals shall include:
a. Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain
detailed operation and control of the equipment.
b. A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown.
c. Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.
d. Installation and maintenance instructions.
e. Safety precautions.
f. Diagrams and illustrations.
g. Testing methods.
536
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
h. Performance data.
i. Lubrication schedule including type, grade, temperature range, and frequency.
j. Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on the
use of special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of supply,
recommended spare parts, and name of servicing organization.
k. Appendix; list qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the
equipment, including addresses and certified qualifications.
G. Approvals will be based on complete submission of manuals together with shop
drawings.
H. After approval and prior to installation, furnish the Resident Engineer with one sample of
each of the following:
1. A 300 mm (12 inch) length of each type and size of wire and cable along with the tag
from the coils of reels from which the samples were taken.
2. Each type of conduit coupling, bushing and termination fitting.
3. Conduit hangers, clamps and supports.
4. Duct sealing compound.
5. Each type of receptacle, toggle switch, outlet box, manual motor starter, device plate,
engraved nameplate, wire and cable splicing and terminating material and single pole
molded case circuit breaker.
6. Each type of light fixture specified in Section 26 51 00, INTERIOR LIGHTING or
shown on the drawings.
1.12 SINGULAR NUMBER
Where any device or part of equipment is referred to in these specifications in the
singular number (e.g., "the switch"), this reference shall be deemed to apply to as many
such devices as are required to complete the installation as shown on the drawings.
1.13 TRAINING
A. Training shall be provided in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, of Section 01
00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
B. Training shall be provided for the particular equipment or system as required in each
associated specification.
537
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C. A training schedule shall be developed and submitted by the contractor and approved by
the Resident Engineer at least 30 days prior to the planned training.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 26 05 11 REQUIREMENT FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATIONS- - -
538
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 26 05 21
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS
AND BELOW)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of the low voltage
power and lighting wiring.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of time rated construction: Section
07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.
B. General electrical requirements that are common to more than one section in Division 26:
Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.
C. Conduits for cables and wiring: Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
D. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible
ground fault currents: Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES, furnish the following:
1. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Showing each cable type and rating.
2. Certificates: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver to the Resident Engineer
four copies of the certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings
and specifications and has been properly installed.
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and
errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are reference
in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American Society of Testing Material (ASTM):
D2301-04 ...............................Standard Specification for Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure
Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape
C. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
539
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
A-A-59544-00 ........................Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation)
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70-05 ......................................National Electrical Code (NEC)
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
44-02 ......................................Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables
83-03 ......................................Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
467-01 ....................................Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment
486A-01 .................................Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper
Conductors
486C-02..................................Splicing Wire Connectors
486D-02 .................................Insulated Wire Connector Systems for Underground Use or
in Damp or Wet Locations
486E-00 ..................................Equipment Wiring Terminals for Use with Aluminum
and/or Copper Conductors
493-01 ....................................Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch
Circuit Cable
514B-02..................................Fittings for Cable and Conduit
1479-03 ..................................Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABLE AND WIRE (POWER AND LIGHTING)
A. Cable and Wire shall be in accordance with Fed. Spec. A-A-59544, except as hereinafter
specified.
B. Single Conductor:
1. Shall be annealed copper.
2. Shall be stranded for sizes No. 8 AWG and larger, solid for sizes No. 10 AWG and
smaller.
3. Shall be minimum size No. 12 AWG, except where smaller sizes are allowed herein.
C. Insulation:
1. THW, XHHW, or dual rated THHN-THWN shall be in accordance with UL 44, and
83.
2. Direct burial: UF or USE shall be in accordance with UL 493.
540
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3. Isolated power system wiring: Type XHHW with a dielectric constant of 3.5 or less.
D. Color Code:
1. Secondary service, feeder and branch circuit conductors shall be color coded as
follows:
208/120 volt
Phase
480/277 volt
Black
A
Brown
Red
B
Orange
Blue
C
Yellow
White
Neutral
Gray *
* or white with colored (other than green) tracer.
a. The lighting circuit “switch legs” and 3-way switch “traveling wires” shall have
color coding unique and distinct (i.e. pink and purple) from the color coding
indicated above. The unique color codes shall be solid and in accordance with the
NEC. Field coordinate for a final color coding with the Resident Engineer.
2. Use solid color compound or solid color coating for No. 12 AWG and No. 10 AWG
branch circuit conductors and neutral sizes.
3. Phase conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be color-coded using one of the
following methods:
a. Solid color compound or solid color coating.
b. Stripes, bands, or hash marks of color specified above.
c. Color as specified using 19 mm (3/4 inch) wide tape. Apply tape in half
overlapping turns for a minimum of 75 mm (three inches) for terminal points, and
in junction boxes, pull boxes, troughs, manholes, and handholes. Apply the last
two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Where cable
markings are covered by tape, apply tags to cable stating size and insulation type.
4. For modifications and additions to existing wiring systems, color coding shall
conform to the existing wiring system.
5. Color code for isolated power system wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC.
541
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2.2 SPLICES AND JOINTS
A. In accordance with UL 486A, C, D, E and NEC.
B. Branch circuits (No. 10 AWG and smaller):
1. Connectors: Solderless, screw-on, reusable pressure cable type, 600 volt, 105 degree
C with integral insulation, approved for copper and aluminum conductors.
2. The integral insulator shall have a skirt to completely cover the stripped wires.
3. The number, size, and combination of conductors, as listed on the manufacturers
packaging shall be strictly complied with.
C. Feeder Circuits:
1. Connectors shall be indent, hex screw, or bolt clamp-type of high conductivity and
corrosion-resistant material.
2. Field installed compression connectors for cable sizes 250 kcmil and larger shall have
not less than two clamping elements or compression indents per wire.
3. Insulate splices and joints with materials approved for the particular use, location,
voltage, and temperature. Insulate with not less than that of the conductor level that is
being joined.
4. Plastic electrical insulating tape: ASTM D2304 shall apply, flame retardant, cold and
weather resistant.
2.3 CONTROL WIRING
A. Unless otherwise specified in other sections of these specifications, control wiring shall
be as specified for power and lighting wiring, except the minimum size shall be not less
than No. 14 AWG.
B. Control wiring shall be large enough so that the voltage drop under inrush conditions
does not adversely affect operation of the controls.
2.4 WIRE LUBRICATING COMPOUND
A. Suitable for the wire insulation and conduit it is used with, and shall not harden or
become adhesive.
B. Shall not be used on wire for isolated type electrical power systems.
2.5 FIREPROOFING TAPE
A. The tape shall consist of a flexible, conformable fabric of organic composition coated one
side with flame-retardant elastomer.
542
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. The tape shall be self-extinguishing and shall not support combustion. It shall be arcproof and fireproof.
C. The tape shall not deteriorate when subjected to water, gases, salt water, sewage, or
fungus and be resistant to sunlight and ultraviolet light.
D. The finished application shall withstand a 200-ampere arc for not less than 30 seconds.
E. Securing tape: Glass cloth electrical tape not less than 0.18 mm (7 mils) thick, and 19 mm
(3/4 inch) wide.
2.6 WARNING TAPE
A. The tape shall be standard, 76 mm (3 inch) wide, 4-Mil polyethylene detectable type.
B. The tape shall be red with black letters indicating “CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC
LINE BELOW”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install in accordance with the NEC, and as specified.
B. Install all wiring in raceway systems, except where direct burial or HCF Type AC cables
are used.
C. Splice cables and wires only in outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, manholes, or
handholes.
D. Wires of different systems (i.e. 120V, 277V) shall not be installed in the same conduit or
junction box system.
E. Install cable supports for all vertical feeders in accordance with the NEC. Provide split
wedge type which firmly clamps each individual cable and tightens due to cable weight.
F. For panelboards, cabinets, wireways, switches, and equipment assemblies, neatly form,
train, and tie the cables in individual circuits.
G. Seal cable and wire entering a building from underground, between the wire and conduit
where the cable exits the conduit, with a non-hardening approved compound.
H. Wire Pulling:
1. Provide installation equipment that will prevent the cutting or abrasion of insulation
during pulling of cables.
2. Use ropes made of nonmetallic material for pulling feeders.
543
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3. Attach pulling lines for feeders by means of either woven basket grips or pulling eyes
attached directly to the conductors, as approved by the Resident Engineer.
4. Pull in multiple cables together in a single conduit.
I. No more than (3) single-phase branch circuits shall be installed in any one conduit.
J. The wires shall be derated in accordance with NEC Article 310. Neutral wires, under
conditions defined by the NEC, shall be considered current-carrying conductors.
3.2 SPLICE INSTALLATION
A. Splices and terminations shall be mechanically and electrically secure.
B. Where the Government determines that unsatisfactory splices or terminations have been
installed, remove the devices and install approved devices at no additional cost to the
Government.
3.3 CONTROL AND SIGNAL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Unless otherwise specified in other sections, install wiring and connect to
equipment/devices to perform the required functions as shown and specified.
B. Except where otherwise required, install a separate power supply circuit for each system
so that malfunctions in any system will not affect other systems.
C. Where separate power supply circuits are not shown, connect the systems to the nearest
panelboards of suitable voltages, which are intended to supply such systems and have
suitable spare circuit breakers or space for installation.
D. Install a red warning indicator on the handle of the branch circuit breaker for the power
supply circuit for each system to prevent accidental de-energizing of the systems.
E. System voltages shall be 120 volts or lower where shown on the drawings or as required
by the NEC.
3.4 CONTROL AND SIGNAL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A. Install a permanent wire marker on each wire at each termination.
B. Identifying numbers and letters on the wire markers shall correspond to those on the
wiring diagrams used for installing the systems.
C. Wire markers shall retain their markings after cleaning.
D. In each manhole and handhole, install embossed brass tags to identify the system served
and function.
544
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3.5 FEEDER IDENTIFICATION
A. In each interior pulbox and junction box, install metal tags on each circuit cables and
wires to clearly designate their circuit identification and voltage.
B. In each manhole and handhole, provide tags of the embossed brass type, showing the
cable type and voltage rating. Attach the tags to the cables with slip-free plastic cable
lacing units.
3.6 EXISITNG WIRING
Unless specifically indicated on the plans, existing wiring shall not be reused for the new
installation. Only wiring that conforms to the specifications and applicable codes may be
reused. If existing wiring does not meet these requirements, existing wiring may not be
reused and new wires shall be installed.
3.7 FIELD TESTING
A. Feeders and branch circuits shall have their insulation tested after installation and before
connection to utilization devices such as fixtures, motors, or appliances.
B. Tests shall be performed by megger and conductors shall test free from short-circuits and
grounds.
C. Test conductor phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground.
D. The Contractor shall furnish the instruments, materials, and labor for these tests.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 26 05 21 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTIRCAL - - -
545
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies general grounding and bonding requirements of electrical
equipment operations and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault
currents.
B. “Grounding electrode system” refers to all electrodes required by NEC, as well as
including made, supplementary, lightning protection system grounding electrodes.
C. The terms “connect” and “bond” are used interchangeably in this specification and have
the same meaning.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General
electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one section of Division
26.
B. Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Low Voltage power and lighting wiring.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATIONS.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance
with drawings and specifications.
2. Include the location of system grounding electrode connections and the routing of
aboveground and underground grounding electrode conductors.
C. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports of ground resistance.
D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to
the Resident Engineer:
1. Certification that the materials and installation is in accordance with the drawings and
specifications.
546
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Certification, by the Contractor, that the complete installation has been properly
installed and tested.
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and
errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are
referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
B1-2001..................................Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire
B8-2004..................................Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded
Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
81-1983 ..................................IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground
Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground
System
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70-2005 ..................................National Electrical Code (NEC)
99-2005 ..................................Health Care Facilities
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
44-2005 .................................Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables
83-2003 .................................Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
467-2004 ...............................Grounding and Bonding Equipment
486A-486B-2003 ..................Wire Connectors
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS
A. Equipment grounding conductors shall be UL 83 insulated stranded copper, except that
sizes 6 mm² (10 AWG) and smaller shall be solid copper. Insulation color shall be
continuous green for all equipment grounding conductors, except that wire sizes 25 mm²
(4 AWG) and larger shall be permitted to be identified per NEC.
B. Bonding conductors shall be ASTM B8 bare stranded copper, except that sizes 6 mm² (10
AWG) and smaller shall be ASTM B1 solid bare copper wire.
547
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C. Isolated Power System: Type XHHW-2 insulation with a dielectric constant of 3.5 or
less.
D. Electrical System Grounding: Conductor sizes shall not be less than what is shown on the
drawings and not less than required by the NEC, whichever is greater.
2.2 GROUND RODS
A. Copper clad steel, 19 mm (3/4-inch) diameter by 3000 mm (10 feet) long, conforming to
UL 467.
B. Quantity of rods shall be as required to obtain the specified ground resistance.
2.3 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS
Components shall meet or exceed UL 467 and be clearly marked with the manufacturer,
catalog number, and permitted conductor size(s).
2.4 GROUND CONNECTIONS
A. Below Grade: Exothermic-welded type connectors.
B. Above Grade:
1. Bonding Jumpers: compression type connectors, using zinc-plated fasteners and
external tooth lockwashers.
2. Ground Busbars: Two-hole compression type lugs using tin-plated copper or copper
alloy bolts and nuts.
3. Rack and Cabinet Ground Bars: one-hole compression-type lugs using zinc-plated or
copper alloy fasteners.
2.5 EQUIPMENT RACK AND CABINET GROUND BARS
Provide solid copper ground bars designed for mounting on the framework of open or
cabinet-enclosed equipment racks with minimum dimensions of 4 mm thick by 19 mm
wide (3/8 inch x ¾ inch).
2.6 GROUND TERMINAL BLOCKS
At any equipment mounting location (e.g. backboards and hinged cover enclosures)
where rack-type ground bars cannot be mounted, provide screw lug-type terminal blocks.
2.7 SPLICE CASE GROUND ACCESSORIES
Splice case grounding and bonding accessories shall be supplied by the splice case
manufacturer when available. Otherwise, use 16 mm² (6 AWG) insulated ground wire
with shield bonding connectors.
548
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Ground in accordance with the NEC, as shown on drawings, and as hereinafter specified.
B. System Grounding:
1. Secondary service neutrals: Ground at the supply side of the secondary disconnecting
means and at the related transformers.
2. Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from the service entrance):
Ground the secondary neutral.
3. Isolation transformers and isolated power systems shall not be system grounded.
C. Equipment Grounding: Metallic structures (including ductwork and building steel),
enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, and other
conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits shall be bonded and grounded.
D. Special Grounding: For patient care area electrical power system grounding, conform to
NFPA 99, and NEC.
3.2 INACCESSIBLE GROUNDING CONNECTIONS
Make grounding connections, which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible
(except connections for which periodic testing access is required) by exothermic weld.
3.3 CORROSION INHIBITORS
When making ground and ground bonding connections, apply a corrosion inhibitor to all
contact surfaces. Use corrosion inhibitor appropriate for protecting a connection between
the metals used.
3.4 CONDUCTIVE PIPING
A. Bond all conductive piping systems, interior and exterior, to the building to the grounding
electrode system. Bonding connections shall be made as close as practical to the
equipment ground bus.
B. In operating rooms and at intensive care and coronary care type beds, bond the gases and
suction piping, at the outlets, directly to the room or patient ground bus.
3.5 ELECTRICAL ROOM GROUNDING
Building Earth Ground Busbars: Provide ground busbar hardware at each
electrical room and connect to pigtail extensions of the building grounding ring.
549
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3.6 WIREWAY GROUNDING
A. Ground and Bond Metallic Wireway Systems as follows:
1. Bond the metallic structures of wireway to provide 100 percent electrical continuity
throughout the wireway system by connecting a 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumper at
all intermediate metallic enclosures and across all section junctions.
2. Install insulated 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumpers between the wireway system
bonded as required in paragraph 1 above, and the closest building ground at each end
and approximately every 16 meters (50 feet).
3. Use insulated 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumpers to ground or bond metallic wireway
at each end at all intermediate metallic enclosures and cross all section junctions.
4. Use insulated 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumpers to ground cable tray to columnmounted building ground plates (pads) at each end and approximately every 15
meters.
3.7 GROUND RESISTANCE
A. Grounding system resistance to ground shall not exceed 5 ohms. Make necessary
modifications or additions to the grounding electrode system for compliance without
additional cost to the Government. Final tests shall assure that this requirement is met.
B. Resistance of the grounding electrode system shall be measured using a four-terminal
fall-of-potential method as defined in IEEE 81. Ground resistance measurements shall be
made before the electrical distribution system is energized and shall be made in normally
dry conditions not less than 48 hours after the last rainfall. Resistance measurements of
separate grounding electrode systems shall be made before the systems are bonded
together below grade. The combined resistance of separate systems may be used to meet
the required resistance, but the specified number of electrodes must still be provided.
C. Services at power company interface points shall comply with the power company
ground resistance requirements.
D. Below-grade connections shall be visually inspected by the Resident Engineer prior to
backfilling. The Contractor shall notify the Resident Engineer 24 hours before the
connections are ready for inspection.
3.8 GROUND ROD INSTALLATION
A. Drive each rod vertically in the earth, not less than 3000 mm (10 feet) in depth.
550
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Where permanently concealed ground connections are required, make the connections by
the exothermic process to form solid metal joints. Make accessible ground connections
with mechanical pressure type ground connectors.
C. Where rock prevents the driving of vertical ground rods, install angled ground rods or
grounding electrodes in horizontal trenches to achieve the specified resistance.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING & BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM- - -
551
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of conduit, fittings, and
boxes to form complete, coordinated, grounded raceway systems. Raceways are required
for all wiring unless shown or specified otherwise.
B. Definitions: The term conduit, as used in this specification, shall mean any or all of the
raceway types specified.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Mounting board for telephone closets: Section 06 10 00, ROUGH CARPENTRY.
B. Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of fire rated construction: Section 07
84 00, FIRESTOPPING.
C. Sealing around conduit penetrations through the building envelope to prevent moisture
migration into the building: Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.
D. Identification and painting of conduit and other devices: Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.
E. General electrical requirements and items that is common to more than one section of
Division 26: Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATIONS.
F. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible
ground fault currents: Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
In accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES, furnish the following:
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Size and location of main feeders;
2. Size and location of panels and pull boxes
3. Layout of required conduit penetrations through structural elements.
4. The specific item proposed and its area of application shall be identified on the
catalog cuts.
552
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Certification: Prior to final inspection, deliver to the Resident Engineer four copies of the
certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and
has been properly installed.
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and
errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are
referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70-05 ......................................National Electrical Code (NEC)
C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1-03 ........................................Flexible Metal Conduit
5-01 ........................................Surface Metal Raceway and Fittings
6-03 ........................................Rigid Metal Conduit
50-03 ......................................Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
360-03 ....................................Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit
467-01 ....................................Grounding and Bonding Equipment
514A-01 .................................Metallic Outlet Boxes
514B-02..................................Fittings for Cable and Conduit
514C-05..................................Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes and Covers
651-02 ....................................Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit
651A-03 .................................Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit
797-03 ....................................Electrical Metallic Tubing
1242-00 ..................................Intermediate Metal Conduit
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
TC-3-04 ..................................PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing
FB1-03 ...................................Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conduit,
Electrical Metallic Tubing and Cable
553
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
A. Conduit Size: In accordance with the NEC, but not less than 13 mm (1/2 inch) unless
otherwise shown. Where permitted by the NEC, 13 mm (1/2 inch) flexible conduit may
be used for tap connections to recessed lighting fixtures.
B. Conduit:
1. Rigid galvanized steel: Shall Conform to UL 6, ANSI C80.1.
2. Rigid aluminum: Shall Conform to UL 6A, ANSI C80.5.
3. Rigid intermediate steel conduit (IMC): Shall Conform to UL 1242, ANSI C80.6.
4. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Shall Conform to UL 797, ANSI C80.3. Maximum
size not to exceed 105 mm (4 inch) and shall be permitted only with cable rated 600
volts or less.
5. Flexible galvanized steel conduit: Shall Conform to UL 1.
6. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit: Shall Conform to UL 360.
7. Surface metal raceway: Shall Conform to UL 5.
C. Conduit Fittings:
1. Rigid steel and IMC conduit fittings:
a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA FB1.
a. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows: Only steel or
malleable iron materials are acceptable. Integral retractable type IMC couplings
are also acceptable.
b. Locknuts: Bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of an
enclosure.
c. Bushings: Metallic insulating type, consisting of an insulating insert molded or
locked into the metallic body of the fitting. Bushings made entirely of metal or
nonmetallic material are not permitted.
d. Erickson (union-type) and set screw type couplings: Approved for use in concrete
are permitted for use to complete a conduit run where conduit is installed in
concrete. Use set screws of case hardened steel with hex head and cup point to
firmly seat in conduit wall for positive ground. Tightening of set screws with
pliers is prohibited.
554
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
e. Sealing fittings: Threaded cast iron type. Use continuous drain type sealing
fittings to prevent passage of water vapor. In concealed work, install fittings in
flush steel boxes with blank cover plates having the same finishes as that of other
electrical plates in the room.
2. Rigid aluminum conduit fittings:
a. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows: Malleable iron,
steel or aluminum alloy materials; Zinc or cadmium plate iron or steel fittings.
Aluminum fittings containing more than 0.4 percent copper are prohibited.
b. Locknuts and bushings: As specified for rigid steel and IMC conduit.
c. Set screw fittings: Not permitted for use with aluminum conduit.
3. Electrical metallic tubing fittings:
a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA FB1.
b. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.
c. Couplings and connectors: Concrete tight and rain tight, with connectors having
insulated throats. Use gland and ring compression type couplings and connectors
for conduit sizes 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller. Use set screw type couplings with
four set screws each for conduit sizes over 50 mm (2 inches). Use set screws of
case-hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in wall of conduit
for positive grounding.
d. Indent type connectors or couplings are prohibited.
e. Die-cast or pressure-cast zinc-alloy fittings or fittings made of "pot metal" are
prohibited.
4. Flexible steel conduit fittings:
a. Conform to UL 514B. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.
b. Clamp type, with insulated throat.
5. Surface metal raceway fittings: As recommended by the raceway manufacturer.
6. Expansion and deflection couplings:
a. Conform to UL 467 and UL 514B.
b. Accommodate, 19 mm (0.75 inch) deflection, expansion, or contraction in any
direction, and allow 30 degree angular deflections.
555
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
c. Include internal flexible metal braid sized to guarantee conduit ground continuity
and fault currents in accordance with UL 467, and the NEC code tables for
ground conductors.
d. Jacket: Flexible, corrosion-resistant, watertight, moisture and heat resistant
molded rubber material with stainless steel jacket clamps.
D. Conduit Supports:
1. Parts and hardware: Zinc-coat or provide equivalent corrosion protection.
2. Individual Conduit Hangers: Designed for the purpose, having a pre-assembled
closure bolt and nut, and provisions for receiving a hanger rod.
3. Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers: Not less than 38 mm by 38 mm (1-1/2 by 1-1/2
inch), 12 gage steel, cold formed, lipped channels; with not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch)
diameter steel hanger rods.
4. Solid Masonry and Concrete Anchors: Self-drilling expansion shields, or machine
bolt expansion.
E. Outlet, Junction, and Pull Boxes:
1. UL-50 and UL-514A.
2. Cast metal where required by the NEC or shown, and equipped with rustproof boxes.
3. Sheet metal boxes: Galvanized steel, except where otherwise shown.
4. Flush mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with raised covers so that front
face of raised cover is flush with the wall. Surface mounted wall or ceiling boxes
shall be installed with surface style flat or raised covers.
F. Wireways: Equip with hinged covers, except where removable covers are shown.
G. Warning Tape: Standard, 4-Mil polyethylene 76 mm (3 inch) wide tape detectable type,
red with black letters, and imprinted with “CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE
BELOW”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PENETRATIONS
A. Cutting or Holes:
1. Locate holes in advance where they are proposed in the structural sections such as
ribs or beams. Obtain the approval of the Resident Engineer prior to drilling through
structural sections.
556
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Cut holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures with a
diamond core drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or
manual hammer type drills are not allowed, except where permitted by the Resident
Engineer as required by limited working space.
B. Fire Stop: Where conduits, wireways, and other electrical raceways pass through fire
partitions, fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an
effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases as specified in Section 07 84
00, FIRESTOPPING, with rock wool fiber or silicone foam sealant only. Completely fill
and seal clearances between raceways and openings with the fire stop material.
C. Waterproofing: At floor, exterior wall, and roof conduit penetrations, completely seal
clearances around the conduit and make watertight as specified in Section 07 92 00,
JOINT SEALANTS.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. In accordance with UL, NEC, as shown, and as hereinafter specified.
B. Essential (Emergency) raceway systems shall be entirely independent of other raceway
systems, except where specifically "accepted" by NEC Article 517.
C. Install conduit as follows:
1. In complete runs before pulling in cables or wires.
2. Flattened, dented, or deformed conduit is not permitted. Remove and replace the
damaged conduits with new undamaged material.
3. Assure conduit installation does not encroach into the ceiling height head room,
walkways, or doorways.
4. Cut square with a hacksaw, ream, remove burrs, and draw up tight.
5. Mechanically and electrically continuous.
6. Independently support conduit at 8’0” on center. Do not use other supports i.e.,
(suspended ceilings, suspended ceiling supporting members, lighting fixtures,
conduits, mechanical piping, or mechanical ducts).
7. Support within 300 mm (1 foot) of changes of direction, and within 300 mm (1 foot)
of each enclosure to which connected.
8. Close ends of empty conduit with plugs or caps at the rough-in stage to prevent entry
of debris, until wires are pulled in.
557
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
9. Conduit installations under fume and vent hoods are prohibited.
10. Secure conduits to cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes and outlet boxes with bonding
type locknuts. For rigid and IMC conduit installations, provide a locknut on the inside
of the enclosure, made up wrench tight. Do not make conduit connections to junction
box covers.
11. Flashing of penetrations of the roof membrane is specified in Section 07 60 00,
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.
12. Do not use aluminum conduits in wet locations.
13. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein, all conduits shall be
installed concealed within finished walls, floors and ceilings.
D. Conduit Bends:
1. Make bends with standard conduit bending machines.
2. Conduit hickey may be used for slight offsets, and for straightening stubbed out
conduits.
3. Bending of conduits with a pipe tee or vise is prohibited.
E. Layout and Homeruns:
1. Install conduit with wiring, including homeruns, as shown.
2. Deviations: Make only where necessary to avoid interferences and only after
drawings showing the proposed deviations have been submitted approved by the
Resident Engineer.
3.3 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION
A. In Concrete:
1. Conduit: Rigid steel, IMC or EMT. Do not install EMT in concrete slabs that are in
contact with soil, gravel or vapor barriers.
2. Align and run conduit in direct lines.
3. Install conduit through concrete beams only when the following occurs:
a. Where shown on the structural drawings.
b. As approved by the Resident Engineer prior to construction, and after submittal of
drawing showing location, size, and position of each penetration.
4. Installation of conduit in concrete that is less than 75 mm (3 inches) thick is
prohibited.
558
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
a. Conduit outside diameter larger than 1/3 of the slab thickness is prohibited.
b. Space between conduits in slabs: Approximately six conduit diameters apart,
except one conduit diameter at conduit crossings.
c. Install conduits approximately in the center of the slab so that there will be a
minimum of 19 mm (3/4 inch) of concrete around the conduits.
5. Make couplings and connections watertight. Use thread compounds that are UL
approved conductive type to insure low resistance ground continuity through the
conduits. Tightening set screws with pliers is prohibited.
B. Furred or Suspended Ceilings and in Walls:
1. Conduit for conductors above 600 volts:
a. Rigid steel or rigid aluminum.
b. Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other types in the same system is
prohibited.
2. Conduit for conductors 600 volts and below:
a. Rigid steel, IMC, rigid aluminum, or EMT. Different type conduits mixed
indiscriminately in the same system is prohibited.
3. Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.
4. Connect recessed lighting fixtures to conduit runs with maximum 1800 mm (six feet)
of flexible metal conduit extending from a junction box to the fixture.
5. Tightening set screws with pliers is prohibited.
3.4 EXPOSED WORK INSTALLATION
A. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, exposed conduit is only permitted in
mechanical and electrical rooms.
B. Conduit for conductors above 600 volts:
1. Rigid steel or rigid aluminum.
2. Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other types in the same system is
prohibited.
C. Conduit for Conductors 600 volts and below:
1. Rigid steel, IMC, rigid aluminum, or EMT. Different type of conduits mixed
indiscriminately in the system is prohibited.
D. Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.
559
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
E. Install horizontal runs close to the ceiling or beams and secure with conduit straps.
F. Support horizontal or vertical runs at not over 2400 mm (eight foot) intervals.
G. Surface metal raceways: Use only where shown.
H. Painting:
1. Paint exposed conduit as specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.
2. Paint all conduits containing cables rated over 600 volts safety orange. Refer to
Section 09 91 00, PAINTING for preparation, paint type, and exact color. In addition,
paint legends, using 50 mm (two inch) high black numerals and letters, showing the
cable voltage rating. Provide legends where conduits pass through walls and floors
and at maximum 6000 mm (20 foot) intervals in between.
3.5 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Conduits 75 mm (3 inches) and larger, that are secured to the building structure on
opposite sides of a building expansion joint, require expansion and deflection couplings.
Install the couplings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Provide conduits smaller than 75 mm (3 inches) with junction boxes on both sides of the
expansion joint. Connect conduits to junction boxes with sufficient slack of flexible
conduit to produce 125 mm (5 inch) vertical drop midway between the ends. Flexible
conduit shall have a copper green ground bonding jumper installed. In lieu of this flexible
conduit, expansion and deflection couplings as specified above for 375 mm (15 inches)
and larger conduits are acceptable.
C. Install expansion and deflection couplings where shown.
D. Seismic Areas: In seismic areas, provide conduits rigidly secured to the building structure
on opposite sides of a building expansion joint with junction boxes on both sides of the
joint. Connect conduits to junction boxes with 375 mm (15 inches) of slack flexible
conduit. Flexible conduit shall have a copper green ground bonding jumper installed.
3.6 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, INSTALLATION
A. Safe working load shall not exceed 1/4 of proof test load of fastening devices.
B. Use pipe straps or individual conduit hangers for supporting individual conduits.
Maximum distance between supports is 2.5 m (8 foot) on center.
C. Support multiple conduit runs with trapeze hangers. Use trapeze hangers that are
designed to support a load equal to or greater than the sum of the weights of the conduits,
560
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
wires, hanger itself, and 90 kg (200 pounds). Attach each conduit with U-bolts or other
approved fasteners.
D. Support conduit independently of junction boxes, pull boxes, fixtures, suspended ceiling
T-bars, angle supports, and similar items.
E. Fasteners and Supports in Solid Masonry and Concrete:
1. New Construction: Use steel or malleable iron concrete inserts set in place prior to
placing the concrete.
2. Existing Construction:
a. Steel expansion anchors not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) bolt size and not less than
28 mm (1-1/8 inch) embedment.
b. Power set fasteners not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) diameter with depth of
penetration not less than 75 mm (3 inches).
c. Use vibration and shock resistant anchors and fasteners for attaching to concrete
ceilings.
F. Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts are permitted.
G. Bolts supported only by plaster or gypsum wallboard are not acceptable.
H. Metal Structures: Use machine screw fasteners or other devices specifically designed and
approved for the application.
I. Attachment by wood plugs, rawl plug, plastic, lead or soft metal anchors, or wood
blocking and bolts supported only by plaster is prohibited.
J. Chain, wire, or perforated strap shall not be used to support or fasten conduit.
K. Spring steel type supports or fasteners are prohibited for all uses except: Horizontal and
vertical supports/fasteners within walls.
L. Vertical Supports: Vertical conduit runs shall have riser clamps and supports in
accordance with the NEC and as shown. Provide supports for cable and wire with fittings
that include internal wedges and retaining collars.
3.7 BOX INSTALLATION
A. Boxes for Concealed Conduits:
1. Flush mounted.
2. Provide raised covers for boxes to suit the wall or ceiling, construction and finish.
561
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. In addition to boxes shown, install additional boxes where needed to prevent damage to
cables and wires during pulling in operations.
C. Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused openings. Use threaded plugs for
cast metal boxes and snap-in metal covers for sheet metal boxes.
D. Outlet boxes in the same wall mounted back-to-back are prohibited. A minimum 600 mm
(24 inch), center-to-center lateral spacing shall be maintained between boxes.)
E. Minimum size of outlet boxes for ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacles is 100 mm (4
inches) square by 55 mm (2-1/8 inches) deep, with device covers for the wall material
and thickness involved.
F. Stencil or install phenolic nameplates on covers of the boxes identified on riser diagrams;
for example "SIG-FA JB No. 1".
G. On all Branch Circuit junction box covers, identify the circuits with black marker.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAY BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS- -
562
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of panelboards.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 09 91 00, PAINTING: Identification and painting of panelboards.
B. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General
electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one Section of Division
26.
C. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits
and outlet boxes.
D. Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wiring.
E. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:
Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible
ground fault currents.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATIONS.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance
with drawings and specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, wiring diagrams
accessories and weights of equipment. Complete nameplate data including
manufacturer’s name and catalog number.
C. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to
the Resident Engineer:
1. Certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications
has been properly installed, and that the loads are balanced.
563
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and
errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are
referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
PB-1-2006 ..............................Panelboards
AB-1-2002 .............................Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches and
Circuit Breaker Enclosures
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70-2005 .................................National Electrical Code (NEC)
70E-2004 ................................Standard for Electrical Life Safety in the Workplace
C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
50-2003 ..................................Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
67-2003 ..................................Panel boards
489-2006 ................................Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker
Enclosures
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards shall be in accordance with UL, NEMA, NEC, and as shown on the
drawings.
B. Panelboards shall be standard manufactured products. All components of the panelboards
shall be the product and assembly of the same manufacturer. All similar units of all
panelboards to be of the same manufacturer.
C. All panelboards shall be hinged “door in door” type with:
1. Interior hinged door with hand operated latch or latches as required to provide access
to circuit breaker operating handles only, not to energized ports.
2. Outer hinged door shall be securely mounted to the panelboard box with factory bolts,
screws, clips or other fasteners requiring a tool for entry, hand operated latches are
not acceptable.
3. Push inner and outer doors shall open left to right.
564
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
D. All panelboards shall be completely factory assembled with molded case circuit breakers.
Include one-piece removable, inner dead front cover independent of the panelboard
cover.
E. Panelboards shall have main breaker or main lugs, bus size, voltage, phase, top or bottom
feed, and flush or surface mounting as scheduled on the drawings.
F. Panelboards shall conform to NEMA PB-1, NEMA AB-1 and UL 67 and have the
following features:
1. Nonreduced size copper or aluminum bus bars, complete with current ratings as
shown on the panel schedules connection straps bolted together and rigidly supported
on molded insulators.
2. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the “distributed phase” or
“phase sequence” type. Single-phase, three-wire panelboard busing shall be such that
when any two adjacent single-pole breakers are connected to opposite phases, twopole breakers can be installed in any location. Three-phase, four-wire busing shall be
such that when any three adjacent single-pole breakers are individually connected to
each of the three different phases, two-or three-pole breakers can be installed at any
location. Current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated. Mains ratings
shall be as shown.
3. Mechanical lugs furnished with panelboards shall be cast, stamped or machined metal
alloys of sizes suitable for the conductors indicated to be connected thereto.
4. Neutral bus shall be 100% rated, mounted on insulated supports.
5. Grounding bus bar equipped with screws or lugs for the connection of grounding
wires.
6. Buses braced for the available short circuit current, but not less than 22,000 amperes
symmetrical for 120/208 volt and 120/240 volt panelboards.
7. Branch circuit panels shall have buses fabricated for bolt-on type circuit breakers.
8. Protective devices shall be designed so that they can be easily replaced.
9. Where designated on panel schedule "spaces", include all necessary bussing, device
support and connections. Provide blank cover for each space.
10. In two section panelboards, the main bus in each section shall be full size. The first
section shall be furnished with subfeed lugs on the line side of main lugs only, or
565
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
through-feed lugs for main breaker type panels, and with cable connections to the
second section. Panelboard sections with tapped bus or crossover bus are not
acceptable.
11. Series rated panelboards are not permitted.
2.2 CABINETS AND TRIMS
A. Cabinets:
1. Provide galvanized steel cabinets to house panelboards. Cabinets for outdoor panels
shall be factory primed and suitably treated with a corrosion-resisting paint finish
meeting UL 50 and UL 67.
2. Cabinet enclosure shall not have ventilating openings.
3. Cabinets for panelboards may be of one-piece formed steel or of formed sheet steel
with end and side panels welded, riveted, or bolted as required.
2.3 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR PANELBOARDS
A. Breakers shall be UL 489 listed and labeled, in accordance with the NEC, as shown on
the drawings, and as specified.
B. Circuit breakers in panelboards shall be bolt on type on phase bus bar or branch circuit
bar.
1. Molded case circuit breakers for lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards
shall have minimum interrupting rating as indicated but not less than:
a. 120/208 Volt Panelboard: 22,000 amperes symmetrical.
b. 120/240 Volt Panelboard: 22,000 amperes symmetrical.
2. Molded case circuit breakers shall have automatic, trip free, non-adjustable, inverse
time, and instantaneous magnetic trips for 100-ampere frame or less. Magnetic trip
shall be adjustable from 3X to 10X for breakers with 600 ampere frames and higher.
C. Breaker features shall be as follows:
1. A rugged, integral housing of molded insulating material.
2. Silver alloy contacts.
3. Arc quenchers and phase barriers for each pole.
4. Quick-make, quick-break, operating mechanisms.
5. A trip element for each pole, thermal magnetic type with long time delay and
instantaneous characteristics, a common trip bar for all poles and a single operator.
566
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
6. Electrically and mechanically trip free.
7. An operating handle which indicates ON, TRIPPED, and OFF positions.
a. Line connections shall be bolted.
b. Interrupting rating shall not be less than the maximum short circuit current
available at the line terminals as indicated on the drawings.
8. An overload on one pole of a multipole breaker shall automatically cause all the poles
of the breaker to open.
9. Shunt trips shall be provided where indicated
10. For circuit breakers being added to existing panelboards, coordinate the breaker type
with existing panelboards. Modify the panel directory.
2.4 SEPARATELY ENCLOSED MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Where separately enclosed molded case circuit breakers are shown on the drawings,
provide circuit breakers in accordance with the applicable requirements of those specified
for panelboards.
B. Enclosures are to be of the NEMA types shown on the drawings. Where the types are not
shown, they are to be the NEMA type most suitable for the environmental conditions
where the breakers are being installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions, the NEC, as
shown on the drawings, and as specified.
B. Locate panelboards so that the present and future conduits can be conveniently
connected. Coordinate the sizes of cabinets with designated closet space.
C. In accordance with Section 09 91 00, PAINTING, paint the panelboard system voltage,
and feeder sizes as shown on the riser diagram in 1 inch block lettering on the inside
cover of the cabinet door. Paint the words "LIFE SAFETY BRANCH", "CRITICAL
BRANCH", or "EQUIPMENT SYSTEM" as applicable and the panel designation in one
inch block letters on the outside of the cabinet doors.
D. Install a typewritten schedule of circuits in each panelboard after being submitted to and
approved by the Resident Engineer. Schedules, after approval, shall be typed on the panel
directory cards and installed in the appropriate panelboards, incorporating all applicable
567
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
contract changes pertaining to that schedule. Include the room numbers and items served
on the cards.
E. Mount the panelboard fully aligned and such that the maximum height of the top circuit
breaker above finished floor shall not exceed 1980 mm (78 inches). For panelboards that
are too high, mount panelboard so that the bottom of the cabinets will not be less than
150 mm (6 inches) above the finished floor.
F. For panelboards located in areas accessible to the public, paint the exposed surfaces of
the trims, doors, and boxes with finishes to match surrounding surfaces after the
panelboards have been installed.
G. Directory-card information shall be typewritten to indicate outlets, lights, devices, and
equipment controlled and final room numbers served by each circuit and shall be
mounted in holders behind protective covering.
H. Where new panels are to be installed in existing backboxes, backboxes shall have rust
and scale removed from inside. Paint inside of backboxes with rust preventive paint
before the new panel interior is installed. Provide new trim and doors for these panels.
Covers shall fit tight to the box with no gaps between the cover and the box.
I. Provide ARC flash identification per NFPA 70E.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS- - -
568
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 26 25 11
BUSWAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of the busways to form a
complete coordinated system.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING: Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity
of time rated construction.
B. Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS: Sealing around busway penetrations through the
building envelope to prevent moisture migration into the building.
C. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General
electrical requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 26.
D. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:
Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path to ground for
possible ground fault currents.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATIONS, submit the following:
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance
with drawings and specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details and position, mounting
method, vertical supports, materials, fire stops, weather stops, and layout of the
busway runs.
3. Show the detailed coordinated connections to equipment terminations such as
switchgear, switchboards, transformers and panelboards.
C. Manuals:
1. Provide complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets,
and information for ordering replacement parts.
569
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the manuals to the
Resident Engineer.
D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to
the Resident Engineer:
1. Certification that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplement and
errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are
referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
857-01 ....................................Busways
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70-02 ......................................National Electrical Code (NEC)
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
BU 1-99 ..................................Busways
BU 1.1-00 ...............................General Instructions for Handling, Installation, Operation
and Maintenance of Busway Rated 600 Volts or Less
BU 1.2-02 ...............................Application Information for Busway Rated 600 Volts or
Less
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
A. Busway shall be in accordance with UL 857 and NEMA BU 1, BU 1.1 and BU 1.2.
B. Busway shall be rated as shown on the drawings for the positions in which they are being
installed, and have the following features:
1. For indoor locations, they shall be totally enclosed, low impedance type and moisture
resistant.
2. Ratings shall not be less than required by the NEC and NEMA BU 1 and not less than
shown on the drawings. Short circuit current ratings shall not be less than 42,000
amps, as required by NEMA BU 1 or as required for the available fault current,
whichever is higher.
570
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3. Busway shall be 3-phase, 4-wire, full neutral except where 3-phase, 3-wire is shown
on the drawings.
4. Busway shall include an internal ground bus bar, not less than 50 percent of the phase
bus.
5. All bus bars for each busway shall be within a single housing. Paralleled or multiple
busways will not be accepted.
6. Bus Bars:
a. Shall be copper.
b. Bus bar and interconnection joints shall be silver plated, constant high-pressure
type with high strength, copper silicon alloy bolts, nuts and washers.
c. Shall be completely insulated with flame-retardant, track-resistant, selfextinguishing insulation.
d. Temperature rises shall not exceed NEMA Standards.
7. Housings:
a. Shall be steel or aluminum with continuous mounting rails.
b. Bus bar assemblies and housing shall be products of the same manufacturer.
c. Shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted at the factory with primer and the
manufacturer's standard finish.
d. Shall have rustproof metal hardware.
e. For busways that pass through floors or firewalls, incorporate fire stops within the
busway housings and external flanges to close the openings in the walls or floors
adjacent to the busways.
f. Install expansion fittings in the busway runs in compliance with the
manufacturer's standard recommendations.
8. Busway shall not be reduced in size at any point.
C. Storage: All busway shall be stored at the job site as recommended in NEMA BU 1.1.
D. Dimensions and Configurations:
1. Configure within the spaces designated for their installation.
2. Coordinate the routing of equipment installations by other trades to avoid conflicts.
3. Make final field measurements and check them with the shop drawings for the
busways prior to authorization of fabrication of the busways.
571
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install busways as required by the NEC, UL, manufacturer's recommendations and as
follows:
B. Support the busways as required by the NEC with not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch) steel
rods.
C. Install side bracing to prevent swaying or movement of the busways. In seismic zones,
bracing shall be installed as per details on drawings.
D. When the installations are complete, inspect the busway joints and eliminate any strains
and stresses on the bus bars and housings.
E. Coordinate all of the busway terminations to equipment to insure proper phasing,
connection and lugs.
F. Tighten all of the bolt connections in the busways with a torque wrench as recommended
by the manufacturer of the busways. After the busways have been energized for not less
than 30 days, repeat the torque wrench tightening of all bolt connections.
3.2 FIELD TESTS
A. Perform tests per NEMA BU 1.1 and as follows:
1. After installation but prior to energizing, busways shall be tested for continuity,
phasing and insulation resistance.
2. Insulation resistance shall be measured phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with a
500 volt megger and values shall not be less than one megohm.
B. The contractor shall furnish the instruments, materials and labor for these tests.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 26 25 11 BUSWAYS- - -
572
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of wiring devices.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General
electrical requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 26.
B. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits
and outlets boxes.
C. Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wiring.
D. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:
Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path to ground for
possible ground fault currents.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATIONS, submit the following:
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance
with drawings and specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, construction materials, grade
and termination information.
C. Manuals: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver four copies of the following to the
Resident Engineer: Technical data sheets and information for ordering replacement units.
D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to
the Resident Engineer: Certification by the Contractor that the devices comply with the
drawings and specifications, and have been properly installed, aligned, and tested.
573
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and
errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are
referenced in the text by basic designation only.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70-02 ......................................National Electrical Code (NEC)
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
WD 1-99.................................General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices
WD 6-02 ................................Wiring Devices – Dimensional Requirements
D. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
5-96 ........................................Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings
20-00 ......................................General-Use Snap Switches
231-98 ....................................Power Outlets
467-93 ....................................Grounding and Bonding Equipment
498-01 ....................................Attachment Plugs and Receptacles
943-03 ....................................Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECEPTACLES
A. General: All receptacles shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as hospital
grade (green dot identification) and conform to NEMA WD 1. (EXCEPTION Receptacle types which have no listing as hospital grade but are listed by UL in their
respective categories or receptacles indicated on the drawings as “not hospital grade”).
1. Mounting straps shall be plated steel, with break-off plaster ears and shall include a
self-grounding feature. Terminal screws shall be brass, brass plated or a copper alloy
metal.
2. Receptacles shall have provisions for back wiring with separate metal clamp type
terminals (four min.) and side wiring from four captively held binding screws.
B. Duplex receptacles shall be single phase, 20 ampere, 120 volts, 2-pole, 3-wire, and
conform to the NEMA 5-20R configuration in NEMA WD 6. The duplex type shall have
break-off feature for two-circuit operation. The ungrounded pole of each receptacle shall
be provided with a separate terminal.
574
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. Bodies shall be ivory in color.
2. Switched duplex receptacles shall be wired so that only the top receptacle is switched.
The remaining receptacle shall be unswitched.
3. Duplex Receptacles on Emergency Circuit:
a. Bodies shall be red in color. Wall plates shall be red with the word
"EMERGENCY" engraved in 6 mm, (1/4 inch) white letters.
b. In rooms without emergency powered general lighting, the emergency receptacles
shall be of the self-illuminated type.
4. Ground Fault Interrupter Duplex Receptacles: Shall be an integral unit suitable for
mounting in a standard outlet box.
a. Ground fault interrupter shall be hospital grade and consist of a differential
current transformer, solid state sensing circuitry and a circuit interrupter switch. It
shall be rated for operation on a 60 Hz, 120 volt, 20-ampere branch circuit.
Device shall have nominal sensitivity to ground leakage current of five
milliamperes and shall function to interrupt the current supply for any value of
ground leakage current above five milliamperes (+ or – 1 milliamp) on the load
side of the device. Device shall have a minimum nominal tripping time of 1/30th
of a second. Devices shall meet UL 943.
5. Isolated Ground Type Duplex Receptacles:
a. Bodies shall be orange in color.
b. Shall be hospital grade and UL listed as “Isolated Ground”.
7. Duplex Receptacles (not hospital grade): Shall be the same as hospital grade duplex
receptacles except for the "hospital grade" listing and as follows.
a. Bodies shall be brown phenolic compound supported by a plated steel mounting
strap having plaster ears.
b. Shall be NEMA WD 1 heavy duty type.
C. Receptacles; 20, 30 and 50 ampere, 250 volts: Shall be complete with appropriate cord
grip plug. Devices shall meet UL 231.
575
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2.2 TOGGLE SWITCHES AND DIMMERS
A. Toggle switches shall be totally enclosed tumbler type with bodies of phenolic
compound. Toggle handles shall be ivory in color unless otherwise specified. The rocker
type switch is not acceptable and will not be approved.
1. Switches installed in hazardous areas shall be explosion proof type in accordance
with the NEC and as shown on the drawings.
2. Shall be single unit toggle, butt contact, quiet AC type, heavy-duty general-purpose
use with an integral self grounding mounting strap with break-off plasters ears and
provisions for back wiring with separate metal wiring clamps and side wiring with
captively held binding screws.
3. Shall be color coded for current rating, listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and
meet the requirements of NEMA WD 1, Heavy-Duty and UL 20.
4. Ratings:
a. 120 volt circuits: 20 amperes at 120-277 volts AC.
b. 277 volt circuits: 20 amperes at 120-277 volts AC.
5. The switches shall be mounted on the striker plate side of doors.
6. Incorporate barriers between switches with multigang outlet boxes where required by
the NEC.
7. Switches connected to isolated type electrical power systems shall be double pole.
8. All toggle switches shall be of the same manufacturer.
B. Dimmers: Incandescent lamp loads. Wall-mounted incandescent dimmers shall be
specification grade with capability of raising and lowering the lighting from completely
off at extreme counter-clockwise rotation, to full intensity. Dimmers shall include an
“off” position. Dimmers shall maintain full load rating even when two or more units are
installed adjacent to one another. All wall-mounted dimmers shall be of the same
manufacturer.
C. Dimmers: Fluorescent lamp loads. Wall-mounted fluorescent lamp dimmers shall be
specification grade with large control knob and shall be capable of raising and lowering
the lighting from completely off at extreme counter-clockwise rotation, to full intensity.
Dimmers shall include an “off” position. Dimmers shall have low end intensity
adjustment and maintain full load rating even when two or more units are installed
576
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
adjacent to one another. All wall-mounted dimmers shall be of the same manufacturer.
Dimming ballast shall be provided for each F32 rapid start lamp or pair of lamps.
Dimmers shall have adequate capacity for the load served and the environment in which
installed.
2.3 WALL PLATES
A. Wall plates for switches and receptacles shall be type 302 stainless steel. Oversize plates
are not acceptable.
B. Color shall be ivory unless otherwise specified.
C. Standard NEMA design, so that products of different manufacturers will be
interchangeable. Dimensions for openings in wall plates shall be accordance with NEMA
WD1.
D. For receptacles or switches mounted adjacent to each other, wall plates shall be common
for each group of receptacles or switches.
E. In psychiatric areas, wall plates shall have tamperproof screws and beveled edges.
F. Wall plates for data, telephone or other communication outlets shall be as specified in the
associated specification.
2.4 SURFACE MULTIPLE-OUTLET ASSEMBLIES
A. Assemblies shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 70 and UL 5.
B. Shall have the following features:
1. Enclosures:
a. Thickness of steel shall be not less than 1 mm (0.040 inch) steel for base and
cover. Nominal dimension shall be 40 by 70 mm (1-1/2 by 2-3/4 inches) with inside
cross sectional area not less than 2250 square mm (3.5 square inches). The enclosures
shall be thoroughly cleaned, phosphatized and painted at the factory with primer and
the manufacturer's standard baked enamel or lacquer finish.
2. Receptacles shall be duplex, hospital grade. See paragraph 'RECEPTACLES' in this
section. Device cover plates shall be the manufacturer's standard corrosion resistant
finish and shall not exceed the dimensions of the enclosure.
3. Unless otherwise shown on drawings, spacing of the receptacles along the strip shall
be 600 mm (24 inches) on centers.
577
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
4. Wires within the assemblies shall be not less than No. 12 AWG copper, with 600 volt
ratings.
5. Installation fittings shall be designed for the strips being installed including bends,
offsets, device brackets, inside couplings, wire clips, and elbows.
6. Bond the strips to the conduit systems for their branch supply circuits.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC and as shown as on the drawings.
B. Ground terminal of each receptacle shall be bonded to the outlet box with an approved
green bonding jumper, and also connected to the green equipment grounding conductor.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES- - -
578
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 26 51 00
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of the interior lighting
systems.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General
requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 26.
B. Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wiring.
C. Section 26 27 26, WIRING DEVICES: Wiring devices used as part of the lighting
systems.
D. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:
Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path to ground for
possible ground fault currents.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS, in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.
B. Refer to Paragraph, GUARANTY, in Section 00 72 00, GENERAL CONDITIONS.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATIONS, submit the following:
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance
with drawings and specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, required
clearances, terminations, wiring and connection diagrams, photometric data, ballasts,
lenses, louvers, lamps, and controls.
3. When catalog data and/or shop drawings for fluorescent fixtures are submitted for
approval, photometric data from an independent testing laboratory shall be included
579
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
with the submittal, indicating average brightness and efficiency of the fixture, as
specified in specification or as shown on the drawings. Coefficient of utilization data
will not be considered a suitable substitute.
C. Samples:
1. Simultaneously with the shop drawing and catalog cut submittal, deliver to the
Resident Engineer a sample of each lighting fixture types: ____________,
______________, ______________ for approval. The approved samples shall be
installed in the location directed by the Resident Engineer and shall be removed,
repackaged and turned over to the Resident Engineer after final inspection.
D. Manuals:
1. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings companion copies of complete
maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets, and information
for ordering replacement parts.
2. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the final updated
maintenance and operating manuals, including any changes, to the Resident Engineer.
E. Certifications:
1. Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following certifications
to the Resident Engineer:
a. Certification by the Contractor that the equipment has been properly installed,
adjusted, and tested.
b. Include with shop drawings, certification from the manufacturers that all
electronic high-frequency ballasts meet the transient protection required by IEEE
C62.41, Cat. A. Include with initial shop drawing submittal.
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and
errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are
referenced in the text by designation only.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
C78.1-91.................................Fluorescent Lamps - Rapid-Start Types - Dimensional and
Electrical Characteristics
580
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C78.2-91.................................Fluorescent Lamps - Preheat-Start Types - Dimensional
and Electrical Characteristics
C78.3-91.................................Fluorescent Lamps - Instart Start and Cold-Cathode Types Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics
C78.376-91.............................Chromaticity of Fluorescent Lamps (ANSI/NEMA
C78/376-96)
C. Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM):
Requirements for Ballast Certification.
D. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):
C62.41-91...............................Recommended Practice on Surge Voltage in Low Voltage
AC Power Circuits
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70-02 ......................................National Electrical Code (NEC)
101-00 ....................................Life Safety Code
F. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
C82.1-97.................................Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications
C82.2-02.................................Method of Measurement of Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts
C82.4-02.................................Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure
Sodium Lamps
C82.11-02...............................High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts
G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
496-96 ....................................Edison-Base Lampholders
542-99 ....................................Lampholders, Starters, and Starter Holders for Fluorescent
Lamps
844-95 ....................................Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous
(Classified) Locations
924-95 ....................................Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
935-01 ....................................Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts
1029-94 ..................................High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts
1598-00 ..................................Luminaires
H. Federal Communications Commission (FCC):
581
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 47, Part 18
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES (LUMINAIRES)
A. Shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, UL 1598 and shall be as shown on drawings and
as specified.
B. Sheet Metal:
1. Shall be formed to prevent warping and sagging. Housing, trim and lens frame shall
be true, straight (unless intentionally curved) and parallel to each other as designed.
2. Wireways and fittings shall be free of burrs and sharp edges and shall accommodate
internal and branch circuit wiring without damage to the wiring.
3. Where lighting fixtures are detailed with minimum 20 gauge housing, minimum 22
gauge housings will be acceptable provided they have strengthening embossed rib
and break formations, which give the equivalent rigidity of a 20 gauge housing.
4. When installed, any exposed fixture housing surface, trim frame, door frame and lens
frame shall be free of light leaks; lens doors shall close in a light tight manner.
5. Hinged door closure frames shall operate smoothly without binding when the fixture
is in the installed position, and latches shall function easily by finger action without
the use of tools.
C. Ballasts shall be serviceable while the fixture is in its normally installed position, and
shall not be mounted to removable reflectors or wireway covers unless so specified.
D. Lamp Sockets:
1. Fluorescent: Lampholder contacts shall be the biting edge type or
phosphorous-bronze with silver flash contact surface type and shall conform to the
applicable requirements of UL 542. Contacts for recessed double contact lampholders
and for slimline lampholders shall be silver plated. Lampholders for bi-pin lamps,
with the exception of those for "U" type lamps, shall be of the telescoping
compression type, or of the single slot entry type requiring a one-quarter turn of the
lamp after insertion.
2. Incandescent: Shall have porcelain enclosures and conform to the applicable
requirements of UL 496.
3. High Intensity Discharge (H.I.D.): Shall have porcelain enclosures.
582
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
E. Recessed incandescent fixtures mounted in an insulated ceiling shall be listed for use in
insulated ceilings.
F. Fluorescent fixtures with louvers or light transmitting panels shall have hinges, latches
and safety catches to facilitate safe, convenient cleaning and relamping. Vapor tight
fixtures shall have pressure clamping devices in lieu of the latches.
G. Mechanical Safety: Lighting fixture closures (lens doors, trim frame, hinged housings,
etc.) shall be retained in a secure manner by captive screws, chains, captive hinges or
fasteners such that they cannot be accidentally dislodged during normal operation or
routine maintenance.
H. Metal Finishes:
1. The manufacturer shall apply his standard finish (unless otherwise specified) over a
corrosion resistant primer, after cleaning to free the metal surfaces of rust, grease, dirt
and other deposits. Edges of pre-finished sheet metal exposed during forming,
stamping or shearing processes shall be finished in a similar corrosion resistant
manner to match the adjacent surface(s). Fixture finish shall be free of stains or
evidence of rusting, blistering, or flaking.
2. Interior light reflecting finishes shall be white with not less than 85 percent
reflectances, except where otherwise shown on the drawing.
3. Exterior finishes shall be as shown on the drawings.
I. Provide all lighting fixtures with a specific means for grounding their metallic wireways
and housings to an equipment grounding conductor.
J. Light Transmitting Components for Fluorescent Fixtures:
1. Shall be 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or water white, annealed, crystal glass.
2. Flat lens panels shall have not less than 3.2 mm (1/8 inch) of average thickness. The
average thickness shall be determined by adding the maximum thickness to the
minimum unpenetrated thickness and dividing the sum by 2.
3. Unless otherwise specified, lenses, diffusers and louvers shall be retained firmly in a
metal frame by clips or clamping ring in such a manner as to allow expansion and
contraction of the lens without distortion or cracking.
K. Compact fluorescent fixtures shall be manufactured specifically for compact fluorescent
lamps with ballasts integral to the fixture. Assemblies designed to retrofit incandescent
583
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
fixtures are prohibited except when specifically indicated for renovation of existing
fixtures. Fixtures shall be designed for lamps as specified.
2.2 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS
A. Where applicable, fluorescent lamps and ballasts shall comply with the National Energy
Policy Act of 1992.
B. Ballasts shall comply with NEMA 82.1, 82.2 and 82.11, NFPA 70, and UL 935 unless
otherwise specified.
C. Lamp types F32T8 and F32T8/U shall be operated by electronic, high frequency ballasts.
All other fluorescent lamp types shall be operated by the standard energy saving
electromagnetic core-and-coil ballasts. For these applications, the lamps shall be operated
by core-and-coil ballasts where specifically required on the drawings as "core-and-coil".
D. Electronic high-frequency ballasts:
1. Ballasts shall operate the lamps at a frequency between 20 and 60 KHz from an input
frequency of 60Hz.
2. Ballast package:
a. Size: The ballast case shall be sized to be physically inter-changeable with
standard core-and-coil ballasts and suitable for standard mounting in new or
existing lighting fixtures.
b. Case marking: Mark the ballast to indicate the required supply voltage, frequency,
RMS current, current surge during starting, input watts, and power factor at the
design center voltage, open circuit voltage, crest factor and efficacy.
3. Performance:
a. Light output:
1) At the design voltage, the light output shall be at least equal to that obtained
by a core-and-coil ballasted system meeting ANSI, NEMA and CBM
standards. The comparison test shall be measured in the same fixture at 25
degrees C (plus or minus one degree) ambient room temperature.
2) Tests shall be made in fixtures designed only for the number of lamps being
tested.
3) For other applications (higher ambients, etc.) the tests should be operated with
equivalent lamp wall temperatures plus or minus 4 degrees C.
584
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
b. Efficacy: The efficacy of the high-frequency, electronically ballasted system shall
be at least 15 percent greater than the equivalent CBM core-and-coil ballasted
system (see "Light output" above).
c. Starting: The ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation of
lamps at an ambient temperature of 10 degrees C (50 degree F) or more for an
input voltage of plus or minus 10 percent about the center design voltage unless
otherwise indicated. The ballast shall never be started in the instant start mode at
any temperature.
d. Operation:
1) The ballast shall safely and reliably operate in a room ambient temperature
from 10 degrees C (50 degree F) to 40 degrees C (105 degree F).
2) The light output shall not vary by more than plus or minus 5 percent for a plus
or minus 10 percent variation of the input voltage about the center design
voltage. Light output shall remain constant for a plus or minus 5 percent
variation of the input voltage.
3) The ballast shall operate the lamps in a manner that will not adversely curtail
the normal life of the lamp.
e. Transient protection: The ballast shall comply with IEEE C62.41, Cat. A.
f. Flicker: The flicker shall be less than 5 percent and without visible flicker.
g. Noise: The audible noise levels should be equivalent to or better than the Class A
rating of CBM certified ballasts.
h. Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Radio Frequency Interference (RFI): The
EMI and RFI limits shall meet the requirements of the Federal Communications
Commission Rules and Regulations (CFR 47 Part 18).
i. Rated life: The ballast shall have a rated life of 10 years or 30,000 hours (based
on a 10 hour day).
j. The two-lamp ballast shall safely operate two F32T8 RS, 32- watt lamps or two
F32T8/U lamps. The single lamp ballast shall safely operate one F32T8 RS, 32watt lamp or one F32T8/U lamp.
k. Power factor: Not less than 95 percent.
l. Reliability:
585
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1) Labels: Ballasts must be labeled or listed by UL and CBM/ETL.
2) Submit, simultaneously with shop drawings, a certified test report by an
independent testing laboratory showing that the electronic ballasts meet or
exceed all the performance requirements in this specification.
m. Total harmonic distortion (THD) shall be less than 10 percent.
E. Core-and-coil ballasts (for lamps other than F32T8 and F32T8/U or where shown on
drawings as "core-and-coil"):
1. Shall be rapid starting type.
2. Shall comply with NEMA 82.1 and UL 935.
3. Shall be UL Class P with automatic-resetting, internal, thermal protection.
4. Shall be CBM/ETL certified.
5. Power factor shall be not less than 95 percent. Capacitors in ballasts shall not contain
PCB (Polychlorinated Biphenyl) fluids or other fluids recognized as hazardous when
discharged into the environment.
6. Sound ratings shall be Class A or better, except for ballast sizes which are not
available with Class A ratings, as standard products from any manufacturer. Ballasts
which are not available with Class A ratings shall have the quietest ratings available.
7. Where core-and-coil ballasts are specified or detailed in lieu of the normally required
electronic high-frequency types, two lamp ballasts shall be energy-saving type, UL
listed to operate F40T12 rapid start lamps for both standard 40 watt lamps and the
reduced wattage 35/34 watts energy-saving lamps. Lamp output shall be within 5
percent of nominal rating. When operating energy-saving lamps, the input watts to the
ballast shall not exceed 78 watts at 120 V.A.C. Energy-saving type ballasts should not
be used in ambient temperatures below manufacturer's recommendations.
F. Ballasts for lighting fixtures controlled by dimming devices shall be the electronic, high
frequency type as specified herein, equipped for dimming and conform to the
recommendations of the manufacturer of the associated dimming devices to assure
satisfactory operation of the lighting system.
G. All ballasts serving straight or "U" type lamps shall be mounted by four non-turning studs
(or captive bolts) equipped with lock washers and nuts or locking type nuts, or by four
thread cutting (TC) sheet metal screws which are firmly secured against the fixture body
586
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
(or wireway) to maximize dissipation of heat and minimize noise. Exception: electronic
high-frequency ballasts may be mounted at a minimum of two points, one at each end of
unit.
H. Ballasts shall be serviceable while the fixture is in its normally installed position, and
shall not be mounted to removable reflectors or wireway covers unless so specified.
I. To facilitate multi-level lamp switching, lamps within fixture shall be wired with the
outermost lamp at both sides of the fixture on the same ballast, the next inward pair on
another ballast and so on to the innermost lamp (or pair of lamps). Within a given room,
each switch shall uniformly control the same corresponding lamp (or lamp pairs) in all
fixture units that are being controlled.
J. Where three-lamp fixtures are indicated, unless switching arrangements dictate
otherwise, utilize a common two-lamp ballast to operate the center lamp in pairs of
adjacent units that are mounted in a continuous row. The ballast fixture and slave-lamp
fixture shall be factory wired with leads or plug devices to facilitate this circuiting.
Individually mounted fixtures and the odd fixture in a row shall utilize a single-lamp
ballast for operation of the center lamp.
2.3 LAMPS
A. Fluorescent Lamps:
1. Rapid start fluorescent lamps shall comply with ANSI C78.1; preheat-start type shall
comply with ANSI C78.2; and instant-start and cold-cathode lamps shall comply with
ANSI C78.3.
2. Chromacity of fluorescent lamps shall comply with ANSI C78.376.
3. The lamps shall include the F32T8, F32T8/U 32 watt energy saving type and EPACT
approved F40T12 type if specifically required by contract drawings for special
applications.
4. Except as indicated below, lamps shall be energy saving type, have a color
temperature between 3500 and 4100K, a Color Rendering Index (CRI) of not less
than 75, and an initial lumen output not less than 2800. "U" tube lamps shall have the
same color temperature and CRI limits as the above.
587
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
a. In utility areas (Electrical, Communication and Mechanical) Service rooms and
closets), maintenance closets and non-medical storage spaces, utilize energy
saving light-white lamps.
b. In areas with ambient temperatures below 60 degrees use the 40 watt version of
the lamp above.
c. Over the beds in Intensive Care, Coronary Care, Recovery, Life Support, and
Observation and Treatment areas; Electromyographic, Autopsy (Necropsy),
Surgery, and certain dental rooms (Examination, Oral Hygiene, Oral Surgery,
Recovery, Labs, Treatment, and X-Ray) use color corrected lamps having a CRI
of 90 or above and a correlated color temperature between 5000 and 6000K.
d. Other areas as indicated on the drawings.
B. Incandescent lamps shall be the general service, inside frosted type rated 130 volts except
where otherwise shown on the drawings.
C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Shall be 2700K, 10,000 hours average rated life, and as
follows:
1. T4, twin tube, rated 13 watts, 825 initial lumens (min) as indicated.
2. T4, double twin tube rated 13 watts, 900 initial lumens (min),as indicated.
2.4 RADIO-INTERFERENCE-FREE FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
A. Shall be specially designed for suppressing radio-frequency energy produced within the
fixtures. The Rules and Regulations of FCC (CFR 47, Part 18) shall apply.
B. Lenses shall have a light-transparent layer of metal permanently bonded to them, and in
positive contact with the steel housing or equal to prevent the radio-frequency
interferences from passing through the lenses. The effective light transmittance of the
lenses shall be not less than 75 percent.
C. Install line filters within the body of the fixtures and wired in series with the supply
circuit conductors to eliminate the transmission of radio frequency energy into the supply
circuit.
2.5 EXIT LIGHT FIXTURES
A. Exit light fixtures shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA 101 and UL 924.
B. Housing and Canopy:
1. Shall be made of cast or extruded aluminum, or rolled steel.
588
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Optional steel housing shall be a minimum 20 gauge thick or equivalent strength
aluminum.
3. Steel housing shall have baked enamel over corrosion resistant, matte black or ivory
white primer.
C. Door frame shall be cast or extruded aluminum, and hinged with latch.
D. Finish shall be satin or fine-grain brushed aluminum.
E. There shall be no radioactive material used in the fixtures.
F. Fixtures:
1. Inscription panels shall be cast or stamped aluminum a minimum of 2.25 mm (0.090
inch) thick, stenciled with 150 mm (6 inch) high letters, baked with red color stable
plastic or fiberglass. Lamps shall be luminous red Light Emitting Diodes (LED)
mounted in center of letters on red color stable plastic or fiberglass. The LED shall be
rated minimum 25 years life; maximum of 3.5 watts for single face and 7 watts for
double-faced fixtures that do not use diffuser panels in front of the LEDs. LED exit
light fixtures that use diffuser panels shall require a maximum of 1.0 watt per fixture
for single or double face fixtures.
2. Double-Faced Fixtures: Provide double-faced fixtures where required or as shown on
drawings.
3. Directional Arrows: Provide directional arrows as part of the inscription panel where
required or as shown on drawings. Directional arrows shall be the "chevron-type" of
similar size and width as the letters and meet the requirements of NFPA 101.
G. Voltages: Fixtures shall be wired for 120-volt operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer's instructions and as
shown on the drawings or specified.
B. Align, mount and level the lighting fixtures uniformly.
C. Avoid interference with and provide clearance for equipment. Where the indicated
locations for the lighting fixtures conflict with the locations for equipment, change the
locations for the lighting fixtures by the minimum distances necessary as approved by the
Resident Engineer.
589
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
D. For suspended lighting fixtures, the mounting heights shall provide the clearances
between the bottoms of the fixtures and the finished floors as shown on the drawings.
E. Fluorescent bed light fixtures shall be attached to the studs in the walls. Attachment to
gypsum board only is not acceptable.
F. Lighting Fixture Supports:
1. Shall provide support for all of the fixtures. Supports may be anchored to channels of
the ceiling construction, to the structural slab or to structural members within a
partition, or above a suspended ceiling.
2. Shall maintain the fixture positions after cleaning and relamping.
3. Shall support the lighting fixtures without causing the ceiling or partition to deflect.
4. Hardware for recessed fluorescent fixtures:
a. Where the suspended ceiling system is supported at the four corners of the fixture
opening, hardware devices shall clamp the fixture to the ceiling system structural
members, or plaster frame at not less than four points in such a manner as to resist
spreading of the support members and safely lock the fixture into the ceiling
system.
b. Where the suspended ceiling system is not supported at the four corners of the
fixture opening, hardware devices shall independently support the fixture from the
building structure at four points.
5. Hardware for surface mounting fluorescent fixtures to suspended ceilings:
a. In addition to being secured to any required outlet box, fixtures shall be bolted to
a grid ceiling system at four points spaced near the corners of each fixture. The
bolts shall be not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) secured to channel members attached
to and spanning the tops of the ceiling structural grid members. Non-turning studs
may be attached to the ceiling structural grid members or spanning channels by
special clips designed for the purpose, provided they lock into place and require
simple tools for removal.
b. In addition to being secured to any required outlet box, fixtures shall be bolted to
a plaster ceiling at four points spaced near the corners of each fixture.
Pre-positioned 6 mm (1/4 inch) studs or threaded plaster inserts secured to ceiling
structural members shall be used to bolt the fixtures to the ceiling. In lieu of the
590
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
above, 6 mm (1/4 inch) toggle bolts may be used on new or existing ceiling
provided the plaster and lath can safely support the fixtures without sagging or
cracking.
6. Hardware for recessed lighting fixtures:
a. All fixture mounting devices connecting fixtures to the ceiling system or building
structure shall have a capacity for a horizontal force of 100 percent of the fixture
weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of the fixture weight.
b. Mounting devices shall clamp the fixture to the ceiling system structure (main
grid runners or fixture framing cross runners) at four points in such a manner as to
resist spreading of these supporting members. Each support point device shall
utilize a screw or approved hardware to "lock" the fixture housing to the ceiling
system, restraining the fixture from movement in any direction relative to the
ceiling. The screw (size No. 10 minimum) or approved hardware shall pass
through the ceiling member (T-bar, channel or spline), or it may extend over the
inside of the flange of the channel (or spline) that faces away from the fixture, in a
manner that prevents any fixture movement.
c. In addition to the above, the following is required for fixtures exceeding 9 kg (20
pounds) in weight. Note: Ceiling types are defined in ASTM Standard C635-69.
1) Where fixtures mounted in "Intermediate" and "Heavy Duty" ceilings weigh
between 9 kg and 25 kg (20 pounds and 56 pounds) provide two 12 gauge
safety hangers hung slack between diagonal corners of the fixture and the
building structure.
2) Where fixtures weigh over 25 kg (56 pounds) they shall be independently
supported from the building structure by approved hangers. Two-way angular
bracing of hangers shall be provided to prevent lateral motion.
d. Where ceiling cross runners are installed for support of lighting fixtures, they
must have a carrying capacity equal to that of the main ceiling runners and be
rigidly secured to the main runners.
7. Outlet boxes for support of lighting fixtures (where permitted) shall be secured
directly to the building structure with approved devices or supported vertically in a
hung ceiling from the building structure with a nine gauge wire hanger, and be
591
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
secured by an approved device to a main ceiling runner or cross runner to prevent any
horizontal movement relative to the ceiling.
G. Furnish and install the specified lamps for all lighting fixtures installed and all existing
lighting fixtures reinstalled under this project.
H. Coordinate between the electrical and ceiling trades to ascertain that approved lighting
fixtures are furnished in the proper sizes and installed with the proper devices (hangers,
clips, trim frames, flanges), to match the ceiling system being installed.
I. Bond lighting fixtures and metal accessories to the grounding system as specified in
Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
J. At completion of project, relamp all fixtures which have failed/burned-out lamps. Clean
all fixtures, lenses, diffusers and louvers that have accumulated dust/dirt during
construction.
- - - E N D OF SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING- - -
592
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 27 41 41
MASTER ANTENNA TV EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS -- EXTENSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the furnishing, installing and testing of a complete and operating
extension of an existing master antenna TV system, and associated equipment.
B. Interface the master antenna system extension with the existing systems and distribute the
television signals to all locations indicated.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The MATV Extension system shall provide adjacent channel operation of the 35
television channels currently distributed at the site.
B. The MATV Extension system shall receive the VHF and converted UHF TV channel
signals from the existing MATV System and shall process and distribute them to the
designated TV outlets indicated on the drawings.
C. The signals shall be acquired at the existing MATV head-end equipment cabinet, or as
close to the MATV head-end equipment cabinet as possible.
1.
Interface Selection: The interface point shall be located in the project scope area.
D. The Contractor is not responsible for the condition of the signals of the existing MATV
system. However, the Contractor is required to optimize the TV signals without
compromising the existing MATV system. If trouble is found in the exiting system,
notify the Resident Engineer in writing of the nature of troubles, and the expected effect
on the signals in the extension system.
E. The system shall include but not be limited to: interface cabinet; necessary combiners and
filters; distribution amplifiers; cable and connectors; and necessary passive devices such
as splitters, directional couplers, TV outlets and taps.
F. System layout that loops the RF cable from room to room is not acceptable. Each floor
or ward distribution system shall be a “tap” design where each room’s TV outlet is fed
from a directional multi-tap provided from a centrally located (usually in the corridor)
lateral trunkline cable. Each ward or floor lateral trunkline cable shall be connected to a
vertical trunkline riser cable in the associated signal closet. Each vertical riser trunkline
593
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
cable shall be connected to the headend output. Distribution (floor or riser) amplifiers
shall be provided to satisfy system’s TV outlet signal level requirements.
G. The MATV Extension system shall connect TV receivers as follows:
1. Standard CATV capable TV receivers to the designated TV outlets in day rooms,
waiting rooms, recreation rooms, and other non patient areas.
2. Patient bedrooms shall be provided for connection of "Hospital grade" CATV capable
TV receivers which are remotely controlled by the Nurse Call Pillow Speaker. Each
connection to a patient bed shall include:
a. A single duplex outlet consisting of one RF outlet and one multi-pin remote
control jack.
b. Necessary interface and connection to the TV receiver.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. The signal level of each channel at each TV outlet shall be ± 10 dBmV, plus or minus 5
dB across 75 Ohms:
1. NHCU: The signal level at the Power Distribution Room TV outlet shall be ± 25
dBmV, plus or minus 2 dB across 75 Ohms.
B. The MATV Extension system shall meet the following minimum parameters at each TV
outlet. The signal quality at the interface point shall not be less than the stated minimum
parameters:
1. Signal-To-Noise Ratio: -44 dB
2. Cross Modulation: -46 dB
3. Hum Modulation: -55 dB
4. Return Loss: -14 dB
5. Isolation (outlet-outlet): 24 dB
6. Visual to Aural Carrier Ratio: 13 dB to 17 dB below visual
7. Impedance: 75 ohms
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. The manufacturer shall have had experience with three or more installations of
systems of comparable size and complexity as regards to coordinating, engineering,
594
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
testing, and supervising. Each of these installations shall have been in successful
operation for one or more years.
2. Prior to review of submittals, Department of Veterans Affairs (VA) reserves the right
to:
a. Have the manufacturer submit a list of locations of similar installations.
b. Inspect any of these installations and question the user concerning the
installations without the presence of the supplier.
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and
approved for installation of units required for this project:
1. Testing Personnel: An employee of the installer, certified by National Institute for
Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) as Video Security Systems Level
III technician.
C. Standards and Testing: All supplies, materials or equipment shall be listed, labeled, or
certified by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to comply with referenced UL
Standards.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES and Section 27 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
INSTALLATIONS.
1. Submittals shall also be marked to show specification reference including the section
and paragraph number.
2. Concurrent Review: For Architect-Engineer projects, submit additional three copies
of submittals.
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the quantity, make and model
number of each item.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Narrative description of system.
2. A List of the equipment to be furnished. The quantity, make, and model number of
each item is required.
3. Interface cabinet layout drawing, as it is to be installed.
595
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
4. Equipment technical literature detailing the electrical and technical characteristics of
each item of equipment to be furnished.
5. Engineering drawings of the system, showing calculated signal levels at each input
and output point in the system with the proposed signal levels at each tap off point,
and signal level at each TV outlet jack.
6. Detailed schematics of subsystems, assemblies and subassemblies to component
level, clearly presented, to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.
D. Field Quality Assurance:
1. Test Plan: Submit the test plan prior to pretesting for evaluation and approval.
2. List of test equipment.
3. Letter certifying that the Contractor understands the requirements of the SAMPLES
4. Letter certifying that the Contractor understands the requirements of Part 3
concerning tests.
5. Submit test reports.
E. Test Equipment List: Unless otherwise stated, the test equipment shall not be considered
part of the system. Test equipment shall be of accuracy better than the parameters to be
tested, and shall have a calibration tag of an acceptable calibration service dated not more
than 12 months prior to the test. The list shall include the make, model number of the
following type of equipment as a minimum:
1. Spectrum Analyzer
2. Signal Level Meter
3. Volt-ohm Meter
4. Color TV Receiver
5. Hospital grade pillow Speaker, with TV remote control cable terminating in the multi
pin connector.
F. Samples: A sample of each of the following items shall be furnished to the Resident
Engineer for approval prior to installation. The samples may be returned to the
Contractor at the discretion of the Resident Engineer.
1. Wall Outlet Box 100 x 100 mm (4" x 4"), or two 50 x 100 mm (2" X 4") outlet boxes,
with:
a. RF Outlet installed
596
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
b. Multi-pin jack installed
c. Stainless Cover Plate installed
d. AC Outlets installed
e. Steel Partition installed
2. TV Receiver RF Cable with connector, 600 mm (two foot) section with cable sweep
tag.
3. TV Receiver Remote Control Cable with multi pin connector installed.
4. TV Wall Mount, as required.
5. TV Ceiling Mount, as required.
G. Pretesting Certification: After the system has been installed, aligned, balanced, pretested
and found to meet the requirements of this specification, submit a letter to the Resident
Engineer certifying that the system is ready for the formal acceptance test. Include a copy
of the pretest measurements with the certification.
H. Manuals: Five working days prior to the scheduled acceptance test, deliver four complete
sets of operation and maintenance manuals, for each item of equipment. The manuals
shall detail the theory of operation and shall include narrative descriptions, pictorial
illustrations, block and schematic diagrams and parts lists.
I. As-Installed Wiring Diagrams: Five working days prior to the acceptance test, deliver
four complete sets of as-installed wiring diagrams of the system(s). The diagrams shall
show all inputs and outputs of electronic and passive equipment correctly identified
according to the markers installed on the interconnecting cables. The wiring diagrams
shall show the signal levels of the visual and aural carriers of each TV channel at the
input and output of all electronic equipment, beginning and end of each distribution line
and the TV outlets.
J. Guarantee Period Services: List the entities that will certify the system and who will
perform the guarantee period services. The listing shall include a company brochure, and
name - title - normal and emergency telephone numbers of the individuals providing the
services.
K. Training Plan: Provide a detailed lesson plan specified in the "TRAINING" Article. This
plan will be evaluated and approved by the Office of Telecommunications (333).
597
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.7 GUARANTEE PERIOD SERVICES
A. Furnish and guarantee maintenance service for the system using authorized
representatives of the Contractor performing the installation of work of this Section, for a
period of one year after acceptance of the installation by the VA.
B. Maintenance service shall include the following:
1. Monthly preventive maintenance of equipment, minimum. Coordinate time of the
maintenance with the VAMC, Chief Engineering Service.
2. Responding to calls within 4 hours of notification of system troubles.
3. Repairing and replacing parts and equipment as necessary to keep the system in
optimum operating condition and proper working order.
4. Furnishing tools, test instruments, and parts required.
C. Work Not Included: Maintenance service shall not include the performance of any work
due to improper use, accidents, or negligence for which the Contractor is not directly
responsible.
1.8 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70-05 ......................................National Electrical Code
780-04 ....................................Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection
Systems
99-05 ......................................Standard for Health Care Facilities
C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
1410-97 (R01) ........................Television Receivers and High-Voltage Video Products
1069-01 (R06) ........................Standard for Hospital Signaling and Nurse Call Equipment
1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in manufacturer's original unopened
containers, clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name and equipment model
identification number.
B. Storage and Handling: Store and protect equipment in a manner which will preclude
damage.
598
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Master antenna TV equipment shall be new and the current model of a standard product
of an original equipment manufacturer whose main business is the manufacture for sale
of the items of equipment specified, and which complies with the following:
1. Maintains a factory production line for the item submitted.
2. Maintains a stock of replacement parts for the item submitted.
3. Maintains engineering drawings, specifications, operating manuals and for the items
submitted.
4. Has published and distributed descriptive literature and equipment specifications on
each item of equipment offered.
2.2 EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY
When electrically associated with other equipment; the total system shall be designed and
installed so that the combination of equipment actually employed does not produce
undesirable effects such as signal distortion, noise pulses, glitches, hum bars, transients,
ghosting, tilting, and flutter.
2.3 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. Active component equipment shall consist of solid state components, be rated for
continuous duty service, comply with the requirements of FCC Docket No. 21006 and be
provided with "F" connectors unless otherwise specified.
B. Passive distribution equipment shall be provided with "F" connectors unless otherwise
specified.
C. Trunk, branch and interconnecting coaxial cables and unused ports/taps shall be
terminated with a 75 ohm terminating resistor designed for MATV cable systems without
adapters.
D. Service Conditions: Intercommunications equipment shall be capable of operating
continuously in the following environmental condition without mechanical or electrical
damage or degradation of service:
1. Input Voltage: 120 V rms plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Input Frequency: 60 Hz.
3. Ambient Temperature: Zero to 40 degrees C.
599
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
4. Humidity: 0 to 80 percent relative, non-condensing.
5. Antennas and their supports shall withstand adverse environmental conditions and
161 km/h (100 mph) winds without damage.
E. Equipment shall be rated for continuous duty.
2.4 EQUIPMENT CABINET
A. The equipment cabinet shall be 482.6 mm (19-inch) standard modular rack(s), ventilated,
with locking doors. Comply with CEA-310-E. With baked on paint finish. Two (2)
keys shall be provided for each lock to the Resident Engineer when the system is
accepted.
B. Allow at least 15 inches of blank rack space, for future expansion. Use blank panels to
cover any open or unused rack space. Additionally, install one 1.75” high blank panel
between each item of equipment.
C. Blank panels shall be color matched to the cabinet, made of 1/8-inch aluminum with
vertical dimensions in increments of 1.75-inches. Single standard size blank panels shall
be used to fill unused rack spaces in lieu of multiple adjacent 1.75-inch sizes.
D. Power to equipment mounted in the cabinet shall be from a full-height 120 V power strip
with 15 A, NEMA 5-15R receptacles, mounted inside and to the rear of the cabinet.
Provide a receptacle for each equipment power cord, plus at least four spare outlets. The
strip power shall be controlled by an illuminated on-off switch.
E. Electrical circuit for the power strip shall include a rack-mounted surge protector and
power filter module. It shall be cabinet mounted and the cabinet ac power strip (two
strips maximum) may be connected to it.
1. The surge protective device shall comply with UL 1449, transient voltage surge
suppression in line to ground, line to neutral and neutral to ground modes. The
device shall employ multiple metal-oxide varistors with a nominal clamp level rating
of not more than 400 volts and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of
240 J or more, according to IEEE 61.41.2 and IEEE C62.45.
2. The power filter shall isolate and filter the AC input line:
a. Voltage output regulation: plus or minus 3.0%
b. Noise filtering: more than 45 dB
c. Noise suppression: common minus 40 dB
600
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2.5 DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
A. Amplifier, Broadband: The broadband amplifier shall provide 35 adjacent TV channel
operation with separate adjustable gain and slope controls. It shall be UL approved with
integral lightning/surge protection.
1. Frequency Response: plus or minus 1.5 dB, 54-300 MHz
2. Noise Figure: 10 dB Max.
3. Output Capability: 45 dBmV minimum, 35 channels
4. Cross Modulation: minus 46 dB
5. Gain Control Range: 10 dB
6. Slope Control: 0-8 dB @ 300 MHz
B. Splitter/Mixer: The splitter/mixer shall be ruggedized construction in a radiation proof
metal housing. It shall provide multiple isolated outputs from a single input, or
conversely, a single output from multiple isolated inputs.
1. Bandpass: 5-300 MHz
2. Tap-Tap Isolation: 17 dB
3. Splitting Loss:
a. 2-Way: 4 dB Max.
b. 4-Way: 7.5 dB Max.
c. 8-Way: 12 dB Max.
C. Directional Coupler: The directional coupler shall be encased in a ruggedized radiation
proof metal housing.
1. Outputs: 1 each
2. Insertion Loss: 1.3 dB Max.
3. Tap Loss: 8 dB minimum
4. Isolation Tap-Output: 25 dB Minimum
5. Bandpass: 5-300 MHz
D. Directional Multi-Tap: The multi-tap shall be a directional coupler type and encased in a
ruggedized radiation-proof metal housing. It shall come in multiple tap values.
1. Tap Loss: 10 dB minimum
2. Bandpass: 5-300 MHz
3. Insertion Loss: 3.7 dB maximum
601
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
4. Isolation: Tap to output: 28 dB
5. Isolation: Tap to tap: 23 dB
6. Outputs: Two, Four & Eight
7. Match: 14 dB
E. TV Receiver Wall Outlet:
1. The TV receiver wall outlet shall consist of an RF jack and where required, a remote
control multi-pin jack mounted in a steel outlet box. When installed with a duplex AC
outlet, a partitioned 100 x 100 mm (4" X 4") or 50 x 100 (2" x 4") steel outlet box
shall be used.
2. The wall outlet shall be fed from a directional coupler or be a directional coupler.
3. Interface of the Nurse Call Pillow Speaker Unit to the installed remote control multipin jack for remote control of the TV receiver is the responsibility of the Nurse Call
installer; not the TV system installer.
4. The wall outlet shall be provided with stainless steel cover plate(s) to fit the RF Jack,
multi pin jack and the outlet box provided.
2.6
COAXIAL CABLE
A. The coaxial cable shall be an RG-6 double shielded, certified 100% sweep tested by the
manufacturer by tags on each reel. The tags and a two foot sample shall be delivered to
the Resident Engineer prior to installation. The cable shall be able to pass the frequency
spectrum from 5 to 890 MHz.
1. Center Conductor: 18 AWG copper-clad steel
2. Dielectric: Foam
3. Jacket: Black PVC or PE, UL 1685 Type CATV or CM
4. Temperature Rating: 80 degrees C
5. Impedance: 75 Ohm
B. Attenuation for the following frequencies at a maximum indicated dB per 30 m (100
feet):
1. 7 MHz: 0.6
2. 54 MHz: 1.8
3. 216 MHz: 3.5
4. 470 MHz: 4.7
602
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
5. 890 MHz: 7.0
B. Coaxial Cable Terminators: These units shall be metal housed precision types in the
frequency ranges selected.
1. Frequency:
a. 5-890 MHz.
b. 200-1500 MHz.
c. 3000-5000 MHz.
2. Power Blocking: As required, 1.5:1 Max.
3. Return Loss: 25 dB.
4. Connectors: "F", unless otherwise indicated.
5. Impedance: 75 Ohms, unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 TV RECEIVER CONNECTIONS
A. Coaxial Cable: Provide one connecting cable for each TV outlet in the MATV system
plus 10% spares. The cable shall connect the TV receiver to the RF jack.
1. Length: 1800 mm (6 feet).
2. Cable: RG-6 double shielded type.
3. Connector: Snap-on "F" at MATV outlet end and screw-on "F" at receiver end.
B. Remote Control Cable: Provide one multi-conductor connecting cable for each TV outlet
in the system plus 10% spares. The cable shall connect the TV receiver remote control
circuits to the multi pin jack.
1. Length: 1800 mm (6 feet).
2. Cable: 5 conductor minimum, stranded copper.
3. Connector: Multi-pin plug at the outlet end and no connector at the receiver end.
4. Working Voltage: 200 V.
C. TV Receiver Matching Transformer: Provide 75 to 300 Ohm matching transformers, in a
quantity equal to 10% of the TV wall outlets. The matching transformer shall have metal
case or other means to reduce local pickup (ghosting) at the TV receiver input.
1. Insertion loss: UHF - 1.5 dB, VHF - 0.5 dB.
2. Return loss: UHF - 12 dB, VHF - 20 dB.
3. Balance: UHF - 30 dB, VHF - 35 d.
D. TV Receiver Ceiling/Wall Mount:
603
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1. Install mounts where indicated, using factory made accessories, braces and back
plates, as needed for secure mounting.
2. The mount shall be able to be swiveled, tilted and locked, and be adjustable in width
for TV receivers.
3. The installation of mounts shall be approved by the Resident Engineer. Allow at least
1980 mm (78 inches) headroom under the mount when installed in a location where
personnel may walk directly under it.
2.8 RF CONNECTORS:
A. "F" Connectors: Screw type coupling for quick connect/disconnect of coaxial cable
terminations. Crimp on integral ferrule connector designed to fit the coaxial cable
furnished.
1. Working Voltage: 500 V.
2. Frequency Range: 0 to 890 MHz.
3. Impedance: 75 Ohms.
B. "UHF" Connectors: Screw type coupling for quick connect/disconnect of coaxial cable
terminations. It shall be a crimp on connector designed to fit the coaxial cable furnished.
1. Working Voltage: 500 V.
2. Frequency Range: 0 to 890 MHz.
3. Impedance: 75 Ohms.
C. "BNC" Connectors: Bayonet locking coupling for quick connect/disconnect of coaxial
cable terminations.
1. Working Voltage: 500 V.
2. Frequency Range: 0-890 MHz.
3. Impedance: 75 Ohms.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment according to NFPA 70, accepted industry standards of good practice,
the requirements of this specification, and in a manner which does not constitute a safety
hazard:
1. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Insure that installation personnel understand the requirements of this specification.
604
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C. Install suitable filters, traps, and pads for minimizing interference and for balancing the
amplifiers and distribution system:
1. Filters, splitters, couplers, tap-offs, matching transformers and TV wall outlets shall
be able to pass color TV channels in the frequency bands selected, in the directions
specified, with low loss, and high isolation and with minimum delay of the color
subcarrier frequency.
2. Install all equipment necessary to meet the requirements of Part 2 paragraph
"Equipment Compatibility" and the system performance standards.
D. Connect passive equipment according to the manufacturer's specification to insure correct
termination, isolation impedance match, and signal level balance at each outlet.
E. Identification: Cables shall be labeled with permanent markers at the terminals of the
electronic and passive equipment. The lettering on the cables shall correspond with the
lettering on the as-installed diagrams.
F. Outlet Installation: Where TV receivers are installed adjacent to each other in bedrooms,
install MATV outlets for each receiver.
G. Cable Terminations:
1. All lines shall be terminated in a suitable manner to facilitate future expansion of the
MATV system. There shall be a minimum of one spare output at each distribution
point on each floor.
2. Terminating resistors shall be used to terminate unused branches, outlets and unused
equipment ports of the system and shall be devices designed for the purpose of
terminating coaxial cable carrying TV signals in MATV systems.
3. Equipment installed outdoors shall be weatherproof or installed in weatherproof
enclosures with hinged doors and locks with 2 keys.
3.2 SYSTEM CABLING:
A. Install cabling in raceway, except within cabinets. Conceal raceway and cables, except in
unfinished spaces. MATV cables shall not be installed in AC power conduits:
1. Cable in raceway shall be NFPA Type CMG.
2. Cable in cable tray in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceiling spaces, shall
be NFPA Type CMP.
605
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
B. Raceway and boxes shall be as specified in Section 27 05 33, RACEWAYS AND
BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.
C. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations
only at outlets, equipment terminals, and in terminal cabinets. Cables may not be spliced:
1. Connectors shall be installed using the connector manufacturer's approved crimping
tool.
D. Cold-weather installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps
may not be used.
3.3. AC POWER
A. Connect branch AC circuits which supply power to the MATV system to a single panel
board and shall clearly indicate on the directory in the panel board that the circuits supply
power to the system.
B. Install a 120 volt AC branch circuit, wired to a separate breaker, from the power panel to
each equipment cabinet:
1. Provide AC power outlets that are convenient to each item of equipment in the
equipment cabinet and to each TV receiver wall outlet.
3.4 GROUNDING
A. Ground installed equipment in accordance with the Section 27 05 26, GROUNDING
AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS to eliminate shock hazards
and to minimize ground loops, noise pickup, or other interferences:
1. Ground wires for equipment shall be at least No. 14 AWG stranded copper wire.
2. Ground wires for equipment cabinets or racks shall be at least No. 10 AWG stranded
copper wire.
3.5 EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLY
A. Equipment installed indoors shall be installed in equipment cabinets so as to be
accessible for maintenance without interference to other nearby equipment.
B. Equipment shall be installed with sufficient vertical separation to insure adequate air
circulation. Any cabinet, in which the ambient temperature shall exceed 45 degrees C at
the top, shall be equipped with a quiet thermostatically controlled fan. The cabinet shall
be designed to provide air flow around equipment.
606
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
C. Cables shall enter the equipment cabinets in such a manner that doors shall open and
close without disturbing or damaging the cables.
3.6 TESTS
A. Pretesting:
1. Upon completing installation of the MATV system extension, align, balance and
completely pretest the entire MATV system. After pre-testing and only after pretesting, the system shall be formally tested in the presence of a Government
representative.
2. Verify (utilizing the approved spectrum analyzer and signal level meter) that the
system is fully operational and meets all system performance requirements of this
specification.
3. Measure and record the visual and aural carrier levels of each channel at each of the
following points:
a. Head-end signal level and signal-to-noise ratio for each TV channel specified.
b. Distribution amplifier inputs and outputs.
c. Last outlet or splitter of each feeder.
d. A random sampling of 25% of TV outlets, selected by the Resident Engineer.
4. After pretest measurements are made, the system shall be left to "burn-in" until the
final inspection is completed.
5. A copy of the recorded system pretest measurements and the written certification that
the system is ready for the formal acceptance test shall be submitted to the Resident
Engineer.
B. Acceptance Testing:
1. Notify the Resident Engineer in writing seven days after the pre-test has been
completed and 30 days prior to the date acceptance testing is expected to begin. Test
system in the presence of a Government Representative. Verify that the total system
meets the requirements of the specification and complies with all appropriate
standards listed in this specification.
2. The notification of the acceptance test shall include the expected length of the test in
days.
607
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3. The acceptance test shall be performed on a "go/no-go" basis. Only those operator
adjustments required to show proof-of-performance shall be allowed. The test shall
demonstrate and verify that the installed MATV system does comply with the
operational and technical requirements of this specification under operating
conditions. The MATV system shall be rated as either acceptable or unacceptable at
the conclusion of the rest. Failure of any part of the system which precludes
completion of system testing, which cannot be repaired in four (4) hours, shall be
cause for terminating the test of the MATV system. Repeated failures which result in
a cumulative time of eight (8) hours to effect repairs shall cause the entire MATV
system to be declared unacceptable. Retesting of the entire MATV system shall be
rescheduled at the convenience of the Government.
C. Acceptance Test Procedure:
1. Inspection:
a. The Government representative will tour major areas to insure that MATV
systems are completely and properly installed in place, and are operationally
ready for proof-of-performance testing. Failure of the MATV system to meet the
installation requirements of this specification shall be grounds for terminating all
testing.
b. The MATV system diagrams, as-installed drawings, equipment manuals, AUTO
CAD Disks, and pretest measurements shall be reviewed before testing is
resumed.
2. Interface Point Test:
a. Signal Level Test: After the inspection, the MATV signals at the interface point
shall be tested to verify that it meets performance requirements utilizing the
spectrum analyzer or signal level meter.
b. Receiver Test: Following the Signal Level Test, a standard television color
receiver shall be connected to the interface point test tap output with suitable
attenuator pad(s). View each TV channel to verify that there are no visible signal
distortions such as intermodulation (windshield wiper effect), ghosting, and beats
on any channel.
3. Distribution System Testing:
608
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
a. Using a spectrum analyzer or signal level meter, and a TV receiver, check the first
and last outlet in each feeder of the MATV distribution system, to verify that the
distribution system meets performance requirements. Test functions of TV
outlets, that are controlled by a Nurse Call Pillow Speaker, at the same time.
b. Test a random sample of at least 25% of the TV outlets, selected by the Resident
Engineer, for signal level and for picture quality with a color receiver; unless
incorrect levels indicate that a wider sample should be taken.
4. Revise as-installed wiring diagrams to show adjustments made during acceptance
testing.
- E N D OF SECTION 27 41 41 MASTER ANTENNA TELIVISION
EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS-
609
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
SECTION 28 31 00
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section of the specifications includes the furnishing, installation, and connection of
the fire alarm equipment to form a complete coordinated system ready for operation. It
shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances,
control units, fire safety control devices, annunciators, power supplies, and wiring as
shown on the drawings and specified.
B. Fire alarm systems shall comply with requirements of NFPA 72 unless variations to
NFPA 72 are specifically identified within these contract documents by the following
notation: "variation". The design, system layout, document submittal preparation, and
supervision of installation and testing shall be provided by a technician that is certified
NICET level III or a registered fire protection engineer. The NICET certified technician
shall be on site for the supervision and testing of the system. Factory engineers from the
equipment manufacturer, thoroughly familiar and knowledgeable with all equipment
utilized, shall provide additional technical support at the site as required by the
Contracting Officer or his authorized representative. Installers shall have a minimum of
two years experience installing fire alarm systems.
C. Fire alarm signals:
2. Buildings and areas with the project scope area shall have a general evacuation fire
alarm signal in accordance with ASA S3.41 to notify all occupants in the respective
building to evacuate.
D. Alarm signals (by device), supervisory signals (by device) and system trouble signals (by
device not reporting) shall be distinctly transmitted to the main fire alarm system control
unit located in the security office.
E. The main fire alarm control unit shall automatically transmit alarm signals to a listed
central station using a digital alarm communicator transmitter in accordance with NFPA
72.
610
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
1.2 SCOPE
A. All existing fire alarm equipment, wiring, devices and sub-systems that are not shown to
be reused shall be removed. All existing fire alarm conduit not reused shall be removed.
B. A new fire alarm system shall be designed and installed in accordance with the
specifications and drawings. Device location and wiring runs shown on the drawings are
for reference only unless specifically dimensioned. Actual locations shall be in
accordance with NFPA 72 and this specification.
C. Existing fire alarm bells, chimes, door holders, 120VAC duct smoke detectors, valve
tamper switches and waterflow/pressure switches may be reused only as specifically
indicated on the drawings and provided the equipment:
1. Meets this specification section
2. Is UL listed or FM approved
3. Is compatible with new equipment being installed
4. Is verified as operable through contractor testing and inspection
5. Is warranted as new by the contractor.
D. Existing 120 VAC duct smoke detectors, waterflow/pressure switches, and valve tamper
switches reused by the Contractor shall be equipped with an addressable interface device
compatible with the new equipment being installed.
E. Existing reused equipment shall be covered as new equipment under the Warranty
specified herein.
F. Basic Performance:
1. Alarm and trouble signals from each building fire alarm control panel shall be
digitally encoded by UL listed electronic devices onto a multiplexed communication
system.
2. Response time between alarm initiation (contact closure) and recording at the main
fire alarm control unit (appearance on alphanumeric read out) shall not exceed five
(5) seconds.
3. The signaling line circuits (SLC) between building fire alarm control units shall be
wired Style 7 in accordance with NFPA 72. Isolation shall be provided so that no
more than one building can be lost due to a short circuit fault.
4. Initiating device circuits (IDC) shall be wired Style C in accordance with NFPA 72.
611
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
5. Signaling line circuits (SLC) within buildings shall be wired Style 4 in accordance
with NFPA 72. Individual signaling line circuits shall be limited to covering 22,500
square feet of floor space or 3 floors whichever is less.
6. Notification appliance circuits (NAC) shall be wired Style Y in accordance with
NFPA 72.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Restoration of existing surfaces.
B. Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES:
Procedures for submittals.
C. Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING: Fire proofing wall penetrations.
D. Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE: Combination Closer-Holders.//
E. Section 09 91 00, PAINTING: Painting for equipment and existing surfaces.
F. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General
electrical requirements for items which are common to other Division 26 sections.
G. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits
and boxes for cables/wiring.
H. Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW: Cables/wiring.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit 4 copies and 1 reproducible in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP
DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, and Section 26 05 11,
REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.
B. Drawings:
1. Prepare drawings using AutoCAD Release 14 software and include all contractors
information. Layering shall be by VA criteria as provided by the Contracting
Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR). Bid drawing files on AutoCAD will be
provided to the Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The contractor shall be
responsible for verifying all critical dimensions shown on the drawings provided by
VA.
2. Floor plans: Provide locations of all devices (with device number at each addressable
device corresponding to control unit programming), appliances, panels, equipment,
612
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
junction/terminal cabinets/boxes, risers, electrical power connections, individual
circuits and raceway routing, system zoning; number, size, and type of raceways and
conductors in each raceway; conduit fill calculations with cross section area percent
fill for each type and size of conductor and raceway. Only those devices connected
and incorporated into the final system shall be on these floor plans. Do not show any
removed devices on the floor plans. Show all interfaces for all fire safety functions.
3. Riser diagrams: Provide, for the entire system, the number, size and type of riser
raceways and conductors in each riser raceway and number of each type device per
floor and zone. Show door holder interface, elevator control interface, HVAC
shutdown interface, fire extinguishing system interface, and all other fire safety
interfaces. Show wiring Styles on the riser diagram for all circuits. Provide diagrams
both on a per building and campus wide basis.
4. Detailed wiring diagrams: Provide for control panels, modules, power supplies,
electrical power connections, auxiliary relays and annunciators showing termination
identifications, size and type conductors, circuit boards, LED lamps, indicators,
adjustable controls, switches, ribbon connectors, wiring harnesses, terminal strips and
connectors, spare zones/circuits. Diagrams shall be drawn to a scale sufficient to
show spatial relationships between components, enclosures and equipment
configuration.
5. Two weeks prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall deliver to the COTR one (1)
set of reproducible, as-built drawings, two blueline copies and one (1) set of the asbuilt drawing computer files
(using AutoCAD Release 14 or later). As-built
drawings (floor plans) shall show all new and existing conduit used for the fire alarm
system.
C. Manuals:
1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete
maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets for all items used
in the system, power requirements, device wiring diagrams, dimensions, and
information for ordering replacement parts.
a. Wiring diagrams shall have their terminals identified to facilitate installation,
operation, expansion and maintenance.
613
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
b. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and the
interconnections between the items of equipment.
c. Include complete listing of all software used and installation and operation
instructions including the input/output matrix chart.
d. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the
information required to properly operate, inspect, test and maintain the equipment
and system. Provide all manufacturer's installation limitations including but not
limited to circuit length limitations.
e. Complete listing of all digitized voice messages.
f. Provide standby battery calculations under normal operating and alarm modes.
Battery calculations shall include the magnets for holding the doors open for one
minute.
g. Include information indicating who will provide emergency service and perform
post contract maintenance.
h. Provide a replacement parts list with current prices. Include a list of
recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for testing and maintenance
purposes.
i. A computerized preventive maintenance schedule for all equipment. The schedule
shall be provided on disk in a computer format acceptable to the VAMC and shall
describe the protocol for preventive maintenance of all equipment. The schedule
shall include the required times for systematic examination, adjustment and
cleaning of all equipment. A print out of the schedule shall also be provided in the
manual. Provide the disk in a pocket within the manual.
j. Furnish manuals in 3 ring loose-leaf binder or manufacturer's standard binder.
k. A print out for all devices proposed on each signaling line circuit with spare
capacity indicated.
2. Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver four copies of the final updated
maintenance and operating manual to the COTR.
a. The manual shall be updated to include any information necessitated by the
maintenance and operating manual approval.
614
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
b. Complete "As installed" wiring and schematic diagrams shall be included that
shows all items of equipment and their interconnecting wiring. Show all final
terminal identifications.
c. Complete listing of all programming information, including all control events per
device including an updated input/output matrix.
d. Certificate of Installation as required by NFPA 72 for each building. The
certificate shall identify any variations from the National Fire Alarm Code.
e. Certificate from equipment manufacturer assuring compliance with all
manufacturers installation requirements and satisfactory system operation.
D. Certifications:
1. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit the technician's NICET level III
fire alarm certification as well as certification from the control unit manufacturer that
the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized representative of the
major equipment manufacturer. Include in the certification the names and addresses
of the proposed supervisor of installation and the proposed performer of contract
maintenance. Also include the name and title of the manufacturer’s representative
who makes the certification.
2. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from either the
control unit manufacturer or the manufacturer of each component (e.g., smoke
detector) that the components being furnished are compatible with the control unit.
3. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major
equipment manufacturer that the wiring and connection diagrams meet this
specification, UL and NFPA 72 requirements.
1.5 WARRANTY
All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be
free from defects and shall remain so for a period of five (5) years from the date of
acceptance of the entire installation by the Contracting Officer.
1.6 GUARANTY PERIOD SERVICES
A. Complete inspection, testing, maintenance and repair service for the fire alarm system
shall be provided by a factory trained authorized representative of the manufacturer of the
615
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
major equipment for a period of five years from the date of acceptance of the entire
installation by the Contracting Officer.
B. Contractor shall provide all necessary test equipment, parts and labor to perform required
inspection, testing, maintenance and repair.
C. All inspection, testing, maintenance and permanent records required by NFPA 72, and
recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be provided by the contractor. Work
shall include operation of sprinkler system alarm and supervisory devices as well as all
reused existing equipment connected to the fire alarm system. It shall include all
interfaced equipment including but not limited to elevators, HVAC shutdown, and
extinguishing systems.
D. Maintenance and testing shall be performed in accordance with NFPA 72. A
computerized preventive maintenance schedule shall be provided and shall describe the
protocol for preventive maintenance of equipment. The schedule shall include a
systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of all equipment.
E. Non-included Work: Repair service shall not include the performance of any work due to
improper use, accidents, or negligence for which the contractor is not responsible.
F. Service and emergency personnel shall report to the Engineering Office or their
authorized representative upon arrival at the hospital and again upon the completion of
the required work. A copy of the work ticket containing a complete description of the
work performed and parts replaced shall be provided to the VA Contracting Officer or his
authorized representative.
G. Emergency Service:
1. Warranty Period Service: Service other than the preventative maintenance,
inspection, and testing required by NFPA 72 shall be considered emergency call-back
service and covered under the warranty of the installation during the first year of the
warranty period, unless the required service is a result of abuse or misuse by the
Government. Written notification shall not be required for emergency warranty
period service and the contractor shall respond as outlined in the following sections
on Normal and Overtime Emergency Call-Back Service. Warranty period service can
be required during normal or overtime emergency call-back service time periods at
the discretion of the Contracting Officer or his authorized representative.
616
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Normal and overtime emergency call-back service shall consist of an on-site response
within two hours of notification of a system trouble.
3. Normal emergency call-back service times are between the hours of 7:30 a.m. and
4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, exclusive of federal holidays. Service performed
during all other times shall be considered to be overtime emergency call-back service.
The cost of all normal emergency call-back service for years 2 through 5 shall be
included in the cost of this contract.
4. Overtime emergency call-back service shall be provided for the system when
requested by the Government. The cost of the first 40 manhours per year of overtime
call-back service during years 2 through 5 of this contract shall be provided under this
contract. Payment for overtime emergency call-back service in excess of the 40 man
hours per year requirement will be handled through separate purchase orders. The
method of calculating overtime emergency call-back hours is based on actual time
spent on site and does not include travel time.
H. The contractor shall maintain a log at each fire alarm control unit. The log shall list the
date and time of all examinations and trouble calls, condition of the system, and name of
the technician. Each trouble call shall be fully described, including the nature of the
trouble, necessary correction performed, and parts replaced.
I. In the event that VA modifies the fire alarm system post-Acceptance but during the five
year Guaranty Period Service period, Contractor shall be required to verify that the
system, as newly modified or added, is consistent with the manufacturer's requirements;
any verification performed will be equitably adjusted under the Changes clause. The
post-Acceptance modification or addition to the fire alarm system shall not void the
continuing requirements under this contract set forth in the Guarantee Period Service
provision for the fire alarm system as modified or added. The contract will be equitably
adjusted under the Changes clause for such additional performance.
1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements
and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are
referenced in text by the basic designation only.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
617
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
70-2005 ..................................National Electrical Code (NEC).
72-2002 ..................................National Fire Alarm Code.
90A-2002 ...............................Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
101-2003 ................................Life Safety Code
C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
2000-2000...............Fire Protection Equipment Directory
D. Factory Mutual Research Corp (FM): Approval Guide, 2005 Edition
E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
S3.41-1996 .............................Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal
F. International Code Council, International Building Code (IBC) 2003 Edition
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Existing equipment may be reused only where indicated on the drawings.
B. Except as indicated in paragraph A above, all equipment and components shall be new
and the manufacturer's current model. All equipment shall be tested and listed by
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or Factory Mutual Research Corporation for use as part
of a fire alarm system. The authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major
equipment shall certify that the installation complies with all manufacturer's requirements
and that satisfactory total system operation has been achieved.
2.2 CONDUIT, BOXES, AND WIRE
A. Conduit shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS and as follows:
1. All new and reused conduit shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 70.
2. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area.
3. All new conduit shall be 19 mm (3/4 inch) minimum.
B. Wire:
1. All existing wiring shall be removed and new wiring installed in a conduit or
raceway.
2. Wiring shall be in accordance with NEC article 760, Section 26 05 21, LOWVOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS
AND BELOW), and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system.
618
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
All wires shall be color coded. Number and size of conductors shall be as
recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG for
initiating device circuits and 14 AWG for notification device circuits.
3. Addressable circuits and wiring used for the multiplex communication loop shall be
twisted and shielded unless specifically excepted by the fire alarm equipment
manufacturer in writing.
4. Any fire alarm system wiring that extends outside of a building shall have additional
power surge protection to protect equipment from physical damage and false signals
due to lightning, voltage and current induced transients. Protection devices shall be
shown on the submittal drawings and shall be UL listed or in accordance with written
manufacturer's requirements.
5. All wire or cable used in underground conduits including those in concrete shall be
listed for wet locations.
C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes, and Cabinets:
1. Shall be galvanized steel in accordance with UL requirements.
2. All new and reused boxes shall be sized and installed in accordance with NFPA 70.
3. New and existing covers shall be repainted red in accordance with Section 09 91 00,
PAINTING and shall be identified with white markings as "FA" for junction boxes
and as "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM" for cabinets and terminal boxes. Lettering shall be
a minimum of 19 mm (3/4 inch) high.
4. Terminal boxes and cabinets shall have a volume 50 percent greater than required by
the NFPA 70. Minimum sized wire shall be considered as 14 AWG for calculation
purposes.
5. Terminal boxes and cabinets shall have identified pressure type terminal strips and
shall be located at the base of each riser. Terminal strips shall be labeled as specified
or as approved by the COTR.
2.3 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT
A. General:
1. Each building shall be provided with a fire alarm control unit and shall operate as a
supervised zoned fire alarm system.
2. Each power source shall be supervised from the other source for loss of power.
619
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3. All circuits shall be monitored for integrity.
4. Visually and audibly annunciate any trouble condition including, but not limited to
main power failure, grounds and system wiring derangement.
5. Transmit digital alarm information to the main fire alarm control unit.
B. Enclosure:
1. The control unit shall be housed in a cabinet suitable for both recessed and surface
mounting. Cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant prime
coat, and manufacturer's standard finish.
2. Cabinet shall contain all necessary relays, terminals, lamps, and legend plates to
provide control for the system.
C. Operator terminal at main control unit:
1. Operator terminal shall consist of the central processing unit, display screen,
keyboard and printer.
2. Display screen shall have a minimum 15-inch diagonal non-glare screen capable of
displaying 24 lines of 80 characters each.
3. Keyboard shall consist of 60 alpha numeric and 12 user/functional control keys.
4. Printer shall be the automatic type, printing the date, time and location for all alarm,
supervisory, and trouble conditions.
D. Power Supply:
1. The control unit shall derive its normal power from a 120 volt, 60 Hz dedicated
supply connected to the emergency power system. Standby power shall be provided
by a 24 volt DC battery as hereinafter specified. The normal power shall be
transformed, rectified, coordinated, and interfaced with the standby battery and
charger.
2. The door holder power shall be arranged so that momentary or sustained loss of main
operating power shall not cause the release of any door.
3. Power supply for smoke detectors shall be taken from the fire alarm control unit.
4. Provide protectors to protect the fire alarm equipment from damage due to lightning
or voltage and current transients.
5. Provide new separate and direct ground lines to the outside to protect the equipment
from unwanted grounds.
620
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
E. Circuit Supervision: Each alarm initiating device circuit, signaling line circuit, and
notification appliance circuit, shall be supervised against the occurrence of a break or
ground fault condition in the field wiring. These conditions shall cause a trouble signal to
sound in the control unit until manually silenced by an off switch.
F. Supervisory Devices: All sprinkler system valves, standpipe control valves, post indicator
valves (PIV), and main gate valves shall be supervised for off-normal position. Closing a
valve shall sound a supervisory signal at the control unit until silenced by an off switch.
The specific location of all closed valves shall be identified at the control unit. Valve
operation shall not cause an alarm signal. Low air pressure switches and duct detectors
shall be monitored as supervisory signals. The power supply to the elevator shunt trip
breaker shall be monitored by the fire alarm system as a supervisory signal.
G. Trouble signals:
1. Arrange the trouble signals for automatic reset (non-latching).
2. System trouble switch off and on lamps shall be visible through the control unit door.
H. Function Switches: Provide the following switches in addition to any other switches
required for the system:
1. Remote Alarm Transmission By-pass Switch: Shall prevent transmission of all
signals to the main fire alarm control unit when in the "off" position. A system
trouble signal shall be energized when switch is in the off position.
2. Alarm Off Switch: Shall disconnect power to alarm notification circuits on the local
building alarm system. A system trouble signal shall be activated when switch is in
the off position.
3. Trouble Silence Switch: Shall silence the trouble signal whenever the trouble silence
switch is operated. This switch shall not reset the trouble signal.
4. Reset Switch: Shall reset the system after an alarm, provided the initiating device has
been reset. The system shall lock in alarm until reset.
5. Lamp Test Switch: A test switch or other approved convenient means shall be
provided to test the indicator lamps.
6. Drill Switch: Shall activate all notification devices without tripping the remote alarm
transmitter. This switch is required only for general evacuation systems specified
herein.
621
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
7. Door Holder By-Pass Switch: Shall prevent doors from releasing during fire alarm
tests. A system trouble alarm shall be energized when switch is in the abnormal
position.
8. Elevator recall By-Pass Switch: Shall prevent the elevators from recalling upon
operation of any of the devices installed to perform that function. A system trouble
alarm shall be energized when the switch is in the abnormal position.
9. HVAC/Smoke Damper By-Pass: Provide a means to disable HVAC fans from
shutting down and/or smoke dampers from closing upon operation of an initiating
device designed to interconnect with these devices.
I. Remote Transmissions:
1. Provide capability and equipment for transmission of alarm, supervisory and trouble
signals to the main fire alarm control unit.
2. Transmitters shall be compatible with the systems and equipment they are connected
to such as timing, operation and other required features.
J. Remote Control Capability: Each building fire alarm control unit shall be installed and
programmed so that each must be reset locally after an alarm, before the main fire alarm
control unit can be reset. After the local building fire alarm control unit has been reset,
then the all system acknowledge, reset, silence or disabling functions can be operated by
the main fire alarm control unit
K. System Expansion: Design the control units and enclosures so that the system can be
expanded in the future (to include the addition of twenty percent more alarm initiating,
alarm notification and door holder circuits) without disruption or replacement of the
existing control unit and secondary power supply.
2.4 STANDBY POWER SUPPLY
A. Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS):
1. The UPS system shall be comprised of a static inverter, a precision battery float
charger, and sealed maintenance free batteries.
2. Under normal operating conditions, the load shall be filtered through a ferroresonant
transformer.
622
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3. When normal AC power fails, the inverter shall supply AC power to the transformer
from the battery source. There shall be no break in output of the system during
transfer of the system from normal to battery supply or back to normal.
4. Batteries shall be sealed, gel cell type.
5. UPS system shall be sized to operate the central processor, CRT, printer, and all other
directly connected equipment for five minutes upon a normal AC power failure.
B. Batteries:
1. Battery shall be of the sealed, maintenance free type, 24-volt nominal.
2. Battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than
twenty-four hours plus five minutes of alarm to an end voltage of 1.14 volts per cell,
upon a normal AC power failure.
3. Battery racks shall be steel with an alkali-resistant finish. Batteries shall be secured in
seismic areas 2B, 3, or 4 as defined by the Uniform Building Code.
C. Battery Charger:
1. Shall be completely automatic, with constant potential charger maintaining the
battery fully charged under all service conditions. Charger shall operate from a
120-volt, 60 hertz emergency power source.
2. Shall be rated for fully charging a completely discharged battery within 48 hours
while simultaneously supplying any loads connected to the battery.
3. Shall have protection to prevent discharge through the charger.
4. Shall have protection for overloads and short circuits on both AC and DC sides.
5. A trouble condition shall actuate the fire alarm trouble signal.
6. Charger shall have automatic AC line voltage regulation, automatic current-limiting
features, and adjustable voltage controls.
2.5 ANNUNCIATION
A. Annunciator, Alphanumeric Type (System):
1. Shall be a supervised, LCD display containing a minimum of two lines of 40
characters for alarm annunciation in clear English text.
2. Message shall identify building number, floor, zone, etc on the first line and device
description and status (pull station, smoke detector, waterflow alarm or trouble
condition) on the second line.
623
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3. The initial alarm received shall be indicated as such.
4. A selector switch shall be provided for viewing subsequent alarm messages.
5. The display shall be UL listed for fire alarm application.
6. Annunciators shall display information for all buildings connected to the system.
Local building annunciators, for general evacuation system buildings, shall be
permitted when shown on the drawings and approved by the COTR.
B. Printers:
1. System printers shall be high reliability digital input devices, UL approved, for fire
alarm applications. The printers shall operate at a minimum speed of 30 characters
per second. The printer shall be continually supervised.
2. Printers shall be programmable to either alarm only or event logging output.
a. Alarm printers shall provide a permanent (printed) record of all alarm information
that occurs within the fire alarm system. Alarm information shall include the date,
time, building number, floor, zone, device type, device address, and condition.
b. Event logging printers shall provide a permanent (printed) record of every change
of status that occurs within the fire alarm system. Status information shall include
date, time, building number, floor, zone, device type, device address and change
of status (alarm, trouble, supervisory, reset/return to normal).
3. System printers shall provide tractor drive feed pins for conventional fan fold 213
mm x 275 mm (8-1/2" x 11") paper.
4. The printers shall provide a printing and non-printing self test feature.
5. Power supply for printers shall be taken from and coordinated with the building
emergency service.
6. Each printer shall be provided with a stand for the printer and paper.
7. Spare paper and ribbons for printers shall be stocked and maintained as part of the
five (5) year guarantee period services in addition to the one installed after the
approval of the final acceptance test.
2.6 ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Bells:
1. Shall be electric, single-stroke or vibrating, heavy-duty, under-dome, solenoid type.
624
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, shall be 150 mm (6 inches) diameter and
have a minimum nominal rating of 80 dBA at 3000 mm (10 feet).
3. Mount on removable adapter plates on outlet boxes.
4. Bells located outdoors shall be weatherproof type with metal housing and protective
grille.
5. Each bell circuit shall have a minimum of twenty percent spare capacity.
B. Speakers:
1. Shall operate on either 25 VRMS or 70.7 VRMS with field selectable output taps
from 0.5 to 2.0W and originally installed at the one-half watt tap. Speakers shall
provide a minimum sound output of 80 dBA at ten feet with the one-half watt tap.
2. Frequency response shall be a minimum of 400 HZ to 4000 HZ.
3. 100 mm (4 inches) or 200 mm (8 inches) cone type speakers ceiling mounted with
white colored baffles in areas with suspended ceilings and wall mounted in areas
without ceilings.
C. Strobes:
1. Xenon flash tube type minimum 15 candela in toilet rooms and 75 candela in all other
areas with a flash rate of 1 HZ. Strobes shall be synchronized where required by the
National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72).
2. Backplate shall be red with 13 mm (1/2 inch) permanent red letters. Lettering to read
"Fire", be oriented on the wall or ceiling properly, and be visible from all viewing
directions.
3. Each strobe circuit shall have a minimum of twenty (20) percent spare capacity.
4. Strobes may be combined with the audible notification appliances specified herein.
D. Fire Alarm Horns:
1. Shall be electric, utilizing solid state electronic technology operating on a nominal 24
VDC.
2. Shall be a minimum nominal rating of 80 dBA at ten feet.
3. Mount on removable adapter plates on conduit boxes.
4. Horns located outdoors shall be of weatherproof type with metal housing and
protective grille.
5. Each horn circuit shall have a minimum of twenty (20) percent spare capacity.
625
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2.7 ALARM INITIATING DEVICES
A. Manual Fire Alarm Stations:
1. Shall be non-breakglass, address reporting type.
2. Station front shall be constructed of a durable material such as cast or extruded metal
or high impact plastic. Stations shall be semi-flush type.
3. Stations shall be of single action pull down type with suitable operating instructions
provided on front in raised or depressed letters, and clearly labeled "FIRE".
4. Operating handles shall be constructed of a durable material. On operation, the lever
shall lock in alarm position and remain so until reset. A key shall be required to gain
front access for resetting, or conducting tests and drills.
5. Unless otherwise specified, all exposed parts shall be red in color and have a smooth,
hard, durable finish.
//6. Stations identified as key operated only shall have a single standardized lock and key
separate from the control equipment.//
B. Smoke Detectors:
1. Smoke detectors shall be UL listed for use with the fire alarm control unit being
furnished.
2. Smoke detectors shall be addressable type complying with applicable UL Standards
for system type detectors. Smoke detectors shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 72.
3. Detectors shall have an indication lamp to denote an alarm condition. Provide remote
indicator lamps and identification plates where detectors are concealed from view.
Locate the remote indicator lamps and identification plates flush mounted on walls so
they can be observed from a normal standing position.
4. All spot type and duct type detectors installed shall be of the photoelectric type.
5. Photoelectric detectors shall be factory calibrated and readily field adjustable. The
sensitivity of any photoelectric detector shall be factory set at 3.0 plus or minus 0.25
percent obscuration per foot.
6. Detectors shall provide a visual trouble indication if they drift out of sensitivity range
or fail internal diagnostics. Detectors shall also provide visual indication of sensitivity
626
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
level upon testing. Detectors, along with the fire alarm control units shall be UL listed
for testing the sensitivity of the detectors.
C. Heat Detectors:
1. Heat detectors shall be of the addressable restorable rate compensated
fixed-temperature spot type.
2. Detectors shall have a minimum smooth ceiling rating of 2500 square feet.
3. Ordinary temperature (135 degrees F) heat detectors shall be utilized in // elevator
shafts and // elevator mechanical rooms. Intermediate temperature rated (200 degrees
F) heat detectors shall be utilized in all other areas.
4. Provide a remote indicator lamp, key test station and identification nameplate (e.g.
“Heat Detector - Elevator P-
) for each elevator group. Locate key test station
in plain view on elevator machine room wall.
D. Water Flow and Pressure Switches:
1. Wet pipe water flow switches and dry pipe alarm pressure switches for sprinkler
systems shall be connected to the fire alarm system by way of an address reporting
interface device.
2. All new water flow switches shall be of a single manufacturer and series and
non-accumulative retard type. // See Section 21 12 00, FIRE-SUPPRESSION
STANDPIPES and Section 21 13 13, WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS for new
switches added. Connect all switches shown on the approved shop drawings.//
3. All new switches shall have an alarm transmission delay time that is conveniently
adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds. Initial settings shall be 30-45 seconds. Timing shall
be recorded and documented during testing.
E. Extinguishing System Connections:
1. Kitchen Range Hood and Duct Suppression Systems:
a. Each suppression system shall be equipped with a micro-switch connected to the
building fire alarm control unit. Discharge of a suppression system shall
automatically send a alarm signal to the building fire detection and alarm system
for annunciation.
b. Operation of this suppression system shall also automatically shut off all sources
of fuel and heat to all equipment requiring protection under the same hood.
627
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Each gaseous suppression system shall be monitored for system alarm and system
trouble conditions via addressable interface devices.
2.8
SUPERVISORY DEVICES
A. Duct Smoke Detectors:
1. Duct smoke detectors shall be provided and connected by way of an address reporting
interface device. Detectors shall be provided with an approved duct housing mounted
exterior to the duct, and shall have perforated sampling tubes extending across the full
width of the duct (wall to wall). Detector placement shall be such that there is
uniform airflow in the cross section of the duct.
2. Interlocking with fans shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 90A and as
specified hereinafter under Part 3.2, "TYPICAL OPERATION".
3. Provide remote indicator lamps, key test stations and identification nameplates (e.g.
"DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR AHU-X") for all duct detectors. Locate key test
stations in plain view on walls or ceilings so that they can be observed and operated
from a normal standing position.
B. Sprinkler and Standpipe System Supervisory Switches:
1. Each sprinkler system water supply control valve, riser valve or zone control valve,
and each standpipe system riser control valve shall be equipped with a supervisory
switch. Standpipe hose valves, and test and drain valves shall not be equipped with
supervisory switches.
2. PIV (post indicator valve) or main gate valve shall be equipped with a supervisory
switch.
3. Valve supervisory switches shall be connected to the fire alarm system by way of
address reporting interface device. // See Section 21 13 13, WET-PIPE SPRINKLER
SYSTEMS for new switches to be added. Connect tamper switches for all control
valves shown on the approved shop drawings. //
4. The mechanism shall be contained in a weatherproof die-cast aluminum housing that
shall provide a 19 mm (3/4 inch) tapped conduit entrance and incorporate the
necessary facilities for attachment to the valves.
5. The entire installed assembly shall be tamper-proof and arranged to cause a switch
operation if the housing cover is removed or if the unit is removed from its mounting.
628
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2.9 ADDRESS REPORTING INTERFACE DEVICE
A. Shall have unique addresses that reports directly to the building fire alarm panel.
B. Shall be configurable to monitor normally open or normally closed devices for both
alarm and trouble conditions.
C. Shall have terminal designations clearly differentiating between the circuit to which they
are reporting from and the device that they are monitoring.
D. Shall be UL listed for fire alarm use and compatibility with the panel to which they are
connected.
E. Shall be mounted in weatherproof housings if mounted exterior to a building.
2.10 INSTRUCTION CHART:
Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic
or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame with a backplate. Install the frame in
a conspicuous location observable from each control unit where operations are
performed. The card shall show those steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is
received under all conditions, normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble. Provide an
additional copy with the binder for the input output matrix for the sequence of operation.
The instructions shall be approved by the COTR before being posted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, 72, 90A, and 101 as shown on the
drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer. Fire alarm wiring
shall be installed in conduit. All conduit and wire shall be installed in accordance with
Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS , Section
26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
(600 VOLTS AND BELOW), and all penetrations of smoke and fire barriers shall be
protected as required by Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.
B. All new conduits, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in
finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. All existing accessible fire alarm
conduit not reused shall be removed.
C. All new or reused exposed conduit shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 91 00,
PAINTING to match surrounding finished areas and red in unfinished areas.
629
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
D. Existing devices that are reused shall be properly mounted and installed. Where devices
are installed on existing shallow backboxes, extension rings of the same material, color
and texture of the new fire alarm devices shall be used. Mounting surfaces shall be cut
and patched in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS,
Restoration, and be re-painted in accordance with Section 09 91 00, PAINTING as
necessary to match existing.
E. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control units and remote annunciators shall
be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when
located in unfinished areas. Exact locations to be approved by the COTR.
F. Speakers shall be ceiling mounted and fully recessed in areas with suspended ceilings.
Speakers shall be wall mounted and recessed in finished areas without suspended
ceilings. Speakers may be surface mounted in unfinished areas.
G. Strobes shall be flush wall mounted 2,000 mm (80 inches) above the floor or 150 mm (6
inches) below ceiling, whichever is lower. Locate and mount to maintain a minimum 900
mm (36 inches) clearance from side obstructions.
H. Manual pull stations shall be installed not less than 1050 mm (42 inches) or more than
1200 mm (48 inches) from finished floor to bottom of device and within 1500 mm (60
inches) of a stairway or an exit door.
I. Where possible, locate water flow and pressure switches a minimum of 300 mm (12
inches) from a fitting that changes the direction of the flow and a minimum of 900 mm
(36 inches) from a valve.
J. Mount valve tamper switches so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve
and adjust to operate within two revolutions toward the closed position of the valve
control, or when the stem has moved no more than one-fifth of the distance from its
normal position.
3.2 TYPICAL OPERATION
A. Activation of any manual pull station, water flow or pressure switch, heat detector,
kitchen hood suppression system, gaseous suppression system, or smoke detector shall
cause the following operations to occur:
1. Operate the emergency voice communication system in Buildings indicate buildings.
For sprinkler protected buildings, flash strobes continuously only in the zone of
630
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
alarm. For buildings without sprinkler protection throughout, flash strobes
continuously only on the floor of alarm.
2. Continuously sound a temporal pattern general alarm and flash all strobes in the
building in alarm until reset at the local fire alarm control unit in Buildings within the
project scope area.
3. Release only the magnetic door holders in the smoke zone on the floor from which
alarm was initiated after the alert signal.
4. Transmit a separate alarm signal, via the main fire alarm control unit to the fire
department.
5. Unlock the electrically locked exit doors within the zone of alarm.
B. Operation of a smoke detector at a corridor door used for automatic closing shall also
release only the magnetic door holders on that floor in that smoke zone. Operation of a
smoke detector at a shutter used for automatic closing shall also release only the shutters
on that floor in that smoke zone.
F. Operation of duct smoke detectors shall cause a system supervisory condition and shut
down the ventilation system and close the associated smoke dampers as appropriate.
G. Operation of any sprinkler or standpipe system valve supervisory switch, high/low air
pressure switch, or fire pump alarm switch shall cause a system supervisory condition.
3.3 TESTS
A. Provide the service of a NICET level III, competent, factory-trained engineer or
technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically
supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. Make all
adjustments and tests in the presence of the COTR.
B. When the systems have been completed and prior to the scheduling of the final
inspection, furnish testing equipment and perform the following tests in the presence of
the COTR. When any defects are detected, make repairs or install replacement
components, and repeat the tests until such time that the complete fire alarm systems
meets all contract requirements. After the system has passed the initial test and been
approved by the COTR, the contractor may request a final inspection.
1. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for
short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.
631
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
2. Test the insulation on all installed cable and wiring by standard methods as
recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
3. Run water through all flow switches. Check time delay on water flow switches.
Submit a report listing all water flow switch operations and their retard time in
seconds.
4. Open each alarm initiating and notification circuit to see if trouble signal actuates.
5. Ground each alarm initiation and notification circuit and verify response of trouble
signals.
3.4 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Prior to final acceptance a minimum 30 day "burn-in" period shall be provided. The
purpose shall be to allow equipment to stabilize and potential installation and software
problems and equipment malfunctions to be identified and corrected. During this
diagnostic period, all system operations and malfunctions shall be recorded. Final
acceptance will be made upon successful completion of the "burn-in" period and where
the last 14 days is without a system or equipment malfunction.
B. At the final inspection a factory trained representative of the manufacturer of the major
equipment shall repeat the tests in Article 3.3 TESTS and those required by NFPA 72. In
addition the representative shall demonstrate that the systems function properly in every
respect. The demonstration shall be made in the presence of a VA representative.
3.5 INSTRUCTION
A. The manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide instruction and training to the
VA as follows:
1. Six one-hour sessions to engineering staff, security police and central attendant
personnel for simple operation of the system. Two sessions at the start of installation,
two sessions at the completion of installation and two sessions 3 months after the
completion of installation.
2. Four two-hour sessions to engineering staff for detailed operation of the system. Two
sessions at the completion of installation and two sessions 3 months after the
completion of installation.
632
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
3. Three eight-hour sessions to electrical technicians for maintaining, programming,
modifying, and repairing the system at the completion of installation and one eighthour refresher session 3 months after the completion of installation.
B. The Contractor and/or the Systems Manufacturer's representative shall provide a
typewritten "Sequence of Operation" including a trouble shooting guide of the entire
system for submittal to the VA. The sequence of operation will be shown for each input
in the system in a matrix format and provided in a loose leaf binder. When reading the
sequence of operation, the reader will be able to quickly and easily determine what output
will occur upon activation of any input in the system. The INPUT/OUTPUT matrix
format shall be as shown in Appendix A to NFPA 72.
C. Furnish the services of a competent instructor for instructing personnel in the
programming requirements necessary for system expansion. Such programming shall
include addition or deletion of devices, zones, indicating circuits and printer/display text.
- - - END OF SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM- - -
END OF SOLICITATION No VA-243-10-IB-0127
633
Nordstrom Contracting & Consulting Corp.
Interior Upgrades
Castle Point, NY
4.29 DRAWINGS {SEE ATTACHMENT}
SECTION 00 01 15
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
The drawings listed below accompanying this specification and form a part of the contract.
Drawing No
Title
ARCHITECTURAL & ASBESTOS REMOVAL
GI 001 - COVER SHEET / GENERAL INFORMATION
GC 101 – LIFE SAFETY, IRCA AND PHASING PLAN FIRST FLOOR
AD 101 – DEMOLITION PLAN
AE 101 – ARCHITECTURAL FLOOR AND DIMENSION FLOOR
AE 101.1 – REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FIRST FLOOR
AE 401 – LARGE SCALE PLAN & ELEVATIONS FIRST FLOOR
AE 501 – INTERIOR DETAILS
AE 502 – INTERIOR DETAAILS
AF 101 – FINISH & FLOOR PATTERN PLAN FIRST FLOOR
FIRE PROTECTION
FX 001 – FIRE PROTECTION – DETAILS AND NOTES
FX 101 – FIRE PROTECTION – PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN – DEMOLITION & NEW WORK
PLUMBING
PL 001 – PLUMBING - SCHEDULES & DETAILS
PL 101 – PLUMBING - PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN – DEMOLITION & NEW WORK
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
MH 001 – HVAC - SCHEDULES & DETAILS
MH 101 – HVAC - PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN – DEMOLITION & NEW WORK
ELECTRICAL
E 001 – ELECTRICAL – SCHEDULES, DETAILS & NOTES
ED 101 – ELECTRICAL – PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN DEMOLITION
EL 101 – ELECTRICAL – PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN – NEW WORK POWER & LIGHTING
- - - END - - -
634